Home

ASIAN IMPORTS APPLICATION

1. YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1996 98 Impreza 2 2L 1998 Impreza 2 5L 1987 90 Justy 1 2L 1990 98 Legacy 2 2L 1990 91 Loyale 1 8L 1983 84 Sedan 1 6L 1983 89 Sedan 1 8L 1992 97 SVX 2 5L 1983 89 Wagon 1 8L 1985 91 XT 1 8L 1988 91 XT6 2 7L YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1985 94 4 Runner 2 4L 14 1985 94 4 Runner 3 0L V6 1983 91 Camry 2 0L I4 1989 91 Camry 2 5L V6 1992 94 Camry 22L I4 1992 94 Camry 3 0L V6 1983 85 Celica 2 4L 14 1986 93 Celica 2 0L I4 1990 93 Celica 1 6L I4 1990 94 Celica 22L I4 1994 Celica 1 8L I4 1985 94 Corolla 1 6L I4 1993 94 Corolla 1 8L I4 1983 88 Cressida 2 8L I6 1989 92 Cressida 3 0L I6 1988 92 Land Cruiser 4 0L I6 1993 94 Land Cruiser 4 5L I6 1986 90 MR2 1 6L I4 20 GENERAL INFORMATION VEHICLE COVERAGE YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1991 94 MR2 2 0L 14 Turbo 1991 94 MR2 2 2L 14 1992 94 Paseo 1 5L I4 1991 94 Previa 2 4L 14 1983 Starlet 1 3L 4 1983 86 Supra 2 8L 16 1986 94 Supra 3 0 16 Turbo 1986 94 Supra 3 0L 16 1993 94 T 100 3 0L V6 1989 94 Tercel 1 5L I4 1984 94 Truck 2 4L 14 1985 94 Truck 3 0L V6 1984 85 Van 2 0L 14 1986 89 Van 2 2L 14 GENERAL INFORMATION 21 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 4 TEST MODES AVAILABLE The Asian Imports Cartridge provides the following diagnostic test modes Not all vehicles are equipped with electronic systems capable of using all of the tes
2. aqa 11 MODE B2 DICIS currere RR RIP RERO OR Re wind 13 AKOMOGEF REDA ONE ewa gea bel Es edd ERN 13 15 BAUN DIE Gad EO A WAWA 16 Ta Clar L anh Me bos Ib diet pel 18 MODE ES SNAPSHOT Sanat eel 20 Pu pe c0 CPP 20 O A Eas P DCN diat pes pag de a dep 20 Viewing Captured Da a 20 PETO COTE IARE aa aa RE Rar an tA ird Gda db e gd 20 Operating Procede anh ee RA RRNA Va ki TEREE EES P 20 MODE OBDCONTROLS AT cete a EE 27 MODE BS SYSTEM TESTS aa sa b eren erbe equ PR aba A 28 Submoge FO Prep Vehicle REKE SEN KS 28 MODE F8 INFORMATION is s iisa Va crane VA rece ey exe 30 Lordot 222259465 PA Dae Ted ed tdt 30 31 PITO DNO spice nocd Ai daw a WEG pea dee ua 32 DODAN uias k probki Re dh ds 33 HONORE TIE 34 COMMON TEST MODES HL 1 TEST MODES AVAILABLE RR Re 3 HARDWARE REQUIRED 4 4 eed SVK art 5 JOURS a 6 RON Ed qas 7 GETTING SIARTED
3. INFINITI YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1991 96 G20 2 0L 14 1996 98 130 3 0L V6 1993 97 J30 3 0L V6 1990 92 M30 3 0L V6 1990 96 Q45 4 5L V8 1997 98 Q45 4 1L V8 1997 98 QX4 3 3L V6 KIA ENGINE 1994 Sephia 1 6L 14 LEXUS YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1990 91 ES250 2 5L V6 1992 94 ES300 3 0L V6 1993 94 GS300 3 0L 16 1990 94 LS400 4 0L V8 1992 94 SC300 3 0L 16 1992 94 SC400 4 0L V8 MAZDA YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1986 89 323 1 6L 14 1988 89 323 1 6L 14 Turbo 1990 94 323 1 8L I4 DOHC 1990 94 323 1 8L 14 SOHC 1991 94 323 1 6L 14 SOHC GENERAL INFORMATION 15 VEHICLE COVERAGE YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1995 323 1 5L 14 1987 89 323 Wagon 1 6L I4 1983 87 626 2 0L 14 1986 87 626 2 0L 14 Turbo 1988 92 626 22L 14 1993 98 626 2 0L 14 1993 98 626 2 5L V6 1988 89 929 3 0L V6 1990 91 929 3 0L V6 DOHC 1990 91 929 3 0L V6 SOHC 1992 93 929 3 0L V6 1994 95 929 3 0L V6 DOHC 1994 97 B Series 2 3L 14 1994 98 B Series 3 0L V6 1994 98 B Series 4 0L V6 1995 B Series 2 5L I4 1986 B2000 2 0L I4 1987 93 B2200 22L I4 1987 93 B2600 2 6L I4 1983 85 GLC 1 5L I4 1990 93 Miata 1 6L 14 1994 9799 Miata 1 8L 14 1996 98 Millenia 2 3L V6 1996 98 Millenia 2 5L V6 1989 95 MPV 2 6L I4 1989 98 MPV 3 0L V6 1992 95 MX3 1 6L 14 1992 95 MX3 1 8L 14 1990 93 MX5 1 6L 14 1994 97 99 5 1 8L 14 1988 92 MX6 2 2L 14 1993 97 MX6 2 0L 14 16
4. 3 Turn ignition switch to ON 4 indication will begin on voltmeter Voltmeter will fluctuate Ov to 12v if DTCs are stored in ECU If a DTC is stored in ECU the first number of 12v 1 5 sec indications will equal the 105 digit of a 2 digit DTC After a 2 0 second pause the second number of 12v 0 5 sec indications will equal the 1s digit DTCs are separated by Ov indication for 3 0 sec 5 If no malfunctions are present meter will read 12v once per second 6 After recording DTCs turn ignition switch off 7 Disconnect voltmeter leads 8 Erase DTCswhen all repairs are completed H DTC 12 4 DTC SEPARATION Next DTC 12v Indication Abas 0v seconds 3 sec 1 5 sec 2 2 sec 3 sec L To manually read DTCs from 1985 87 Mitsubishi Galant 1987 88 Mitsubishi Van Wagon that use 9 pin or 12 pin DLC and Analog Voltmeter with Digital Decimal output do the following 1 Locate the 9 or 12 pin Diagnostic Connector MITSUBISHI 19 TEST MODES 2a Connect analog voltmeter red lead to pin 1 diagnostic terminal and voltmeter black lead to pin 12 12 pin or pin 9 9 pin terminal of diagnostic connector PIN 1 PIN 12 2b Same as in Step 2a but use Pin 1 and Pin 9 PIN 1 PIN 9 3 Turn ignition switch to ON Each output cycle takes 16s The first 12v deflection corresponds to a 3 sec Start indication s
5. MODEL ENGINE 1988 92 Charade 1 0L 14 1989 92 Charade 1 3L 14 YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1986 89 Accord 2 0L I4 1990 94 Accord 22L I4 1994 Accord 22L I4 VTEC 1986 Accord Lxi 2 0L 4 1985 Accord Sei 1 8L 14 1987 94 Civic 1 5L I4 1989 91 Civic 1 6L 14 1992 93 Civic 1 5L 14 VTEC E 1992 94 Civic 1 6L 14 1988 Civic CRX 1 5L I4 1985 87 Civic CRX Si 1 5L 14 1988 Civic CRX Si 1 6L 14 1993 Civic del Sol 1 5L 14 1993 94 Civic del Sol 1 6L 14 1994 Civic del Sol 1 5L 14 1994 Civic del Sol 1 6L 14 1986 Civic Si 1 3L I4 GENERAL INFORMATION 13 VEHICLE COVERAGE HYUNDAI YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1989 Civic Wagon 1 6L 14 1989 Civic Wagon 1 5L 14 1989 91 CRX 1 5L 14 1989 CRX HF 1 5L 14 1989 91 CRX Si 1 6L 14 1986 91 Prelude 2 0L 14 1992 94 Prelude 22L 4 1992 94 Prelude 2 3L 14 1993 94 Prelude 2 2L 14 1990 91 Prelude Si 2 0L 4 1990 91 Prelude Si 2 1L I4 YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1996 98 Accent 1 5L 1992 95 Elantra 1 6L I4 1993 98 Elantra 1 8L I4 1995 Elantra 1 5L 1990 94 Excel 1 5L I4 1991 95 Scoupe 1 5L 14 1989 91 Sonata 2 4L 14 1989 98 Sonata 3 0L V6 1992 93 Sonata 2 0L I4 1994 98 Sonata 2 0L I4 DOHC 1997 98 Tiburon 1 8L 14 1997 98 Tiburon 2 0L I4 14 GENERAL INFORMATION VEHICLE COVERAGE
6. moi Boh ala dhe 23 MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 25 DIN KUR Ke Qa 25 OBD U AERE eki RARE KRI A4 UR k Pc ad ORE GA 36 NM ee re eee ne eed Una op td ee e ED cd 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS enim ter bete doi 2 NISSAN SPECIFIC INFORMATION 10 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 11 DETTING STARTED smetana ska susa Cie ERE 12 SELECTING THE VEHICLE sais vesa cba E x DERE RP ERREUR ERR 13 Seleotino the Manujaciwie CORDES ERR EEE EEK UI WE RES 13 Me Modol TOME vana vau vai exis v ate Oe eee Cus Ede dado dca 13 Selecting Model sasassaasaasaasaasdan tan ARA KRE AKA a AA VANE RAE NGA 13 Asian Imports 7 Selecting the Engine And Engine Type ses essun asa as ananas Cu CAN 13 Vehicle Information Display 145 0484 RR ARE VA AUR ASA 13 DET MACMA O O dar VR OD PE bug aa ON 13 TEST MODEM esta KAT rex VER e I Me wa E EM d d drain 15 NE O be bed Mop eb eed 15 Mode FI DIC ENO svenska ERR AQ OHA eae RODEO ER BOULE qha 15 20 OBDUCONTIBOLS suis ene beh Rad bad de Gre dvd preo eed 22 Mode FL OBD 8 m a mai mz a DRE DARE OUR UHR UR DUE EORR NEUE 22 NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS
7. 28 ORD OBD T SOME O Meek LK d DAN Ga ROGA V dad d Era d Ee 28 ORDU SSIS dt obni E kka dod debi 37 pre 1 VEHICLES E Eph d pee 2 SUBARU SPECIFIC INFORMATION 9 TEST MODES AVAILABLE iesu ee Rer Re dees 10 GETTING STARTED edu s 11 SELECTING THE VEHICLE 2 de or edes 12 delecije the M n eb adds Bla bod 12 Wie Model DOG asi 4544434454 UHR PERRA TUR T REA 12 TOO s 00 AMENDMENT n ESAN 12 Selecting ENGINE siss ena RR n a RR ERE AUR Ve IAS AKSU KEI RES 12 Selecting the Fuel System 12 Selecting the Transmission ERE ES quwaq 12 MO PINO MU a v an dae ah ode 12 Selecting the Drive IVDE 13 Vehicle Information Display dana RP alaq Kh n dn n 13 Select Mode NA Ra dd tdeo eb PR wik xq 13 14 OO DM ania Race 14 MORES DND 15 SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 22 VBD 226 2668 646 ARS 22
8. 02 Sensor 1 1 02 Sensor 1 2 02 Sensor 1 2 For V configuration engines with dual exhaust systems there may be a separate upstream and downstream 028 for each bank This will result in the following naming convention 025 B1 SI bank 1 upstream O2S BI S2 bank 1 downstream O2S B2 SI bank 2 upstream O2S B2 S2 bank 2 downstream 02 Sensor 1 1 02 Sensor 2 1 O2 Sensor 1 2 02 Sensor 2 2 4 APPENDICES OBD II OXYGEN SENSOR LOCATION INFORMATION On some V configuration engines with 2 upstream O2S there may be an O2S 3 O2S 3 is the downstream O2S after the catalytic converter This configuration may have a third O2S ahead of the catalytic converter and results in the following naming convention O2S B1 S1 lt bank 1 upstream 028 B1 52 bank 1 upstream 028 B2 SI bank 2 upstream O2S BI S3 bank 1 downstream O2 Sensor 1 1 O O2 Sensor 2 1 A O O2 Sensor 1 2 O2 Sensor 1 3 YO Together these conventions are all used to identify the O2S that may be causing a DTC or producing a faulty signal The O2S naming conventions shown here are consistent with J1979 Please consult the appropriate service manual for more information on the vehicle that you are working on APPENDICES 5 DEFINITION OF CODE C DEFINITION OF CODE TYPE The Asian Imports application cartridge uses five description for code types which are Auto Manual ECU LED Malfunction Indicator Lam
9. For Adapter Type OBD II see COMMON TEST MODES II section for operating instructions and test mode information MITSUBISHI 11 MITSUBISHI SPECIFIC INFORMATION 2 MITSUBISHI SPECIFIC INFORMATION The Mitsubishi vehicles covered by the Asian Imports Cartridge are separated into two different sections within the Asian Imports Operator s Manual The vehicle s on board system will determine which section of the Operator s Manual will need to be used Vehicles that are OBD II certified have information about the operating test modes in the COMMON TEST MODES II section of the Operator s Manual Vehicles that have OBD or OBD I systems have test mode information in this section of the Operator s Manual In these sections you will find information on test modes available how to connect the tester to the vehicle and operating instructions for the different test modes A complete list of Mitsubishi Diagnostic Trouble Codes is included at the back of each section To determine which section of the Operator s Manual to use for diagnostic information and instructions look at Adapter Type of the Vehicle and Systems chart If the vehicle you are testing has an OBD II adapter type use the COMMON TEST MODES II section of the Operator s Manual If the vehicle you are testing does not have the OBD II Adapter Type use this section to diagnose the vehicle under test 12 MITSUBISHI TEST MODES AVAILABLE 3 TEST MODES AVAILABLE The follow
10. TOYOTA 21 SELECTING THE VEHICLE INACTIVE SYSTEM DISPLAYS If an inactive system has been selected from the Select System Menu the tester will display information screens These screens remind you that DTCs will be output on the System MIL Instrument Panel and MIL flashes must be counted manually to read DTCs INACTIVE AV SYSTEM HAS BEEN SELECTED FOR TESTING FOR INACTIVE AV SYSTEMS TESTER INITIATES DTC FLASH ON SYS MIL Y MIL FLASHES MUST BE COUNTED TO DETERMINE DTC ENTER TO SELECT MODE MENU SELECT MODE MENU When the above steps are completed the Select Mode menu displays the test modes available for the selected vehicle and system Refer to Section 7 Test Modes and the Common Test Modes OBD OBDI Systems section for operating the test modes with Toyota vehicles A list of Engine system test modes is shown below 1983 88 VEHICLES 1989 94 VEHICLES Y SELECT MODE v SELECT MODE 4y F1 DTC ENTRY F0 DATA LIST F5 SYSTEM TESTS F2 DTC F8 INFORMATION F3 SNAPSHOT v TO SELECTED TEST MODE SELECT MODE Y F5 SYSTEM TESTS F9 INFORMATION TO SELECTED TEST MODE NOTE displayed for engine systems only For 1989 94 Toyota vehicles modes F0 Data List and F3 Snapshot are 22 TOYOTA SELECTING THE VEHICLE ACTIVE KEYS Select System displays Scroll up or down display Return
11. Start engine If engine will not start check for DTC s by observing the 2 Monitor Lamp If engine starts and the ECS Lamp turns ON check for DTC s by observing the O2 Monitor Lamp If engine starts and the ECS Lamp turns OFF run the engine at idle for 1 minute ON Perform 5 brief WOT place the transmission in gear and run the engine up to stall speed in order to operate the pressure switch Run the engine at 2500 RPM until the ECS Lamp turns ON If ECS Lamp stays ON record DTC s that are flashed by the O2 Monitor Lamp The long segment 1 2 seconds represents the tens digit The short segment 0 2 seconds represents the ones digit Each DTC is separated by a 1 8 second delay If the ECS Lamp blinks the system is normal Turn key OFF and disconnect the Test Mode Connectors To manually read Test Mode DTCs from 1985 1986 MPFI Subaru vehicles using the Electronic Control System ECS Lamp and ECU LED O2 Monitor LED do the following 1 Warm engine to normal operating temperature turn all accessories switches OFF 2 Turn key OFF 3 Connect Test Mode connectors Use F4 DJC LOCATION from the Information menu for test mode connectors location SUBARU 17 TEST MODES 4 Turn key Do not start engine ECS Lamp should turn ON and the fuel pump should cycle every 1 5 seconds 5 Start engine If engine will not start check for DTC s by observing the O2 Monitor Lamp If
12. da o ceo da odi ds 8 Powering the Mastertech Tech JA or Tech 8 Establishing COMMKUN ICEKO GRA RA Ke 8 O O OO OM ER PE PE O 8 TESTNIODES 9 DO O MAMAM 9 O O EVE ee heed NE iba ee ERE 9 EO a NE V Ad 14 Mode F2 Diapnostic Double Codes DTC cce entres RR Le LER ERES 16 Mode ONO A HM ead be dd eh mabe ea 20 Mode PS OBD CONNOR icc hea eda saa ede eke ERASE ROS 23 MINE VEU 24 eta suns eed sem Oka RESALE qaad aqq 27 Mode FI 28 2 Asian Imports CT o occorre 1 YXEHICLES AND SYSTEMS Leute uon erre ERR IRR e tke ER pt Ree stu 2 ACURA SPECIFIC INFORMATION oo 5 Two JO Digpuose Acura aad dard e que GRO HR 5 TEST MODES AVAILABLE ertt ER RE RT S he mene ss 6 GETTINO STARTED o eorr OO pue ehh ra 7 SELECTING THE VEHICLE UBER der det 8 visat boba kok ee ades d actes ds 8 MADE ear os cada chee i ss de dedu xa ik KK Cass au qaq 8 SCEGOROWIENIOJA 8 ECK ME ANE 8 Vehicle format 5 bee pae E 8 SIEC Mode MENU 428 458 D Edad 8 TEST RODE 10 uda aed auia qr d Aki ee QU 10 ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE
13. Enter model year CO Used to answer guestions in tester display EXIT Return to previous display 10 HYUNDAI TEST MODES 6 TEST MODES When the Select Mode menu is displayed test modes available for Hyundai vehicles may be selected You may select Modes 1 Entry F2 F5 System Tests and F8 Information without connecting the tester to the vehicle Operating instructions for Modes F1 DTC Entry and F2 DTCs are included in this section READING CODES Detailed operating instructions for using Modes F1 DTC Entry and F2 DTC with Hyundai vehicles are included in the following procedure F1 Entry is displayed for all Hyundai vehicles and F2 is displayed for Hyundai vehicles that have AUTOCODES as the Code Type listed in the Vehicles and Systems table NOTE Follow the Submode F0 Prepare Vehicle instructions to ensure proper vehicle preparation prior to testing The vehicle must be completely EH warmed up in order for the tester to communicate properly with the vehicle MODE F1 DTC ENTRY When Mode F1 Entry is selected the tester displays submodes which after your selection can provide information on how to read diagnostic trouble codes DTCs from the vehicle how to clear DTCs from the vehicle or tester memory obtain a text description of entered or selected DTCs and review entered or selected DTCs as a result of manually retrieving codes from the ECU DTC ENT
14. 15 SECONDS RECONNECT THE BATTERY TERMINAL ENTER VEHICLE TROUBLE DES ENTER Examples of Clear DTC Instructions TURN IGNITION OFF REMOVE EFI TOYOTA LEXUS FUSE FOR 60 SEC ENTER VEHICLES DISCONNECT THE NISSAN NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL WAIT VEHICLES ENTER ACTIVE KEYS O GD Display how to clear ECU codes information Clear codes stored in tester memory Return to DTC menu Return to DTC menu COMMON TEST MODES I 19 MODE F3 SNAPSHOT 5 MODE F3 SNAPSHOT The purpose of the Snapshot test mode is to help you isolate an intermittent or transient problem by storing engine data parameters before and or after the problem occurs The Snapshot test mode can be used in the service bay and during road testing When the tester is operating in Snapshot mode it is constantly storing diagnostic data parameter values and any available trouble codes A time and position index for the stored information is also saved When the tester memory is full the oldest earliest data collected is erased to make room for new information A TRIGGER tells the tester when to freeze collected data You can specify a TRIGGER CONDITION and TRIGGER POINT so the tester collects data that will be most useful in diagnosing the current problem TRIGGER CONDITION The trigger condition that you select defines the specific circumstances under which you want the
15. O O 4 EM 42 Creer eer Tee hx Sere ee ERE 1 VERICLES AND SYSTEMS adas a ena Ea RR Ea nege mane e TYGRSWESSIORS da od bad di cuc kos ko ki 10 TOYOTA SPECIFIC INFORMATION 11 Tuo Fasto Diagnose TOVORE dob gd deque daba aed 11 TOYOTA OBD SYSTEMS Pk RES emen e cakes 12 PROMO Daa LiT EPA ev oba Cad da d Cp dd 12 SOMEDAY pe ao at dO de dedi dede our rus ede rude a e 12 Electronically Controlled Transmission DTCS O ov esse seo KKI ANA 12 TOC 8 Asian Imports APPENDICES di dass Cono DICOS aririk Air Conditioning DTCs A Pap DICI GAS PAS A note dbout the MIL ona aa vana Selecting the Manufacturer Replay Snapshot Data Selecting the Model Year Selecting the Model Selecting the Engine Vehicle Information Display System Inquiry 1989 94 Vehicles Only TEST MODES AVAILABLE GETIING STARTED eee fol per e ee dete te A SELECTING IHE oasis tct b mE TE T Cms Possible System Supported Displays 1989 94 Vehicles Only Select System MENU asa 7 Inactive System Displays Select Mod
16. 03 Example of Review DTC Instructions ACTIVE KEYS Advance to next DTC Hold displayed DTC Display summary screen of entered DTCs Print entered or selected current DTCs Return to DTC Entry menu COMMON TEST MODES I 17 MODE F2 DTC S SUBMODE F4 CLEAR The Clear submode allows you to clear all DTCs stored in the tester and provides instructions for clearing active DTCs stored in the vehicle ECU To select Clear DTC s submode do the following 1 Press G to select DTC from the Select Mode menu 2 Press to select Clear DTC from DTC menu 3 For some vehicles the tester asks if you want to clear codes from the vehicle or from the tester Press GD for information screens that describe how to clear ECU codes or press aij to clear entered or selected codes that are stored in the tester memory 4 When F0 FROM ECU is selected one or more instruction screens explain how to clear the DTCs The instructions are specific to the vehicle selected The illustration shows examples of Clear DTC instructions 5 When F1 FROM TESTER is selected the DTCs stored in the tester are cleared 6 Press SLR to return to the DTC menu 18 COMMON TEST MODES I MODE F2 DTC S SELECT MODE F1 DTC ENTRY F2 DTC F3 SNAPSHOT DTC F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC s z CLEAR DTC s F0 FROM ECU F1 FROM TESTER ENTER
17. 8 Tester will automatically command the vehicle ECU into the correct mode required to read DTCs and will display all received DTCs on the tester display Submode F2 DTC List This submode provides you with a way to view all possible ECU DTCs including DTC numbers and descriptions You can also select the DTCs obtained from the analog voltmeter or MIL as an alternative way of entering DTCs into the tester s memory As you scroll through the available DTCs you can view a description of the DTC obtained from the analog voltmeter or MIL You can Select the DTC on the tester screen for later review or printing Refer to the COMMON TEST MODES I section for further information Submode F3 Review DTC This submode provides you with a review of the DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The description of the entered or selected DTC will be displayed along with a numerical summary of the entered or selected DTC Review DTC is intended to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTCs that you have encountered during diagnosis Submode F4 Clear DTC s This submode has two options for you to chose Option 1 is a series of instructions which inform you how to clear DTCs from the ECU Option 2 clears DTC s from the tester s memory that you entered or selected The clear DTC s mode is helpful and provides information that you would normally have to locate in a service manual NOTE Follow the Submode F0 Pre
18. BATTERY VOLTAGE 12 6 V BAROMETER SENSOR INDICATES SAMPLE 0 81 bar 34 NUMBER RELATIVE TO TRIGGER AII parameter pairs can be displayed BATTERY VOLTAGE 12 3 V BAROMETER SENSOR 0 81 bar 12 BATTERY VOLTAGE DTC 49 14 9 V BATTERY BAROMETER SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH 0 81 bar 2 YES Code Display Complete DISPLAYS TRIGGER SAMPLE OF DATA BATTERY VOLTAGE 14 8 V BAROMETER SENSOR 0 81 bar 0 lt TRIGGER SAMPLE BATTERY VOLTAGE 12 9V BAROMETER SENSO 0 81 bar 1 NO TROUBLE CODES A 4 Seconds parameter pairs can be displayed DISPLAYS FIRST SAMPLE OF DATA BATTERY VOLTAGE 12 6 V BAROMETER SENSOR 0 81 bar 33 Snapshot Data Display COMMON TEST MODES I 25 MODE F3 SNAPSHOT SELECT MODE F3 SNAPSHOT F5 SYSTEM TESTS F8 INFORMATION SNAPSHOT OPTIONS F0 ANY CODE F1 SINGLE CODE F2 MANUAL TRIG F3 REPLAY DATA F9 TRIG POINT TRIGGER POINT AT F0 BEGINNING F1 CENTER or F2 END of data SNAPSHOT MODE ENTER ECM CODE TO TRIGGER ON XX THEN PRESS ENTER SET UP PHASE See Steps 1 2 Review previously captured data YES More Data Parameters COOLANT TEMP CAPTURE 40 C 104 F PHASE MANI AIR TEMP See Steps 3 6 40 C 104 F W FLASHING W WAITING FOR TRIGGER USE 33 AND GQ SELECT DIFFERENT DATA PARAMETERS COO
19. INFINITI 5 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 3 TEST MODES AVAILABLE The following test modes are available when testing Infiniti vehicles General operating instructions for test modes other than ENTRY are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section There are also Infiniti specific instructions for operating the test modes in TEST MODES on page 10 MODE F1 DTC ENTRY SUBMODE F0 HOW TO READ SUBMODE F1 ENTER DTC s SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST SUBMODE F3 REVIEW DTC SUBMODE F4 CLEAR DTC s MODE F5 SYSTEM TESTS SUBMODE F0 PREP VEHICLE MODE F8 INFORMATION SUBMODE F3 ID INFO SUBMODE F5 ECU LOCATION 6 INFINITI GETTING STARTED 4 GETTING STARTED Before operating the Asian Imports Cartridge with an Infiniti vehicle the following steps must be performed 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Plug the tester power cable into the vehicle cigarette lighter The power cable may also be directly connected to the battery via the optional battery adapter cable P N 02001636 NOTE Since the cigarette lighter can be switched some tests require that the EH power cable be directly connected to the battery via the battery adapter cable 3 Turn on the tester and select the application software that you will be using Verify that the correct screen is displayed The tester should display a screen similar to Figure 1 1 ASIAN IMPORTS 83 02 ENTER FIGURE 1 1 Tester stan
20. 244 A46DE A245E A340H 10 TOYOTA TOYOTA SPECIFIC INFORMATION 2 TOYOTA SPECIFIC INFORMATION TWO WAYS TO DIAGNOSE TOYOTA Toyota powertrain diagnosis can be performed with the Asian Imports cartridge installed in a Tech 1 Tech Mastertech tester Additionally Toyota vehicles can be diagnosed with the aftermarket version of the Toyota OEM level program card software using the Mastertech tester only Operating instructions and test mode information are available for the OEM level software in the Toyota Lexus Program Card Operator s Manual If you do not have the necessary Program Card and Mastertech tester to perform OEM level diagnostics you can use the Asian Imports Cartridge for limited model year coverage The following Toyota section includes the test modes available how to connect the tester to the vehicle operating instructions for DTC entry and the applicable DTCs for each model year Parameters that can be displayed by Toyota vehicles along with a description and states or units range of each parameter are listed in Section 9 TOYOTA 11 TOYOTA OBD SYSTEMS 3 TOYOTA OBD SYSTEMS Toyota passenger cars and trucks are equipped with On Board Diagnostic systems that operate with engine fuel and emission systems Toyota OBD include transmission ECT antilock brake ABS cruise control CCS air conditioning A C and airbag AB For these systems Toyota vehicles do no
21. YEAR 1992 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 65 A C SIGNAL EC AT CU 67 ELECTRICAL COOLING FAN RELAY NO2 69 WATER THERMOSENSOR FAN YEAR 1993 DESCRIPTOR NOTE For 1993 Navajo DTCs see table beginning on page 50 1993 1 IGNITION PULSE IGNITER IGNITION COIL IGNITION PULSE IG PULSE CIRCUIT 2 NE SIGNAL NE SIGNAL CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR NE2 SIGNAL CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 2 NE2 SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR NE SIGNAL NE2 SIGNAL CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 2 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR NE SIGNAL 3 G SIGNAL DOHC AND CALIFORNIA B6 G SIGNAL CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR G SIGNAL CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 1 G SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR G1 SIGNAL G SIGNAL CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 1 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR G SIGNAL 4 SIGNAL CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR G2 SIGNAL SIGNAL CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 5 KNOCK SENSOR LEFT SIDE KNOCK SENSOR 6 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SPEED SIGNAL SPEEDOMETER SENSOR 7 RIGHT SIDE KNOCK SENSOR 8 AIRFLOW METER AIRFLOW SENSOR 9 WATER THERMOSENSOR ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIS ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR OR CIRCUIT 44 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1993 CONTINUED 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 22 23 24 25 DESCRIPTOR INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR IN AIR FLOW SENSOR INTAKE AIR THERMOS
22. screen EXIT Return to Select Mode menu 28 COMMON TEST MODES I MODE F5 SYSTEM TESTS SELECT MODE F0 PREP VEHICLE IS ENGINEA NO START YES NO USEy 4 KEYS DOES ENGINE TO VIEW PREPARE CRANK VEHICLE SCREENS YES NO YES v CHECK CHECK BATTERY OR IS SPARK VACUUM HOSES STARTER CIRCUIT OBSERVEDAT ELEC WIRING SPARK PLUG COOLANT LEVEL v EXIT YES NO 2 N y e SET PARKING BRAKE BLOCK DRIVE WHEELS CHECK FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM Y OR ENGINE MECH EXIT TURN ACCESSORIES OFF PLACE A T Y IN PARK OR M T CHECK IGNITION IN NEUTRAL PRIMARY AND SECONDARY CKTS EXIT WARM ENGINE RUN AT 2000 RPM FOR 2 MINUTES t v 8 VEHICLE PREP COMPLETED CONTINUE TESTING IDIAGNOSIS EXIT 2 Prep Vehicle Flowchart COMMON TEST MODES I 29 MODE F8 INFORMATION 8 MODE F8 INFORMATION SUBMODE F1 DLC LOCATION Submode F1 DLC Location is available for select Chrysler Import and Nissan vehicles and all Hyundai Lexus Mazda Mitsubishi and Toyota vehicles The DLC Location test mode displays where the Data Link Connector DLC for the selected ECU is located on the vehicle Depending on the vehicle being tested there may be one or more different DLCs for the various ECUs The tester informs you if the DLC location is not applicable for the selected system To
23. 34 NISSAN NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1993 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 13 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE 14 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 21 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 22 FUEL PUMP OR FP CKT FAILURE 31 FAULTY ECM OR ECM CKT FAILURE 32 EGR SENSOR OR EGR CKT FAILURE 33 O2S OR O2S CIRCUIT FAILURE LEFT HO2S OR CIRCUIT FAILURE HO2S OR HO2S CIRCUIT FAILURE 34 KNOCK SENSOR OR KS CKT FAILURE 35 EGR TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 41 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 43 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 45 INJECTOR LEAK 51 FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 53 RIGHT HO2S OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 54 TCM TO ECU CIRCUIT FAILURE FAULTY A T CONTROL UNIT 55 NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECM YEAR 1994 DESCRIPTOR 1994 11 CAMSHAFT POS OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 12 MAF SENSOR OR MAF CKT FAILURE 13 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE 14 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 21 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 22 FUEL PUMP OR FP CIRCUIT FAILURE 31 FAULTY ECM OR ECM CKT FAILURE 32 EGR SENSOR OR EGR CKT FAILURE NISSAN 35 NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1994 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 33 LEFT HO2S OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 025 OR O2S CIRCUIT FAILURE HO2S OR HO2S CIRCUIT FAILURE 34 KNOCK SENSOR OR KS CKT FAILURE 35 EGR TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 41 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 43 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 45 INJECTOR LEAK 51 FUEL
24. SUBARU VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS ENGINE FUEL ECU ADAPTER SYSTEM MODES 1995 SVX 3 3L H6 MPFI 4AT MIL MANCODES NONE LEGACY 2 2L H4 MPFI 4AT 5MT AUTOCODES oBDIH IMPREZA 1 8L H4 MPFI 4AT 5MT ECULED MANCODES NONE For Adapter Type OBD II see Common Tet Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information m ne E 1996 LEGACY 2 2L H4 MPFI 4AT 5MT N A AUTOCODES OBDII IMPREZA 1 8L H4 MPFI 4AT 5MT N A AUTOCODES OBDII IMPREZA 2 2L H4 MPFI 4AT 5MT N A AUTOCODES OBDII SVX 3 3L H6 MPFI 4AT N A AUTOCODES OBDII For Adapter Type OBD II see Common Tet Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information MODEL mwone NE 1997 IMPREZA 1 8L H4 MPFI 4AT 5MT N A AUTOCODES OBDII IMPREZA 2 2L H4 MPFI 4AT 5MT N A AUTOCODES OBDII LEGACY 2 2L H4 MPFI 4AT 5MT N A AUTOCODES OBDII LEGACY 2 5L H4 MPFI 4AT 5MT N A AUTOCODES OBDII SVX 3 3L H6 MPFI 4AT N A AUTOCODES OBDII For Adapter Type OBD II see Common Tet Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information MODEL ENGINE FUEL TRANS ECU CODE ADAPTER SYSTEM TYPE MODES 1998 SUBARU 7 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL ENGINE FUEL ECU CODE ADAPTER CONTINUED SYSTEM MODES TYPE TYPE IMPREZA 2 2L H4 MPFI 4AT 5MT N A AUTOCODES oBDH IMPREZA 2 5L H4 MPFI 4A
25. Submode F3 Review DTC This submode provides you with a review of the DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The description of the entered or selected DTC will be displayed along with a numerical summary of the entered or selected DTC Review DTC is intended to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTCs that you have encountered during diagnosis Submode F4 Clear This submode has two options for you to chose Option is to view text screens that provide information on how to clear the DTCs from ECU memory This is performed by tester keypad presses Option F1 clears the tester memory from DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The clear DTC s mode is helpful and provides information that you would normally have to locate in a service manual MODE F2 DTC To read DTCs on all 1988 93 and select 1987 1994 and 1995 Chrysler Imports vehicles you will need to locate the vehicle DLC and connect the Chrysler Imports Check Adapter to the tester and vehicle To locate the DLC select F1 DLC Location from the Information menu If necessary refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further instructions When Mode F2 DTC is selected the tester displays four submodes DTC Submodes F1 READ DTC s F2 DTC LIST F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC s Follow the Submode F0 Prepare Vehicle instructions to ensure proper vehicle preparation prior to testing The v
26. 1 Verify that the diagnostic mode selector is turned fully counterclockwise or diagnostic slide switch is in the OFF position 2 Turn ignition switch to ON 3 Check for LED lamp illumination on ECU bulb check 4 Turn the diagnostic mode selector fully clockwise or change the diagnostic slide switch into the ON position 5 Observe the ECU LEDs for DTCs 23 24 and 31 The presence of these DTCs indicates that the ECU has not received input switch signals from the Accelerator Park Neutral and A C and or heater switch 6 Depress and release accelerator pedal 7 Observe the ECU LEDs for DTCs 24 and 31 The presence of these DTCs indicates that the ECU has not received input switch signals from the Park Neutral and A C and or heater switch 8 Shift automatic transmission from neutral through drive gears and back to neutral or shift manual transmission from neutral to all gear selections and back to neutral 9 Observe the ECU LEDs for DTC 31 The presence of this DTC indicates that the ECU has not received an input switch signal from the A C and or heater switch 10 Start the engine 11 Observe the ECU LEDs for DTCs 14 and 31 The presence of these DTCs indicates that the ECU has not received input switch signals from the vehicle speed and A C and or heater switch 12 Drive the vehicle above 6 MPH 13 Observe the ECU LEDs for DTC 31 The presence of this DTC indicates that the ECU has not received an input switch sign
27. 1 8L 4 TURBO 2 0L 14 3 0L V6 3 0 3 0L V6 TURBO 3 0L V6 1 6L 14 1 6L 14 1 6L 14 2 0L 14 2 4L 14 2 4L 14 2 4L 14 3 0L V6 3 0L V6 ENGINE CAISET CA20E VG30E VG30E VG30ET VG30E 161 CA16DE 161 20 2241 2241 2241 VG30I VG30I ENGINE TYPE EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI TBI TBI TBI TBI TBI ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK ADAPTER 1988 200SX 200SX 200SX 300ZX 1 8L I4 TURBO 2 0L 14 3 0L V6 3 0 3 0L V6 TURBO CAISET CA20E VG30E VG30E VG30ET EFI EFI EFI EFI CA MIL LED FED ECU LED CA MIL LED FED ECU LED CA MIL LED FED ECU LED CA MIL LED FED ECU LED CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK NISSAN VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL ENGINE ENGINE FUEL ECU CODE ADAPTER CONTINUED TYPE TYPE MODES TYPE TYPE MAXIMA 3 0L V6 VG30E EFI 5 MIL LED CHECK PULSAR NX 1 8L 14 CA18DE EFI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED SENTRA 1 6L 14 E16I EFI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED STANZA 2 0L 14 CA20E EFI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED VAN 2 4L 4 2241 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED PATHFINDER 2 4L 14 2241 5
28. 3 0L V6 2 0L TURBO 14 2 2L 4 1 5L 4 2 4L 4 3 0L 16 3 0L TURBO 16 1 5L 14 4 5L I6 3 0L V6 2 4L 4 3 0L V6 2 4L 4 3 0L V6 3VZ FE 5S FE 3S GTE 4A FE 5S FE 4A FE TA FE 7M GE 3S GTE 5S FE 5 2TZ FE 2JZ GE 2JZ GTE 3E E 1FZ FE 3VZ E 22R E 3VZ E 22R E 3VZ E PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PRI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES CODES CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CHECK TCDL CHECK TDCL CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK TDCL CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK TDCL CHECK TDCL CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK MODEL 1994 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER 1994 SUPRA CAMRY CELICA COROLLA 3 0L 16 3 0L TURBO 16 3 0L V6 2 2L 4 2 2L 4 1 8L 14 1 6L 14 1 8L 14 2JZ GE 2JZ GTE IMZ FE 5S FE 5S FE TA FE 4A FE TA FE PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES
29. ECU to the selected mode the tester informs you Press 9 to return to the OBD Controls menu GB Select test ENTER Used when instructions on each screen have been completed EXIT Return to OBD Controls menu NISSAN 25 CONTROLS SELECT MODE AV R AFR MON F1 AFR MON B F2 SWITCH TEST CONNECT CHECK ADAPTER RED TO VEHICLE DLC ENTER ENTER START ENGINE AND WARM TO NORMAL OPERATING TEMP ENTER ENTER TURN ENGINE OFF TURN IGN SWITCH TO ON POSITION ENTER ENTER Message if ECU does not enter switch test mode SWITCH TEST UNABLE TO SET REQUESTED MISC TEST MODE EXIT IN PROCESS Message if ECU does not CHECK START detect start signal SIGNAL CIRCUIT MOMENTARILY TURN IGN SW TO CRANK DO NOT START ENGINE Message if ECU does not detect idle switch signal DEPRESS ACCELERATOR PEDAL CHECK IDLE SIGNAL CIRCUIT EXIT Message if ECU does not detect VSS CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT EXIT START ENGINE DRIVE VEHICLE GREATER THAN 12 MPH SWITCH TEST PASS EXIT Switch Test Submode F3 RT DTC Monitor The Real Time RT DTC Monitor output control test is available for all 1987 89 and select 1990 95 Nissan vehicles If you are unsure of test application check the ECU Modes column in the Nissan Vehicles and Systems table If the EC
30. Ga Diagnostic Jumper Connector 5 Wait 2 seconds 6 Disconnect the jumper wire and reconnect the DJC 7 Record the DTCs by reading the flashing dashboard MIL To manually clear DTCs from 1993 95 Nissan Quest 3 0L do the following 1 Perform the manually reading DTCs function 2 Referring to the illustration use the Nissan jumper wire P N 02002075 to short the Blue White wire and Grey Blue wire between the DJC halves 3 Wait 2 seconds 4 Disconnect the jumper wire and reconnect the DJC 5 The MIL will illuminate constantly indicating the DTCs have been erased Submode F2 DTC List This submode provides you with a way to view all possible ECU DTCs including DTC numbers and descriptions You can also select the DTCs obtained from the ECU LED or MIL as an alternative way of entering DTCs into the tester s memory As you scroll through the available DTCs you can view a description of the DTC obtained from the ECU LED You can Select the DTC on the tester screen for later review or printing Refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further information Submode F3 Review DTC s This submode provides you with a review of the DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The description of the entered or selected DTC will be displayed along with a numerical summary ofthe entered or selected DTC Review DTC is intended to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTCs tha
31. IGNITION PULSE IGNITION PULSE CIRCUIT CRANK ANGLE SENSOR AIR FLOW METER WATER THERMO SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR FEEDBACK SYSTEM O2 SENSOR ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR THROTTLE SENSOR BOOST SENSOR PRESSURE SENSOR EGR POSITION SENSOR ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR WATER THERMO SENSOR OR CIRCUIT COIL WITH IGNITER TRAILING SIDE VACUUM SENSOR OR CIRCUIT ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR OR CIRCUIT O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR DYNAMIC CHAMBER INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTAKE AIR PIPE EGR POSITION SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FEEDBACK SYSTEM A F SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT NO 1 CYLINDER SENSOR SLOW FUEL CUT SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT COASTING RICHER SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT PURGE SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT DUTY SOLENOID VACUUM VALVE OR CIRCUIT DUTY SOLENOID VENT VALVE OR CIRCUIT ACV SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT IDLE UP SOLENOID VALVE FOR A T OR CIRCUIT VACUUM SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 30 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1988 DESCRIPTOR 1988 1 IGNITION COIL IGNITION PULSE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR IGNITION PULSE CIRCUIT 2 NE SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR NE SIGNAL AIR FLOW METER 3 Gl SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR Gl SIGNAL WATER THERMO SENSOR GROUP SENSOR DISTRIBUTOR 4 G2 SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR G2 SIGNAL INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AIR FLOW METER 5 KNOCK SENSOR OR KNOCK CONTROL UNIT O2 SENSOR 6 THROTTLE SENSOR 7 PRESSURE SENS
32. OBD OBD I SYSTEMS YEAR 1983 DESCRIPTOR 1983 1 ENGINE SPEED RPM SIGNAL 2 WATER THERMO SENSOR 3 O2 SENSOR 4 VACUUM SENSOR 5 EGR POSITION SENSOR YEAR 1984 DESCRIPTOR 1984 1 ENGINE SPEED RPM SIGNAL 2 WATER THERMO SENSOR AIR FLOW METER 3 O2 SENSOR WATER THERMO SENSOR 4 VACUUM SENSOR O2 SENSOR 5 EGR POSITION SENSOR THROTTLE SENSOR 6 ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR 28 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1985 1985 DESCRIPTOR ENGINE SPEED RPM SIGNAL WATER THERMO SENSOR AIR FLOW METER O2 SENSOR WATER THERMO SENSOR VACUUM SENSOR O2 SENSOR EGR POSITION SENSOR THROTTLE SENSOR ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR YEAR 1986 1986 12 15 22 DESCRIPTOR ENGINE SPEED RPM SIGNAL CRANK ANGLE SENSOR IGNITION PULSE WATER THERMO SENSOR AIR FLOW METER FEEDBACK SYSTEM WATER THERMO SENSOR VACUUM SENSOR INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR AIR FLOW METER TEMPERATURE SENSOR EGR POSITION SENSOR O2 SENSOR FEEDBACK SYSTEM THROTTLE SENSOR ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR BOOST SENSOR EGR POSITION SENSOR ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR COIL WITH IGNITER TRAILING SIDE INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR DYNAMIC CHAMBER NO 1 CYLINDER SENSOR MAZDA 29 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1987 1987 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 22 23 26 28 29 30 35 45 DESCRIPTOR
33. On Board Diagnostics OBD OL Drive is a general term used to refer to any self diagnosis performed by the vehicle s ECUs OBD is also used to refer to the EPA s federal OBD program OBD I refers to California s first phase of on board diagnostics OBD I requires that the ECU diagnose some of the emissions related components and that the DTCs resulting from that diagnosis be made available to the service technician In many cases OBD I codes are displayed via a flashing MIL light OL Fault Other Test Results The California Air Resource Board CARB requires that by 1996 all vehicles sold in California contain a certain minimum on board diagnostic capability to diagnose emissions related failures of the engine control system These diagnostic requirements have been designated as OBD II On Board Diagnostics Phase II with a goal of monitoring all of the emissions related components on board the vehicle for proper operation CARB s intent with the OBD II program is to permit the PCM State s Inspection and Maintenance Program to PCM evolve into a check of the on board computer for the presence of diagnostic trouble codes underhood and tailpipe inspections would no longer be required P N PCS Over Drive Overhead Cam Open Loop due to driving conditions for FUEL STATUS parameter Used to indicate that the fuel system is operating open loop due to such driving conditions
34. System Malfunction P0510 Closed TP Switch Circuit Malfunction P0551 Power Steering Pressure Sensor Circuit Range Performance P0600 PCM Malfunction SPI Communication P0601 PCM Internal Malfunction P0605 Internal PCM Failure P0700 EATX Controller Detects DTC P0705 Transmission Range Sensor PRNDL Input Circuit Malfunction P0710 Transmission Temp Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0715 Speed Error Input Speed Sensor Circuit P0720 Speed Error Output Speed Sensor Circuit P0725 A T Engine Speed does Not match PCM Engine Speed P0731 Ist Gear Incorrect Ratio P0732 2nd Gear Incorrect Ratio P0733 3rd Gear Incorrect Ratio P0734 4th Gear Incorrect Ratio P0736 Reverse Gear Incorrect Ratio P0740 TCC Lockup Control Out of Range P0750 LR Solenoid Circuit Error P0755 2 4 Solenoid Circuit Error P0760 OD Solenoid Circuit Error P0765 OD Solenoid Circuit Error P1100 Induction Control Motor Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction P1101 Traction Control Vacuum Solenoid Malfunction P1102 Traction control Ventilation solenoid Malfunction P1103 Turbo Waste Gate Actuator Malfunction P1104 Turbo Waste Gate Solenoid Malfunction P1105 Fuel Pressure Solenoid Circuit Malfunction 36 CHRYSLER IMPORTS CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES YEAR 1996 98 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR P1294 P1295 P1296 P1297 P1300 P1390 P1391 P1400 P1443 P1486 P1487 P1489 P1490 P14
35. Vehicle is not OBD II compatible APPENDICES 7 IF YOU RE HAVING A PROBLEM Recommendations Verify that the vehicle s ignition is on Verify that cable is plugged into vehicle s diagnostic connector Check underhood decal for OBD certification TESTER LOSES COMMUNICATION WITH THE VEHICLE LOSS OF VEHICLE COMMUNICATIONS Possible Causes Vehicle s ignition was turned off Diagnostic cable came loose from vehicle s diagnostic connector Vehicle failed to respond to query from tester Recommendations Verify that the vehicle s ignition is on Verify that cable is plugged into vehicle s diagnostic connector Turn tester and vehicle s ignition off Then turn ignition to on followed by turning on the tester and attempting to reestablish communication Some vehicles fail to respond properly to tester queries for certain tests This is particularly true with oxygen sensor tests 1f all readiness tests have not been completed If possible drive the vehicle to complete the readiness tests and then rerun the tests PARAMETER UPDATE RATE IS SLOW Possible Cause Aslow update rate is characteristic of OBD II communications A typical update rate is approximately 125 to 150 ms per parameter 7 or 8 updates per second for a single parameter Therefore a typical list of 20 parameters will only be updated approximately every 3 seconds Recommendation Ifa faster update rate is needed select
36. 2 Select F1 other results from the SELECT TEST menu 3 Select the ECU from which you choose to monitor data for vehicles with multiple ECUs only The message Waiting For Data is displayed followed by the OTHER RESULTS test information In addition to reporting data for these TIDs and CIDs the vehicle reports test limits minimum maximum or both for acceptable operation The tester compares the data with the test limits and displays a PASS or FAIL indication for each TID and CID The actual received data can be viewed by moving the star cursor 26 COMMON TEST MODES II TEST MODES with the arrow keys to the desired item and pressing 5 If N A not available is displayed for a limit then the ECU did not send a value for that limit 01 01 ECU 10 Test Value 0200 Min Limit Max Limit 0300 ENTER Displays actual received data Move marker EXIT Return to SYSTEM TESTS menu MODE F8 INFORMATION The information mode is used to enable you to request vehicle specific information from the vehicle ECU such as VIN Software Calibration ID or Software Verification Number If the vehicle PCM does not support vehicle PCM information the tester will display Vehicle Info Supported when the INFORMATION mode is selected Submode F0 VIN The VIN selection allows you to electronically read the Vehicle Identification Number that is stored in the vehicle s ECU This mode is only selectable when it
37. 3 Turn the rotary diagnostic test mode selector on the ECU fully clockwise or move the slide switch to the opposite position 4 Wait at least 2 seconds 5 Turn the diagnostic test mode selector fully counter clockwise or push the slide switch back to the original position 6 The self diagnostic system is now in the self diagnostic code output mode Key On Engine Off Mode 2 7 The DTCs are indicated by a flashing red LED and the MIL lamp 8 Count the flashes on the ECU LED or MIL Long flashes are 10 s digit and short flashes are 15 digit 9 Write down all received DTCs 10 When DTC recording is complete turn the rotary diagnostic mode selector fully clockwise or push the slide switch to the opposite position 11 Wait at least 2 seconds and then turn the rotary diagnostic mode selector fully counter clockwise or push the slide switch back to the original position NOTE For further information refer to the Factory Service Manual for the vehicle you are testing INFINITI 11 TEST MODES Submode F2 DTC List This submode provides you with a way to view all possible ECU DTCs including DTC numbers and descriptions You can also select the DTCs obtained from the ECU LED or MIL as an alternative way of entering DTCs into the tester s memory As you scroll through the available DTCs you can view a description of the DTC obtained from the ECU LED You can Select the DTC on the tester s
38. 3 Seconds DTC 14 02 SENSOR VOLTAGE FAULT DTC REQUEST PROCESS ENTER NO DTCs ARE ACTIVE EXIT DTC SUMMARY 02 14 Examples Of Read DTC s KEYS Advance display to next Holds presently displayed DTC Displays DTC summary G Prints list of current DTCs Return to Select Mode menu 14 COMMON TEST MODES MODE F2 DTC S SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST The DTC List submode provides a list of all DTC numbers and a description of each DTC available for the selected vehicle DTCs may be selected by pressing the key or deselected by pressing the key The entire DTC list can be printed if the tester is connected to a compatible serial printer To select DTC List submode do the following 1 Press select DTC from the Select Mode menu 2 Press GE to select DTC List from the DTC menu 3 An instruction screen explains how to view select and deselect the DTCs Press to display the DTC List 4 Use the and keys to scroll through the DTCs 5 Press to select a displayed DTC SELECTED is displayed at the bottom of the screen To deselect a DTC press when the code is displayed 6 Press G to print the entire DTC list 7 Press CB to return to the DTC menu SELECT MODE F1 DTC ENTRY F2 DTC F4 CONTROLS DTC F1 READ DTC s F2 DTC LIST F3 REVIEW DTC USE A 8 Y TO GO THROUGH DTC LIST YES lt SELECT N
39. 71 LOW 5 VOLT SUPPLY TO TPS AND MAP OBD II SYSTEMS YEAR 1996 98 DESCRIPTOR 1996 98 OBD II P0100 Volume Air Flow Circuit Malfunction P0105 MAP Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0106 BARO Pressure Circuit Out of Range P0107 MAP Sensor Voltage Too High P0108 MAP Sensor Voltage Too Low P0110 IAT Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0112 IAT Sensor Voltage Too Low P0113 IAT Sensor Voltage Too High P0115 ECT Circuit Malfunction P0117 ECT Sensor Voltage Too Low P0118 ECT Sensor Voltage Too High P0120 TPS Circuit Malfunction CHRYSLER IMPORTS 33 CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1996 98 DTC DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED NO P0121 TPS Voltage does not Agree with MAF P0122 TPS Voltage Too Low P0123 TPS Voltage Too High P0125 Excessive Time to Reach Closed Loop Avenger Sebring non turbo Talon P0125 Coolant Temp Too Low No Closed Loop Operation P0130 HO2 Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 1 Circuit Malfunction P0131 pstream HO2 Sensor Short to Ground P0132 pstream HO2 Sensor Short to Battery Voltage P0134 pstream HO2 Sensor not Switching U U P0133 Upstream HO2 Sensor Response Rate U P0135 Upstream HO2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction P0136 HO2 Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 2 Circuit Malfunction P0137 Downstream HO2 Sensor Short to Ground P0138 Downstream HO2 Sensor Short to Battery Voltage P0139 Downstream HO2 Sensor not Switching P01
40. Air Flow Meter AFM output voltage signal sent to the vehicle ECM from the Air Flow Meter based on the rate of air flow through the AFM AFM SIG PERIOD mS 0 66 Time period of Karman Vortex airflow meter sent as input to the vehicle from the Karman Vortex airflow meter based on the rate of air flow through the KV AFM CRANK SIGNAL ON OFF Crank starter motor signal input as sent to vehicle ECU during engine cranking ON crank switch on OFF crank switch off LEXUS 27 DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS DTC RESULT STATES Result of ECM diagnostic self test which checks for malfunction codes NOT diagnostic trouble codes has detected and stored diagnostic trouble codes ENG COOLANT TMP DEGREES UNITS RANGE DEGREES F 58 260 DEGREES C 50 127 Engine Coolant Temperature input as sent to the vehicle ECM and calculated by the ECM based on cooling system thermostat condition and engine operation mode ENGINE SPEED UNITS RANGE RPM Engine Speed signal as input to the vehicle ECU and calculated by the ECU based on the signal from the distributor pulse generator IDLE SWITCH ON OFF Idle Switch signal status as sent to the vehicle ECM based on idle switch state in throttle position sensor ON switch closed engine idling OFF switch open engine off idle NOTE When testing the idle switch make sure the engine is running INJECTOR
41. Battery Voltage Overcharge Generator Terminal B Circuit Open PSP Switch Out of Range PSP Switch Input Error PSP Switch Failed ON Transmission Solenoid Malfunction Transmission Range Sensor Circuit Intermittent Malfunction Brake On Off Switch Out of Range Digital Transmission Range Sensor Malfunction Transmission Range Sensor Out of Range KOEO Self Test PNP in Gear Transmission Fluid Temp Circuit Out of Range No Transmission Fluid Temp Change for Low Range Operation Shift Solenoid 1 Mechanical Failure Shift Solenoid 2 Mechanical Failure Shift Solenoid 3 Mechanical Failure Shift Solenoid 4 Mechanical Failure No Transmission Fluid Temp Change for High Range Operation OD Drum Speed Signal Lost During Operation No VSS 2 Signal 4x4 Low Switch Error TCC Solenoid Mechanical Failure Detected TCC Control Error TCC Solenoid Failed ON TCC Solenoid Failed ON TCC System Stuck in OFF Position Electric Pressure Control Solenoid Open Circuit Electric Pressure Control Solenoid Short Circuit Electric Pressure Control Solenoid Failed Low Shift Solenoid A Performance Coast Clutch Solenoid Malfunction Shift Solenoid B Performance MAZDA 65 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 1998 DTC DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED NO P1761 Shift Solenoid C Performance P1762 SS3 SS4 OD Band Failure P1765 3 2 Timing Valve Open or Short P1770 Overrunning Clutch Solenoid Open or Short P1780 Tran
42. CYL B ACURA 21 ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1994 DESCRIPTOR 1994 0 FAULTY ECM OR ECM CIRCUIT FAILURE 1 HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE INTEGRA VIGOR 1 LEFT HO2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE LEGEND FRONT HO2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE NSX RIGHT HO2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE LEGEND REAR HO2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE NSX MAP SENSOR OR MAP CIRCUIT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE OR CIRCUIT FAILURE INTEGRA VIGOR CRANK ANGLE SENSOR NO 1 LEGEND CRANK ANGLE SENSOR A NSX MAP SENSOR OR MAP CIRCUIT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CIRCUIT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR TDC CRANK ANGLE SENSOR NO 1 INTEGRA VIGOR O o N a R R N N CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL 1 LEGEND co CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL A NSX IAT SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 12 EGR SYSTEM OR CIRCUIT FAILURE LEGEND NSX 12 EGR SYSTEM OR CIRCUIT FAILURE VIGOR 13 BARO SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 14 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE 15 IGNITION OUTPUT SIGNAL OR CIRCIT FAILURE 16 FUEL INJECTOR FAILURE 17 VSS OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 18 IGNITION TIMING CONTROL UNIT 20 ELECTRIC LOAD DETECTOR 21 VTEC SOLENOID VALVE INTEGRA 21 FRONT SOLENOID VALVE NSX 22 VTEC PRESSURE SWITCH INTEGRA 22 FRONT VTEC PRESSURE SWITCH NSX 22 ACURA ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1994 CONTINUED 23 23 30 31 35 35 36 36 41 41 41 42
43. EXIT Closed throttle Open throttle Switch Test Scroll Up or Down ENTER Used when each step has been completed EXIT Return to OBD Controls menu MAZDA 25 CONTROLS Notes on Switch Test operation If a switch test fails before replacing a component check ECM PCM Relay Wiring harness Switch operation with continuity tester No 1 Thermo Switch No 2 Thermo Switch reguires shorting a terminal contained in the underhood electric fan check connector See vehicle service manual for more information TP idle power Switch This test checks the idle and power switches that are built into the throttle position sensor TP TP idle switch is ON contacts closed at idle OFF contacts open with throttle pedal partially depressed TP power switch is ON contacts closed at wide open throttle WOT and OFF contacts open with throttle pedal in any other position except fully depressed Blower Switch Note that in certain cases blower fan switches change state only in the 3rd 4th position AIC Switch When testing the A C Switch the blower switch should be in the 1st position Inhibitor Switeh Remember to remove foot from brake pedal before changing gear selector position CAUTION 5 Make sure parking brake has been set and wheels have been blocked to prevent vehicle motion Submode F1 O2S Monitor The O2S monitor is available on selected 1983 95 Mazda vehicles To check test a
44. LASER LASER 1 5L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 2 4L 14 SOHC 1 8L 4 SOHC 2 0L 14 DOHC 4G15 4G93 4G93 4G64 4G37 4G63 MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI NONE JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER CHECK CHECK MANCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES CHRYSLER IMPORTS VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1994 CONTINUED ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE LASER STEALTH STEALTH STEALTH SUMMIT SUMMIT SUMMIT WAGON SUMMIT WAGON TALON TALON TALON MODEL 1995 2 0L I4 DOHC TUR 3 0L V6 DOHC 3 0L V6 DOHC TUR 3 0L V6 SOHC 1 5L 4 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 1 8L 4 SOHC 2 4L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 2 0L 14 DOHC 2 0L 14 DOHC TUR ENGINE 4G63 6G72 6G72 6G72 4G15 4G93 4G93 4G64 4G37 4G63 4G63 ENGINE TYPE MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI CHECK JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER NONE JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER CHECK CHECK CHECK ADAPTER TYPE AUTOCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MANCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES CODE TYPE 1995 AVENGER AVENGER COLT COLT COLT VISTA COLT VISTA SEBRING SEBRING STEALTH STEALTH STEALTH SUMMIT SUMMIT SUMMIT WAGON TALON TALON 2 0L 14 DOHC 2 5L V6 SOHC 1 5L 14 SOHC 1
45. LEFT O2S OR CIRCUIT FAILURE KNOCK SENSOR OR KS CKT FAILURE EXHAUST GAS TEMP SENSOR CA ONLY FUEL TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 14 INFINITI INFINITI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1992 DESCRIPTOR 43 45 51 53 54 55 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE INJECTOR LEAK CA MODELS INJECTOR CIRCUIT CA MODELS RIGHT O2S OR CIRCUIT FAILURE TCM TO ECU CIRCUIT FAILURE NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECU YEAR 1993 DESCRIPTOR 1993 11 12 13 14 16 21 31 32 33 34 35 42 43 45 46 51 53 54 55 CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL MAF SENSOR OR MAF CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE FAULTY ECM OR ECM CKT FAILURE EGR SYSTEM FAIL CA MODELS HO2S OR HO2S CIRCUIT FAILURE LEFT HO2S OR HO2S CKT FAILURE KNOCK SENSOR OR KS CKT FAILURE EGR TEMP SENSOR CA MODELS FUEL TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE INJECTOR LEAK CA MODELS SECONDARY TPS Q45 WITH TCS INJECTOR CIRCUIT CA MODELS RIGHT HO2S OR HO2S CKT FAILURE TCM TO ECU CIRCUIT FAILURE NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECM INFINITI 15 INFINITI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1994 DESCRIPTOR 1994 11 CAMSHAFT POS OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 12 MAF SENSOR OR MAF CKT FAILURE 13 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE 14 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 16 TCS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FAILURE 21 IGNITION SIGNAL OR
46. P0339 Crankshaft Position Sensor Circuit Intermittent 58 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 1998 DTC CONTINUED NO DESCRIPTOR P0340 P0350 P0351 P0352 P0353 P0354 P0400 P0401 P0402 P0420 P0421 P0422 P0430 P0440 P0441 P0442 P0443 P0446 P0450 P0452 P0453 P0455 P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 P0470 P0500 P0501 P0503 P0505 P0506 Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction Ignition Coil Primary Circuit Malfunction Ignition Coil A Primary Circuit Malfunction Ignition Coil B Primary Circuit Malfunction Ignition Coil C Primary Circuit Malfunction Ignition Coil D Primary Circuit Malfunction EGR Flow System Malfunction EGR Flow Insufficient EGR Detection Excessive Flow Catalyst Below Threshold Bank 1 Warm up Catalyst Efficiency Below Threshold EVAP Control System Malfunction Leak Check Catalyst Bank 2 Below Threshold EVAP Control System Malfunction EVAP Purge Control Malfunction Small Leak Detected in EVAP System EVAP System Purge Control Valve Circuit Malfunction Excess Fuel Tank Pressure or a Vent Control Malfunction EVAP System Pressure Sensor Malfunction Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Low Input Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor High Input EVAP Control System Leak or Blockage Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Malfunction Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Range Performance Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Low Input Fuel Level Sensor Circuit High Input Exhaust P
47. P0604 ICM RAM Checksum Failure P0605 ICM ROM Checksum Failure P0700 Transmission DTC ICM Watchdog Circuit P0705 TRS Sensor PRNDL Input Circuit Malfunction P0710 TFT Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0715 Speed Error Input Speed Sensor Circuit P0720 Speed Error Output speed Sensor Circuit P0725 Engine Speed Input Circuit Malfunction P0731 15 Gear Incorrect Ratio P0732 2nd Gear Incorrect Ratio P0733 3rd Gear Incorrect Ratio P0734 4th Gear Incorrect Ratio P0736 Reverse Gear Incorrect Ratio P0740 TCC Lock Up Control Out of Range P0750 Shift Solenoid A Low Reverse Malfunction P0755 Shift Solenoid B Malfunction P0760 Shift Solenoid C Malfunction P0765 Shift Solenoid D Malfunction P1100 Induction Control Motor Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction 38 MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 98 CONTINUED DTC P1101 P1102 P1103 P1104 P1105 P1294 P1295 P1296 P1297 P1300 P1390 P1391 P1400 P1443 P1486 P1487 P1489 P1490 P1492 P1493 P1494 P1495 P1496 P1500 P1600 P1696 P1697 P1698 P1715 P1738 P1739 P1750 DESCRIPTOR Traction Control Vacuum Solenoid Malfunction Traction Control Ventilation Solenoid Malfunction Turbo Waste Gate Actuator Malfunction Turbo Waste Gate Solenoid Malfunction Fuel Pressure Solenoid Malfunction Target Idle not Reached 200 RPM No 5 Volt Signal to TPS No
48. P1858 Transfer Case Touch Drive Plate D Circuit P1860 Transfer Case Touch Drive Plate Short to Battery Voltage P1862 Transfer Case Touch Drive Plate Y W P1864 Transfer Case Touch Drive Plate Y W P1866 Transfer Case System Concern P1867 Transfer Case Contact Plate MAZDA 67 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 68 MAZDA MITSUBISHI VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MITSUBISHI SPECIFIC INFORMATION TEST MODES AVAILABLE GETTING STARTED SELECTING THE VEHICLE TEST MODES Mode F1 DTC Entry Submode F0 How To Read Submode F1 Enter DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC Submode F4 Clear DTC s Mode F2 DTC Submode F1 Read DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC Submode F4 Clear DTC s 7 MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs OBD T uuu crac esse dat O NE A 36 36 MITSUBISHI VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS Using the Asian cartridge the following Mitsubishi vehicles can be diagnosed FUEL TYPE ADAPTER CODE MODEL 1984 ENGINE podate 1984 CORDIA 1 8L I4 TURBO G62B STARION 2 6L I4 TURBO G54B TREDIA 1 8L I4 TURBO G62B ECI EFI TBI ECI EFI NONE MANCODE NONE MANCODE NONE MANCODE FUEL TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE MODEL 1985 ENGINE sn 1985 CORDIA 1 8L 14 TURBO G62B GALANT 2 4L 14 G64B MIRAGE 1 6L 4
49. SUBMODE F0 PREP VEHICLE MODE F8 INFORMATION SUBMODE F2 SCC LOCATION SUBMODE F3 ID INFO SUBMODE F5 ECU LOCATION Note that Submodes F2 or F5 are not available on certain vehicles 6 ACURA GETTING STARTED 4 GETTING STARTED Before operating the Asian Imports Cartridge with an Acura vehicle the following steps must be performed 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Plug the tester power cable into the vehicle cigarette lighter The power cable may also be directly connected to the battery via the optional battery adapter cable P N 02001636 NOTE Since the cigarette lighter can be switched some tests require that the power cable be directly connected to the battery via the optional battery adapter cable 3 Turn on the tester and select the application software that you will be using Verify that the correct screen is displayed The tester should display a screen similar to the one below ASIAN IMPORTS 83 98 lt ENTER gt Tester Stand Alone Display 4 If the display is correct press 11959 If the display is not correct refer to Appendix D 5 Follow the instructions on the following page to select the vehicle type you are testing by entering required vehicle information into the tester 6 When the vehicle has been selected refer to the Acura Test Modes section for information on how to set the vehicle up for retrieving DTCs On some late model Acura vehicles the Servi
50. Throttle Position Closed Switch Stuck TP Sensor Out of Range Low TP Sensor Circuit Intermittent Downstream HO2 Sensor not Tested Upstream HO2 Sensor Swapped from Bank to Bank Downstream HO2 Sensor Swapped from Bank to Bank Upstream HO2 Sensor no Switch Limit Bank 1 MAZDA 61 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 1998 DTC DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED NO P1131 Upstream HO2 Sensor no Switch Lean Bank 1 P1132 Upstream HO2 Sensor no Switch Rich Bank 1 P1137 HO2 Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 2 Lack of Sensor Indicates Lean P1138 HO2 Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 2 Lack of Sensor Indicates Rich P1143 HO2 Sensor Bank1 Sensor 3 Lack of Sensor Indicates Lean P1144 HO2 Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 3 Lack of Sensor Indicates Rich P1150 Upstream HO2 Sensor no Switch Limit Bank 2 P1151 Upstream HO2 Sensor no Switch Lean Bank 2 P1152 Upstream HO2 Sensor no Switch Rich Bank 2 P1169 HO2 Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 2 Inversion P1170 HO2 Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 1 Inversion P1173 HO2 Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1 Inversion P1195 EGR Barometric Pressure Sensor Open or Short P1196 Ignition Start Switch Input Malfunction P1235 Fuel Pump Control Out of Range Open or Short P1236 Fuel Pump Control Out of Range Open or Short P1250 Fuel Pressure Circuit Open or Short P1252 Pressure Regulator Control Solenoid Valve No 2 Open or Short P1260 Theft Detected Engine Disabled P1270 RPM Vehi
51. To select SCC Location submode do the following 1 Press G to select Information from the Select Mode menu 2 Press to select SCC Location from the Information menu 3 The tester displays the SCC Location of the ECU being tested on the selected vehicle Some examples of SCC Location displays are shown in the following figure Remember the displays for other vehicles will be different SELECT MODE F3 SNAPSHOT SCC Connector F5 SYSTEM TESTS F8 INFORMATION SELECT MODE Y F1 DLC LOCATION F2 SCC LOCATION F3 ID INFO Acura Honda Service Check Connector Jumper UNDER THE PASSENGER SIDE DASHBOARD RIGHT SIDE 4 The tester informs you if the SCC location is not required for the selected vehicle SCC LOCATION REFER TO F0 NOT APPLICABLE TO RETRIEVE DTCs er eee FROM OBD SYSTEM Return to Information menu COMMON TEST MODES I 31 MODE F8 INFORMATION SUBMODE F3 ID INFO The Vehicle Information submode displays the currently selected year vehicle manufacturer model engine displacement and type and additional information such as fuel system and grade To select ID Info submode do the following 1 Press EE to select Information from the Select Mode menu 2 Press to select ID Info from the Information menu 3 The currently selected vehicle information is displayed An example is shown in the following figure SELECT MODE F3 SNAPSHOT F5 SYSTEM TESTS F8 INFO
52. VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS Using the Asian Imports Cartridge the following Lexus vehicles can be diagnosed MODEL 1990 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL SYSTEM ADAPTER TYPE 1990 ES250 LS4000 2 5L V6 4 0L V8 2VZ FE 1UZ FE SFI MFI CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CHECK TDCL CHECK TDCL MODEL 1991 MODEL 1992 1992 ES300 SC300 LS400 SC400 ENGINE ENGINE 3 0L V6 3 0L 16 4 0L V8 4 0L V8 ENGINE TYPE ENGINE TYPE 3VZ FE 2JZ GE 1UZ FE 1UZ FE FUEL SYSTEM FUEL SYSTEM SFI SFI MFI MFI CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA ADAPTER TYPE CHECK TDCL CHECK TDCL ADAPTER TYPE CHECK TDCL CHECK TDCL CHECK TDCL CHECK TDCL MODEL 1993 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL SYSTEM ADAPTER TYPE 1993 ES300 GS300 SC300 LS400 SC400 3 0L V6 3 0L 16 3 0L 16 4 0L V8 4 0L V8 3VZ FE 2JZ GE 2JZ GE 1UZ FE 1UZ FE SFI SFI SFI MFI MFI CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CHECK TDCL CHECK TDCL CHECK TDCL CHECK TDCL CHECK TDCL LEXUS VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1994 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL SYSTEM ADAPTER TYPE 1994 ES300 GS300 SC30
53. and the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for instructions on operating the test modes with Mazda vehicles 14 MAZDA SELECTING THE VEHICLE MANUFACTURER gt MAZDA MITSUBISHI NISSAN ENTER MAZDA 1983 2002 SELECT MODEL 323 PROTEGE YES NO YES SELECT ENGINE 1 6L 14 SOHC YES NO N 1994 MAZDA 323 PROTEGE 1 6L 14 SOHC EGI MFI 63 or 5 sec SELECT MODE 4Y F1 DTC ENTRY F2 DTC F8 OBD CONTROLS Mazda Vehicle Selection Enter model year o Used to answer questions in tester diaplay EXIT Return to previous display MAZDA 15 TEST MODES 6 TEST MODES When the Select Mode menu is displayed test modes available for Mazda vehicles may be selected Operating instructions for test modes other than DTC ENTRY DTCs and OBD CONTROLS are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section You may select Mode F1 Entry Mode F5 System Tests and Mode F8 Information without connecting the tester to the vehicle READING CODES Detailed operating instructions for using Modes F1 DTC Entry and F2 DTC with Mazda vehicles are included in the following procedure Remember that F2 DTC is automatically displayed with Mazda vehicles that have CHECK as the adapter type listed in Section 1 Operating instructions for Mode F4 OBD Controls are included in Section 7 IMPORTANT Follow the Submode FO P
54. 1049F MANI AIR TEMP MANI AIR TEMP MANI AIR TEMP 409C 104 409 104 409 104 Waiting for Trigger Trigger Occurs Data Display Phase ACTIVE KEYS CO Scroll through displayed data parameter Mark the top display parameter as fixed for creating your own pairs Mark the bottom display parameter as fixed for creating your own pairs Manual trigger EXIT Terminate data capture early ENTER Manual trigger COMMON TEST MODES I 23 MODE F3 SNAPSHOT Data Display Phase To select the data display phase of Snapshot mode do the following 7 The Data Display phase is indicated with the number of the data sample in the lower right hand corner of the display Use the and keys to sequence through the data samples Sample 0 corresponds to the trigger sample sample 1 is the sample immediately preceding the trigger sample 1 is the sample immediately after the trigger and so on Press to go to the earliest sample in memory or to go to the latest sample Press G to display the trigger sample 0 While in the data display phase pressing Gag toggles between the sample index and the sample time INJ PULSE WIDTH 3 245 MSEC ENGINE SPEED 900RPM 16 ENTER ENTER INJ PULSE WIDTH 40 MSEC ENGINE SPEED 900 RPM 3 4 Sample Index The sample time and sample index displayed is relative to the trigger samples before the trigger ha
55. 14 gt ee ET eee ee TER VV TI 14 TEST MODES ini cece salsa dua 16 16 QURE OE TO TE O TT 16 MGs FEIT 21 OBD CONTROLS det td hee j tet k en bo ab m ke 24 Mode FE OBD dO Ro AGE HUE ad NE EORR 24 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES 28 OBD OPD ITS DONDE deti Sed uad dedi be dino Gad bw tu KE sed apa 28 OR U A AN A oi a eter er A bite 57 MINI ISSN KAI Mm 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS PER RI REDE T Eben 3 MITSUBISHI SPECIFIC INFORMATION 12 TEST MODES AVAILABLE massaa sina RR ganas roke E 13 GETIINGOTARTED emere RH 14 SELECTING THE VEHICLE E Aaa Lek t ee dx 15 VINE RO 100070 7 cn 15 Selecting the Model Year UR YK ERE RAS 15 Selene Model k a dogo kia RE P BAR Sah ox ead dude awe A EM ARE 15 Selecting the Engine And Engine Type RR EATUR REY 15 Display esa ed Lan ve aaa umawa wap uk Ede dE Cu kd 15 Selen Mole 16 Ced a 17 PUI qais 17 Mose JO DIE EROT 3 dd 17 Meb DIC
56. 17 FUEL PUMP AUTO CHOKE OR CKT 21 WATER TEMP SNSR SIGNAL OR CKT THERMOSENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 30 SUBARU SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1989 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR 22 23 24 25 31 32 33 34 35 41 42 44 45 46 51 52 53 55 56 61 62 63 KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE VLC SOLENOID VLV OR CKT FAILURE AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE BYPASS AIR CONT VALVE OR CKT IDLE UP SOLENOID OR CKT FAILURE AIR CONTROL VLV OR CKT FAILURE FUEL INJ 3 amp 4 ORCIRCUIT FCV SOLENOID OR CIRCUIT FAILURE THROTTLE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL EGR SOL VALVE ON OFF OR CKT EGR LINE CLOGGED OR CKT CA ONLY PURGE SOL VALVE ON OFF OR CKT CPC SOLENOID OR CIRCUIT FAILURE SYSTEM LEAN CONDITION FEEDBACK SYSTEM FAIL CA ONLY IDLE SWITCH OR CIRCUIT FAILURE WASTEGATE CNTRL SOL OR CIRCUIT KDWN CNTRL RLY ON OFF POS RADIATOR FAN CONTROL SYSTEM NEUTRAL SW OR CKT NO SIGNAL NEUTRAL SW CKT REMAINS ON CLUTCH SW CKT FWD w MT ONLY SOLENOID OR CIRCUIT FAILURE EGR SENSOR OR CKT CA ONLY EGR GAS TEMP SNSR CA ONLY EGR SYSTEM CALIF ONLY PARKING SW CKT SW REMAINS ON IDLE UP SYSTEM 1 OR CKT FAILURE IDLE UP SYSTEM 2 OR CKT FAILURE SUBARU 31 SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1990 DESCRIPTOR 1990 1 SPEC CODE MT 49ST CAN SPEC CODE FW
57. 1992 ELANTRA EXCEL SCOUPE SONATA SONATA 1 6L 14 1 5L 14 1 5L 14 2 0L 14 3 0L V6 G4DR G4AJ G4AJ G4AF G6AT MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES HYUNDAI VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS ENGINE FUEL ADAPTER ENGINE TYPE CODE 1993 ELANTRA 1 6L 4 G4DR MPI CHECK AUTOCODES ELANTRA 1 8L 14 G4DM MPI CHECK AUTOCODES EXCEL 1 5L 14 G4AJ MPI CHECK AUTOCODES SCOUPE 1 5L 14 G4AE MPI NONE MIL CODES SONATA 2 0L 14 G4AP MPI CHECK AUTOCODES SONATA 3 0L V6 G6AT MPI CHECK AUTOCODES ENGINE EET T EE ET CODE 1994 ELANTRA 1 6L 14 G4DR MFI CHECK AUTOCODES ELANTRA 1 8L 14 G4DM MFI CHECK AUTOCODES EXCEL 1 5L 14 G4AJ MFI CHECK AUTOCODES SCOUPE 1 5L 14 G4AE MFI NONE MIL CODES SONATA 2 0L 14 DOHC G4AP MFI CHECK AUTOCODES SONATA 3 0L V6 G6AT MPI CHECK AUTOCODES ENGINE P CODE 1995 1 5L 4 G4EK MFI NONE MILCODES ELANTRA 1 5L 14 G4DJ MFI CHECK AUTOCODES ELANTRA 1 6L I6 G4DR MFI CHECK AUTOCODES ELANTRA 1 8L 14 G4DN MFI CHECK AUTOCODES SCOUPE 1 5L 14 G4AE MFI NONE MILCODES SONATA 2 0L 14 G4AP MFI CHECK AUTOCODES SONATA 3 0L V6 G6AT MFI CHECK AUTOCODES HYUNDAI 3 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS ENGINE ENGINE TYPE
58. 5 Press 9 0 to return to the previous question or test menu COMMON TEST MODES Il 31 TEST MODES Scroll up and down Ce GD Answer question or query Advance to the next menu Exit to the previous question or test menu Submode F9 Repair Verification After repairs are made to a vehicle powertrain system the status of system DTCs and monitor tests should be checked Using this submode will help determine the effectiveness of repairs just completed to the system using the test modes within the Asian Imports program including the importance of manufacturer OBD II drive cycle and monitor completion after repairs To verify the repairs do the following 1 Press X to select OBD II Toolpak from the Select Mode menu 2 Press 6 select Diagnostics from OBD II Toolpak menu The key help screen will be displayed 3 Press a to select Repair Verification from the Diagnostics menu First time users to ensure proper operation this mode is best reviewed before actual testing on vehicle is performed 4 Use the D and keys to review the prompts that are displayed on the screen Read any key help screens that may be displayed for navigation help NOTE For automobile manufacturer drive cycle information refer to the service manual for the vehicle that is currently being tested 5 Press to return to the previous question or test menu Scroll up and down
59. 7 Run the engine above 2000 RPM until the MIL turns ON If the MIL flashes DTC s perform fix The long segment 1 2 seconds represents the tens digit The short segment 0 2 seconds ON represents the ones digit Each DTC is separated by a 1 8 second delay If the MIL blinks the system is normal 8 Turn key OFF and disconnect diagnostic leads 9 Erase DTC s when all repairs are completed Use F4 CLEAR DTC s from the Entry menu for instructions on how to clear the DTC s from the vehicle and the tester Submode F2 DTC List This submode provides you with a way to view all possible ECU DTCs including DTC numbers and descriptions You can also select the DTCs obtained from the ECU LED as an alternative way of entering DTCs into the tester s memory As you scroll through the available DTCs you can view a description of the DTC obtained from the ECU LED You can Select the DTC on the tester screen for later review or printing Refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further information Submode F3 Review DTC This submode provides a way of reviewing DTCs that you selected or entered in the tester The description of the entered or selected DTC will be displayed along with a numerical summary of the entered or selected DTC Review DTC is intended to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTCs that you have encountered during diagnosis Submode F4 Clear This helpfu
60. A T Knock Neutral M T NO 1 Thermo NO 2 Thermo Rear Defrost TP idle TP idle power TP power NOTE When performing the Switch Test make sure the vehicle is properly EH warmed up and is tested in a well ventilated area 24 MAZDA CONTROLS To perform the Switch Test do the following 1 Press 6 to select Switch Tests from the OBD Controls menu Press or until the is opposite the desired Switch Test Then press 44339 2 The tester displays instructions for performing the Switch Test Press 1959 when each step has been completed 3 Follow the instructions on the tester display When each instruction is completed the tester indicates if further action is necessary If a problem is detected press 94 to return to the OBD Controls menu 4 As a result of following the steps on the display the tester will monitor and display the switch state Press to return to OBD Controls menu 5 When finished press 24 to return to the OBD Controls menu SELECT MODE F0 SWITCH TEST F1 O2S MONITOR AY SELECT SC TEST AIR COND TURN ACCESSORIES OFF SET PARKING BRAKE ENTER ENTER ENTER CONNECT CHECK ADAPTER ORANGE C TO VEHICLE DLC ENTER ENTER TURN IGNITION KEY ON ENGINE OFF ENTER DEPRESS RELEASE THROTTLE TO CHANGE SW STATE ENTER ENTER TP IDLE SW TP IDLE SW TP IDLE ON TP IDLE OFF EXIT
61. AUTOCODES MODEL 1991 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE 1991 3000GT 3000GT ECLIPSE ECLIPSE ECLIPSE GALANT GALANT GALANT 3 0L V6 DOHC 3 0L V6 DOHC TUR 1 8L 14 2 0L 14 2 0L 14 TURBO 2 0L 14 DOHC 2 0L 14 DOHC TUR 2 0L 14 SOHC 8V 6G72 6072 4037 4663 4663 4663 4663 4663 AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES MITSUBISHI VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS LOC MEL NI M cone ype MIRAGE 1 5L I4 SOHC 4G15 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES MIRAGE 1 6L 14 DOHC 4G61 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES MONTERO 3 0L V6 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES PRECIS 1 5L 4 G4AJ MPI CHECK AUTOCODES TRUCK 2 4L 14 4G64 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES TRUCK 3 0L 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES MODEL 1992 ENGINE pig wzi CODE 1992 3000GT 3 0L V6 DOHC 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES 3000GT 3 0L V6 DOHC TUR 6672 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES DIAMANTE 3 0L V6 DOHC 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES DIAMANTE 3 0L V6 SOHC 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES ECLIPSE 1 8L 14 SOHC 4G37 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES ECLIPSE 2 0L 14 DOHC 4G63 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES ECLIPSE 2 0L 14 DOHC TUR 4G63 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES EXPO 2 4L 4 4G64 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES EXPO LRV 1 8L 4 4G93 MPI CHECK
62. AUTOCODES MIL LED MIL LED OBD NONE NONE Adapter Type OBD II see the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information MODEL ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL CODE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE G20 B0 J30 045 1996 2 0L 14 3 0L V6 3 0L V6 4 5L V8 SR20DE VQ30DE VG30DE VH45DE SMPI SMPI SMPI SMPI N A N A N A N A AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II MODEL For Adapter Type OBD II see the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information ENGINE ENGINE TYPE CODE ADAPTER 130 230 0 4 1997 3 0L V6 3 0L V6 3 3L V6 VQ30DE VG30DE VG33E SMPI SMPI SMPI N A N A N A AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES OBD OBD II OBD II INFINITI VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS ENGINE TYPE FUEL TYPE ECU MODES MODEL ENGINE CODE TYPE ADAPTER 045 4 1L V8 VH41DE SMPI N A AUTOCODES TYPE OBD II information For Adapter Type OBD II see the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode ADAPTER MODEL ENGINE cis CODE 1998 130 3 0L V6 VQ30DE MFI N A AUTOCODES QX4 3 3L V6 VG33E MFI N A AUTOCODES Q45 4 1L V8 VH41DE MFI N A
63. An example of the Enter DTC display for Toyota vehicles is shown below ENTER DTC 2 ENTER All late model Toyota vehicles with Engine and optional Transmission ABS Cruise Control Air Conditioning and Airbag systems flash DTCs on the dashboard MIL On select vehicles the Air Conditioning system does not have a MIL for DTC reading DTCs are flashed with the 10 s digit first followed by the 15 digit There is a 1 5 second period between the 10 s and 15 digit and a 2 5 second period between individual DTCs 5 When is pressed the tester displays the DTC number and a short description of the code 6 After you enter the DTC the tester asks for additional trouble code entry Press to enter another DTC If M9 is pressed the tester displays an instruction screen describing the functions available 1 ADVANCE CODE J HOLD CODE EXIT QUIT ENTER SUMMARY 7 Press to move to the next DTC If you wish to hold a DTC screen press to freeze the automatic scrolling feature DTC 03 MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE FAULT 8 Press GNUa to view a summary screen of all entered DTCs DTC SUMMARY 03 9 Press SD to return to the DTC menu ENTER Enter the displayed DTC and display summary screen YES Enter another DTC NO Advance to instruction screen m TOYOTA TEST MODES KEYS Continued Enter DTC number Move to the next DTC Stop the automatic scrolling Return
64. BEBO MODEM 4564040444 16 TESTMODES 17 Reddins EEA UU GA KASK 17 ered yon cade 17 LEXUS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 21 O O qua dz ite TE dier aa ridi 21 Anti Lock Brake SYSTEM EN WHE RRL XU EODD ERR OUR AUGERE 21 23 Cruise Control sasa aua COEUR EHS RRS RAW AW ZKE DED EMPEROR REE DKA 24 Como eo SOESNISIUE 24 usasapa tuk ai Ed TETE TE VET Ea da Mab Se 25 DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS 27 MAZDA eee aN 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS PA VeRO Sb 3 MAZDA SPECIFIC INFORMATION 11 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 12 OBETINID STARTED pipa di EEE Tere eer IRE URP re YE 13 SELECTING THE VEHICLE m bebe etes etta 14 Defacto C de EUM RE id 14 TOC 6 Asian Imports JON oad ae dale aide neat av C us ep doa 14 Seleeting the Model 205 dna dka ET OR EERE RES 14 Selecting the Engine And Engine Type 14 Vehicle Information Display 55 RA 184455445 oan APRA
65. Connect the OBD II Adapter Cable to the vehicle DLC 9 Connect the 12V power cable to the vehicle cigarette lighter 10 Turn the vehicle ignition switch ON to begin diagnostics 11 Refer to this manual and the application cartridge operator s manual for software operating instructions DLC Cable Tech 1 14 12 Pin VIM Adapter P N 02001198 Tech 1 OBD II VIM P N 02001808 Application Cartridge VIM 16 24 Pin 2 Adapter Cable e P N 02001744 FIGURE 1 3 Tech 1 Setup 6 COMMON TEST MODES II HARDWARE REQUIRED PRINTING CAPABILITIES The Asian Imports software supports printing data via a Tech 1 printer VP 414 printer or other compatible serial printer connected to the tester If you are using a Tech 1 tester refer to the RS232 Operator s Manual for setup and printing instructions If you are using a Tech 1A or Mastertech tester refer to the tester Operator s Manual for setup and printing instructions Two types of printing are supported by the OBD II software Pressing the key in a Data Display mode e g Data List or DTCs causes the tester to print a list of data appropriate to the mode a list of diagnostic data parameters or DTCs The tester can be setup to print an image of the tester s screen referred to as Screen Print For information on the VP 414 serial printer contact your sales representative COMMON TEST MODES II 7 GETTING STARTED 3 GETTING STARTED POWERING
66. Data Setup When you select Data List from the OBD II Functions menu the tester will display the DATA LIST menu This menu allows you to either go directly to displaying data or to the Data List Setup mode to select the data you want to display COMMON TEST MODES II 9 TEST MODES Submode FO Display Data To select Display Data do the following FO DATALIST F1 DISPLAY DATA Engine Speed 756 RPM 185 F 1 Select FO DATA LIST from the SELECT MODE menu 2 Select FO DISPLAY DATA from the DATA LIST menu The tester will display either ALL PARAMETERS or USER DATA LIST PARAMETERS depending on which selection was last made since the tester was powered up Submode F1 Data Setup The DATA SETUP mode allows you to select the data you want to display You can select either ALL PARAMETERS or USER LIST PARAMETERS which allows you to monitor any combination of parameters from parameter to all parameters The update rate for the parameters depends on the number of parameters selected A single parameter can be sampled as fast as 8 times per second The more parameters that are selected the slower the update rate will be To select Data Setup do the following FO DATA LIST FO ALL PARMS F1 USER LIST PARAMETERS Engine Speed 756 RPM ECT o 185 F 1 Select FO DATA LIST from the SELECT MODE menu 2 Select F1 DATA SETUP from the DATA LIST menu 3 Select FO ALL PARMS or F1
67. EXIT Exit to the previous question or test menu Submode F1 Parameters The Parameters submode displays text descriptions for each diagnostic data parameter displayed in the Asian Imports software application Common high and low values for each diagnostic data parameter are also available for reference NOTE EB total number of displayed diagnostic data parameters will depend on the When the tester is connected to the vehicle and Data List is selected the vehicle ECU calibration This is not a function of the tester 32 COMMON TEST MODES II TEST MODES Submode F0 Definitions The text descriptions of each diagnostic data parameter are available when the tester is connected to a vehicle and a live data list is displayed or during a shop or training review session and the tester is not connected to a vehicle To display Parameter descriptions Viewing on vehicle live data list do the following 1 Set up and display a data list using 0 Data List 2 Scroll through the Data List until the parameter for which you want information is displayed Press G to select the top parameter or press HD to select the bottom parameter An asterisk will appear next to the selected parameter 3 Press GNUa to display the first text screen for the selected parameter Press to advance through the text description screens Press to view the previous text description screen 4 To select a different parameter press 3 41 t
68. MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER c MPER c MPER MPER MPER MPER MPER aa a a g MPER JUMPER TOYOTA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1988 CONTINUED ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TRUCK 4 RUNNER TRUCK 4 RUNNER C TRU 4 RUNNER LAND CRUISER 2 4L I4 2 4L I4 2 4L I4 2 4L I4 3 0L V6 3 0L V6 4 0L I6 22R E 22R E 22R TE 22R TE 3VZ E 3VZ E 3F E EFI EFI EFITURBO EFI TURBO EFI EFI EFI MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MPER MPER MPER MPER MPER MPER MPER Z d MODEL 1989 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER 1989 CAMRY CELICA COROLLA CRESSIDA MR2 SUPRA TERCEL LAND CRUISER VAN 4RUNNER 2WD amp 4WD TRUCK 2WD amp 4WD 2 0L I4 2 5L V6 2 0L 14 ST GT 2 0L 14 GTS 2 0L TURBO 14 ALL TRAC 1 6L I4 CA ONLY 1 6L 14 1 6L 14 3 0L 16 1 6L 14 1 6L IR SC 3 0L 16 3 0L TURBO 16 1 5L 14 CA ONLY 4 0L I6 22L I4 2 4L I4 3 0L V6 2 4L I4 CA ONLY 2 4L I4 3 0L V6 3S FE 2VZ FE 3S FE 3S GE 3S GTE 4A F 4A FE 4A
69. P0142 HO2 Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 3 Circuit Malfunction P0146 HO2 Sensor Circuit Bank 1 Sensor 3 no Activity P0147 HO2 Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 3 Heater Circuit Malfunction P0150 O2 Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1 Circuit Malfunction P0151 Upstream HO2 Sensor Circuit Bank 2 Low Voltage P0152 HO2 Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1 High Voltage P0153 Upstream HO2 Sensor Bank 2 Slow Response P0154 O2 Sensor Circuit Bank 2 Sensor 1 no Activity P0155 Upstream HO2 Sensor Bank 2 Heater Circuit Malfunction P0160 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit Bank 2 Sensor 2 no Activity P0161 HO2 Sensor Heater Bank 2 Sensor 2 Circuit Malfunction P0170 Bank 1 Fuel Trim Malfunction P0171 Fuel System A F Ratio Lean Bank 1 P0172 Fuel System A F Ratio Rich Bank 1 P0173 Bank2 Fuel Trim Malfunction P0174 Fuel System A F Ratio Lean Bank 2 P0175 Fuel System A F Ratio Rich Bank 2 P0230 Fuel Pump Primary Circuit Malfunction P0231 Fuel Pump Secondary Circuit Low P0232 Fuel Pump Secondary Circuit High P0300 Random Misfire Detected P0301 Cylinder No 1 Misfire Detected P0302 Cylinder No 2 Misfire Detected P0303 Cylinder No 3 Misfire Detected P0304 Cylinder No 4 Misfire Detected P0305 Cylinder No 5 Misfire Detected P0306 Cylinder No 6 Misfire Detected P0320 PIP Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0325 Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction
70. REVIEW DTC SUBMODE F4 CLEAR DTC s MODE F5 SYSTEM TESTS SUBMODE F0 PREP VEHICLE MODE F8 INFORMATION SUBMODE F3 ID INFO SUBMODE F4 DJC LOCATION 4 DAIHATSU GETTING STARTED 4 GETTING STARTED Before operating the Asian Imports Cartridge with a Daihatsu vehicle the following steps must be performed 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Plug the tester power cable into the vehicle cigarette lighter The power cable may also be directly connected to the battery via the optional battery adapter cable P N 02001636 NOTE Since the cigarette lighter can be switched some tests require that the EH power cable be directly connected to the battery via the battery adapter cable 3 Turn on the tester and select the application software that you will be using Verify that the correct screen is displayed The tester should display a screen similar to the one below ASIAN IMPORTS 83 98 ENTER Tester Stand alone Display 4 If the display is correct press 959 If the display is not correct refer to Appendix D 5 Follow the instructions on the following page to select the vehicle type you are testing by entering required vehicle information into the tester DAIHATSU 5 SELECTING THE VEHICLE 5 SELECTING THE VEHICLE Once you ve pressed 033 from the power up screen the following steps must be performed to select the manufacturer model year model and engine type of the ve
71. Subaru Specific Instructions for operating the test modes with Subaru vehicles MANUFACTURER AV SELECT gt SUBARU TYPE SUZUKI gt YES NO ENTER YES SUBARU SELECT 1983 2002 TYPE SELECT 2WD MODEL YEAR YESINO YES SELECT 1990 SUBARU MODEL LOYALE LOYALE 1 8L H4 YES NO MPFI TURBO YES O or 5 sec SELECT SELECT MODE AY ENGINE F1 DTC ENTRY 1 8L F5 SYSTEM TESTS YESINO F8 INFORMATION YES SELECT TYPE MPFI TURBO YESINO YES Y O SELECT TYPE CA YES NO YES Subaru Vehicle Selection ACTIVE KEYS Enter model year o9 Used to answer questions in tester display Confirm Power up display Return to previous display SUBARU 13 TEST MODES 6 TEST MODES When the Select Mode menu is displayed test modes available for Subaru vehicles may be selected You may select Mode F1 Entry Mode F5 System Tests or Mode F8 Information without connecting the tester to the vehicle Operating instructions for the test modes other than DTC Entry are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section Detailed operating instructions for using Mode F1 DTC Entry with Subaru vehicles are included in the following procedure READING CODES When Mode F1 DTC Entry is selected the tester displays submodes which after your selection provide information on how to read diagnostic trouble codes DTCs
72. The Prepare Vehicle System Test submode ensures that the vehicle system is properly warmed and preconditioned for accurate diagnosis The Prepare Vehicle test also guides you through vehicle no start diagnostics the tester prompts you if the vehicle can start if the engine can crank or if spark is observed at the spark plug which can help you in reviving a no start vehicle so diagnosis can be performed on a vehicle with possible engine control system problems Performing the Prepare Vehicle System test should be done every time that you are performing diagnosis on the engine control system Before performing the Prep Vehicle submode select the type of vehicle being tested NOTE When checking an engine for spark at the ignition coil coil secondary wire or spark plug secondary wire use a suitable spark gap tester to EH prevent electrical shock and ignition system damage Run the test in a well ventilated area To select Prep Vehicle submode do the following 1 Press RT to select Prep Vehicle from the System Tests menu 2 Start the engine if possible then use the up and down keys to read the prepare vehicle screens When the instructions on the screens have been completed press 9 0 to return to the Select Mode menu 3 If the engine will not start follow the Engine No Start instructions then press to return to the Select System Tests menu Used to scroll through the instruction displays Answer question
73. These DTCs are only available on OBD II compliant vehicles APPENDICES IF YOU RE HAVING A PROBLEM D IF YOU RE HAVING A PROBLEM This appendix describes some of the possible problems which you might run into when you try to use the Asian Imports Software on an OBD II compliant vehicle OBD II INTERFACE CIRCUITRY NOT INSTALLED OBD II Interface Circuitry Not Installed Possible Cause OBD II Interface Circuitry is not installed in the Tester Recommendations Verify that the vehicle s ignition is on Remove power from the tester by unplugging the DLC cable and reconnecting the cable Verify that the OBD II Interface Circuitry is installed in your tester in one of the following configurations AnOBD II Interface Cartridge is installed in the top slot of the Tech 1A A Vehicle Interface Module VIM is connected in line with the serial data cable for either the TECH 1 or TECH IA OBD II compliant daughter board inside the Mastertech NOTE The OBD II Interface Cartridge will not work with a TECH 1 An error message OBD II Interface Circuitry Not Installed will be displayed if you attempt to use the OBD II Interface Cartridge with a TECH 1 TESTER IS UNABLE TO COMMUNICATE WITH THE VEHICLE Check Cable Cable ON Does Vehicle Support II Possible Causes Vehicle s ignition is off Diagnostic cable is not plugged into vehicle s diagnostic connector
74. This 15 performed by following the tester instruction screens If you have trouble additional F1 READ DTC s retrieval information is described on the next page This submode is available for all 1989 95 Hyundai vehicles excluding 1993 95 Scoupe If you are unsure ofthe Read DTC test application check the code type column in the Hyundai Vehicle Coverage table found at the beginning of this section If the Code Type column indicates Autocodes then the vehicle supports Fl READ 5 NOTE When reading DTCs from Hyundai vehicles make sure the engine is at EH normal operating temperature and testing is performed in a well ventilated area Reading DTCs from 1989 1995 Hyundai ECUS using the F1 Read DTCs mode in Asian Imports cartridge 1 Insert Asian cartridge into MASTERTECH or TECH 1A 2 Connect Hyundai Check adapter Yellow to DLC 3 Connect the Check adapter to the vehicle DLC Press F1 DLC location from the Information menu for Data Link Connector location assistance 4 Power MASTERTECH or TECH 1A with 12v power cable 5 Select Hyundai vehicle to test 6 Press F2 DTCs from Hyundai test mode menu 7 Press F1 READ DTCs submode from test menu Follow instructions on the tester display HYUNDAI 15 TEST MODES 8 Tester will automatically command the vehicle ECU into the correct mode required to read DTCs and will display all received DTCs on the tester display On certain Hyundai vehic
75. amp DATA CODES amp DATA CHECK TDCL CHECK TDCL OBD II CHECK TDCL CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK TOYOTA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1994 CONTINUED ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TERCEL MR2 PASEO PREVIA LAND CRUISER T100 4RUNNER 2WD amp 4WD TRUCK 2WD amp 4WD 1 5L 14 2 0L TURBO 14 2 2L 4 1 5L 14 2 4L 4 4 5L I6 3 0L V6 2 4L 4 3 0L V6 2 4L 14 3 0L V6 3E E 3S GTE 5S FE 5E FE 2TZ FE 1FZ FE 3VZ E 22R E 3VZ E 22R E 3VZ E PFI PFI PFI PRI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI CODES CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES CODES CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK For Adapter OBD II use the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information TOYOTA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS ELECTRONIC TRANSMISSIONS Using the Asian cartridge the following Toyota Electronic Transmission Transaxle Applications can be diagnosed TOYOTA MODEL TRANSMISSION SUPRA CRESSIDA TRUCK 4RUNNER T100 CAMRY CAMRY CAMRY CAMRY CELICA CAMRY MR2 PASEO PREVIA COROLLA TRUCK 4RUNNER A340E 540 541 540 240 241
76. and is valid when the engine MIL does not illuminate or will not illuminate for 2 seconds when the ignition is turned on Refer to the service manual for the current vehicle for further explanation of code 0 How to enter for both types is explained on the following pages Four LEDs For Hondas with four LEDs the Enter DTC s mode displays four question marks for entering the The full screen information tells you that if the LED is ON then press D If the LED is OFF then press 9 Be careful when entering the DTC so that the ECU LED pattern is the same on the tester screen as the ECU Failure to do so will cause an incorrect DTC description to be displayed Refer to the following procedure for manually reading 4 LED DTCs on the ECU and entering the number into the tester DTC numbers can also be decoded from the LEDs Each LED has a particular value associated with it Reading from left to right on the ECU the values are 8 4 2 and 1 If the second and fourth LEDs are ON that represents a 4 and a 1 Total the values of the ON LEDs and you have the correct DTC In the example 4 1 5 so number 5 is set in the engine ECU Refer to HONDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs on page 15 for a definition of the ECU ENTER STATE OF 4 LEDs 1 ON 0 OFF 7777 ENTER LEDs manually read DTCs from early model Honda vehicles that use 4 LEDs on ECU do the following 1 Use 5 ECU LOCATION from the Informa
77. from the O2 monitor ECU LED on the side of the ECU 5 If the ECS lamp is flashing ON OFF in 1 second then there are no Test Mode DTCs stored in the ECU Disconnect Test Mode connectors and finish diagnosis 5b If the ECS lamp is ON while the engine is running there are Test Mode DTCs stored in the ECU and the ECU LED will begin flashing DTCs Use F5 ECU location from the Information menu for location information on the electronic control unit If Test Mode DTCs are stored in ECU the ECU LED will begin indicating the DTCs ECU LED flashes 10 s digit then the 1 s digit with a 0 3 second delay Each DTC is separated by a 1 8 second interval DTC series is separated by a 1 8 second interval If no DTCs are stored in ECU the normal condition will be flashed on the ECS lamp The normal condition is one ECS lamp flash every 1 second 5c If ECS lamp is OFF while engine is running idle engine for 1 minute vary engine RPM by performing 5 brief wide open throttle openings place transmission in gear and raise RPM to stall place transmission back into park and hold RPM at 2500 for 1 minute After completion go to 5a above 6 The normal condition is one ECS lamp flash in 1 second 7 Disconnect Test Mode connectors 16 SUBARU TEST MODES 8 Erase DTCs when all repairs are completed To manually read Test Mode DTCs from 1983 1986 carbureted Subaru vehicles using the Electronic Control System ECS Lamp and ECU LED O2 Monitor L
78. menu EXIT Return to the Select Mode menu or to the OBD Controls menu 2 COMMON TEST MODES I MODE FO DATA LIST 2 MODE F0 DATA LIST The purpose of the Data List mode is to monitor engine or transmission data parameters When Data List is selected the tester displays ECU data parameters in pre programmed pairs You can also create your own pairs If you are using a Mastertech tester and the Multi Function Program Card is installed the Enhanced mode is available when testing Lexus and Toyota vehicles To select the Data List mode do the following 1 Press to select the Data List mode from the Select Mode menu 2 To see the other pre programmed data pairs available for the selected system press either the or key The key will cause the tester to seroll forwards through the list of pre programmed pairs The key will cause backwards scrolling Holding either key will cause continuous scrolling You can also create data parameter pairs different from the pre programmed pairs as explained in Create Your Own Data Pairs A description of all engine and transmission data parameters available for each manufacturer that is capable of displaying data parameters is included in that Manufacturer s specific section Not all data parameters are transmitted by every vehicle 3 The data parameters can be printed if the tester is connected to a compatible serial printer Refer to the tester operator s manual for ins
79. printed if the tester is connected to a compatible serial printer To select Review DTC submode do the following 1 Press to select DTC Entry from the Select Mode menu 2 Press GF to select Review DTC from the DTC Entry menu 3 An instruction screen explains how to view the DTCs Press to display the stored DTCs COMMON TEST MODES I 9 MODE F1 ENTRY 4 The DTC number is displayed on the first line followed by a description of the DTC Press to advance to the next code or press to hold the displayed code 5 When all DTCs have been displayed press 1959 to display a summary screen of all entered DTCs 6 Press G to print a list of selected current DTCs 7 Press to return to the DTC Entry menu SELECT MODE F1 ENTRY F4 OBD CONTROLS F5 SYSTEM TESTS DTC ENTRY Y F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC S 4 ADVANCE CODE Y HOLD CODE EXIT QUIT ENTER SUMMARY DTC 03 MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE FAULT SUMMARY 03 Example of Review Displays ACTIVE KEYS Advance to next DTC or hold displayed DTCs Display summary screen G Print entered or selected current DTCs Return to DTC Entry menu 10 COMMON TEST MODES MODE F1 ENTRY SUBMODE F4 CLEAR DTC S The Clear DTC submode allows you to clear all DTCs stored in the tester and displays instructions for clearing active DTCs stored in the vehicle ECUs To s
80. 08002617 3rd Edition Tech 18 Tech 1A8 and Mastertech are registered trademarks of Vetronix Corporation Printed in USA 11 02 TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERAL INFORMATION 1 n r e eV 2 Common e Modes DE NOE ua nad deve ved exe da Pad dod ded q qud 2 Manufacturer Specific Sections Description 2 Iw lorlseresiksexspemzqiep reduessceeseietddc qnis ete 2 Test Selection Dese RD Q u assay bead Bebe KAAN Aaa ea 3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS p rh zt eee 4 Connecting And Disconnecting the Tester While Ignition Key Is On 4 Removing the Cartridge While the Tester Is Powered On 4 Vehicle Specilie Precautions 2 44 oues coke EA HERO 4 ASIAN IMPORTS CARTRIDGE KIT DESCRIPTION 5 A Note About Tech I And Tech JA Testers edd bide x RR KATA Lad RR A 5 Asian Deporte Features RA ERE AE 6 CONTERIS Qu yu aa era ces tam REWA tes hs Os 6 Asian Jumper ADpioaflans vaa mdi 10 Asian Imports Adapter Cable Applications e RROD RE EE 10 VEHICLE COYERAGE om exec eoe t e lee 11 ARE cou d dad dz dedo ada Goa Gem ar Bedae 11 Chrysler haports Dodge RE ZORA 11 Chrysler Import
81. 1 6L 14 YES NO 1994 KIA SEPHIA 1 6L 14 MPI O or 5 sec SELECT MODE Y F1 DTC ENTRY F5 SYSTEM TESTS F8 INFORMATION KIA Vehicle Selection ACTIVE KEYS 3 GO Scrolls through screen display Enter model year Used to answer questions in tester display Confirm Power up display Return to previous display KIA TEST MODES 6 TEST MODES When the Select Mode menu is displayed test modes available for Kia vehicles may be selected You may select Mode F1 ENTRY Mode F5 SYSTEM TESTS or Mode F8 INFORMATION without connecting the tester to the vehicle Operating instructions for the test modes other than DTC Entry are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section Detailed operating instructions for using Mode F1 ENTRY with Kia vehicles are included in the following procedure READING CODES When Mode F1 DTC ENTRY is selected the tester displays submodes which after your selection provide information on how to read diagnostic trouble codes DTCs from the vehicle how to clear DTCs from the vehicle or tester memory obtain a text description of entered or selected DTCs and review entered or selected DTCs as a result of manually retrieving codes from the ECU To read DTC codes on Kia vehicles you must connect the single wire Kia jumper P N 02002075 to the data link connector DLC and observe the flashing MIL If you do not know where the DLC
82. 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 2 4L 4 SOHC 2 0L 14 DOHC 2 5L V6 SOHC 3 0L V6 DOHC TUR 3 0L V6 DOHC 3 0L V6 SOHC 1 5L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 2 4L 14 SOHC 2 0L I4 SOHC 2 0L I4 SOHC TUR 420A 6G73 4G15 4G93 4G93 4G64 420A 6673 6672 6072 6072 4093 4093 4664 4664 4663 4663 MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI OBD OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES For OBD II Adapter Type use Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information MODEL 1997 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE 1997 AVENGER AVENGER SEBRING 2 0L 14 DOHC 2 5L V6 SOHC 2 0L 14 DOHC 420A 4G73 420A MFI MFI MFI OBD II OBD II OBD II AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES CHRYSLER IMPORTS VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1997 ENGINE ADAPTER CONTINUED ENGINE TYPE TYPE CODE WPE SEBRING 2 5L V6 SO
83. 2 2L I4 F22B2 SMPFI MIL LED SCC ACCORD 2 2L I4 VTEC F22B1 SMPFI MIL LED SCC CIVIC 1 5L 14 D15B7 SMPFI MIL LED SCC D15B8 SMPFI MIL LED SCC CIVIC 1 5L I4 VTEC D15Z1 SMPFI MIL LED SCC CIVIC 1 6L 4 VTEC D16Z6 SMPFI MIL LED SCC CIVIC DEL SOL 1 5L 14 D15B7 SMPFI MIL LED SCC CIVIC DEL SOL 1 6L I4 B16A3 SMPFI MIL LED SCC CIVIC DEL SOL 1 6L 14 VTEC D16Z6 SMPFI MIL LED SCC PRELUDE 2 2L I4 F22A1 SMPFI MIL LED SCC PRELUDE 2 2L I4 VTEC H22A1 SMPFI MIL LED SCC PRELUDE 2 3L 14 H23A1 SMPFI MIL LED SCC HONDA 5 HONDA SPECIFIC INFORMATION 2 HONDA SPECIFIC INFORMATION Two Ways to Diagnose Honda Honda powertrain diagnosis can be performed with the Asian Imports cartridge installed in a Tech 1 Tech or Mastertech tester Additionally Honda vehicles can be diagnosed with the aftermarket version of the Honda OEM level program card software using the Mastertech tester only Operating instructions and test mode information are available for the OEM level software in the Acura Honda Program Card Operator s Manual If you do not have the necessary Program Card and Mastertech tester to perform OEM level diagnostics you can use the Asian Imports Cartridge for limited model year coverage The following Honda section includes the test modes available how to connect the tester to the vehicle operating instructions for DTC entry and the applicable DTCs for each model year 6 HONDA TEST MODES AVAILABLE 3
84. 5 Volt Signal to MAP Sensor No Change in MAP Sensor from Start to Run Ignition Timing Adjustment Circuit Malfunction Timing Belt Skipped 1 Tooth or More Intermittent Loss of CMP or CKP MDP Sensor Circuit Malfunction EVAP system Purge Control Valve 2 Circuit Malfunction EVAP Control System Pinched Hose High Speed Radiator Fan Control Relay Circuit High Speed Condenser Fan Control Relay Circuit Low Speed Fan Control Relay Circuit Malfunction Battery Temp Sensor High Voltage Battery Temp Sensor Low Voltage EVAP Ventilation Solenoid Switch or Mechanical Fault EVAP Ventilation Solenoid Circuit 5 Volt Output Supply Too Low Generator FR Terminal Circuit Malfunction Serial Communication Link Malfunction PCM Failure Write Denied PCM Failure SRI Mile not stored No CCD Message from TCM Pulse Generator Assembly Malfunction Transmission Overheat High Temp Operation Activated TCM Power up While Vehicle Being Driven Transmission Solenoid Assembly Malfunction MITSUBISHI 39 MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 98 DTC DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED NO P1765 TCM Sensed Volts on Pressure Switch When Unexpected P1767 EATX Relay Always ON Contacts Closed P1768 EATX Relay Always OFF Contacts Open P1770 Inadequate Element Volume L R P1771 Inadequate Element Volume 2 4 P1772 Inadequate Element Volume OD P1775 Solenoid Switch Valve Latched in LU Position P1776 Sole
85. AUTOCODES OBD II OBD II OBD II information For Adapter Type OBD II see the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode INFINITI INFINITI SPECIFIC INFORMATION 2 INFINITI SPECIFIC INFORMATION The Infiniti vehicles covered by the Asian Imports Cartridge are separated into two different sections within the Asian Imports Operator s Manual The vehicle s on board system will determine which section of the Operator s Manual will need to be used Vehicles that are OBD II certified have information about the operating test modes in the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section of the Operator s Manual Vehicles that have OBD or OBD I systems have test mode information in this section of the Operator s Manual In these sections you will find information on test modes available how to connect the tester to the vehicle and operating instructions for the different test modes A complete list of Infiniti Diagnostic Trouble Codes is included at the back of each section To determine which section of the Operator s Manual to use for diagnostic information and instructions look at Adapter Type of the Vehicle and Systems chart If the vehicle you are testing has an OBD II adapter type use the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section of the Operator s Manual Ifthe vehicle you are testing does not have the OBD II Adapter Type use this section to diagnose the vehicle under test
86. B2 1 FT O2S B1 S2 FT O2S B2 2 FT O2S B1 S3 FT O2S B2 S3 FT O2S B1 S4 FT O2S B2 S4 100 to 100 Fuel Trim Oxygen Sensor 25 Sx represents the short term correction to fuel injection that may be adopted by the ECU In this case oxygen sensor fuel trim represents the ECU s determination of exhaust gas oxygen content and relates the data to a short term adjustment to fuel strategy based on information obtained from the applicable O2S Associated with the OBD II system and the parameter label are and COMMON TEST MODES II 41 ASIAN IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC PARAMETERS Sx Bx refers to Bank 1 or 2 and Sx refers to the sensor in positions 1 2 3 or 4 Refer to Appendix B OBD II Oxygen Sensor Location Information for a more complete description of the O2S naming convention FUEL PRESSURE kPa 0 to 765 psi Oto 111 Fuel Pressure data parameter is a gauge measure of the engine fuel rail pressure The fuel pressure parameter can be displayed in metric units kPa or in English units psi FUEL STATUS 1 FUEL STATUS 2 STATES OPEN LOOP CLOSED LOOP OL DRIVE OL FAULT CL FAULT RESERVED UNUSED Fuel Status represents fuel control status of the feedback loop between the vehicle ECU and the oxygen sensor Fuel Status can be displayed for both Bank I and Bank 2 If only Bank 1 is used for fuel control FUEL STATUS 2 is displayed as UNUSED The states of Fuel Status can be Open Loop Closed Loop Op
87. CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED TRUCK 2 4L I4 Z241 TBI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED PATHFINDER 3 0L V6 VG30I TBI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED TRUCK 3 0L V6 VG30I TBI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED ENGINE ADAPTER ENGINE 1989 240SX 2 4L 14 KA24E EFI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED 300ZX 3 0 3 0L V6 VG30E EFI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK TURBO VG30ET FED ECU LED MAXIMA 3 0L V6 VG30E EFI 5 MIL LED CHECK PULSAR NX 1 6L 14 GA161 TBI 5 MIL LED FED ECU LED PULSAR NX 1 8L 14 CA18DE EFI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED SENTRA 1 6L 14 GA161 EFI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED STANZA 2 0L 14 CA20E EFI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED VAN 2 4L H Z241 TBI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED PATHFINDER 2 4L 4 Z241 TBI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED 4 NISSAN VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL ENGINE ENGINE FUEL ECU CODE ADAPTER CONTINUED TYPE TYPE MODES TRUCK 2 4L 14 2241 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED PATHFINDER 3 0L V6 VG30I TBI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED TRUCK 3 0L V6 VG30I TBI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED ENGINE ADAPTER ENGINE TYPE TYPE 1990 240SX 2 4L 14 KA24E EFI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED 300ZX 3 0L V6 VG30DE EFI 2 MIL LED NONE MAXIMA 3 0L V6 VG30E EFI 5 MIL LED CHECK PULSAR NX 1 6L 14 161 5 MIL LED FED ECU LED SENTRA 1 6L 14 161 TBI 5 CA MIL LED CHEC
88. CKT 5 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 6 NO RPM SIGNAL ABOVE 1000 RPM IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE NO RPM SIGNAL ABOVE 1500 RPM ECU NE OR G SIG IGN START OR CKT 7 TP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 8 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 9 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OR CKT TOYOTA 35 TOYOTA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1986 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 10 STARTER SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 11 A C P N ON TPS OFF DURING DIAG MAIN RELAY OR ECU CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE A C ON TPS OFF DURING DIAG CK 12 NO ECU RPM SIG DURING CRANKING KS OR KS CKT FAILURE NO ECU NE G SIG DURING CRANKING 13 NO ECU IGN SIG ABOVE 1000 RPM KS OR KS CKT FAILURE NO ECU NE SIG ABOVE 1000 RPM 14 NO IGNITER SIG 6x OR CKT FAIL ABNORMAL TURBO PRESS TUR OR AFM 21 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 22 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 23 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 24 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 31 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE 32 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE 41 TP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OR CKT 43 STARTER SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 51 P N ON TPS OFF DURING DIAG A C ON N S OFF DURING DIAG CK 52 KS OR KS CKT FAILURE 53 ECU OR KS CPU OR CIRCUIT FAILURE YEAR 1987 DESCRIPTOR 1987 1 NO DTCs NORMAL OPERATION 2 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE 3 NO IGNITER PULSE 4x OR CKT FAIL 4 WATER THERMO SENSOR OR CKT O2 SENSOR LEAN INDICATION 6 NO ECU NE SIGNAL DURING CRANK RUN 36 TOYO
89. CKT FAILURE 13 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 14 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 15 MPS OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 21 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR 22 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 23 TDC SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT 24 SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 25 BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 31 DETONATION SNSR OR CKT FAILURE 41 INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE 43 EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR 44 IGNITION COIL OR CKT FAILURE 26 CHRYSLER IMPORTS CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES YEAR 1990 DESCRIPTOR 1990 0 ECU OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 11 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 12 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 13 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 14 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 15 MPS OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 21 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR 22 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 23 TDC SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT 1 amp 4 CYL TDC SENSOR OR 24 SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 25 BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 31 DETONATION SNSR OR CKT FAILURE 41 INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE 43 EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR 44 IGNITION COIL OR CKT FAILURE YEAR 1991 DESCRIPTOR 1991 0 ECU OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 11 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE REAR O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 12 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 13 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 14 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 15 MOTOR POSITION SENSOR OR CKT 21 ENGIN
90. DESCRIPTOR SOLENOID VALVE PURGE CONTROL METERING OIL PUMP STEPPING MOTOR PURGE SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT METERING OIL PUMP SOLENOID VALVE EGR CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE EGR VACUUM SOLENOID VALVE EGR DUTY SOLENOID VACUUM VALVE OR CIRCUIT SOLENOID VALVE EGR VENT DUTY SOLENOID VENT VALVE OR CIRCUIT RELAY COLD START INJECTOR SOLENOID VALVE SPLIT AIR BYPASS ACV SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT SOLENOID VALVE RELIEF 1 SOLENOID VALVE SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE PORT AIR BYPASS ISC VALVE IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE BAC VALVE IDLE UP SOLENOID VALVE FOR A C OR CIRCUIT IDLE UP SOLENOID VALVE FOR A T OR CIRCUIT RIGHT SIDE O2 SENSOR HEATER O2 SENSOR HEATER LEFT SIDE O2 SENSOR HEATER METERING OIL PUMP SOLENOID VALVE ACCELERATED WARM UP SYSTEM SOLENOID VALVE RELIEF 2 SOLENOID VALVE PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE VICS SOLENOID VALVE VRIS 1 SOLENOID VALVE VRIS SOLENOID VALVE TURBO PRECONTROL SOLENOID VALVE WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE TURBO CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CHARGE CONTROL VACUUM SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT SOLENOID VALVE VRIS 2 SOLENOID VALVE CHARGE RELIEF SOLENOID VALVE DOUBLE THROTTLE CONTROL 46 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1993 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 51 FUEL PUMP RELAY 52 AIR PUMP RELAY 55 VEHICLE SPEED PULSE GENERATOR VEHICLE SPEED PULSE GENERATOR ATX 56 ATF THERMOSENS
91. Diagnostic Connector is referred to as the Diagnostic NISSAN 15 TEST MODES Jumper Connector DJC Refer to the section on manually reading DTCs from the 1993 95 Nissan Quest in Mode Fl Submode 1 Submode F0 How To Read This submode provides information on how to manually read DTCs from the vehicle Step by step screen instructions provide information to correctly set up the vehicle ECU An example is provided in Common Test Modes section If you have trouble additional DTC retrieval information is described below If you refer to the shop manual for this information make sure that you are following the correct steps for the system that you are working on Submode F1 Enter DTC s On Nissan vehicles the Enter DTCs submode allows you to manually read DTCs This submode provides you with a text description of the numeric DTC that was entered into the tester The Enter DTC Submode displays two question marks for DTC Entry The tester screen prompts you to enter the DTCs read from the ECU LED s or the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Be careful when reading the from the ECU LED s or MIL Incorrect ECU LED or MIL interpretation can cause the wrong DTC description to be displayed Once all DTCs have been manually read and recorded enter each DTC into the tester as described in Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section Refer to the appropriate procedure on the following pages for manually reading ECU LED DTCs Sli
92. ECU 10 DTCs 4 P0100 P0122 P0101 P0118 For vehicles with multiple ECUs only To display Pending DTCs do the following 1 Select F2 DTCs from the SELECT MODE menu 2 Select F3 pending DTCs from the DTCs menu COMMON TEST MODES II 19 TEST MODES 3 Select the ECU from which you choose to monitor data for vehicles with multiple ECUs only The message Waiting For Data is displayed followed by the PENDING DTCs information A detailed description can be displayed for any pending DTC by moving the next to the desired code and pressing The is moved by pressing the arrow keys ECU 10 P0100 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Malfunction ENTER isplays description of the pendin Displays descripti f the pending DTC O Move marker EXIT Exits to SELECT MODE menu MODE F3 SNAPSHOT Setup The SNAPSHOT mode helps you isolate an intermittent or transient problem by storing data parameters before or after the problem occurs The information can be saved and used for a later replay or hardcopy print option 1 SINGLE DTC TRIG OR iza ivi Meje SELECT ECU x Engine Speed 1052 RPM Ign Timing 18 5 REPLAY SNAPSHOT 4 TRIGGER POINT F9 DATA SETUP FO ALL PARMS F1 CUSTOM LIST For vehicles with multiple ECUs only To display Snapshot information do the following 1 Select F3 SNAPSHOT from the SELE
93. EXIT Return to Information menu 34 COMMON TEST MODES I COMMON TEST MODES II 1 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 2 HARDWARE REQUIRED Mastertech 3 GETTING STARTED Powering the Mastertech Tech or Tech 1 Establishing Communication Communication Failure 4 TEST MODES Select Mode Menu Mode FO Data List Submode 0 Display Data Submode F1 Data Setup Submode F0 Parameters Submode F1 User List Parameters Multiple ECUs Mode F1 Readiness Mode F2 Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs Submode F0 Read DTCs Submode F1 Freeze Data Submode F2 Clear Info Submode F3 Pending DTCs Mode F3 Snapshot Submode F4 Trigger Point Submode F3 Snapshot Replay Mode FA OBD ConbtOolg LLL lt 23 PO EVA LESE ada kak ol 23 lU TNNT A ROE ON 24 Subinade FO TS 1 C EA A czo Ea Submode F1 Other Results Mode F8 Information bine FO VIN LU N Submode F1 S W CALIB ID Subiade F gt E VERIF ID 28 Mode ES OBD Tl a oo O GAGA A AEG 28 FO OREGON R soma MD MUTET ea Submode 0 Prep Vehicle Subanode Procede senenta it brio akit ER tara Submode F9 Repair Verification Submode F1 Parameters sasanka Submode Definitions Submode F1 Ranges SUBMOJE rA DTE LIB p submicde Readiness uoces ud ied iege en MEE Submode F
94. FAILURE O2 SENSOR OR 025 CKT FAILURE LEFT 025 02 FAILURE FRONT O2S OR O2S CKT FAILURE RIGHT 02 OR 02 CKT FAILURE REAR O2S OR 02 CKT FAILURE MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE CK ANGLE OR CK ANG CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 1 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR A MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL A IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE ELECTRONIC AIR CONTROL SENSOR IGNITION OUTPUT SIG OR CKT FAIL FUEL INJECTOR FAILURE VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE IGNITION TIMING CONTROL UNIT LEFT KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE FRONT KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE A T FI SIGNAL A A T FI SIGNAL B TC STB SIGNAL TCFC SIGNAL LEFT O2S HEATER OR CKT FAILURE FRONT O2S HEATER OR CKT FAILURE RIGHT O2S HEATER OR CKT FAILURE REAR O2S HEATER OR CKT FAILURE ACURA 17 ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1991 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 43 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM LEFT FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM FRONT FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM 44 RIGHT FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM REAR FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM 45 LEFT FUEL SUPPLY METERING FRONT FUEL SUPPLY METERING 46 RIGHT FUEL SUPPLY METERING REAR FUEL SUPPLY METERING 47 FAULTY FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE 51 REAR SPOOL SOLENOID VALVE 53 RIGHT KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE REAR KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE 54 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 2 CR
95. FAILURE 13 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 14 SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 15 MOTOR POSITION SWITCH OR CKT HYUNDAI 17 HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1990 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 21 ECT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 22 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 23 NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT 24 VSS OR CKT FAILURE 25 BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 41 FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE 43 EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR YEAR 1991 DESCRIPTOR 1991 0 ECU CIRCUIT FAILURE 11 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 12 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 13 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 14 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 15 MOTOR POSITION SWITCH OR CKT 21 ECT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 22 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 23 NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT 24 VSS OR CKT FAILURE 25 BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 41 FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE 43 EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR YEAR 1992 DESCRIPTOR 1992 0 ECU CIRCUIT FAILURE 11 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 12 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 18 HYUNDAI HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1992 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR 13 14 15 21 22 23 24 25 41 42 43 44 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE MOTOR POSITION SWITCH OR CKT ECT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT TDC S
96. FAILURE FCV SOLENOID OR CIRCUIT FAILURE THROTTLE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 025 SYSTEM OR CIRCUIT FAILURE VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL VEHICLE SPEED SNSR OR CIRCUIT EGR SOL VALVE ON OFF OR CKT EGR LINE CLOGGED OR CKT CA ONLY PURGE SOL VALVE ON OFF OR CKT PURGE SOLENOID CONTROL SYSTEM SYSTEM LEAN CONDITION IDLE SWITCH OR CIRCUIT FAILURE KDWN CNTRL RLY ON OFF POS SUBARU 29 SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1988 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 51 NEUT SWITCH OR CKT NO SIGNAL NEUTRAL SW CKT REMAINS ON 52 CLUTCH SW OR CKT FAIL FWD ONLY 55 EGR GAS TEMP SENSOR CA ONLY 61 PARKING SW CKT SW REMAINS ON 62 IDLE UP SYSTEM 1 OR CKT FAILURE 63 IDLE UP SYSTEM 2 OR CKT FAILURE YEAR 1989 DESCRIPTOR 1989 1 SPEC CODE MT 49ST CAN 2 SPEC CODE MT CAL 3 SPEC CODE AT 49ST CAN SPEC CODE AT 4WD 49ST CAN 4 SPEC CODE AT CAL SPEC CODE AT 4WD CAL 5 SPEC CODE MT FED CAN 6 SPEC CODE MT CAL 7 SPEC CODE AT FWD CAN 49ST SPEC CODE AT FED CAN 8 SPEC CODE AT FWD CAL SPEC CODE AT CAL 11 CRANK ANGLE SNSR REF PULSE OR CKT 12 STARTER SW CRANKING 13 CKP SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 14 FUEL INJ 1 amp 2 OR CIRCUIT FUEL INJ 5 amp 6 OR CIRCUIT FUEL INJ OUTPUT OR CKT FAILURE DUTY SOL VLV OR CKT FAILURE 15 FUEL INJ 3 amp 4 OR CIRCUIT FUEL INJ 1 amp 2 OR CIRCUIT CFC SYSTEM OR CKT MT ONLY 16 FEEDBACK SYSTEM OR CKT FAILURE
97. FE CHECK AUTOCODES RX7 1 3L R2 EGI EFI RE13B CHECK AUTOCODES B2000 2 0L 4 CARB FE CHECK AUTOCODES 1987 323 1 6L 14 EGI EFI B6 CHECK AUTOCODES 323 WAGON 1 6L 4 EGI EFI B6 CHECK AUTOCODES 626 2 0L I4 EGI EFI FE CHECK AUTOCODES 626 2 0L I4 TURBO EGI EFI FE CHECK AUTOCODES RX7 1 3L R2 EGI EFI RE13B CHECK AUTOCODES RX7 1 3L R2 TURBO EGI EFI RE13B CHECK AUTOCODES B2200 2 2L 4 CARB F2 CHECK AUTOCODES 1988 323 PROTEGE 1 6L 4 EGI EFI B6 CHECK AUTOCODES 323 PROTEGE 1 6L 14 TURBO EGI EFI B6 CHECK AUTOCODES MAZDA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL ENGINE ADAPTER 1983 89 ENGINE TYPE TYPE CODE TYPE 323 WAGON 1 6L 14 EGI EFI B6 CHECK AUTOCODES 626 MX6 22L 4 EGI EFI F2 CHECK AUTOCODES 626 MX6 2 2L 4 TURBO EGI EFI F2 CHECK AUTOCODES 929 3 0L V6 EGI EFI JE CHECK AUTOCODES RX7 1 3L R2 EGI EFI RE13B CHECK AUTOCODES RX7 1 3L R2 TURBO EGI EFI RE13B CHECK AUTOCODES B2200 2 2L 4 CARB F2 CHECK AUTOCODES 1989 323 1 6L I4 E EGI EFI B6 CHECK AUTOCODES 323 1 6L IL TURBO EGI EFI B6 CHECK AUTOCODES 323 WAGON 1 6L 14 EGI EFI B6 CHECK AUTOCODES 626 MX6 2 2L I4 EGI EFI F2 CHECK AUTOCODES 626 MX6 2 2L I4 TURBO EGI EFI F2 CHECK AUTOCODES 929 3 0L V6 EGI EFI JE CHECK AUTOCODES MPV 2 6L I4 EGI EFI G6 CHECK AUTOCODES MPV 3 0L V6 EGI EFI JE CHECK AUTOCODES RX7 1 3L R2 EGI EFI RE13B CHECK AUTOCODES RX7 1 3L R2 TURBO EGI EFI RE13B CHECK AUTOCODES B2200 2 2L 4 CARB F2 CHECK AUTOCODES 26001 2 6L 4 EGI EFI G6 CHECK AUTOCODES MODEL 1990 ENGI
98. FIXED ON OFF POSITION VACUUM SW 2 OFF TEST MODE ONLY 25 SOLENOID VALVE 1 REMAINS OFF 31 DUTY SOLENOID VLV REMAINS ON 32 THERMO SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 33 COOLANT THERMO SENSOR OR CKT FDBK SYS FAILURE TEST MODE ONLY 34 ASP AIR THERMO SNSR OR CIRCUIT AUTO CHOKE POWER REMAINS OFF 41 VACUUM SW 1 ON TEST MODE ONLY 42 INJ FIXED IN ON OFF POSITION VACUUM SW 2 ON TEST MODE ONLY 22 SUBARU SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1983 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 43 AUTO CHOKE POWER REMAINS ON 51 SOLENOID VALVE 3 REMAINS ON 52 SOLENOID VALVE I REMAINS ON YEAR 1984 DESCRIPTOR 1984 11 IG PULSE FAILURE OPEN SHORT CKT IGN PULSE SYS ENG 12 STARTER SW OR CKT REMAINS OFF IGN PULSE SYS ENG 13 STARTER SW OR CKT REMAINS ON IGN PULSE SYS ENG OFF HC MT 14 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE IGN PULSE SYS ENG OFF HC AT 15 IGN PULSE SYS ENG 16 IGN PULSE SYS ENG 17 IGN PULSE SYS ENG OFF HC MT 18 IGN PULSE SYS ENG OFF HC AT 21 AIR FLOW METER FLAP SEIZED 22 PRESSURE SWITCH FIXED ON OFF POS VSS FAIL AT IN TEST MODE ONLY 23 IDLE SWITCH OR CIRCUIT FAILURE O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 24 WOT SWITCH OR CIRCUIT FAILURE THERMO SNSR FAIL LESS THAN 68degF 25 THERMO SNSR FAIL ABOVE 230degF 31 DUTY SOLENOID VLV REMAINS
99. GE 7M GE 4A GE 4A GZE 7M GE 7M GTE 3E 3F E 4Y E 22R E 3VZ E 22R 22R E 3VZ E PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI 2V CARB PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI 1V CARB PFI PFI PFI PFI 2V CARB PFI PFI CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES amp DATA CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK TDCL CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK TOYOTA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1990 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER 1990 CAMRY CELICA COROLLA CRESSIDA MR2 SUPRA TERCEL LAND CRUISER 4RUNNER 2WD amp 4WD TRUCK 2WD amp 4WD 2 0L 14 2 5L V6 1 6L 14 2 0L TURBO 14 ALL TRAC 22L 14 1 6L 14 1 6L 14 3 0L I6 1 6L 14 1 6L IR SC 3 0L I6 3 0L TURBO I6 1 5L 14 1 5L I4 CA ONLY 4 0L I6 2 4L 4 3 0L V6 2 4L I4 CA ONLY 2 4L 4 3 0L V6 3S FE 2VZ FE 4A FE 3S GTE 5S FE 4A FE 4A GE 7M GE 4 4A GZE 7M GE 7M GTE 3E E 3E 3F E 22R E 3VZ E 22R 22R E 3VZ E PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI IV PFI PFI 2V CARB PFI PFI CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES amp DATA CO
100. High Voltage Internal Control Module ROM Error TCM to ECM Input Pulse Malfunction Inhibitor Switch Malfunction A T Range Circuit No Input Signal A T Range Circuit More than Two Input Signals Transmission Fluid Temp Sensor Open Circuit Transmission Fluid Temp Sensor Short Circuit Pulse Generator A or B Open Circuit Pulse Generator A Open Circuit Pulse Generator B Open Circuit Ignition Pulse Pickup Circuit lst Gear shift Does Not Match Engine Speed 2nd Gear shift Does Not Match Engine Speed 3rd Gear shift Does Not Match Engine Speed 4th Gear shift Does Not Match Engine Speed Damper Clutch System Malfunction Damper Clutch System Malfunction Damper Clutch System Malfunction Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Open Circuit HYUNDAI 27 HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1996 98 CONTINUED DESCRIPTION P0748 P0750 P0752 P0753 P0757 P0758 P1123 P1124 P1127 P1128 P1140 P1400 P1510 P1513 P1521 P1552 P1553 P1586 P1605 P1606 P1611 P1613 P1614 P1624 P1665 P1670 P1701 P1702 P1704 P1709 P1714 P1715 Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Short Circuit Shift Control Circuit Malfunction Shift Control Solenoid A Open Circuit Shift Control Solenoid Valve A Short Circuit Shift Control Solenoid Valve B Open Circuit Shift Control Solenoid Valve B Short Circuit Long Term Fuel Trim Additive Air System Too Rich Long Term Fuel Trim Additive Air System Too Lean Long
101. INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 53 RIGHT HO2S OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 54 TCM TO ECU CIRCUIT FAILURE FAULTY A T CONTROL UNIT 55 NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECM YEAR 1995 DESCRIPTOR 1995 11 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 12 MAF SENSOR CIRCUIT 13 ECT SENSOR CIRCUIT 14 VSS CIRCUIT 21 IGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT 26 BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR 31 ECM 32 EGR MALFUNCTION 33 HO2 SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION LEFT BANK V6 33 HO2 SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION 33 02 SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION 34 KNOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT 35 EGR TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT 41 IAT SENSOR CIRCUIT 42 FUEL TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT 36 NISSAN NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 43 TPS CIRCUIT 45 INJECTOR LEAK 51 INJECTOR CIRCUIT 53 HO2 SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION RIGHT BANK V6 54 SIGNAL CIRCUIT FROM A T CONTROL TO ECM 55 NO FAILURE DETECTED OBD II SYSTEMS YEAR 1995 98 DESCRIPTION 1995 98 OBD II P0000 No Failure Detected P0100 Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0105 Absolute Pressure Sensor Malfunction P0110 IAT Sensor circuit malfunction P0115 ECT circuit malfunction P0120 TPS circuit malfunction P0125 Coolant temp Sensor Circuit Malfunction no Closed Loop Fuel Control P0130 Front H O2 Sensor Circuit Malfunction no Closed Loop P0131 Front HO2 Sensor Lean Shift Monitor P0132 Front HO2 Sensor Rich Shift Monitor P0133 Front HO2 Sensor Response Moni
102. If the ECU Modes column indicates 5 Modes then the vehicle supports Switch Test The Switch Test provides you with a guided procedure which tests the condition of the switched inputs to the ECU The components that are tested are the idle switch located in the TPS on some vehicles starter switch the crank signal from the ignition switch while in the crank position and the vehicle speed switch which indicates a speed of greater than 12MPH when the vehicle speed sensor contacts close If while performing the Switch test the tester detects a fault with either switched input it will display a message about which circuit to check Or if the test is completed and the tester does not detect a failure a pass message will be displayed NOTE When performing the Switch Test make sure the vehicle is properly EH warmed up and is tested in a well ventilated area To perform the Switch Test do the following 1 Press to select Switch Test from the OBD Controls menu 2 The tester displays instructions for performing the Switch Test Press 19 9 when each step has been completed 3 Follow the instructions on the tester display When each instruction is completed the tester indicates if further action is necessary If a problem is detected press 9 0 to return to the OBD Controls menu 4 The tester informs you if the switch passes the test Press 3 4 to return to the OBD Controls menu 5 If the tester is unable to set
103. LEXUS OBDSYSTEMS e da a o 5 Engine Dep IM caked SKA KAI RR ACERO AGER TESLA OUR dE dM eda Edu Rd ARE 5 EHE EL TO AO d 5 Eleutronically Controlled Transmission DICs E 5 diui aen doce dai van ed pu T quid dp 5 CHE Control DIGS Festart tirik ARE SNR oC RC 6 Band dad oa ead ond wa 6 POI line 6 AM OM NOM iori epar gi a dpi dd ar do acd iode FRU 6 SYSTEMIE covered By Me sol WANE 4244344618 DANE PRODURRE GRAUE RARE ARE GRE dod 6 TEST MODES AVAILABLE iesu etr eere Pi 8 GETTING STARIED a adas A eh ee belua 9 SELECTING THE VEHICLE bero Ro Pet Merde don odes 11 DCN be MnIe nn n APR kee p ded x kka 11 EIA dua tie ved whee SEA Sud ad ead ai 11 DECC INE 11 Roto 4 5 MP 11 ona JASKA eli aD GARE padres doi 11 DIN uuu utu d Cod Cre x R aqq wen 11 doe kk 13 Possible Systems Supported Displays eed a hex 14 MOR 1303 50500044 EM HEURE PEAK 15 TRACE Pd bouem dar wedge Chad ew qas 15
104. LINE 1 key on engine off Key On Eng Off key on engine running at idle KOER IDLE RPM key on engine running at 2500 RPM KOER 2500 RPM key on engine running in drive 0 MPH KOER DRV OMPH key on engine running in drive 15 MPH KOER DRV 15 key on engine running in drive 25 MPH 25MPH key on engine running in drive 35 MPH KOER DRV 35MPH key on engine running in drive 45 MPH KOER DRV 45MPH key on engine running in drive 55 MPH KOER DRV 55 MPH key on engine running in drive wide open throttle acceleration KOER DRV WOT key on engine running in drive closed throttle deceleration KOER DRV CTD 8 The actual value for the current parameter is displayed on line 2 ONLY if the tester is connected to an OBD II system and F9 OBD II Toolpak is selected from the select mode menu If the tester is not connected to an OBD II system and F9 OBD II Toolpak has not been selected from the select mode menu only the common high and low values are displayed 9 Common high hi and low lo parameter values for the data condition are displayed on lines 3 and 4 common high and low values were obtained from actual vehicle powertrain systems with OBD II certified systems 10 Press 9410 to return to the parameter list or Parameters menu 34 COMMON TEST MODES II TEST MODES ACTIVE KEYS Scroll up and down Select parameter to view Toggle display Exit to the pr
105. Locate the 1 pin 6 pin and 17 pin Diagnostic Connector 2a 6 pin and 1 pin DLC only Connect a suitable jumper wire from the self test input STI terminal 1 pin DLC single lead shell color sometimes green or black to ground Self Test Input STI 25 17 pin DLC only Connect a suitable jumper wire from the engine test input TEN terminal to ground Ground Engine Test TEN 2 On vehicles with only the 6 pin DLC go to Step 3 3 Connect analog voltmeter red lead to engine fault code output FEN or STO terminal in the 6 pin or 17 pin DLCs refer to service manual for correct wire and voltmeter black lead to ground Set analog voltmeter to 20 volt scale MAZDA 17 TEST MODES Engine Fault Code FEN Self Test Output STO 4 Turn ignition switch to ON 5 DTC indication will begin on voltmeter Voltmeter will fluctuate 0 to 12 volts if DTCs are stored in ECU If a DTC is stored in ECU the STO line will first indicate 12 volts The first number of 0 volt 1 2 second indications will equal the 10 s digit ofa 2 digit After a 1 6 second pause the second number of 0 volt 0 4 second indications will equal the 1 s digit DTCs are separated by 12 volt indication for 4 0 seconds PREJE vy o DTC 16 4 10 SEPARATION Next DTC 9 12v Indication 4 17 0v IRS 44 O seconds 2s 1 258 4 0s 1 25s 1 6s LIE 6 If no malfunctions are present meter wi
106. MPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE XT6 2 7L H6 MPFI 4AT 5MT ECULED MANCODES NONE ENGINE FUEL ADAPTER SYSTEM TYPE 1991 LEGACY 2 2L H4 MPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE LEGACY 2 2L H4 MPFI TURBO A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE LOYALE 1 8L H4 SPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE SUBARU 5 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS FUEL SYSTEM ADAPTER TYPE ENGINE LOYALE 1 81 H4 XT 1 81 H4 XT6 2 7L H6 MPFI TURBO MPFI MPFI A T M T A T M T A T M T ECULED ECULED ECULED MANCODES MANCODES MANCODES NONE NONE NONE ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM ADAPTER TYPE 1992 LEGACY 2 2L H4 LEGACY 2 2L H4 SVX 3 3L H6 MPFI MPFI TURBO MPFI A T M T A T M T 4AT ECULED ECULED MIL MANCODES MANCODES MANCODES NONE NONE NONE FUEL SYSTEM ADAPTER ENGINE 1993 SVX 3 3L H6 LEGACY 2 2L H4 LEGACY 2 2L H4 IMPREZA 1 8L H4 MPFI MPFI MPFI TURBO MPFI 4AT 4AT 5MT 4AT 5MT 4AT 5MT MIL ECULED ECULED ECULED MANCODES MANCODES MANCODES MANCODES NONE NONE NONE NONE FUEL SYSTEM ADAPTER ENGINE 1994 SVX 3 3L H6 LEGACY 2 2L H4 LEGACY 2 2L H4 IMPREZA 1 8L H4 MPFI MPFI MPFI TURBO MPFI 4AT 4AT 5MT 4AT 5MT 4AT 5MT MIL ECULED ECULED ECULED MANCODES MANCODES MANCODES MANCODES NONE NONE NONE NONE
107. Malfunction Fuel Injector No 5 Circuit Malfunction Fuel Injector No 6 Circuit Malfunction Fuel Pump Relay Control Circuit Malfunction Random Misfire Detected Cylinder No 1 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 2 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 3 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 4 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 5 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 6 Misfire Detected Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Malfunction Crankshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction Ignition Coil No 1 Primary Circuit Malfunction Ignition Coil No 2 Primary Circuit Malfunction EGR Flow System Malfunction EGR System Malfunction EGR Solenoid Circuit Malfunction Catalyst System Bank 1 Below Efficiency Threshold Warm Up Catalyst Bank 1 Below Efficiency Threshold Catalytic Converter Efficiency Failure Warm Up Catalyst Bank 2 Below Efficiency Threshold Catalytic Converter Front Bank Efficiency Failure EVAP Control System Malfunction EVAP Purge Flow Monitor System Malfunction EVAP Control System Leak Detected EVAP Purge System Control Valve Circuit Malfunction CHRYSLER IMPORTS 35 CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1996 98 DTC DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED NO P0446 EVAP Vent Control System Malfunction P0450 EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Malfunction P0455 EVAP Control System Large Leak Detected P0500 VSS Circuit Malfunction 0505
108. Malfunction Left Bank P0174 Fuel System Malfunction Lean Condition Left Bank P0175 Fuel System Malfunction Rich Condition Left Bank P0180 Fuel Tank Temp Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0300 Random Misfire Detected P0301 Cylinder No 1 Misfire Detected P0302 Cylinder No 2 Misfire Detected P0303 Cylinder No 3 Misfire Detected P0304 Cylinder No 4 Misfire Detected P0305 Cylinder No 5 Misfire Detected P0306 Cylinder No 6 Misfire Detected P0325 Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0400 EGR System Malfunction 38 NISSAN NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 98 CONTINUED DTC NO P0402 P0420 P0430 P0440 P0443 P0446 P0450 P0500 P0505 0510 P0600 P0605 P0705 P0710 P0720 P0725 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0740 0744 0745 0750 0755 1105 P1110 P1130 P1150 P1155 P1160 P1165 DESCRIPTION EGRC BPT Valve Malfunction Three way Catalyst System Malfunetion Right Bank Three way Catalyst System Malfunetion Left Bank EVAP System Small Leak Detected EVAP Purge Control Valve Circuit Malfunction EVAP Vent Control Valve Circuit Malfunction EVAP System Pressure Sensor Malfunction Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction IAC Valve AAC System Malfunction Closed Throttle Sensor Idle Switch Malfunction Sign
109. ON 32 O2S OR CKT FAIL LOW OUTPUT DUTY SOLENOID VLV REMAINS OFF 33 COOLANT THERMO SENSOR OR CKT FDBK SYS FAILURE TEST MODE ONLY 34 ASP AIR THERMO SNSR OR CIRCUIT BACKUP SYS FAIL MEMORY NOT HIGH 35 BACKUP SYS FAIL MEMORY NOT LOW 41 HIGH ALTITUDE SENSOR OR CKT SUBARU 23 SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1984 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 42 FUEL INJ OR CKT OPEN OR SHORT VACUUM SW 2 ON TEST MODE ONLY 43 VACUUM SW 2 OFF TEST MODE ONLY 44 VACUUM SW 1 ON TEST MODE ONLY 45 VACUUM SW 1 OFF TEST MODE ONLY 52 SOLENOID VALVE 1 REMAINS 53 SOLENOID VALVE 1 REMAINS OFF 54 AUTO CHOKE POWER REMAINS ON 55 AUTO CHOKE POWER REMAINS OFF 62 SOL VLV2 ON AT MT FED not 4WD 63 SOL VLV2 OFF AT MT FED not 4WD 73 IGN PULSE SYS ENG OFF HC MT 77 IGN PULSE SYS ENG OFF HC MT YEAR 1985 DESCRIPTOR 1985 11 IG PULSE OR CKT NO IG PULSE IG PULSE ENG OFF 5MT 2WD 49ST IGN SW SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 12 STARTER SW OR CKT OFF MODE IG PULSE ENG OFF AT FF 49ST STARTER SW OR CKT REMAINS OFF 13 STARTER SW OR CKT IN ON MODE STARTER SW OR CKT REMAINS ON 14 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE AIR FLOW METER FLAP POSITION 15 IGN PULSE ENG OFF 4MT FF 49ST 21 AIR FLOW METER FLAP SEIZED 22 PRESSURE SWITCH IN ON OFF POS VEHICLE SPEED SNSR OR CIRCUIT PRESSURE SWITCH ON OFF FAILURE VACUUM SWITCH ON OFF FAILURE VACUUM SWITCH IN ON OFF POS 23
110. OR CKT 24 SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 25 BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 31 KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE 32 MAP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 36 IGNITION TIMING ADJUSTMENT 39 RF HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT 41 INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE 43 EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR 44 IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 1 4 CYL IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 52 IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 2 amp 5 CYL IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 2 amp 3 CYL 53 IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 3 amp 6 CYL 55 IAC VALVE POS SENSOR OR CKT 59 LR HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT REAR HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT 61 TORQUE REDUCED SIGNAL OR CKT 62 INDUCTION CNTRL VALVE POS SNSR 69 RR HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT 71 TRACTION CONTROL VACUUM SOLENOID 72 TRACTION CONTROL VENT SOLENOID 32 MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 DESCRIPTOR 1995 11 12 13 14 15 21 22 23 24 25 31 32 36 39 41 42 43 44 52 52 53 55 59 61 62 69 71 72 LEFT FRONT HO2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT VOLUME AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CIRCUIT IAT SENSOR OR CIRCUIT TPS OR CIRCUIT IDLE SPEED CONTROL SENSOR OR CIRCUIT ECT SENSOR OR CIRCUIT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR OR CIRCUIT CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR OR CIRCUIT VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OR CIRCUIT BARO PRESSURE SENSOR OR CIRCUIT KNOCK SENSOR OR CIRCUIT MAP SENSOR CIRCUIT IGNITION TIMING ADJUSTMENT SIGNAL OR CIRCUIT RIGHT FRONT HO2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT INJECT
111. Open or Short P1523 VICS Circuit Malfunction Open or Short P1524 Charge Air Cooler Bypass Solenoid Valve Circuit Open or Short P1525 ABV Vacuum Open or Short P1526 ABV Vent Open or Short P1527 Accelerate Warm up Open or Short P1540 ABV Control System Open or Short P1566 Backup Power Supply Circuit Malfunction P1601 Communication Line Error A T P1602 Immobilizer Unit PCM Communication Error P1603 Immobilizer System Codeword not Registered PCM P1604 Immobilizer System Key ID Number Unregistered PCM P1605 KAM Power Circuit Test Error P1608 PCME CPU Malfunction P1609 PCM Knock Damaged P1621 Immobilizer System Codeword Problem After Engine Crank P1622 Immobilizer System Key ID Number does not Match P1623 Immobilizer System Codeword Key ID Read Write Error PCM P1624 Immobilizer System Communication Counter 0 P1627 ECM TCS Line Communication Error P1628 ECM TCS Line ABV Communication Error P1631 Generator Output Voltage Signal no Electricity P1632 Battery Voltage Monitor Signal Circuit Malfunction 64 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 1998 DTC CONTINUED NO P1633 P1634 P1650 P1651 P1652 P1701 P1702 P1703 P1704 P1705 P1709 P1711 P1713 P1714 P1715 P1716 P1717 P1718 P1719 P1720 P1729 P1740 P1741 P1742 P1743 P1744 P1746 P1747 P1749 P1751 P1754 P1756 DESCRIPTOR
112. P W mS 0 33 Injector solenoid Pulse Width on time based on output calculated by the vehicle ECU based on engine load engine RPM and Throttle Position INTAKE AIR PRES mmHg 0 1244 Intake Air Pressure Vacuum signal sent as an input to the vehicle ECM from the MAP VAC sensor based on engine load INTAKE AIR VOL g S 0 510 Intake Air Volume is a measure of engine intake air volume through the air Flow Meter in grams per second g s The more throttle opening the greater intake air volume into the engine This parameter applies to AFM equipped engines only ISC DUTY RATIO 0 100 Idle Speed Control ISC valve percentage opening based on output calculated by the vehicle ECU based on engine load engine RPM and Throttle Position 28 LEXUS DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ISC VALVE UNITS RANGE Idle Speed Control ISC valve step based on output calculated by the vehicle ECU based on engine load engine RPM and Throttle Position KNOCK SIGNAL ON OFF Knock sensor signal correction as commanded by vehicle ECM based on engine load and indicates that the ECM advance retard strategy 1s controlling ignition timing ON correction enabled OFF correction disabled LEAN MIX SENSOR mA 0 72 Lean mixture sensor current as input to the vehicle ECM based on air fuel ratio O2 content of exhaust gases LEFT A F FB STATES Left side air fuel feedback signal state as commanded by vehicle
113. Read Submode F1 Enter DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC s Submode F4 Clear DTC s Mode F2 DTC Submode F1 Read Enter DTC s Submode F5 Sens DTC VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS Using the Asian Imports Cartridge the Toyota vehicles on the following pages can be diagnosed MODEL 1983 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER 1983 CAMRY STARLET CELICA CRESSIDA CELICA SUPRA 2 0L 4 1 3L 14 2 4L 14 2 8L 16 2 8L 16 2S E 4K E 22R E 5M GE 5M GE EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MANCODES MANCODES JU JU JU JU JU MPER MPER MPER MPER MPER MODEL 1984 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER 1984 CAMRY CELICA CRESSIDA CELICA SUPRA STARLET VAN TRUCK 2 0L 4 2 4L 14 2 8L 16 2 8L 16 1 3L 14 2 0L I4 2 4L I4 2S E 22R E 5M GE 5M GE 4K E 3Y EC 22R E EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI MILCODES MILCODES MANCODES MANCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES JU JU JU JU JU JU MPER MPER MPER MPER MPER MPER MPER MODEL 1985 ENGINE ENGINE ADAPTER 1985 CAMRY CELICA COROLLA CRESSIDA CELICA SUPRA VAN TRUCK 2 0L 14 2 4L 14 1 6L 14 2 8L 16 2 8L 16 2 0L 14 2
114. STARTED SELECTING THE VEHICLE TEST MODES Mode F1 Entry Submode 0 How To Read Submode F1 Enter DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC Submode F4 Clear DTC s Mode F2 DTC Submode F1 Read DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC Submode F4 Clear DTC s 7 CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs PO T 30 31 OBD 33 er ROM O CHE OE NI 38 CHRYSLER IMPORTS VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS Using the Asian cartridge the following Chrysler Imports vehicles can be diagnosed ENGINE FUEL ADAPTER TYPE TYPE TYPE CODE TYPE MODEL 1984 ENGINE 1984 COLT 1 6L 4 SOHC TUR G32B ECI EFI NONE MANCODES MODEL 1985 ENGINE ET pais CODE 1985 COLT 1 6L 4 SOHC TUR G32B ECI EFI NONE MANCODES CONQUEST 2 6L I4 SOHC TUR G54B ECIEFI NONE MANCODES ENGINE ADAPTER MODEL 1986 ENGINE TYPE TYPE CODE TYPE 1986 COLT 1 6L 14 SOHC TUR G32B ECI EFI NONE MANCODES CONOUEST 2 6L 14 SOHC TUR G54B ECI EFI NONE MANCODES CONOUEST 2 6L 14 TUR INT G54B ECI EFI NONE MANCODES ENGINE ADAPTER MODEL 1987 ENGINE TYPE TYPE CODE TYPE 1987 COLT 1 6L 14 SOHC TUR G32B ECI EFI NONE MANCODES COLT VISTA 2 0L 14 SOHC G63B MPI CHECK AUTOCODES CONOUEST 2 6L I4 SOHC TUR G54B ECI EFI CHECK AUTOCODES CONOUEST 2 6L I4 TUR INT G54B ECI EFI CHECK AUTOCODES CHRYSLER IMPORTS 3 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS EN
115. Sensor Voltage Grounded P0132 Upstream HO2 Sensor Shorted to Heater Circuit Voltage P0133 Upstream HO2 Sensor Response P0134 Upstream HO2 Sensor Stays at Center P0135 Right Front HO2 Sensor Malfunction P0136 Right Rear O2 Sensor Malfunction P0137 Downstream HO2 Sensor Voltage Grounded P0138 Downstream HO2 Sensor Shorted to Heater Circuit Voltage P0139 Downstream HO2 Sensor Stays at Center P0140 Downstream HO2 Sensor Stays at Center P0141 Right Rear HO2 Sensor Malfunction P0150 Left Rear O2 Sensor Malfunction P0155 Left Front HO2 Sensor Malfunction 36 MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 98 CONTINUED DTC P0156 P0161 P0170 P0171 P0172 P0173 P0201 P0202 P0203 P0204 P0205 P0206 P0220 P0300 P0301 P0302 P0303 P0304 P0305 P0306 P0325 P0335 P0340 P0351 P0352 P0400 P0401 P0403 P0420 P0421 P0422 P0431 DESCRIPTOR Left Rear O2 Sensor Malfunction HO2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction Bank 2 Sensor 2 Bank 1 Fuel Trim Malfunction Fuel System Lean Fuel System Rich Bank 2 Fuel Trim Malfunction Injector Circuit Cylinder No 1 Malfunction Injector Circuit Cylinder No 2 Malfunction Injector Circuit Cylinder No 3 Malfunction Injector Circuit Cylinder No 4 Malfunction Injector Circuit Cylinder No 5 Malfunction Injector Circuit Cylinder No 6 Malfunction Fuel Pump Re
116. Sensor Response Monitor Right Bank Left Bank Q45 P0140 Rear HO2 Sensor High Voltage Right Bank Left Bank Q45 P0141 Rear HO2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction Right Bank Left Bank Q45 P0150 Front HO2 Sensor Malfunction no Closed Loop Left Bank Right Bank Q45 P0151 Front HO2 Sensor Lean Shift Monitor Left Bank Right Bank Q45 P0152 Front HO2 Sensor Rich Shift Monitor Left Bank Right Bank Q45 18 INFINITI INFINITI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1996 98 P0153 P0154 P0155 P0156 P0157 P0158 P0159 P0160 P0161 P0170 P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 P0180 P0300 P0301 P0302 P0303 P0304 P0305 P0306 P0325 P0330 DESCRIPTOR Front HO2 Sensor Response Monitor Left Bank Right Bank Q45 Front HO2 Sensor High Voltage Left Bank Right Bank Q45 Front HO2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction Left Bank Right Bank Q45 Rear HO2 Sensor Circuit Malfunction Left Bank Right Bank Q45 Rear HO2 Sensor Minimum Voltage Monitor Left Bank Right Bank Q45 Rear HO2 Sensor Maximum Voltage Monitor Left Bank Right Bank Q45 Rear HO2 Sensor Response Monitor Left Bank Right Bank Q45 Rear HO2 Sensor High Voltage Left Bank Right Bank Q45 Rear HO2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction Left Bank Right Bank Q45 Fuel Injection System Function Fuel Injection System Lean Right Bank Left B
117. TEST MODES PARAMETER TOLERANCE LT FT 1 LT FT2 Fuel Pressure MAP Engine Spd Vehicle Spd Ign Timing TPS 025 Sx FT O28 Bx Sx 3 9196 15 kPaG 5 kPa 2 5 RPM 5 kph 2 52 36 0 1 gm s 1 96 0 025 3 91 KEYS gt number Return to DATA LIST menu Scroll through parameters in CUSTOM LIST Print data list if equipped with serial printer Scroll through displayed data parameters or for CUSTOM LIST SETUP SELECT or DESELECT PARAMETERS Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs unlock bottom parameter if fixed Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs unlock top parameter if fixed Toggle the data descriptor line with the Parameter Identification PID number and the ECU Toggle unit conversions for applicable parameters between English and metric COMMON TEST MODES II 13 TEST MODES MODE F1 READINESS The READINESS test mode allows you to display the status of the vehicle s on board monitors which monitor the operation of the emissions related components These READINESS tests must run in order for the DTC and test result displays to accurately reflect the conditions of the vehicle s emissions related components If the vehicle you are testing contains more than one OBD II ECU you will be asked to select which ECU information you would lik
118. TEST MODES I 5 MODE F1 ENTRY 5 The following diagram shows an example of How To Read DTC displays Remember the displays may be different for the vehicle you are testing 6 Press to return to the DTC Entry menu DTC ENTRY F0 HOW TO READ F1 ENTER DTC s F2 DTC LIST SHORT THE 2P SERVICE CHECK CONNECTOR WITH THE SCC JUMPER TURN IGN KEY TO ON THE MIL AND THE ECU LED WILL INDICATE DTCs BY THE AV NUMBER amp LENGTH OF CODE BLINKS 2 DIGIT CODES USE A LONG FOR 1 DIGIT FIGURE 1 1 Example Of How To Read DTCs Displays Scroll through displayed instructions Hold a displayed screen EXIT Return to DTC Entry menu SUBMODE F1 ENTER DTC S The Enter DTC submode displays a description of DTCs entered into the tester memory A list of DTC numbers available for the selected vehicle is available by using submode F2 DTC LIST To select the Enter DTC s submode do the following 1 Press to select DTC Entry from the Select Mode menu 2 Press QD to select Enter DTC s from the DTC Entry menu 6 COMMON TEST MODES MODE F1 ENTRY 3 Use the tester keypad to enter the DTC displayed on the vehicle ECU then press 443 An example of the Enter DTC display sereen is shown in the following figure ENTER DTC ENTER ECU LED Some Honda and Acura vehicles have a single ECU mounted LED that flashes DTCs Refer to the Honda and Acura specific sections th
119. TURBO BOOST PRESSURE CONTROL 45 VACUUM SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 51 FUEL PUMP RESISTOR RELAY 71 INJECTOR FRONT SECONDARY 73 INJECTOR REAR SECONDARY YEAR 1990 DESCRIPTOR 1990 1 IGNITION PULSE IGNITION PULSE IGNITER IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL TRAILING SIDE IGNITION PULSE CIRCUIT 2 NE SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR NE SIGNAL CRANK ANGLE SENSOR NE SIGNAL 34 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1990 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 3 G SIGNAL Gl SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR Gl SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR G SIGNAL CRANK ANGLE SENSOR G SIGNAL 4 G2 SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR G2 SIGNAL 5 KNOCK SENSOR OR KNOCK CONTROL UNIT 8 AIRFLOW METER AIRFLOW SENSOR 9 WATER THERMOSENSOR WATER THERMOSENSOR OR CIRCUIT 10 INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR AIRFLOW METER 11 INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR DYNAMIC CHAMBER INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR ENGINE 12 THROTTLE SENSOR THROTTLE SENSOR FULL RANGE 13 PRESSURE SENSOR INTAKE MANIFOLD PRESSURE VACUUM SENSOR OR CIRCUIT 14 ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR IN ECU ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR ATP ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR OR CIRCUIT 15 O2 SENSOR LEFT SIDE O2 SENSOR O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT 16 EGR POSITION SENSOR CALIFORNIA ONLY EGR POSITION SENSOR EGR POSITION SENSOR OR CIRCUIT 17 FEEDBACK SYSTEM FEEDBACK SYSTEM LEFT SIDE 18 THROTTLE SENSOR NARROW RANGE AIR FUEL SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRC
120. TURBO G32B STARION 2 6L 4 TURBO G54B TREDIA 1 8L 14 TURBO G62B ECI EFI MPI ECI EFI ECI EFI ECI EFI MANCODE MANCODE MANCODE MANCODE m m m m m MANCODE ADAPTER CODE TYPE TYPE MODEL 1986 ENGINE praes 1986 CORDIA 1 8L I4 TURBO G62B GALANT 2 4L 14 G64B MIRAGE 1 6L I4 TURBO G32B STARION 2 6L I4 TUR INT G54B STARION 2 6L I4 TURBO G54B TREDIA 1 8L I4 TURBO G62B ECI EFI MPI EFI ECI EFI ECI EFI ECI EFI Z Z Z z Z Z z Z 7 Z m m m m tm m o O O MANCODE MANCODE MANCODE MANCODE MANCODE MANCODE MITSUBISHI VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1987 ENGINE n VE s CODE TYPE 1987 CORDIA 1 8L 14 TURBO G62B ECIEFI NONE MANCODE GALANT 2 4L 4 G64B MPI CHECK AUTOCODE MIRAGE 1 6L 14 G32B ECIEFI NONE MANCODE STARION 2 6L I4 TUR INT G54B ECIEFI CHECK AUTOCODES STARION 2 6L 4 TURBO G54B ECIEFI CHECK AUTOCODES TREDIA 1 8L 14 TURBO G62B ECIEFI NONE MANCODE VAN WAGON 2 4L 14 G64B MPI CHECK AUTOCODES MODEL 1988 ENGINE poty CODE 1988 CORDIA 1 8L 14 TURBO G62B ECIEFI NONE MANCODE GALANT SIGMA 3 0L V6 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES MIRAGE 1 6L 4 TURBO G32B ECIEFI NONE MANCODE STARION 2 6L I4 TURBO G54B ECIEFI CHECK AUTOCODES TREDIA 1 8L I4 TURBO G62B ECIEFI NONE MANCODE VAN WAGON 2 4L 4 G64B MPI CHECK AUTOCODES MO
121. UP SOLENOID VALVE FOR A C OR CIRCUIT IDLE UP SOLENOID VALVE FOR A T OR CIRCUIT SOLENOID VALVE TRIPLE INDUCTION CONTROL SYSTEM OR O2 SENSOR RELAY SOLENOID VALVE VARIABLE RESONANCE INDUCTION SYSTEM SOLENOID VALVE WASTE GATE VACUUM SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR YEAR 1989 1989 1 2 3 4 IGNITION PULSE IGNITION PULSE IGNITER IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL TRAILING SIDE IGNITION PULSE CIRCUIT NE SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR NE SIGNAL CRANK ANGLE SENSOR NE SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR G SIGNAL Gl SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR Gl SIGNAL G SIGNAL CRANK ANGLE SENSOR G SIGNAL G2 SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR G2 SIGNAL 32 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1989 CONTINUED 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 DESCRIPTOR KNOCK SENSOR OR KNOCK CONTROL UNIT AIRFLOW METER AIRFLOW SENSOR AIRFLOW METER AFM WATER THERMOSENSOR WATER THERMOSENSOR OR CIRCUIT INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR AIRFLOW METER INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR AFM INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR DYNAMIC CHAMBER INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR ENGINE THROTTLE SENSOR THROTTLE SENSOR FULL RANGE PRESSURE SENSOR INTAKE MANIFOLD PRESSURE VACUUM SENSOR OR CIRCUIT ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR WITHIN ECU ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR ATP ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE OR CIRCUIT O2 SENSOR O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT EGR POSI
122. VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT YEAR 1991 DESCRIPTOR 1991 1 SPEC CODE MT FED 2700cc SPEC CODE MT FED NON TURBO 2 SPEC CODE 2700 SPEC CODE MT CA NON TURBO 3 SPEC CODE AT FED CAN SPEC CODE AT FED 2700cc SPEC CODE AT FED CAN 4WD 1800cc SPEC CODE AT FED NON TURBO 4 SPEC CODE AT CAL SPEC CODE AT CA 2700cc SPEC CODE AT CA 4WD 1800cc SPEC CODE AT CA NON TURBO 5 SPEC CODE MT FED CAN SPEC CODE MT FED CAN 1800cc SPEC CODE MT FED TURBO 6 SPEC CODE MT CAL SPEC CODE MT CA 1800cc SPEC CODE MT CA TURBO 7 SPEC CODE AT FED CAN SPEC CODE AT FED FWD 1800cc SPEC CODE AT FED TURBO 8 SPEC CODE AT CAL SPEC CODE AT CA FWD 1800cc SPEC CODE AT CA TURBO 11 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT FAILURE 12 STARTER SWITCH SIGNAL ABNORMAL 13 CAM ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT FAILURE 34 SUBARU SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1991 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR 14 15 16 17 21 22 23 24 25 31 32 33 34 35 41 42 44 45 49 51 52 55 61 FUEL INJECTOR NO 1 INOPERATIVE LEGACY FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT OR CIRCUIT FAILURE LOYALE W SPFI FUEL INJECTORS NO 1 amp 2 ORCIRCUIT FAILURE LOYALE W MPFI FUEL INJECTORS NO 1 amp 2 1800 XT FUEL INJECTORS 5 amp 6 2700 XT6 FUEL INJECTOR NO 2 INOPERATIVE LEGACY FUEL INJECTORS NO 3 amp 4 CIRCUIT FAILURE LOYALE W SPFI FUEL INJECTORS 3 amp 4 1800 XT FUEL INJECTORS NO 1 amp
123. VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS Using the Asian cartridge the following Nissan vehicles can be diagnosed ENGINE ENGINE FUEL ECU ADAPTER TYPE TYPE MODES TYPE 1984 200SX 1 8L I4 TURBO CAISET EFI 2 ECU LED NONE 200SX 2 0L CA20E EFI 2 ECU LED NONE 300ZX 3 0L VG30E EFI 2 ECU LED NONE 300ZX 3 0L V6 TURBO VG30ET EFI 2 ECU LED NONE EET Ed 1985 200SX 1 8L I4 TURBO CA18ET EFI 2 ECU LED NONE 200SX 2 0L I4 CA20E EFI 2 ECU LED NONE 300ZX 3 0L VG30E PFI 2 ECU LED NONE 300ZX 3 0L V6 TURBO VG30ET PFI 2 ECU LED NONE MAXIMA 3 0L VG30E PFI 2 ECU LED NONE STANZA 2 0L I4 CA20E EFI 2 ECU LED NONE mo 1986 200SX 1 8L I4 TURBO CA18ET EFI 2 ECU LED NONE 200SX 2 0L I4 CA20E EFI 2 ECU LED NONE 300ZX 3 0L V6 VG30E 2 ECU LED NONE 300ZX 3 0L V6 TURBO VG30ET PFI 2 ECU LED NONE MAXIMA 3 0L V6 VG30E PFI 2 ECU LED NONE STANZA WGN 2 0L I4 CA20E EFI 2 ECU LED NONE PICKUP D21 2 4L I4 2241 EFI 2 ECU LED NONE SERIES 2 NISSAN VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL CONTINUED ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL CODE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE PICKUP D21 SERIES 3 0L V6 VG30I EFI ECU LED NONE ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL CODE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE 1987 200SX 200SX 2005 3007 PULSAR PULSAR NX SENTRA STANZA VAN PATHFINDER TRUCK PATHFINDER TRUCK
124. VOLTAGE IN MONITOR CIRCUIT RIGHT BANK SVX 23 AIR FLOW SENSOR ABNORMAL VOLTAGE 24 BYPASS AIR CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT FAILURE 28 KNOCK SENSOR 2 ABNORMAL VOLTAGE IN MONITOR CIRCUIT LEFT BANK 29 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 2 ABNORMAL VOLTAGE IN MONITOR CIRCUIT 31 THROTTLE SENSOR ABNORMAL VOLTAGE IN CIRCUIT 32 O2 SENSOR INOPERATIVE LEGACY O2 SENSOR 2 INOPERATIVE RIGHT BANK SVX 33 VSS 2 ABNORMAL VOLTAGE 34 EGR SOLENOID VALVE INOPERATIVE 35 PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE INOPERATIVE 37 O2 SENSOR 2 INOPERATIVE LEFT BANK SVX 38 ENGINE TORQUE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT CIRCUIT 41 A F LEARNING CONTROL FAULTY 42 IDLE SWITCH ABNORMAL VOLTAGE 44 WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE INOPERATIVE 36 SUBARU SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1992 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 45 ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR FAULTY LEGACY NON TURBO PRESSURE SENSOR EXCHANGE SOLENOID VALVE FAULTY LEGACY TURBO ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR FAULTY SENSOR IN ECU SVX 49 IMPROPER AIR FLOW SENSOR IN USE 51 NEUTRAL SWITCH ABNORMAL SIGNAL LEGACY M T INHIBITOR SWITCH ABNORMAL SIGNAL LEGACY A T NEUTRAL SWITCH ABNORMAL SIGNAL FROM PARKING SWITCH SVX 52 PARKING SWITCH ABNORMAL SIGNAL 55 EGR GAS TEMP SENSOR ABNORMAL SIGNAL 56 EGR SYSTEM FAILURE CAL YEAR 1993 DESCRIPTOR 1993 11 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR FAILURE 12 STARTER SWITCH ABNORMAL SIGNAL LEGACY STARTER SWITCH ABNO
125. a slow time division e g 1 2 sec division the DTCs will be shown as a waveform on the display 16 MAZDA TEST MODES Submode F0 How To Read This submode provides information on how to manually read DTCs from the vehicle Step by step screen instructions provide information to correctly set up the vehicle ECU This is performed by following the tester instruction screens If you have trouble additional DTC retrieval information is described below If you refer to the manual for this information make sure that you are following the correct steps for the system that you are working on Submode F1 Enter On Mazda vehicles the Enter DTCs submode allows you to enter manually read DTCs This submode provides you with a text description of the numeric DTC that was entered into the tester The Enter DTC Submode displays two question marks for DTC Entry The tester screen prompts you to enter the DTCs read from the analog voltmeter Be careful when reading the DTC from the analog voltmeter Incorrect voltmeter needle interpretation can cause the wrong DTC description to be displayed Once all DTCs have been manually read and recorded enter each DTC into the tester as described in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section Refer to the appropriate procedure for manually reading ECU DTCs on the following pages Manually Reading DTCs from Mazda Vehicles using 6 Pin 1 pin and 6 pin 17pin DLCs and analog voltmeter 1
126. and TECH kits ISUZU DELCO 3 PIN DLC ADAPTER ISUZU HITACHI 3 PIN DLC ADAPTER P N 02001325 P N 02001326 Isuzu Delco 3 Pin DLC Adapter Isuzu Hitachi 3 Pin DLC Adapter ASIAN IMPORTS JUMPER APPLICATIONS MANUFACTURER P N SINGLE WIRE Chrysler Import Mitsubishi 02002106 2 pin male Yes Daihatsu 02002073 6 pin Yes with shell Kia Nissan 1986 88 Toyota 02002075 2 pin male Yes 1983 85 Toyota 02002076 2 pin male Yes Acura Honda 02001935 2 pin Yes with shell ASIAN IMPORTS ADAPTER CABLE APPLICATIONS MANUFACTURER SUPPORTED CONFIGURATION Chrysler Import 02001921 12 14 pin Mitsubishi Hyundai Mazda 02001922 1 6 17 14 pin Nissan 02001897 12 14 pin Toyota Check 02001896 21 14 pin Toyota TDCL 02001895 17 14 pin All Asian Manufacturers with OBD II 02001969 16 14 pin Compliant Powertrain Systems 10 GENERAL INFORMATION VEHICLE COVERAGE 3 VEHICLE COVERAGE Following is a list of vehicles that can be tested with the Asian Imports Cartridge A more detailed chart is included in the Manufacturer Specific Sections ACURA CHRYSLER IMPORTS DODGE YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1986 90 Integra 1 6L 14 1991 94 Integra 1 8L I4 1992 94 Integra 1 7L 14 1986 Legend 2 5L V6 1987 90 Legend Coupe 2 7L V6 1991 94 Legend Coupe 32L V6 1987 Legend Sedan 2 5L V6 1988 90 Legend Sedan 2 7L V6 199
127. are multiple OBD II ECUS the software will inform you when establishing communication with the vehicle by displaying the following message 2 ECUs RESPONDED XX ENGINE XX TRANS Multiple ECU Status Information When viewing multiple OBD II ECU diagnostic data parameters the symbol equal or gt not equal before the parameter name indicates the parameter is being updated by multiple ECUs The symbol indicates the displayed parameter value is being reported as the same value by multiple ECUs The gt symbol indicates the displayed parameter value is not being reported as the same value by multiple ECUs If there is no symbol before the parameter name the parameter is being updated by a single ECU Engine Speed XX gt 149 RPM Engine Speed XX gt 152 RPM CHARACTER STATUS Indicates multiple controllers are reporting approximately the same value for the parameter Indicates multiple controllers are reporting different data values and the data values are exceeding the tolerance values for the parameter blank Not a multiple ECU response The following table lists the tolerances for the different parameters being labelled or gt Multiple parameters that are within the tolerances are reported as being the same Multiple parameters that are not within the tolerances are reported as being not the same PARAMETER TOLERANCE Engine Load 1 96 ECT 5 ST FT 1 STFT2 3 91 12 COMMON TEST MODES II
128. awh RP RA Sd qe RE 6 perenne die Model D W daa vu REAXSRARPASRI TER EE 6 DOMO IDEAE adque ifa ded dci lab abd Eu pd BSS 6 Selectino the ENGINE Lasse as sau apasanka ORE ER PERE 6 Vehicle Information Display RAE CERA AE RE Ra 6 Select Mode ed dod QU ERR Pad ead Ede dub de d 6 TEST MODES owo odst ywania pter Pe BERN d js e dre irte 8 REGGE EOE pian dao h Sew eee TN qul 084 coded mek n 8 ME AED ERDI wara ee ee eee ee eee eee ee EP RE 8 DAIHATSU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 11 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS mto e pa 2 HONDA SPECIFIC INFORMATION ea aoc mere entm enm en 6 TEST MODES AVAILABLE XXE RES Re e e A 7 GETTING STARTED vh bn PER pru orbita OP IA 8 SELECTING THE VEHICLE Loss Er etm exem ener podio 9 iha The UR Ode PE SEE RE EE 9 SEOS IE Mage DEAD AA babe bd FREE podes 9 VETOON NS MOI eut med paa RAS Ea 9 S uta OE p EPIRI M ERO EV pde beds bt 9 morman DOPA 264264 redes oe Sage uu HE ded 9 SEI Mode Moni aie 9 TEST MODES usus exe rende ende PER pa Fera vede dins 11 Reading odes 11 Ji PLP EM LONE E EE asiak e dee pot E Pap d dki 11 HONDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUB
129. be displayed Press 1959 or wait to advance 5 Press to advance through the text description screens Press to back up through the text description screens These text screens contain items to watch out for during oxygen sensor O2S removal from the vehicle exhaust pipe 6 Press to return to previous menu O2S Replacement 7 Press ai to select Replace from the 025 R amp R information menu The key help screen will be displayed Press 1959 or wait to advance 8 Press D to advance through the text description screens Press to back up through the text description screens These text screens contain items to watch out for during oxygen sensor O2S installation into the vehicle exhaust pipe 9 Press to return to previous menu ACTIVE KEYS Scroll up and down Select Remove O2S Info Select Replace O2S Info GB Select O2S Remove and Replace Info Select O2S Information Advance program from current screen Exit to the previous test menu 40 COMMON TEST MODES II ASIAN IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC DATA PARAMETERS 5 ASIAN IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC DATA PARAMETERS The following are the generic diagnostic data parameters defined by the SAE for OBD II vehicles Not all parameters are displayed for all vehicles Prior to displaying data the tester queries the vehicle to determine which parameters are available for that vehicle AIR STATUS UPSTRM DNSTRM ATM OFF RSRVD Air S
130. been completed or that the selected ECU does not monitor the O2S tests The status of the oxygen sensor tests can be monitored in Fl READINESS TEST MODE under the value of OXYGEN SENSOR MONITORING For some vehicles O2S test results may not be available until all readiness tests have been completed O2 Sensor Test Menu The vehicle can provide O2S test results for up to 8 oxygen sensors When O28 RESULTS is selected the tester queries the ECU to determine which oxygen sensors are present It then displays a list of these sensors so that you can select which sensor s test results to examine To select a bank or sensor press the number listed on the left Refer to Appendix B OBD II OXYGEN SENSOR LOCATION INFORMATION for a discussion of oxygen sensor locations If there is no response to the query the tester displays a warning message indicating that the O2S Test results may not be supported SELECT BANK F0 O28 BANK 1 F1 O28 BANK 2 BANK 1 SENSOR F0 SENSOR 1 F1 SENSOR 2 24 COMMON TEST MODES II TEST MODES 025 Data Display Once the sensor has been selected the tester determines which O2 sensor data parameters are available for display It then displays data for each of the parameters The parameters vary depending on the vehicle manufacturer Only parameters which are supported by the vehicle ECU are displayed R gt L Sw Tim 16 Secs L gt R Sw Tim 0 088 Secs The OXYGEN SENSOR MONITORING TEST RESULTS are rep
131. can be commanded to a sensitive test mode which is found in the Sensitive Test this test triggers the engine ECU into a sensitive mode which detects engine DTCs using a test structure that is less stringent to DTC detection The Asian Imports application cartridge supports reading engine DTCs automatically or manually depending on the state active inactive of the engine system ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION DTCS Toyota ECT DTCs are available on select Toyota vehicles with an ECT refer to the factory service manual for the transmission type for the vehicle you are testing ECT DTCs are set by the ECU when problems with but not limited to the ECU ATF temperature accumulator control solenoid and shift control solenoid s are detected The Asian Imports application cartridge supports reading ECT DTCs automatically or manually depending on the state active or inactive of the ECT system ANTILOCK BRAKE DTCS Toyota ABS DTCs are available on select Toyota vehicles equipped with ABS ABS DTCs are set by the ABS ECU when problems with but not limited to the ECU shorted pump motor relay low brake fluid level and pressure sensor problems are detected The Asian Imports application cartridge supports reading ABS DTCs automatically or manually depending on the state active or inactive of the ABS system 1 TOYOTA OBD SYSTEMS CRUISE CONTROL DTCS Toyota CCS DTCs are available on select Toyota
132. displayed Press the last two digits of the year model being tested for 1990 models for 1991 models and so on SELECTING THE MODEL The Model Select menu displays models available for testing Press the TE key until the model being tested is displayed then press the key SELECTING THE ENGINE Next the Engine Select menu is displayed Press until the engine type of the vehicle is displayed then press VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY After the vehicle type 1s selected the tester displays a summary screen of the selected vehicle Information displayed includes the year manufacturer model engine size and type and additional information such as the type of fuel system SELECT MODE MENU When the above steps are completed the Select Mode menu displays the test modes available for the selected vehicle and system See TEST MODES on page 11 and the Common Test Modes OBD OBDI Systems section for instructions on operating the test modes with Honda vehicles HONDA 9 SELECTING THE VEHICLE MANUFACTURER DAIHATSU gt HONDA HYUNDAI ENTER HONDA 1986 1994 SELECT MODEL YEAR 19 SELECT MODEL ACCORD YES NO SELECT ENGINE 2 2L 14 YES NO 1994 HONDA ACCORD 2 2L 14 SMPFI 63 or 5 sec SELECT MODE F1 DTC ENTRY F5 SYSTEM TESTS F8 INFORMATION FIGURE 1 3 Honda Vehicle Selection ACTIVE KEYS Enter model year o9 Used to answer questions in t
133. enun OE cle 7 SELECTING THE VEHICLE 8 TEST MODES 10 gt 10 Mode PX OI 10 INFINITI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 13 QUEE dicendi a eee rade EAS ped qud de 13 ODD 18 dit ee baa Sa ka 1 VEHICLESAND SYSTEMS 22 02 Fa ER 2 SPECIFIC INFORMATION 222 222222 522 4 5259299 3 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 4 DEIHNGSTABIBIE 2 0240 sere aee 5 SELECTING THE VEHICLE bla we Ra ER Kie 6 Seleting the Manufacturer 6 Mode 6 Selecting Model DOS ORS RAO HER 6 SBIEDONE NE ENE ilii dore did ddd CBAR d Gach kaman UK 6 Vehicle Information Display dub d Xa AXXEXATASETUVAR TER AGR 4488 WHS ES 6 59005 pe d 6 TEST MODES dan eee tied 8 DI 0 15 8 MODE TX DEL ONT a NZ le Ee cae ton hee dut da 8 KIA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 12 O NE AE OO O O O DO ipd 12 PU Dorv 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS dze IERI Rd paren sta 2 Asian Imports 5 EHO A O V OO O iden O cj kiaad beds 3 LEXUS SPECIFIC INFORMATION 4 Two a A A KARA 4
134. mode information 8 NISSAN VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS ENGINE ENGINE FUEL ECU ADAPTER 5 1997 SENTRA 1 6L 14 GA16DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II 200SX SENTRA 2 0L 4 SR20DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II 200SX 240SX 2 4L I4 KA24DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II ALTIMA 2 4L I4 KA24DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II MAXIMA 3 0L V6 VQ30DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II PATHFINDER 3 3L V6 VG33E MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II QUEST 3 0L V6 VG30E MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II TRUCK 2 4L 4 KA24E MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II Adapter Type OBD II see Common Test Modes II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information ENGINE ENGINE FUEL ECU ADAPTER 1998 SENTRA 1 6L 14 GA16DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II 2005 SENTRA 2 0L 4 SR20DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II 2005 2405 2 4L 4 KA24DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II ALTIMA 2 4L I4 KA24DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II MAXIMA 3 0L V6 VQ30DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II PATHFINDER 3 3L V6 VG33E MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II QUEST 3 0L V6 VG30E MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II FRONTIER 2 4L I4 KA24DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II Adapter Type OBD II see Common Test Modes II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information NISSAN 9 NISSAN SPECIFIC INFORMATION 2 NISSAN SPECIFIC INFORMATION The Nissan vehicles covered by the A
135. of Range EGR Vacuum Regulator Circuit Malfunction EGR Boost Sensor or Solenoid Valve Frozen EVAP Control System Circuit Malfunction Purge Flow Sensor Circuit Low Input Purge Flow Sensor Circuit High Input Canister Drain Cut Valve Open or Short Fuel Tank Unable to Bleed Vacuum EVAP Vent Valve Circuit Malfunction Fuel Tank Level Sensor Open or Short Purge Solenoid Valve Control System Malfunction Wide Open Throttle A C Cut Off Circuit Malfunction A C Demand Out of Range Cooling Fan Control Primary Circuit Malfunction Condenser Fan Primary Control Circuit Malfunction EGR Solenoid Vacuum Valve Open or Short EGR Vent Solenoid Open or Short EGR Boost Solenoid Valve Circuit Open or Short EGR Valve Motor Coil 1 Open or Short EGR Valve Motor Coil 2 Open or Short EGR Valve Motor Coil 3 Open or Short EGR Valve Motor Coil 4 Open or Short VSS Circuit Intermittent MAZDA 63 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 1998 DTC DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED NO P1501 VSS Circuit Out of Range P1502 VSS Circuit Signal Lost P1504 IAC Circuit Malfunction P1505 IAC Circuit at Adaptive Clip P1506 IAC Circuit Overspeed Error P1507 IAC Circuit Underspeed Error P1508 Bypass Air Solenoid Valve No 1 Open or Short P1509 Bypass Air Solenoid Valve No 2 Open or Short P1521 Variable Resonance Induction Solenoid 1 Open or Short P1522 Variable Resonance Induction Solenoid 2
136. read DTCs using an analog voltmeter Mastertech Oscilloscope For the automobile manufacturers that mention the use of an analog voltmeter to read manual DTCs the Mastertech Oscilloscope may be used Set up the single channel oscilloscope and make connections the same way as the analog voltmeter above Choose the 20v division scale and a slow time division e g 1 2 sec division the DTCs will be shown as a waveform on the display 4 When Gili is pressed the tester displays the DTC number and a short description of the code 5 After you enter the DTC the tester asks for additional trouble code entry Press to enter another DTC If M9 is pressed the tester displays an instruction screen describing the functions available ADVANCE CODE EXIT QUIT ENTER SUMMARY COMMON TEST MODES I 7 MODE F1 ENTRY 6 Press to move to the next DTC If you wish to hold a DTC screen press to freeze the automatic scrolling feature DTC 03 MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE FAULT 7 Press to view a summary screen of all entered DTCs DTC SUMMARY 8 Press GB to return to the DTC Entry menu KEYS Enter the displayed Enter another DTC o Advance to instruction screen Enter DTC number Move to the next DTC Stop the automatic scrolling Return to DTC Entry menu SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST The DTC List submode provides a list of all DTC numbers and a description of each D
137. s Manual If the vehicle you are testing does not have the OBD II Adapter Type use this section to diagnose the vehicle under test TEST MODES AVAILABLE SUBARU 9 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 3 TEST MODES AVAILABLE The following test modes are available when testing Subaru vehicles Operating instructions for test modes other than DTC Entry are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section There are Subaru specific instructions for operating the test modes Refer to TEST MODES on page 14 MODE F1 DTC ENTRY SUBMODE F0 HOW TO READ SUBMODE F0 U CHECK SUBMODE F1 READ MEMORY SUBMODE F2 D CHECK SUBMODE F1 ENTER DTC s SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST SUBMODE F3 REVIEW DTC SUBMODE F4 CLEAR DTC s MODE F5 SYSTEM TESTS SUBMODE F0 PREP VEHICLE MODE F8 INFORMATION SUBMODE F3 ID INFO SUBMODE F4 DJC LOCATION SUBMODE F5 ECU LOCATION 10 SUBARU GETTING STARTED 4 GETTING STARTED Before operating the Asian Imports Cartridge with a Subaru vehicle the following steps must be performed 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Plug the tester power cable into the vehicle cigarette lighter The power cable may also be directly connected to the battery via the optional battery adapter cable P N 02001636 NOTE Since the cigarette lighter can be switched some tests require that the EH power cable be directly connected to the battery via the battery adapter cable 3 Turn on the tester
138. s memory As you scroll through the available DTCs you can view a description of the DTC obtained from the ECU LED You can Select the DTC on the tester screen for later review or printing Refer to Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further information Submode F3 Review DTC This submode provides you with a review of the DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The description of the entered or selected DTC will be displayed along with a numerical summary ofthe entered or selected DTC Review DTC is intended to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTCs that you have encountered during diagnosis Submode F4 Clear This submode has two options for you to choose Option 1 is an automated function during which the tester clears DTCs from the vehicle ECU memory This is performed by tester keypad presses Option 2 clears the tester memory of DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The clear DTC s mode is helpful and provides information that you would normally have to locate in a service manual NOTE Follow the Submode F0 Prepare Vehicle instructions to ensure proper vehicle preparation prior to testing The vehicle must be completely EH warmed up in order for the tester to communicate properly with the vehicle NISSAN 21 CONTROLS 7 CONTROLS The Controls mode is used to select a submenu of output tests applicable to Nissan vehicle
139. select SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR Once the manufacturer is selected the Select Model Year menu is displayed Press the last two digits of the year model being tested J for 1990 models for 1991 models and so on SELECTING THE MODEL The Select Model menu displays models available for testing Press the key until the model being tested is displayed then press the key SELECTING THE ENGINE AND ENGINE TYPE Next the Select Engine menu is displayed Press until the engine and engine type of the vehicle is displayed then press VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY After the vehicle type is selected the tester displays a summary screen of the selected vehicle Information displayed includes the year manufacturer model engine size and additional information such as the type of fuel system HYUNDAI 9 SELECTING THE VEHICLE SELECT MODE MENU When the above steps are completed the Select Mode menu displays the test modes available for the selected vehicle and system Refer to Section 6 Test Modes and the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems sections for instructions on operating the test modes with Hyundai vehicles MANUFACTURER HONDA gt HYUNDAI INFINITI 1989 2002 SELECT MODEL EXCEL YES NO SELECT ENGINE 1 5L 14 YES NO 1991 HYUNDAI EXCEL 1 5L 14 MPI SELECT MODE Y F1 DTC ENTRY F2 DTC F5 SYSTEM TESTS HYUNDAI VEHICLE SELECTION
140. select DLC Location submode do the following 1 Press to select Information from the Select Mode menu 2 Press to select DLC Location from the Information menu 3 The tester displays the location s of the DLC s and or Check Connectors for the selected vehicle For some Toyota and Lexus vehicles you can select the DLC location of the TDCL or Check connector Some examples of DLC Location displays are shown in the following figure Remember the displays for other vehicles will be different SELECT MODE F3 SNAPSHOT F5 SYSTEM TESTS F8 INFORMATION SELECT MODE F1 DLC LOCATION F2 SCC LOCATION F3 ID INFO NEXT TO NO 2 FUSE RELAY BLOCK ON THE PASSENGER SIDE WHEELWELL 4 If no DLC or Check Connector link is necessary the tester displays one of the following screens NO CONECTOR IS THIS VEHICLE NECESSARY ON DOES NOT SUPPORT VEHICLE TDCL CONNECTOR EXIT 5 Press DD to return to the Information menu Return to Information menu 30 COMMON TEST MODES I MODE F8 INFORMATION SUBMODE F2 SCC LOCATION Submode F2 SCC Location is available for Acura and Honda vehicles only The SCC Location test mode displays where the Service Check Connector SCC for the selected ECU is located on the vehicle Depending on the vehicle being tested there may be one or more different SCCs for the various ECUs The tester informs you if the SCC location is not applicable for the selected system
141. service manual for the current vehicle for further explanation of code 0 Instrument Panel Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL CHRYSLER IMPORTS 17 TEST MODES To manually read DTCs from models that use 12 pin 12 pin and 16 pin DLC and analog voltmeter do the following The DLC type is vehicle dependent refer to the information displayed on the tester FO HOW TO READ the DLC type 1 Locate the 12 pin or 12 pin and 16 pin Diagnostic Connector Use F4 DJC Location from the Information menu for diagnostic connector location 2a 12 pin DLC only Connect analog voltmeter red lead to pin 1 terminal and voltmeter black lead to pin 12 ground terminal of diagnosis connector 2b 12 pin and 16 pin DLC only Connect analog voltmeter red lead to pin 25 of 12 pin DLC and black lead to pin 5 of 16 pin DLC Pin 5 S se EJ VEHICLES WITH 12 PIN AND 16 PIN DLC 3 Turn ignition switch to ON 4 DTC indication will begin on voltmeter Voltmeter will fluctuate 0 to 12 volts if DTCs are stored in ECU If a is stored in ECU the first number of 12 volt 1 5 second indications will egual the 10 s digit of a 2 digit DTC After a 2 0 second pause the second number of 12 volt 0 5 second indications will egual the 1 s digit DTCs are separated by 0 volt indication for 3 0 seconds H DTC 12 DTC SEPARATION Next DTC 12y Indication 4517 0 B soconas 3 sec 1 5 sec 2 se
142. test equipment ISO 9141 provides the basis for a large number of different communications protocols Most of these protocols are specific to various equipment or vehicle manufacturers The title of this document is Road Vehicles Diagnostic Systems Requirements for Interchange of Digital Information J2012 J1979 A European document defining an ISO 9141 protocol to be used for support of CARB OBD II diagnostics The title of this document is Road Vehicles Diagnostic Systems Part 2 CARB Reguirements for Interchange of Digital Information SAE Standard defining 2190 protocols which are used for OBD II communications Two versions of this protocol are used for OBD II the 10 4 Kbits sec VPW protocol and the 41 6 Kbits sec PWM protocol The title of this document is Class B Data Communication Network Interface SAE Recommended Practice 12205 defining standard terminology to be used for support of OBD II testing The title of this document is Electrical Electronic Systems Diagnostic Terms Definitions Abbreviations and Acronyms SAE Recommended Practice defining the industry standard connector used for OBD II This connector contains 16 pins 7 which are defined by the SAE and 9 which are available for manufacturer specific uses The title of this document is Diagnostic Connector SAE Recommended Practice defining the requirements for a standard tester to be used for performing OBD II testi
143. the Enter DTCs submode allows you to enter manually read DTCs This submode provides you with a text description of the numeric DTC that was entered into the tester The Enter DTC submode has two question marks on the tester display for entering the DTC The tester screen prompts you to enter the DTCs read off the ECU LED or the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Be careful when reading the DTC from the ECU LED or MIL Incorrect ECU LED or MIL interpretation can cause the wrong DTC description to be displayed Once all DTCs have been manually read and recorded enter each DTC into the tester as described in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section DTC 32 DTC 51 Next DTC Indication WAT 750 12v FINN LED Ov PRA Hea seconds 1 25 1 28 1 25 f 1 85 12s 12s 12s 12s 12s 1 88 0 35 0 35 0 35 10 38 0 35 0 35 0 35 0 35 0 35 0 25 0 25 0 25 Example of DTC Display and Timing manually read ECU Test Mode DTCs from 1983 Subaru vehicles using dashboard electronic control system ECS lamp and ECU LED O2 Monitor LED do the following 1 Warm engine to normal operating temperature turn all accessory switches OFF 2 Turn OFF ignition key 3 Connect the Test Mode connectors black or clear Use F4 DJC location from the Information menu for location information on the test mode connectors 4 Start the engine and note the instrument panel ECS lamp if engine will not start read
144. the test modes other than DTC Entry are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section Detailed operating instructions for using Mode F1 ENTRY with Infiniti vehicles are included in the following procedure READING CODES When Mode F1 ENTRY is selected the tester displays submodes which provide information on how to read diagnostic trouble codes DTCs from the vehicle how to clear DTCs from the vehicle or tester memory buffer obtain a text description of entered or selected DTCs and review entered or selected DTCs as a result of manually retrieving codes from the ECU To read DTC codes on Infiniti vehicles you must locate the ECU and observe the flashing LED or instrument panel MIL If you do not know where the ECU is located select Mode F5 ECU LOCATION from the Information menu If necessary refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further instructions Follow the detailed instructions on the following pages to manually read the DTCs Once the DTCs have been manually read from the ECU you can input the DTC into the tester so the tester can define the code A complete list of Infiniti DTCs is also included in INFINITI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs on page 13 LED 1 Slide or rotary switch FIGURE 1 3 Typical ECU MODE F1 DTC ENTRY When Mode F1 ENTRY is selected the tester displays five submodes F0 HOW TO READ F1 ENTER DTC s F2 DTC LIST 10
145. to Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further instructions Follow the detailed instructions on the following pages to manually read the DTCs Once the DTCs have been manually read from the MIL or analog voltmeter you can input the DTC into the tester so the tester can define the code A complete list of Toyota DTCs is also included in Section 8 MODE F1 DTC ENTRY This mode is available on 1983 88 Toyota vehicles When Mode F1 ENTRY is selected the tester displays five submodes Operating instructions for the submodes are on the following pages F0 How To Read F1 Enter DTC s F2 DTC List F3 Review DTC F4 Clear DTC s Manually Reading DTCs To manually read Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs on Toyota vehicles from 1983 88 there are 2 methods that can be used The first method is for the 1983 84 Cressida and Celica Supra which requires an analog voltmeter Using the analog voltmeter set to a 20 volt scale and connected to the EFI Service connector and a single wire jumper placed on the Diagnostic Jumper Connector Check DJC the DTC can be interpreted from the analog voltmeter needle flashes The second method requires the use of a single wire jumper that is 24 TOYOTA TEST MODES placed across 2 pins of the 2 or 17 pin DJC depending on the model year In a similar fashion the DTCs are instead flashed out on the instrument panel mounted Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL For the automobile manu
146. trigger to be set The various trigger conditions are explained fully in Step 2 of the operating procedures TRIGGER POINT If F9 TRIG POINT is selected from the Snapshot Options menu a trigger point selection menu is displayed Trigger Point allows you to specify which data to capture data that occurs before after or both before and after the point at which the trigger occurs If no trigger point is selected the center trigger point will be used and a similar number of data samples before and after the trigger will be saved Selecting a trigger point is fully explained in Step 2 of the operating procedures VIEWING CAPTURED DATA By selecting F3 REPLAY DATA from the Snapshot menu you have the option of bypassing the Data Capture phase and displaying previously captured data data captured during Snapshot will be retained in the tester memory for up to 24 hours even if the tester is unplugged from the vehicle or until it is overwritten by a new Snapshot PRINTING CAPTURED DATA In addition you can print the captured data providing a hard copy of any selected data sample See Step 11 for more detail OPERATING PROCEDURE The operation of Snapshot mode is divided into three phases Set Up Steps 1 2 Data Capture Steps 3 6 and Data Display Steps 7 12 20 COMMON TEST MODES I MODE F3 SNAPSHOT Setup Phase To select the setup phase of Snapshot mode do the following 1 Press to select Snapshot mode f
147. until it is overwritten by a new Snapshot In addition to a trigger condition selection you have the option of selecting a trigger point The trigger will be at the beginning of the captured data After the trigger occurs the tester continues capturing data until the memory is full then the data is displayed If not enough data samples have been collected to fill the tester memory because was pressed before the tester memory was full some data samples captured before the trigger point will also be available for display If enough time has elapsed before and after the trigger point a similar number of data samples that occurred before and after the trigger point are available for display However if the trigger occurs at or near the start of the Data Capture phase there are fewer samples before the trigger point available for display Also if the key is pressed after the trigger occurs but before the tester memory is full fewer data samples captured after the trigger point are available for display Data that occurred before the trigger is displayed If the tester memory was not full when the trigger occurred some data samples captured after the trigger point are also available for display COMMON TEST MODES I 21 MODE F3 SNAPSHOT SELECT MODE F3 SNAPSHOT F5 SYSTEM TESTS ae SELECT TRIGGER POINT SELECT SINGLE CODE TRIGGER POINT AT F0 BEGINNING F1 CENTER of F2 END of d
148. until the arrow is opposite the manufacturer you wish to select Press D or to scroll to Mitsubishi Then press to select SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR Once the manufacturer is selected the Select Model Year menu is displayed Press the last two digits of the year model being tested for 1990 models D for 1991 models and so on SELECTING THE MODEL The Model Select menu displays models available for testing Press the key until the model being tested is displayed then press the key SELECTING THE ENGINE AND ENGINE TYPE Next the Select Engine menu is displayed Press until the engine and fuel type of the vehicle is displayed then press VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY After the vehicle type 15 selected the tester displays a summary screen of the selected vehicle Information displayed includes the year manufacturer model engine size and additional information such as the type of fuel system MITSUBISHI 15 SELECTING THE VEHICLE SELECT MODE MENU When the preceding steps are completed the Select Mode menu displays the test modes available for the selected vehicle and system Refer to TEST MODES on page 17 and the COMMON TEST MODES I section for instructions on operating the test modes with Mitsubishi vehicles MANUFACTURER Y MAZDA gt MITSUBISHI NISSAN MITSUBISHI 1994 2002 SELECT SELECT MODEL 3000 GT YES NO SELECT ENGINE 3 0L V6 DOHC YES NO 19
149. using the and keys without the need to enter DTC numerically Submode F3 The REVIEW submode displays DTCs that have been entered or selected and Review DTC stored in the tester memory Submode F4 Clearing DTCs from ECUS on import vehicles sometimes requires special manual Clear DTC s steps not related to the tester The Clear DTC menu has a selection for clearing DTCs from the selected vehicle e g removing a certain fuse or disconnecting the battery The Clear submode also contains a selection for clearing DTCs entered into the tester memory SUBMODE F0 HOW TO READ The How To Read submode explains how to set up the selected vehicle to display stored DTCs on the dashboard Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL Once the DTCs are displayed you can enter the code numbers into the tester as described in submode F1 ENTER DTC for a description of the code To select the How To Read submode do the following 1 Press al to select DTC Entry from the Select Mode menu 2 Press G to select How To Read from the DTC Entry menu 3 Use the key to scroll through the How to Read DTC instructions Press to hold a display 4 For some vehicles that require you to watch the flashing LEDs on the ECU the tester gives you the option of displaying the location of the ECU If you are in doubt about the location of the ECU press to select Information from the Select Mode menu then press G to select ECU Location COMMON
150. vehicle and test mode information A complete list of Chrysler Imports Diagnostic Trouble Codes is included at the back of each section To determine which section of the Operator s Manual to use for diagnostic information and instructions look at Adapter Type of the Vehicles and Systems chart If the vehicle you are testing has an OBD II adapter type use the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section of the Operator s Manual If the vehicle you are testing does not have the OBD II Adapter Type use this section to diagnose the vehicle under test CHRYSLER IMPORTS 11 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 3 TEST MODES AVAILABLE The following test modes are available when testing Chrysler Imports vehicles that have OBD OBD I systems Operating instructions for test modes other than F1 DTC Entry and F2 DTCs are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section There are specific instructions for operating the test modes Refer to TEST MODES on page 16 MODE F1 DTC ENTRY SUBMODE F0 HOW TO READ SUBMODE F1 ENTER DTC s SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST SUBMODE F3 REVIEW DTC SUBMODE F4 CLEAR DTC s MODE F2 DTC SUBMODE F1 READ DTC s SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST SUBMODE F3 REVIEW DTC SUBMODE F4 CLEAR DTC s MODE F5 SYSTEM TESTS SUBMODE F0 PREP VEHICLE MODE F8 INFORMATION SUBMODE Fl DLC LOCATION SUBMODE F3 ID INFO SUBMODE F4 DJC LOCATION Note that not all models support DJC or DLC Location Test modes The tester will
151. 0 LS400 SC400 3 0L V6 3 0L 16 3 0L 16 4 0L V8 4 0L V8 3VZ FE 2JZ GE 2JZ GE 1UZ FE 1UZ FE SFI SFI SFI MFI MFI CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA OBD CHECK TDCL CHECK TDCL CHECK TDCL CHECK TDCL For all Adapter Type OBD II use Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information ELECTRONIC TRANSMISSIONS Using the Asian Imports Cartridge the following Lexus Electronic Transmission Transaxle Applications can be diagnosed SC400 SC300 GS300 LS400 ES300 ES300 A340E A341E 540 541 LEXUS MODEL TRANSMISSION LEXUS LEXUS SPECIFIC INFORMATION 2 LEXUS SPECIFIC INFORMATION TWO WAYS TO DIAGNOSE LEXUS Lexus powertrain diagnosis can be performed with the Asian Imports cartridge installed in a Tech 1 Tech 1A or Mastertech tester Additionally Lexus vehicles can be diagnosed with the aftermarket version of the Lexus OEM level program card software using the Mastertech tester only Operating instructions and test mode information are available for the OEM level software in the Lexus Program Card Operator s Manual If you do not have the necessary Program Card and Mastertech tester to perform OEM level diagnostics you can use the Asian Imports Software for limited model year coverage The following Lexu
152. 0L V6 2 6L 14 1 6L 14 1 3L R2 1 3L R2 TURBO 2 2L 14 2 2L 14 2 6L 14 EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI CARB EGI EFI B6 BP BP F2 F2 JE JE JE G6 B6 REI3B RE13B F2 F2 G6 CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK NONE CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES FORDCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES MAZDA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1992 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE TYPE ADAPTER CODE TYPE 1992 323 PROTEGE 323 PROTEGE 323 PROTEGE 626 MX6 626 MX6 929 NAVAJO MX3 MX3 MPV MPV MX5 MIATA B2200 B2200 B2600i 1 6L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 DOHC 2 2L 14 2 2L 14 TURBO 3 0L V6 4 0L V6 1 6L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 DOHC 3 0L V6 2 6L 14 1 6L 14 22L 4 22L 4 2 6L 4 EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI CARB EGI MFI EGI MFI B6 BP BP F2 F2 JE B6 K8 JE G6 B6 F2 CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK NONE CHECK CHECK CHECK CH
153. 1 8L 4 SOHC 1989 96 Montero 3 0L V6 1994 98 Montero 3 5L V6 DOHC 1997 98 Montero Sport 2 4L 14 SOHC 1997 98 Montero Sport 3 0L V6 SOHC 1990 94 Precis 1 5L 14 1988 Sigma 3 0L V6 1984 87 Starion 2 6L I4 Turbo 1986 89 Starion 2 6L 14 Turbo I 1984 88 Tredia 1 8L 14 Turbo 1990 95 Truck 2 4L 14 1990 95 Truck 3 0L V6 1987 90 Van Wagon 2 4L 14 NISSAN YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1984 88 200SX 1 8L 14 Turbo 1984 88 200SX 2 0L 14 1984 88 200SX 3 0L V6 1995 98 200SX 1 6L 14 1995 98 200SX 2 0L 14 1989 98 240SX 2 4L 14 1984 96 300ZX 3 0L 18 GENERAL INFORMATION VEHICLE COVERAGE SUBARU MODEL ENGINE 1993 98 Altima 2 4L I4 1990 Axxess 2 4L I4 1998 Frontier 2 4L 14 1985 98 Maxima 3 0L V6 1991 94 NX Coupe 1 6L 14 1991 94 NX Coupe 2 0L 14 1986 93 Pathfinder 2 4L 14 1986 96 Pathfinder 3 0L V6 1997 98 Pathfinder 3 3L V6 1987 90 Pulsar NX 1 6L I4 1988 89 Pulsar NX 1 8L I4 1993 98 Quest 3 0L V6 1987 98 Sentra 1 6L I4 1991 98 Sentra 2 0L I4 1985 89 Stanza 2 0L I4 1990 92 Stanza 2 4L I4 1995 96 Stanza 2 4L I4 1986 93 Truck 2 4L 14 1986 95 Truck 3 0L V6 1995 97 Truck 2 4L 14 1989 Van 2 4L 14 YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1986 89 3 Door 1 8L 1983 84 BRAT 1 8L 1998 Forester 2 5L 1983 84 Hardtop 1 8L 1984 Hardtop 1 6L 1998 94 Hatchback 1 6L 1998 94 Hatchback 1 8L 1993 97 Impreza 1 8L GENERAL INFORMATION 19 VEHICLE COVERAGE TOYOTA
154. 1 94 Legend Sedan 32L V6 1991 94 NSX 3 0L V6 1992 94 Vigor 2 5L V6 YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1995 98 Avenger 2 0L DOHC I4 1995 98 Avenger 2 5L V6 SOHC 1984 89 Colt 1 6L I4 Turbo 1988 90 Colt 1 6L I4 1988 98 Colt 1 5L I4 1993 98 Colt 1 8L I4 1989 Colt 2000 1 6L I4 Turbo 1989 90 Colt 2000 1 6L I4 1989 92 Colt 2000 1 5L I4 1987 91 Colt Vista 2 0L I4 1992 95 Colt Vista 1 8L I4 1992 95 Colt Vista 2 4L 14 GENERAL INFORMATION 11 VEHICLE COVERAGE CHRYSLER IMPORTS EAGLE YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1989 90 Colt Wagon 1 5L 14 1989 90 Colt Wagon 1 8L 14 1985 89 Conquest 2 6L 14 Turbo 1990 93 Power Ram 50 2 4L 4 1990 93 Power Ram 50 3 0L V6 1990 Ram 50 3 0L V6 1990 93 Ram 50 2 4L 14 1989 Ram Raider 3 0L V6 1995 98 Sebring 2 0L DOHC I4 1995 98 Sebring 2 5L V6 SOHC 1991 96 Stealth 3 0L SOHC V6 1991 96 Stealth 3 0L DOHC V6 1991 96 Stealth 3 0L DOHC Turbo V6 1989 90 Vista Wagon 2 0L 14 YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1989 90 Summit 1 6L I4 1989 96 Summit 1 5L I4 1993 96 Summit 1 8L I4 1992 96 Summit Wagon 1 8L 14 1992 96 Summit Wagon 2 4L I4 1990 94 Talon 1 8L I4 1990 95 Talon 2 0L I4 1990 95 Talon 2 0L I4 Turbo 1996 98 Talon 2 0L I4 1996 98 Talon 2 0L I4 Turbo 12 GENERAL INFORMATION VEHICLE COVERAGE CHRYSLER IMPORTS PLYMOUTH DAIHATSU HONDA YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1990 94 Laser 1 8L 14 1990 94 Laser 2 0L I4 1990 94 Laser 2 0L I4 Turbo
155. 11 volts or more throttle valve fully closed throttle position sensor IDL contacts closed transmission or transaxle in Neutral position accessories switched OFF engine at normal operating temperature 2 Turn ignition key to ON engine OFF 3 Locate the 2 pin Check Diagnostic Jumper Connector press F4 DJC LOCATION from the Information menu for help on DJC location 4 Jumper T and EI terminals by connecting the single wire Toyota Jumper P N 02002076 to the vehicle s 2 pin DJC ET TOYOTA 27 TEST MODES 5 Install analog voltmeter to the EFI service connector Place positive lead on Vf terminal and negative lead on E1 terminal Set analog voltmeter to 20 volt scale V N C E 1 6 Analog voltmeter will begin flashing DTCs If DTCs are stored in ECU there will be a 5 volt indication for 2 seconds followed by a 2 5 volt indication for another 2 seconds Thereafter the number of times the needle deflects between 2 5 volts and 5 volts every 0 6 seconds is the first digit 10 s of a 2 digit code Next the number of times the needle deflects between 2 5 volts and 0 volts every 0 6 seconds is the second digit 1 s of a 2 digit code If no are stored in ECU MIL will flash normal code T EI START 12 gt 41 5v NE Next DTC 207 Indication Ov seconas 2 2 HHHH 2 HHHHHHH I Lost 7 If malfunctions are present t
156. 13 BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE 14 ELECTRONIC IDLE CONTROL FAILURE 15 IGNITION OUTPUT SIG OR CKT FAIL 16 FUEL INJECTOR FAILURE 17 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 19 A T LOCK UP SOL VALVE A B 20 ELECTRIC LOAD SENSOR 21 VTEC SOLENOID VALVE 22 VTEC PRESSURE SWITCH 23 KNOCK SENSOR OR KS CIRCUIT FAIL 30 A T FI SIGNAL 31 A T FI SIGNAL B 41 HO2S HEATER OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 43 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM 48 HO2S CIVIC D15Z1 EXCEPT CA 22 HONDA HONDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1994 DAG DESCRIPTOR NO 1994 0 FAULTY ECU OR ECU FAILURE 1 HO2S OR HO2S CIRCUIT FAILURE MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE R CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CIRCUIT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR TDC O N o CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL 10 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 12 EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE 13 BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE 14 ELECTRONIC IDLE CONTROL FAILURE 15 IGNITION OUTPUT SIG OR CKT FAIL 16 FUEL INJECTOR FAILURE 17 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 19 A T LOCK UP SOL VALVE A B 20 ELECTRIC LOAD SENSOR 21 VTEC SOLENOID VALVE 22 VTEC PRESSURE SWITCH 23 KNOCK SENSOR OR KS CIRCUIT FAIL 30 A T FI SIGNAL A 31 A T FI SIGNAL B 41 HO2S HEATER OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 43 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM 48 HO2S CIVIC D15Z1 EXCEPT CA HONDA 23 HONDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 24 HONDA H
157. 14 4A C CARB MILCODES JUMPER TOYOTA 3 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1987 CONTINUED ENGINE ENGINE ADAPTER COROLLA CRESSIDA MR2 SUPRA SUPRA VAN TRUCK TRUCK TRUCK 4 RUNNER MODEL 1988 1 6L 4 2 81 16 1 6L 14 3 0L I6 3 0L I6 2 2L 4 2 4L 4 2 4L 14 2 4L 14 2 4L 14 ENGINE 4A GE 5M GE 4A GE 7M GE 7M GTE 4Y E 22R 22R E 22R TE 22RE ENGINE EFI EFI EFI EFI EFITURBO EFI CARB EFI EFI TURBO EFI MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER ADAPTER 1988 CAMRY CAMRY ALL TRAC CELICA CELICA CELICA CELICA ALL TRAC COROLLA COROLLA COROLLA FX COROLLA FX16 CRESSIDA MR2 MR2 SUPRA SUPRA VAN 2 0L 4 2 0L 4 2 0L 4 2 0L 4 2 0L 4 2 0L 4 1 6L 14 1 6L 14 1 6L 14 1 6L 14 2 8L 16 1 6L 14 1 6L 14 3 0L 16 3 0L 16 2 2L 4 35 35 35 3S GE 3S GTE 3S GTE 4A F 4A GE 4A GE 4A GE 5M GE 4A GE 4A GZE 7M GE 7M GTE 4Y E EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI TURBO EFI TURBO CARB EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI TURBO EFI MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES
158. 1A testers This circuitry can be installed in the following configurations Mastertech Tech 1A and Tech 1 MASTERTECH set up the Mastertech tester to test II compliant vehicles do the following 1 Make sure the tester is OFF Insert the Asian Imports application cartridge into the cartridge slot at the top of the OBD II compliant Mastertech 2 Be sure the vehicle ignition switch is off 3 Remove any adapters installed on the Data Link Connector DLC cable 4 Connect the DLC cable to the tester and tighten the screws 5 Connect the 16 14 Pin OBD II Adapter Cable to the DLC cable 6 Connect the OBD II Adapter Cable to the vehicle DLC 7 Turn the tester ON Power and ground are provided through the DLC connector so connecting the 12V power cable to the vehicle is not required 8 Turn the vehicle ignition switch on to begin diagnostics 9 Refer to this manual and the application cartridge operator s manual for software operating instructions 4 Application Cartridge Mastertech Tester o Z DLC Cable ff 16 14 Pin _2 OBD II Adapter A Type 3 Cable LI NN pa FIGURE 1 1 Mastertech Setup 4 COMMON TEST MODES II HARDWARE REQUIRED TECH 1A To setup the Tech 1A tester to test OBD II compliant vehicles do the following 1 Insert the OBD Interface Cartridge into the Auxiliary cartridge slot at the top rear of the tester 2 Insert the Asian Imports application
159. 2 2700cc XT6 INJECTOR NO 3 INOPERATIVE INJECTOR NO 4 INOPERATIVE WATER TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT FAILURE KNOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT FAILURE AIR FLOW METER SENSOR CIRCUIT FAILURE BYPASS AIR CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT FAILURE FUEL INJECTORS NO 3 amp 4 CIRCUIT FAILURE TPS CIRCUIT FAILURE O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT FAILURE VSS SIGNAL ABNORMAL EGR SOLENOID VALVE CONTINUOUSLY ON OR OFF CANISTER PURGE SYSTEM FAILURE AIR FUEL SYSTEM FAILURE IDLE SWITCH CIRCUIT ABNORMAL WASTEGATE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE PRESSURE SENSOR EXCHANGE SOLENOID VALVE FAILURE LEGACY TURBO ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR FAULTY LEGACY NON TURBO KICK DOWN CONTROL RELAY FAILURE CONTINUOUSLY ON OR OFF LOYALE W SPFI AIR FLOW SENSOR USE OF IMPROPER SENSOR NEUTRAL INHIBITOR SWITCH CIRCUIT FAILURE PARKING SWITCH SIGNAL ABNORMAL EGR GAS TEMP SENSOR OPEN OR SHORT PARKING SWITCH CIRCUIT FAILURE SWITCH CONTINUOUSLY ON SUBARU 35 SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1992 DESCRIPTOR 1992 11 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT FAILURE 12 STARTER SWITCH ABNORMAL SIGNAL 13 CAM ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT FAILURE 14 INJECTOR NO I INOPERATIVE 15 INJECTOR NO 2 INOPERATIVE 16 INJECTOR NO 3 INOPERATIVE 17 INJECTOR NO 4 INOPERATIVE 18 INJECTOR NO 5 INOPERATIVE 19 INJECTOR NO 6 INOPERATIVE 21 WATER TEMP SENSOR ABNORMAL SIGNAL 22 KNOCK SENSOR ABNORMAL VOLTAGE IN MONITOR CIRCUIT LEGACY KNOCK SENSOR 1 ABNORMAL
160. 2 DTC TEST SELECTION MENU DESCRIPTION The tester displays up to three test modes at a time If other test modes are available the tester automatically scrolls to the next menu display after three seconds To stop the automatic scrolling press the key The display may then be manually scrolled by pressing the key Regardless of which test modes are displayed any test mode can be selected at any time from the menu All menus of more than three items scroll in this way SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST F1 DTC ENTRY SELECT MODE F3 SNAPSHOT F4 OBD CONTROLS GENERAL INFORMATION OPERATING PRECAUTIONS 1 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING THE TESTER WHILE IGNITION KEY IS ON Due to the possibility of voltage spikes that could damage the vehicle or tester electronics you should not connect or disconnect the tester while the ignition key is ON or while the engine is running REMOVING THE CARTRIDGE WHILE THE TESTER IS POWERED ON The cartridge should not be removed or installed from the tester while the tester is powered on If after installing the cartridge the tester does not appear to be functioning properly reset the tester by disconnecting the power plug from the vehicle and reconnecting it VEHICLE SPECIFIC PRECAUTIONS For some vehicles additional precautions are included in the Manufacturer Specific Sections 4 GENERAL INFORMATION ASIAN IMPORTS CARTRIDGE KIT DESCRIPTION 2 ASIA
161. 2 EGR SENSOR OR EGR CKT FAILURE 33 025 OR O2S CIRCUIT FAILURE LEFT O2S OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 34 KNOCK SENSOR OR KS CKT FAILURE KS OR KS CKT FAILURE SR20DE 35 EXHAUST GAS TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT 41 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 43 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 45 INJECTOR LEAK 51 FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 53 RIGHT O2S OR CIRCUIT FAILURE NISSAN 33 NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1991 CONTINUED 54 55 DESCRIPTOR TCM TO ECU CIRCUIT FAILURE FAULTY A T CONTROL UNIT NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECU YEAR 1992 1992 11 12 13 14 21 22 31 32 33 34 35 41 42 45 51 53 54 55 DESCRIPTOR CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL AIR FLOW METER CIRCUIT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE FUEL PUMP OR FP CIRCUIT FAILURE FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE EGR SENSOR OR EGR CKT FAILURE 025 OR 025 CIRCUIT FAILURE LEFT O2S OR CIRCUIT FAILURE KNOCK SENSOR OR KS CKT FAILURE EXHAUST GAS TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE FUEL TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE INJECTOR LEAK FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE RIGHT 02 OR CIRCUIT FAILURE TCM TO ECU CIRCUIT FAILURE FAULTY A T CONTROL UNIT NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECU YEAR 1993 1993 11 12 DESCRIPTOR CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL MAF SENSOR OR MAF CKT FAILURE
162. 21A1 MPFI MPFI MPFI MPFI MPFI MPFI MPFI 2 1V CARB MPFI MPFI MIL LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED MIL LED MIL LED 1992 ACCORD CIVIC CIVIC CIVIC PRELUDE 1993 ACCORD CIVIC ENGINE 2 2L 4 1 5L 14 1 5L 14 1 6L 14 22 2 3L 14 ENGINE 2 2L 14 1 5L 14 ENGINE TYPE F22A1 F22 A6 D15B7 D15B8 D15Z1 D16Z6 F22A1 H23A1 ENGINE TYPE F22A1 F22A6 D15B7 D15B8 FUEL SYSTEM MPFI MPFI MPFI MPFI MPFI MPFI MPFI MPFI FUEL SYSTEM MPFI MPFI MPFI MPFI CODE TYPE MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED CODE TYPE MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED JUMPER TYPE SCC SCC SCC SCC SCC SCC SCC SCC JUMPER TYPE SCC SCC SCC SCC HONDA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL SYSTEM CODE yt CIVIC 1 5L 14 01571 MPFI MIL LED SCC CIVIC 1 6L 4 VTEC D16Z6 MPFI MIL LED SCC CIVIC DEL SOL 1 5 D15B7 SMPFI MIL LED SCC 1 6L I4 VTEC D16Z6 SMPFI MIL LED SCC PRELUDE 2 2L I4 F22A1 SMPFI MIL LED SCC PRELUDE 2 2L I4 VTEC H22A1 SMPFI MIL LED SCC PRELUDE 2 3L 14 H23A1 SMPFI MIL LED SCC ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL SYSTEM CODE peii 1994 ACCORD
163. 23 PROTEGE 323 PROTEGE 323 PROTEGE 626 MX6 M T 626 MX6 A T 626 MX6 929 NAVAJO MPV MPV MX3 MX3 MX5 MIATA RX7 B SERIES B SERIES B SERIES 1 6L 14 SOHC 1 8L 4 SOHC 1 8L 14 DOHC 2 0L 4 2 0L 14 2 5L V6 3 0L V6 DOHC 4 0L V6 3 0L V6 2 6L 4 1 6L 14 1 8L 14 DOHC 1 8L 14 DOHC 1 3L R2 TURBO 2 3L I4 3 0L V6 4 0L V6 EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI MFI MFI MFI B6 BP BP FS FS KL JE JE G6 B6 K8 BP 13B CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK NONE CHECK CHECK NONE CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK NONE NONE NONE AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES FORDCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES FORDCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES FORDCODES FORDCODES FORDCODES MAZDA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1995 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE 1995 323 PROTEGE 323 PROTEGE 626 MX6 626 MX6 929 MPV MPV MX3 MX3 MX5 MIATA RX7 B SERIES B SERIES B SERIES 1 8L 14 1 5L 14 2 0L DOHC 2 5L DOHC 3 0L V6 DOHC 3 0L V6 DOHC 2 6L 14 1 6L 14 1 8L V6 1 8L 14 DOHC 1 3L R2 TURBO 2 3L 14 3 0L V6 4 0L V6 EFI EFI SFI SFI SF
164. 2S Test Results mode and by the Non Continuous On Board Test Results mode to identify manufacturer specific tests The service manual for the vehicle under test should be used to interpret the TID Temperature Throttle Position Tuned Port Injection Throttle Position Sensor Absolute Throttle Position Sensor in percent Traction Transmission Vehicle operation following a key off period which has at least one warm up cycle and one drive cycle Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter A standard data encoding technigue used extensively for serial communication Vacuum Volume Air Flow VDEIC VEH VICS VIN VLV VOLT vPW VRIS VSS VSV VTEC Warm up Cycle WOT WST Variable Dynamic Effect Intake Control Vehicle Variable Inertia Charging System Vehicle Identification Number Valve Voltage Variable Pulse Width Modulation The method used to encode the data in the 10 4 Kbit sec version of the J1850 protocol Variable Resonance Induction System Vehicle Speed Sensor Vacuum Switching Valve Variable Timing Electronic Camshaft Engine coolant temperature increase by at least 40 F since start up that reaches a temperature of 160 F Wide Open Throttle Wastegate GLOSSARY OF TERMS ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 20 APPENDICES
165. 4 21 ECM INTERNAL FAILURE FRONT HO2S OR CKT FAILURE VOL AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE ALL EXCEPT ACCENT SCOUPE ECM INTERNAL FAILURE ACCENT SCOUPE TPS OR CKT FAILURE ECT OR CKT FAILURE EXCEPT ACCENT SCOUPE 22 HYUNDAI HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 27 29 31 33 36 37 38 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 47 59 81 HO2S OR CKT FAILURE ACCENT SCOUPE CRANK POSITION SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE ALL EXCEPT ACCENT SCOUPE MAF SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE ACCENT SCOUPE CAM POSITION SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE ALL EXCEPT ACCENT SCOUPE ECT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE ACCENT SCOUPE VSS REED SWITCH OR CKT FAILURE ALL EXCEPT ACCENT SCOUPE CAM POSITION SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE ACCENT SCOUPE BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE ALL EXCEPT ACCENT SCOUPE CRANK POSITION SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE ACCENT SCOUPE TPS OR CKT FAILURE KNOCK SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE VSS OR CKT FAILURE INCORRECT BATTERY VOLTAGE DETECTED A C SWITCH OR RELAY FAILURE HI BOOST CHECK WASTEGATE CONTROL SYSTEM WASTE GATE CONTROL SOL VAC FAILURE WASTE GATE CONTROL SOL CKT FAILURE FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE NO 1 INJECTOR FAILURE ACCENT SCOUPE FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE NO 2 INJECTOR FAILURE ACCENT SCOUPE EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR ALL EXCEPT ACCENT SCOUPE NO 3 INJECTOR FA
166. 4 O2S Information Submode F0 Location Subinde FU PyBe aae AZ Submode FA MaintenatiGg u u apod ete uu uu enel eda n inis 5 ASIAN IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC DATA PARAMETERS oco tette 41 COMMON TEST MODES II TEST MODES AVAILABLE 1 TEST MODES AVAILABLE The OBD II Section defines available test modes hardware requirements and operating instructions for all OBD II compliant vehicles OBD II functions except OBD II Toolpak require communication with the vehicle ECU s Once the necessary hardware has been installed communication between the tester and vehicle ECU S can be initialized The following test modes are available when testing Asian Imports vehicles that are OBD II compliant F0 DATALIST F0 Display Data F1 Data Setup F1 READINESS F2 DTCS F0 Read DTCs Fl Freeze Data F2 Clear Info F3 Pending DTCs F3 SNAPSHOT F4 OBD CONTROLS F5 SYSTEM TESTS F0 O2S Results F1 Other Results F8 INFORMATIONS F9 II TOOLPAK NOTE Not all models support OBD Controls or Information test modes The tester will automatically determine whether the vehicle under test supports the test mode when the mode is selected COMMON TEST MODES II 3 HARDWARE REQUIRED 2 HARDWARE REQUIRED In order to be fully functional the Asian imports Application cartridge requires that special OBD II Interface Circuitry be used with the Mastertech and Tech 1
167. 40 Downstream HO2 Sensor not Switching P0141 Downstream HO2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction P0151 Upstream HO2 Sensor Front Bank Short to Ground P0152 Upstream HO2 Sensor Front Bank Short to Battery Voltage P0153 Upstream HO2 Sensor Front Bank Slow Response P0154 Upstream HO2 Sensor Front Bank no Switching P0155 HO2 Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1 Heater Circuit Malfunction P0156 O2 Sensor Bank 2 sensor 2 Circuit Malfunction P0157 Downstream HO2 Sensor Front Bank Short to Ground P0158 Downstream HO2 Sensor Front Bank Short to Battery Voltage P0160 Downstream HO2 Sensor Front Bank not Switching P0161 HO2 Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 2 Heater Circuit Malfunction P0170 Fuel Trim Bank 1 System Malfunction P0171 Fuel System Lean Condition P0172 Fuel System Rich Condition P0173 Fuel Trim Bank 2 System Malfunction P0174 Fuel System Front Bank Lean Condition 34 CHRYSLER IMPORTS CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES YEAR 1996 98 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR P0175 P0201 P0202 P0203 P0204 P0205 P0206 P0220 P0300 P0301 P0302 P0303 P0304 P0305 P0306 P0325 P0335 P0340 P0351 P0352 P0400 P0401 P0403 P0420 P0421 P0422 P0431 P0432 P0440 P0441 P0442 P0443 Fuel System Front Bank Rich Condition Fuel Injector No 1 Circuit Malfunction Fuel Injector No 2 Circuit Malfunction Fuel Injector No 3 Circuit Malfunction Fuel Injector No 4 Circuit
168. 42 43 43 43 44 44 45 45 45 46 46 47 51 52 53 53 54 54 59 59 DESCRIPTOR KNOCK SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE B18C1 ENGINE INTEGRA LEFT KNOCK SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE LEGEND A T FISIGNAL A A T FI SIGNAL B TC STB SIGNAL LEGEND GS MODEL TC STB SIGNAL TCFC SIGNAL NSX TCFC SIGNAL LEGEND GS MODEL TCFC SIGNAL NSX HO2 SENSOR HEATER OR CIRCUIT FAILURE INTEGRA VIGOR LEFT HO2 SENSOR HEATER OR CIRCUIT FAILURE LEGEND FRONT HO2 SENSOR HEATER OR CIRCUIT FAILURE NSX FIGHT HO2 SENSOR HEATER OR CIRCUIT FAILURE LEGEND REAR HO2 SENSOR HEATER OR CIRCUIT FAILURE NSX FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM INTEGRA VIGOR LEFT FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM LEGEND FRONT FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM NSX RIGHT FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM LEGEND REAR FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM NSX LEFT FUEL SUPPLY METERING LEGEND FRONT FUEL SUPPLY METERING NSX FUEL SUPPLY METERING VIGOR RIGHT FUEL SUPPLY METERING LEGEND REAR FUEL SUPPLY METERING NSX FAULTY FUEL PUMP OR CIRCUIT FAILURE REAR VTEC SOLENOID VALVE REAR VTEC PRESSURE SWITCH RIGHT KNOCK SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE LEGEND REAR KNOCK SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE NSX VIGOR CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 2 LEGEND CRANK ANGLE SENSOR B NSX CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL 2 LEGEND CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL B NSX ACURA 23 ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 24 ACURA CHRYSLER IMPORTS VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS CHRYSLER IMPORTS SPECIFIC INFORMATION TEST MODES AVAILABLE GETTING
169. 43 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM 20 HONDA HONDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1992 ot DESCRIPTOR NO 1992 0 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 1 O2 SENSOR OR O2S CKT FAILURE MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE R CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE SENSOR OR TPS CIRCUIT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR TDO O N CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL 10 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 12 EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE 13 BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAIL 14 ELECTRONIC IDLE CONTROL FAILURE 15 IGNITION OUTPUT SIG OR CKT FAIL 16 FUEL INJECTOR FAILURE 17 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 19 A T LOCK UP SOL VALVE A B 20 ELECTRIC LOAD SENSOR 21 SPOOL SOLENOID VALVE 22 VALVE TIMING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 23 KNOCK SENSOR OR KS CIRCUIT FAIL 30 A T FI SIGNAL A 31 A T FI SIGNAL B 41 025 HEATER OR O28 HEATER CKT 43 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM 48 LAF SENSOR OR LAF CKT FAILURE HONDA 21 HONDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1993 Die DESCRIPTOR NO 1993 0 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 1 HO2S OR HO2S CIRCUIT FAILURE MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE R CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CIRCUIT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR TDC O N CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL SENSOR OR IAT FAILURE 12 EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE
170. 4L 14 2S E 22R EC 4A GE 5M GE 5M GE 3Y EC 22R E EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES JU JU JU JU JU JU JU MPER MPER MPER MPER MPER MPER MPER TOYOTA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS CONTIN JED ENGINE ren ADAPTER TRUCK 2 4L I4 22R TE EFI TURBO MILCODES JUMPER 4 RUNNER 2 4L 4 22R E EFI MILCODES JUMPER 4 RUNNER 2 4L 4 22R TE EFI TURBO MILCODES JUMPER MODEL 1986 ENGINE pk ADAPTER 1986 CAMRY USA 2 0L 14 2S EL EFI MILCODES JUMPER CAMRY 2 0L 14 2S EL EFI MILCODES JUMPER CANADA CELICA 2 0L 14 2S E EFI MILCODES JUMPER CELICA 2 0L 14 3S GE EFI MILCODES JUMPER COROLLA 1 6L 14 4A GE EFI MILCODES JUMPER CRESSIDA 2 8L 16 5 EFI MILCODES JUMPER MR2 1 6L 14 4A GE EFI MILCODES JUMPER CELICA SUPRA 2 8L 14 5 EFI MILCODES JUMPER CELICA 3 0L 16 7M GE EFI MILCODES JUMPER SUPRA VAN 2 21 14 4Y EC EFI MILCODES JUMPER TRUCK 2 4L 14 22R E EFI MILCODES JUMPER 4 RUNNER 2 4L 14 22R E EFI MILCODES JUMPER TRUCK 2 4L I4 22R TE EFI TURBO MILCODES JUMPER 4 RUNNER 2 4L 14 22R TE EFI TURBO MILCODES JUMPER Vehicle is a 1986 ENGINE MODEL 1987 ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER 1987 CAMRY 2 0L 4 3S FE EFI MILCODES JUMPER CELICA 2 0L 4 35 EFI MILCODES JUMPER CELICA 2 0L I4 3S GE EFI MILCODES JUMPER COROLLA 1 6L
171. 5 FAULTY ECU YEAR 1986 DIC DESCRIPTOR NO 1986 0 FAULTY ECU OR ECU FAILURE 1 FAULTY O2S OR FAULTY FUEL SYS 02 OR O2S CIRCUIT FAILURE 2 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 3 MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE 4 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE HONDA 15 HONDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1986 DTC NO 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15 DESCRIPTOR MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CIRCUIT FAILURE CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE IDLE MIXTURE ADJ SENSOR CKT FAIL EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE YEAR 1987 1987 DTC NO 4 10 11 DESCRIPTOR FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 02 OR O2S CIRCUIT FAILURE SHT CKT IN FREQ SOLENOID VALVE B FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE SHT CKT IN FREQ SOLENOID VALVE A MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE IGNITION TIMING CONTROL UNIT MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CIRCUIT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR TDC CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL CKT FAILURE IN IGNITION WIRE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL CK ANGLE OR CK ANG CKT FAILURE IAT SENSO
172. 7 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1991 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 18 THROTTLE SENSOR NARROW RANGE AIR FUEL SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 20 METERING OIL PUMP POSITION SENSOR 22 SLOW FUEL CUT SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 23 RIGHT SIDE 02 SENSOR COASTING RICHER SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 24 FEEDBACK SYSTEM RIGHT SIDE 25 SOLENOID VALVE PRESSURE REGULATOR SOLENOID VALVE PRESSURE REGULATOR CONTROL 26 SOLENOID VALVE PURGE CONTROL STEP MOTOR METERING OIL PUMP PURGE SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 27 METERING OIL PUMP MOP 28 SOLENOID VALVE EGR SOLENOID VALVE EGR VACUUM DUTY SOLENOID VACUUM VALVE OR CIRCUIT 29 SOLENOID VALVE EGR VENT DUTY SOLENOID VENT VALVE OR CIRCUIT 30 SPLIT AIR SOLENOID VALVE ACV SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 31 SOLENOID VALVE RELIEF 32 SOLENOID VALVE SWITCH 33 PORT AIR SOLENOID VALVE 34 ISC VALVE SOLENOID VALVE BYPASS AIR CONTROL IDLE UP SOLENOID VALVE FOR A C OR CIRCUIT SOLENOID VALVE IDLE SPEED CONTROL IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE BAC VALVE 35 IDLE UP SOLENOID VALVE FOR A T OR CIRCUIT 37 METERING OIL PUMP MOP 38 SOLENOID VALVE ACCELERATED WARM UP SYSTEM SOLENOID VALVE ACCELERATED WARM UP SYSTEM OR AIR SUPPLY VALVE 40 SOLENOID VALVE TRIPLE INDUCTION CON TROL SYSTEM OR O2 SENSOR HEATER 02 SENSOR HEATER RELAY AUXILIARY PORT VALVE 41 SOLENOID VALVE VICS SOLENOID VALVE VARIABLE RESONANCE INDUCTION SYSTEM SOLENOID VALVE VARIABLE DYNAMIC EF
173. 8L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 2 4L 14 SOHC 2 0L 14 DOHC 2 5L V6 SOHC 3 0L V6 DOHC 3 0L V6 DOHC TUR 3 0L V6 SOHC 1 5L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 2 0L 14 DOHC 420A 6G73 4615 4693 4693 4664 420 6673 6072 6072 6072 4093 4093 4664 4637 4663 MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI NONE JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER NONE JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER CHECK CHECK MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES MILCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES CHRYSLER IMPORTS VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1995 CONTINUED ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE TALON 2 0L 14 DOHC TUR 4G63 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES For OBD II Adapter Type use Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information MODEL 1996 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE 1996 AVENGER AVENGER COLT COLT COLT WAGON COLT WAGON SEBRING SEBRING STEALTH STEALTH STEALTH SUMMIT SUMMIT SUMMIT WAGON SUMMIT WAGON TALON TALON 2 0L 14 DOHC 2 5L V6 SOHC 1 5L 14 SOHC 1 8L
174. 91 MITSUBISHI 3000 GT 3 0L V6 DOHC MPI SELECT MODE Y F1 DTC ENTRY F2 DTC F8 SYSTEM TESTS FIGURE 1 3 Mitsubishi Vehicle Selection Enter model year o Used to answer questions in tester display EXIT Return to previous display 16 MITSUBISHI TEST MODES 6 TEST MODES When the Select Mode menu is displayed test modes available for Mitsubishi vehicles may be selected Operating instructions for test modes other than DTC Entry and DTCs are included in the COMMON TEST MODES I section You may select these modes without connecting the tester to the vehicle READING CODES Detailed operating instructions for using Modes 1 Entry and F2 with Mitsubishi vehicles are included in the following procedure F1 DTC Entry is displayed with all Mitsubishi vehicles and F2 DTC is automatically displayed with Mitsubishi vehicles that have CHECK as the adapter type listed in Vehicles and Systems section NOTE Follow the Submode F0 Prepare Vehicle instructions to ensure proper vehicle preparation prior to testing The vehicle must be completely EH warmed up in order for the tester to communicate properly with the vehicle MODE F1 DTC ENTRY When Mode F1 Entry is selected the tester displays submodes which after your selection can provide information on how to read diagnostic trouble codes DTCs from the vehicle how to clear DTCs from the vehicle or tester memory buffer obt
175. 92 P1493 P1494 P1495 P1496 P1498 P1500 P1600 P1696 P1697 P1698 P1715 P1738 P1739 P1750 P1765 P1767 P1768 P1770 IAC System Target Idle not Reached TPS Circuit no 5 Volt Supply MAP Circuit no 5 Volt Supply No Change in MAP from Start to Run Ignition Timing Adjustment Circuit Malfunction Timing Belt Skipped One or More Teeth Intermittent Loss of Cam Crankshaft Position Sensor MDP Sensor Circuit Malfunction EVAP Pure System Control Valve 2 Circuit Malfunction EVAP Leak Monitor Detects Pinched Hose High Speed Radiator Fan Control Relay Circuit Malfunction High Speed Condenser Fan Control Relay Circuit Malfunction Low Speed Fan Control Relay Circuit Malfunction Battery Temp Sensor Voltage Too High Battery Temp Sensor Voltage Too Low EVAP Vent Solenoid System Malfunction EVAP Vent Solenoid Circuit Malfunction PCM 5 Volt Supply to MAP and TPS Too Low High Speed Radiator Fan Ground Control Relay Circuit Malfunction Generator FR Terminal Circuit Malfunction Serial Communication Link Malfunction PCM Failure EEPROM Write Denied PCM Failure SRI Mile not Stored No CCD Messages from EATX ECM A T PG Assembly Malfunction Transmission Overheat High Temp Operation Activated TCM Power up While Vehicle Being Driven Shift Solenoid Assembly Malfunction TCM Senses Volts on Pressure Switch When Unexpected EATX Relay Always ON Contacts Closed EATX Relay Always Off Contacts Open Inadequate Element Vo
176. 995 3000GT 3 0L V6 6G72 MFI JUMPER MILCODES 3000GT 3 0L V6 TURBO 6G72 MFI JUMPER MILCODES DIAMANTE WAGON 3 0L V6 SOHC 6G72 MFI NONE MANCODES DIAMANTE 3 0L V6 DOHC 6G72 MFI NONE MANCODES ECLIPSE 2 0L 4 420A MFI NONE MANCODES ECLIPSE 2 0L I4 TURBO 4G63 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES GALANT 2 4L 4 SOHC 4G64 MFI NONE MANCODES GALANT 2 4L 14 DOHC 4G64 MFI NONE MANCODES MIRAGE 1 5L 14 4G15 MFI NONE MANCODES MIRAGE CAL 1 5L 14 4G15 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES MIRAGE 1 8L 14 4G93 MFI NONE MANCODES MIRAGE CAL 1 8L 14 4G93 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES EXPO LRV 1 8L 4 4G93 MFI JUMPER MANCODES EXPO LRV CAL 1 8L 14 4G93 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES 8 MITSUBISHI VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1995 ENGINE FUEL ADAPTER CONTINUED ENGINE TYPE TYPE SODE VE EXPO LRV 2 4L 14 4G64 MFI NONE MANCODES EXPO CAL 2 4L 14 4G64 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES EXPO 2 4L 14 4G64 AUTOCODES EXPO CAL FWD 2 4L 14 4G64 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES MONTERO 3 0L V6 12V 4G72 MFI NONE MANCODES MONTERO 3 0L V6 24V 4G72 MFI NONE MANCODES MONTERO 3 5L V6 4G74 MFI NONE MANCODES TRUCK 2 4L 14 4G64 MFI NONE MANCODES TRUCK 3 0L V6 4G72 MFI NONE MANCODES For Adapter Type OBD II see COMMON TEST MODES II section for operating instructions and test mode information ENGINE FUEL ADAPTER MODEL 1996 ENGINE TYPE TYPE TYPE CODE 1996 3000GT 3 0L V6 6G72 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES 3000GT 3 0L V6 TURBO 6G72 MFI OBD AUT
177. A T EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE 13 BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE 14 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE 15 IGNITION OUTPUT SIG OR CKT FAIL 16 FUEL INJECTOR FAILURE 17 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 18 IGNITION TIMING CONTROL UNIT 20 ELECTRIC LOAD DETECTOR 20 ACURA ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1993 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR 21 22 23 30 31 35 36 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 51 52 53 54 59 SPOOL SOLENOID VALVE 1 7L FRONT VTEC SOLENOID VALVE VALVE TIMING OIL PRESS SW 1 7L FRONT VTEC PRESSURE SWITCH KS 1 7L OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE LEFT KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE KNOCK SENSOR NO 1 FRONT KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE A T FISIGNAL A A T FI SIGNAL B TC STB SIGNAL TCFC SIGNAL HO2S HEATER OR CIRCUIT FAILURE LEFT HO2S HEATER OR CKT FAILURE FRNT HO2S HEATER OR CKT FAILURE RT HO2S HEATER OR CKT FAILURE REAR HO2S HEATER OR CKT FAILURE FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM LEFT FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM FRONT FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM RIGHT FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM REAR FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM LEFT FUEL SUPPLY METERING FUEL SUPPLY METERING FRONT FUEL SUPPLY METERING RIGHT FUEL SUPPLY METERING REAR FUEL SUPPLY METERING FAULTY FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE REAR VTEC SOLENOID VALVE REAR VTEC PRESSURE SWITCH RIGHT KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE KNOCK SENSOR NO 2 REAR KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 2 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR B CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL 2 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR
178. ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE 1996 ACCENT ELANTRA SONATA SONATA 1 5L 14 1 8L 4 2 0L 14 3 0L V6 G4EK G4DM G4AP G6AT MFI MFI MFI MFI OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES For OBDII Adapter Type use Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information ENGINE TE T SE ein CODE 1997 1 5L I4 SOHC G4EK MFI OBD II AUTOCODES ACCENT 1 5L 4 DOHC G4EK MFI OBD II AUTOCODES ELANTRA 1 8L 4 DOHC G4DM MFI OBD II AUTOCODES SONATA 2 0L 14 DOHC G4AP MFI OBD II AUTOCODES SONATA 3 0L V6 SOHC G6AT MFI OBD II AUTOCODES TIBURON 1 8L I4 DOHC G4GM MFI OBD II AUTOCODES TIBURON 2 0L 14 DOHC G4GF MFI OBD II AUTOCODES For OBD II Adapter Type use Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information 4 HYUNDAI VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS ENGINE ADAPTER ENGINE TYPE TYPE CODE 1998 1 5L 4 SOHC G4EK MFI OBD II AUTOCODES ACCENT 1 5L I4 DOHC G4EK MFI OBD II AUTOCODES ELANTRA 1 8L 14 DOHC G4GM MFI OBD II AUTOCODES SONATA 2 0L 14 DOHC G4AP MFI OBD II AUTOCODES SONATA 3 0L V6 SOHC G6AT MFI OBD II AUTOCODES TIBURON 1 8L I4 DOHC G4GM MFI OBD II AUTOCODES TIBURON 2 0L 4 DOHC G4GF MFI OBD II AUTOCODES ForOBD II Adapter Type use Common T
179. ADJUSTMENT SIGNAL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION SECONDARY PULSED AIR SYSTEM MALFUNCTION 2 0L AVENGER SEBRING 37 PARK NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH A T 2 0L AVENGER SEBRING 39 HO2 SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION RIGHT BANK V6 41 GENERATOR FIELD CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION AVENGER SEBRING 42 ASD FUEL PUMP RELAY CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION 43 EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR IGNITION MISFIRE DETECTED 2 0L AVENGER SEBRING 44 IGNITION COIL TRANSISTOR CYLINDERS 1 4 STEALTH DOHC BATTERY TEMP SENSOR VOLTAGE OUT OF LIMITS 46 CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE TOO HIGH 47 CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE TOO LOW 51 FUEL SYSTEM LEAN 52 IGNITION COIL TRANSISTOR CYLINDERS 2 5 FUEL SYSTEM RICH 53 IGNITION COIL TRANSISTOR CYLINDERS 3 6 INTERNAL PCM FAILURE 2 0L AVENGER SEBRING 32 CHRYSLER IMPORTS CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES YEAR 1995 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 54 NO CAMSHAFT SIGNAL AT PCM 55 IAC VALVE POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION 59 REAR HO2 SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION LEFT BANK V6 61 TOROUE REDUCTION SIGNAL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION 62 PCM FAILURE SRI MILE NOT STORED INDUCTION CONTROL VALVE SYSTEM MALFUNCTION STEALTH DOHC NON TURBO 64 CATALYTIC CONV EFFICIENCY FAILURE M T 2 0L AVENGER SEBRING 65 PCM FAILURE EEPROM WRITE DENIED POWER STEERING PRESS SWITCH FAILURE M T 2 0L AVENGER SEBRING 66 NO CCD MESSAGE FROM A T 69 HO2 SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION RIGHT BANK V6
180. AGE ISC SOL VALVE CKT VOLTAGE AIR CONTROL VLV OR CKT FAILURE AIR CONTROL VLV MON CKT VOLTAGE IDLE UP SOLENOID OR CKT FAILURE FCV SOLENOID OR CIRCUIT FAILURE AIR TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE SPEC CODE 4WD MT CAL THROTTLE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE THROTTLE SENSOR VOLTAGE OR CKT 02 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 02 SNSR VOLTAGE OR CKT FAILURE VSS OR CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL VSS VOLTAGE OR CIRCUIT FAILURE EGR SOL VALVE ON OFF OR CKT EGR LINE CLOGGED OR EGR CKT CA CPC SOL MONITOR CKT VOLTAGE PURGE SOL VALVE ON OFF OR CKT PURGE SOL VALVE OR CKT FAILURE IGNITER MONITOR CKT VOLTAGE SPEC CODE 4WD ECVT CAL AFR ADAPTIVE LEARN CONTROL SYSTEM LEAN CONDITION IDLE SWITCH SIGNAL OR CKT IDLE SWITCH VOLTAGE SIGNAL IDLE SWITCH OR CIRCUIT FAILURE POWER SWITCH SIGNAL OR CKT WASTEGATE CONTRL SOL OR CIRCUIT BARO SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE BARO SENSOR FAILURE KDWN CONTROL RLY ON OFF POS RADIATOR FAN CONTROL SYSTEM AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE NEUTRAL SW CKT REMAINS ON NEUTRAL SW OR CKT NO SIGNAL AT INHIBITOR SWITCH OR CKT CLUTCH SW CKT FWD w MT ECVT PARKING SWITCH OR CKT FAILURE SUBARU 33 SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1990 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 53 HAC SOLENOID OR CKT FAILURE 55 EGR GAS TEMP SENSOR CA ONLY 61 PARKING SWITCH REMAINS ON 62 ELEC LOAD SIGNAL HDLP REAR DEF IDLE UP SYSTEM 1 OR CKT FAILURE 63 BLOWER FAN SW REMAINS ON OFF IDLE UP SYSTEM 2 OR CKT FAILURE 65
181. AILURE SENSOR 1 CAM SIGNAL OK 12 STARTER SWITCH SIGNAL FAILURE 13 CAM ANGLE SENSOR FAILURE 14 FUEL INJECTOR NO 1 OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 15 FUEL INJECTOR NO 2 OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 16 FUEL INJECTOR NO 3 OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 17 FUEL INJECTOR NO 4 OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 18 FUEL INJECTOR NO 5 OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 19 FUEL INJECTOR NO 6 OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 21 ECT SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 22 KNOCK SENSOR MONITOR CIRCUIT RIGHT BANK 23 AIR FLOW SENSOR SIGNAL VOLTAGE 24 BYPASS AIR VALVE IAC CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION 28 KNOCK SENSOR MONITOR CIRCUIT LEFT BANK 29 CKP SENSOR 2 OR CIRCUIT FAILURE CAM SIGNAL OK 40 SUBARU SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 31 TPS SIGNAL VOLTAGE OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 32 O2 SENSOR RIGHT BANK INOPERATIVE 33 VSS 2 OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 34 EGR SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 35 PURGE SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 36 AIR SUCTION VALVE OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 37 O2 SENSOR LEFT BANK INOPERATIVE 38 ENGINE TORQUE CONTROL ECM TCM CIRCUIT 41 AIR FUEL CONTROL LEAN FAILURE 52 PARKING SWITCH SIGNAL 44 WASTEGATE SOLENOID CONTROL VALVE 45 BARO SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 49 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 51 NEUTRAL INHIBIT SWITCH SIGNAL OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 52 PARKING SWITCH SIGNAL 55 EGR TEMP SENSOR OR CIRCUIT 56 EGR SYSTEM MALFUNCTION 61 FUEL TANK PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 62 FUEL TEMP SENSOR OPE
182. AL 21 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 31 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 32 EGR SENSOR OR EGR CKT FAILURE 33 025 OR 025 CIRCUIT FAILURE 34 KNOCK SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 35 EXHAUST GAS TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT 43 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 45 INJECTOR LEAK 46 SECONDARY TPS OR CKT FAILURE 51 FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 54 A T CONTROLLER CIRCUIT FAILURE 55 NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECU YEAR 1991 DESCRIPTOR 1991 11 CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL 12 AIR FLOW METER CIRCUIT FAILURE 13 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE INFINITI 13 INFINITI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1991 14 16 21 31 32 33 34 35 43 45 46 51 54 55 DESCRIPTOR VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE TCS SIGNAL IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE EGR SENSOR OR EGR CKT FAILURE O2S OR O2S CIRCUIT FAILURE KNOCK SENSOR OR KS CKT FAILURE EXHAUST GAS TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE INJECTOR LEAK SECONDARY TPS OR CKT FAILURE FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE A T CONTROLLER CIRCUIT FAILURE NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECU YEAR 1992 1992 11 12 13 14 16 21 22 31 32 33 34 35 42 DESCRIPTOR CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL AIR FLOW METER CIRCUIT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE FUEL PUMP OR FP CIRCUIT FAILURE FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE EGR SYSTEM FAIL CA MODELS
183. AL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR OUTPUT BELOW 02v DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR LOW FLOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR OUT OF RANGE DURING KOEO DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR HIGH OUTPUT DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR ABOVE 4 8v OCTANE ADJUST CIRCUIT OPEN IAC SOLENOID FAILED LOW RPM TEST DURING KOER IAC SOLENOID FAILED HIGH RPM TEST DURING KOER ADAPTIVE AT MINIMUM LIMIT ADAPTIVE AT MAXIMUM LIMIT NO VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL PCM ECA READ ONLY MEMORY ROM TEST FAILED DURING KOEO POWER TO PCM ECA KEEP ALIVE MEMORY KAM TEST FAILED FAILURE IN PCM ECA INTERNAL VOLTAGE STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS CLOSED POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH OPEN DURING KOEO POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH OPEN DURING KOER VEHICLE NOT IN PARK OR NEUTRAL DURING KOEO 52 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1992 1994 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 525 A C SWITCH ON DURING KOEO 528 CLUTCH SWITCH OR PARK NEUTRAL POSITION OPEN SHORT 528 CLUTCH PEDAL SWITCH PARK NEUTRAL SWITCH OPEN SHORT M 536 STOPLIGHT SWITCH OPEN SHORT OR ACTUATED DURING SELF TEST 538 DYNAMIC RESPONSE TEST INCORRECT RPM CHANGE OPERATOR ERROR 538 INVALID CYLINDER BALANCE TEST DUE TO THROTTLE MOVEMENT 539 A C WITCH ON DURING KOEO OR KOER 542 FUEL PUMP OPEN SHORT 543 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT OPEN 554 PRESSURE REGULATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT FAIL
184. AMSHAFT POSIT SENSOR OR CKT ECT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 24 VSS OR CIRCUIT FAILURE CAMSHAFT POSIT SENSOR OR CKT 25 BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 26 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 27 KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE 29 VEHICLE SPEED OR CIRCUIT 31 BATTERY VOLTAGE OR ALTERNATOR 33 A C COMPRESSOR OR CKT FAILURE 36 ECM MAP SENSOR FAILURE HIGH 37 ECM MAP SENSOR CNTRL DEV FAULT 38 ECM MAP SENSOR CNTRL VALVE HYUNDAI 21 HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1994 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR 39 41 42 43 44 45 47 48 53 59 61 62 63 65 69 81 82 83 84 ECM MAP SENSOR PRESSURE SNSR FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE NO 1 INJECTOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE NO 2 INJECTOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR NO 3 INJECTOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE NO 4 INJECTOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE PURGE CNTRL SOL VALVE OR CKT ISC ACTUATOR FAILURE OPENING ISC ACTUATOR FAILURE CLOSING FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE REAR HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT ECU FAILURE INJ OR PURGE SOL ECU FAILURE IDLE ACT OR A C ECU FAILURE DRIVING CKT A ECU FAILURE INJ PCV ISA A C RLY ECU FAILURE DRIVING AIR FUEL CONTROL FAILURE A F ADAPTIVE FAILURE MULTIP A F ADAPTIVE FAILURE A N A F ADAPTIVE FAILURE ADDITIVE DESCRIPTOR YEAR 1995 1995 0 11 12 13 13 1
185. ANK ANGLE SENSOR B 59 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL 2 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL B YEAR 1992 DESCRIPTOR 1992 0 FAULTY ECU OR ECU FAILURE 1 02 SENSOR OR 025 CKT FAILURE LEFT O2S OR 02 CKT FAILURE FRONT O2S OR O2S CKT FAILURE 2 RIGHT O2S OR 02 CKT FAILURE REAR 025 OR 025 CKT FAILURE 3 MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE 4 CK ANGLE OR CK ANG CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 1 CK ANGLE OR CK ANG CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR A MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR O N CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL 1 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL A 18 ACURA ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1992 CONTINUED 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 30 31 35 36 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 51 DESCRIPTOR IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE ELECTRONIC AIR CONTROL SENSOR IGNITION OUTPUT SIG OR CKT FAIL FUEL INJECTOR FAILURE VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE IGNITION TIMING CONTROL UNIT ELECTRIC LOAD DETECTOR SPOOL SOLENOID VALVE 1 7L FRONT SPOOL SOLENOID VALVE VALVE TIMING OIL PRESS SW 1 7L FRT VALVE TIMING OIL PRESSURE SW KS 1 7L OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE LEFT KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE FRONT KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE A T
186. ANP SOL VALVE OR CKT FAILURE 64 VLC SOL VALVE OR CKT FAILURE 65 FCV SOL VALVE OR CKT FAILURE 71 IGN PULSE ENG OFF 5MT 2WD CA 73 IGN PULSE ENG OFF SMT 4WD CA 74 IGN PULSE ENG OFF AT 4WD CA 88 SPFI CONTROL UNIT FAILURE YEAR 1987 DESCRIPTOR 1987 1 SPEC CODE MT 49ST CAN SPEC CODE MT CAL SPEC CODE AT 49ST CAN R N SPEC CODE AT CAL SPEC CODE MT FED SPEC CODE MT CAL CAN SPEC CODE AT FED SPEC CODE AT CAL CAN 11 CRANK ANGLE SNSR REF PULSE OR CKT IGN PULSE CKT FAULT ENG OFF 12 STARTER SW ON OFF CRANKING BACK UP SYSTEM OR CKT FAILURE 13 CKP SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 14 FUEL INJ 1 amp 2 OR CKT FAILURE DUTY SOLENOID VALVE OR CKT FUEL INJ OUTPUT OR CKT FAILURE 15 FUEL INJ 3 amp 4OR CKT FAILURE SUBARU 27 SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 1987 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 21 WATER TEMP SNSR SIGNAL OR CKT THERMO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 22 KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE VLC SOLENOID VALVE OR CKT 23 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 24 IDLE UP SOLENOID OR CKT FAILURE AIR CONTROL VLV OR CKT FAILURE 25 FCV SOLENOID OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 31 THROTTLE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 32 O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 025 SYSTEM OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 33 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL VEHICLE SPEED SNSR OR CIRCUIT 34 EGR SOL VALVE ON OFF OR CKT 35 PURGE SOL VALVE ON OFF OR CKT PURGE SOLENOID CONTROL SYSTEM 41 SYS
187. AP System Small Leak Positive Pressure P1441 Vacuum Cut Bypass Valve Circuit Malfunction P1443 Canister Control Vacuum Check Switch Circuit Malfunction P1444 EVAP Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve P1445 EVAP Purge Volume Control Valve P1446 EVAP Vent Control Valve Closed P1447 EVAP Control System Purge Flow Monitoring P1448 EVAP Vent Control Valve Open P1490 Vacuum Cut Bypass Valve Circuit Malfunction P1491 Vacuum Cut Bypass Valve Malfunction P1492 EVAP Purge Control Valve or Solenoid Valve P1493 EVAP Purge Control Valve and Solenoid Valve P1605 A T Diagnosis Communication Line P1705 Throttle Position Sensor or Switch P1706 Park Neutral Switch Circuit P1760 Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve INFINITI 21 INFINITI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 22 INFINITI VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS KIA SPECIFIC INFORMATION TEST MODES AVAILABLE GETTING STARTED SELECTING THE VEHICLE TEST MODES Mode F1 Entry Submode F0 How To Read Submode F1 Enter DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC s Submode F4 Clear DTC s KIA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS Using the Asian Imports Cartridge the following Kia vehicles can be diagnosed FUEL ADAPTER MODEL ENGINE TYPE CODE 1994 1 6L 14 MPI MILCODES NONE KIA SPECIFIC INFORMATION 2 KIA SPECIFI
188. ASIAN IMPORTS APPLICATION Operator s Manual 3rd Edition Acura Chrysler Imports Daihatsu Honda Hyundai Infiniti Isuzu Kia Lexus Mazda Mitsubishi Nissan Subaru Suzuki Toyota Vetronix Bosch Group SOME THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW EXHAUST GAS When performing any checks with the engine running in an enclosed space such as a garage be sure there is proper ventilation Never inhale exhaust gases they contain carbon monoxide a colorless odorless extremely dangerous gas which can cause unconsciousness or death CAUTION CAUTION Always set the parking brake securely before performing any checks or repairs on the vehicle to help prevent vehicle movement that may cause injury IMPORTANT PLEASE READ The TECH 1 TECH 1A and Mastertech are designed for use by authorized personnel only They have been developed for the sole purpose of diagnosing and repairing automotive electronic systems With the help of the information presented in this manual and the appropriate automotive service manual gualified personnel should be able to diagnose and repair vehicle electronic control systems DISCLAIMER Every attempt has been made to provide complete and accurate technical information based on service information available at the time of publication However the right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice FCC CERTIFICATION This eguipment complies with the reguirement in Par
189. ATA is selected from the SELECT MODE menu Only one ECU s data can be displayed in Freeze Data mode SELECT ECU F1 10 ENGINE F2 18 TRANS 2 F1 FREEZE DATA SELECT ECU Trouble Code P0130 Engine Speed 1000 RPM For vehicles with multiple ECUs only To display Freeze Data do the following 1 Select F2 DTCs from the SELECT MODE menu 2 Select F1 FREEZE DATA from the menu 3 Select the ECU from which you choose to monitor data for vehicles with multiple ECUs only The message WAITING FOR DATA will appear The FREEZE DATA information will then be displayed FREEZE DATA is only available for the first DTC which was detected by the vehicle The first parameter in the list is the DTC which caused the FREEZE DATA to be saved The FREEZE DATA is displayed in the same format as the data list in the DATA LIST mode COMMON TEST MODES II 17 TEST MODES Ce GD Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs unlock bottom p displayed p parameters if fixed Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs unlock top played p parameters if fixed Toggle the data descriptor line with the Parameter Identification PID number and the ECU 88 number Toggle unit conversions for applicable parameters between English and metric G3 Print freeze data list 1f equipped with a serial pr
190. AUTOCODES GALANT 2 0L 14 DOHC 4G63 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES GALANT 2 0L 14 DOHC TUR 4G63 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES GALANT 2 0L I4 SOHC 8V 4G63 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES MIRAGE 1 5L I4 SOHC 4G15 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES MIRAGE 1 6L I4 DOHC 4G61 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES MONTERO 3 0L V6 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES TRUCK 2 4L 14 4G64 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES TRUCK 3 0L V6 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES 6 MITSUBISHI VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS ENGINE FUEL ADAPTER MODEL 1993 ENGINE CODE TYPE TYPE TYPE TYPE 1993 3000GT 3000GT DIAMANTE DIAMANTE DIAMANTE WAGON ECLIPSE ECLIPSE ECLIPSE EXPO EXPO LRV EXPO LRV GALANT GALANT GALANT MIRAGE MIRAGE MONTERO PRECIS TRUCK TRUCK 3 0L V6 DOHC 3 0L V6 DOHC TUR 3 0L V6 DOHC 3 0L V6 SOHC 3 0L V6 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 2 0L 14 DOHC 2 0L 14 DOHC TUR 2 4L 14 1 8L 14 2 4L 14 2 0L 14 DOHC 2 0L 14 SOHC 16V 2 0L 14 SOHC 8V 1 5L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 3 0L V6 1 5L 14 2 4L 4 3 0L V6 6G72 6G72 6G72 6G72 6G72 4G37 4G63 4G63 4G64 4G93 4G64 4G63 4G63 4G63 4G15 4G93 6G72 G4AJ 4G64 6G72 MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK AUTOCODES AU
191. Asian Imports application cartridge supports reading DTCs automatically or manually depending on the state active or inactive of the ECT system ANTILOCK BRAKE DTCS Lexus ABS DTCs are available on select Lexus vehicles equipped with ABS ABS DTCs are set by the ABS ECU when problems with but not limited to the ECU shorted pump motor relay low brake fluid level and pressure sensor are detected The Asian Imports application cartridge supports reading ABS DTCs automatically or manually depending on the state active or inactive of the ABS system LEXUS 5 LEXUS SYSTEMS CRUISE CONTROL DTCS Lexus CCS DTCs are available on select Lexus vehicles with automatic cruise control CCS DTCs are set by the CCS ECU when problems with but not limited to the ECU actuator malfunction and cruise control switch are detected The Asian Imports application cartridge supports reading CCS DTCs automatically or manually depending on the state active or inactive of the CCS system AIR CONDITIONING DTCS Lexus A C DTCs are available on select Lexus vehicles with automatic air conditioning A C are set by the A C ECU when problems with but not limited to the ECU room temperature sensor and air mix door are detected Note that on some Lexus vehicles the A C system does not support a dashboard MIL The Asian Imports application cartridge supports reading A C DTCs automatically or manually depending on the state active or
192. C INFORMATION TWO WAYS TO DIAGNOSE KIA Kia powertrain diagnosis can be performed with the Asian Imports cartridge installed in a Tech 1 Tech 1A or Mastertech tester Additionally Kia vehicles can be diagnosed with the aftermarket version of the Kia OEM level program card software using the Mastertech tester only Operating instructions and test mode information are available for the OEM level software in the Kia Program Card Operator s Manual If you do not have the necessary Program Card and Mastertech tester to perform OEM level diagnostics you can use the Asian Imports Cartridge for limited model year coverage The following Kia section includes the test modes available how to connect the tester to the vehicle operating instructions for DTC entry and the applicable DTCs for each model year KIA 3 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 3 TEST MODES AVAILABLE The following test modes are available when testing Kia vehicles Operating instructions for test modes other than DTC Entry are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section There are Kia specific instructions for operating the test modes Refer to TEST MODES on page 8 MODE F1 DTC ENTRY SUBMODE F0 HOW TO READ SUBMODE F1 ENTER DTC s SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST SUBMODE F3 REVIEW DTC SUBMODE F4 CLEAR DTC s MODE F5 SYSTEM TESTS SUBMODE F0 PREP VEHICLE MODE F8 INFORMATION SUBMODE F3 ID INFO SUBMODE F4 DJC LOCATION SUBMODE F5 ECU LOCATION 4 KIA
193. C Power Jack capabilities You can identify a TECH by the phone style jacks on both sides of the tester Note that the TECH1 and TECH require a different DLC cable DC Power cable and vehicle adapters When using this manual to diagnose a vehicle take the time to determine the type of tester that you have and be sure you are using the correct cables and adapters Doing so may prevent misuse of application cartridges and incorrect vehicle diagnosis GENERAL INFORMATION 5 ASIAN IMPORTS CARTRIDGE KIT DESCRIPTION With the built in RS232C interface the Mastertech and TechlA testers both support host computer communications and printer capabilities Using the optional VP 411 printer you can print a hard copy of test results This information is helpful for your reference records as well as customer consultation when you are describing test results ASIAN IMPORTS CARTRIDGE FEATURES With the Asian Imports Cartridge you can Select a specific vehicle to test by make model model year and VIN code Read engine and transmission diagnostic data parameters if available from vehicle Read instructions for learning how to read DTCs from vehicles with ECU LED analog voltmeter or MIL output DTCs Read instructions for clearing DTCs from selected vehicles Display location of ECU diagnostic jumper connector DJC or Data Link connector DLC Read pending DTCs from OBD II compliant vehicles Read and display Diagnostic T
194. C is separated by a 4 0 second interval The overall DTC series is separated by a 4 0 second interval If no DTCs are stored in ECU MIL will not flash DTC DTC Foo separation BDZIE Next DTC 12v Indication SN 7 O Hoss 40s 125165 1911911413 s 25s 0s 256 1 LT ETT 5 The normal DTC condition is no MIL flash 6 Disconnect Kia single wire jumper 7 Erase DTCs when all repairs are completed Submode F2 List This submode provides you with a way to view all possible ECU DTCs including DTC numbers and descriptions You can also select the DTCs obtained from the MIL as an alternative way of entering DTCs into the tester s memory As you scroll through the available DTCs you can view a description of the DTC obtained from the MIL You can Select the DTC on the tester screen for later review or printing Refer to Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further information Submode F3 Review DTC s This submode provides a way of reviewing DTCs that you selected or entered in the tester The description of the entered or selected DTC will be displayed along with a numerical summary of the entered or selected DTC Review DTC is intended to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTCs that you have encountered during diagnosis 10 KIA TEST MODES Submode F4 Clear This submode has two options for you to choo
195. CH ALWAYS ON 32 CONTROL SWITCH GROUND SHORT 33 SET amp RES SW ON SIMULTANEOUSLY 34 CONTROL SWITCH OFF MALFUNCTION 41 MOTOR ACTUATE MALFUNCTION 42 SOURCE VOLTAGE DROP ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION YEAR 1989 94 DESCRIPTOR 1989 1994 37 DIRECT CLUTCH SPD SENSOR SIG 38 ATF TEMP SENSOR SIGNAL 41 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 42 SPD SENSOR SIGNAL METER 44 SPEED SENSOR REAR 46 ACCUMULATOR CONTROL SOLENOID 61 SPD SENSOR SIGNAL T M 62 NO 1 SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID 63 NO 2 SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID 64 LOCK UP CONTROL SOLENOID 65 TIMING SOLENOID 67 OD DIRECT CLUTCH SPD SENSOR SIG 68 KICK DOWN SWITCH 73 DIFF LOCK SOLENOID OPEN 74 DIFF LOCK SOLENOID OPEN 76 NO 3 SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID 86 ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 88 COMMUNICATION ERROR TCM ECM 44 TOYOTA TOYOTA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS ENGINE YEAR 1989 94 1989 1994 DESCRIPTOR ECU RPM SIGNAL CRANKING RPM SIGNAL OR PHASE IGNITION SIGNAL IGF1 IGNITION SIGNAL IGF2 AT CONTROL SIGNAL GI SIGNAL G2 SIGNAL MAIN 02 SIGNAL amp HEATER FAIL COOLANT TEMP SENSOR SIGNAL INTAKE TEMP SENSOR SIGNAL INTAKE TEMP SENSOR SIGNAL AIR FUEL RATIO LEAN MALFUNCTION AIR FUEL RATIO RICH MALFUNCTION SUB LH 02 SIG amp HEATER FAIL MAIN 02 SIGNAL amp HEATER FAIL SUB RH 02 SIG amp HEATER FAIL VAF MAF METER MAP SENSOR SIG VAF METER SIGNAL IAC MALFUNCTION TURBO PRESSURE
196. CKT FAILURE 25 IDLE SPD CONTROL FUNCTION 31 FAULTY ECM OR ECM CKT FAILURE 32 EGR SENSOR OR EGR CKT FAILURE 33 FRONT HO2S OR HO2S CKT FAILURE LEFT HO2S OR HO2S CKT FAILURE 34 KNOCK SENSOR OR KS CKT FAILURE 35 EGR TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT FAILURE 36 EGRC BPT VALVE FUNCTION 37 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL 41 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 43 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 45 INJECTOR LEAK 46 SECONDARY TPS OR CKT FAILURE 51 FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 53 RIGHT HO2S OR HO2S CKT FAILURE 54 TCM TO ECM CIRCUIT FAILURE 55 NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECM 65 MISFIRE NO 4 CYLINDER 66 MISFIRE NO 3 CYLINDER 67 MISFIRE NO 2 CYLINDER 68 MISFIRE NO 1 CYLINDER 71 MISFIRE MULTIPLE CYL 72 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNC 76 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION 16 INFINITI INFINITI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1994 DESCRIPTOR 77 REAR HO2S OR HO2S CKT FAILURE 82 CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL 84 A T DIAGNOSIS COMM LINE 91 FRONT HO2S OR HO2S CKT FAILURE 95 CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL 98 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE YEAR 1995 DESCRIPTOR 1995 11 CAM SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION 12 MAF SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORT 13 ECT SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORT 14 VSS OR CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORT 16 TCS SIGNAL CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORT 21 IGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION 31 ECM MALFUNCTION 32 EGR VALVE OR SOLENOID MALFUNCTION 33 LEFT HO2 SENSOR CIRCUIT OPE
197. CODES ADAPTER TYPE ENGINE MODEL 1992 ENGINE CODE TYPE TYPE 1992 COLT COLT 200 COLT VISTA COLT VISTA LASER LASER LASER POWER RAM 50 POWER RAM 50 RAM 50 STEALTH STEALTH STEALTH SUMMIT SUMMIT WAGON SUMMIT WAGON TALON TALON TALON 1 5L 14 SOHC 1 5L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 2 4L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 2 0L 14 DOHC 2 0L 14 DOHC TUR 2 4L 4 3 0L V6 2 4L 14 3 0L V6 DOHC 3 0L V6 DOHC TUR 3 0L V6 SOHC 1 5L I4 SOHC 1 8L I4 SOHC 2 4L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 2 0L 14 DOHC 2 0L 14 DOHC TUR 4G15 4G15 4G93 4G64 4G37 4G63 4G63 4G64 6G72 4G64 6G72 6G72 6G72 4G15 4G93 4G64 4G37 4G63 4G63 MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES CHRYSL ER IMPORTS VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1993 ENGINE ENG
198. CODES ENTER HONDA ACURA DISCONNECT THE NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL FOR AT ENTER REMOVE THE CLOCK RADIO FUSE 10A FROM THE ENTER TURN IGNITION OFF REMOVE THE NO 15 ACGS FUSE ENTER TURN IGNITION OFF REMOVE THE ALTERNATOR SENSE ENTER LEAST 10 SECONDS ENTER UNDER HOOD FUSE RELAY BOX FOR 10 SECONDS ENTER FROM THE UNDER DASH FUSE RELAY BOX FOR 10 SEC ENTER FUSE FROM THE UNDER HOOD FUSE RELAY BOX ENTER FOR 10 SECONDS ENTER Examples of Clear DTC Instructions 12 COMMON TEST MODES I MODE F2 DTC S 4 MODE F2 DTC S The purpose of the F2 DTC test mode is to read DTCs stored in the ECU on supported vehicles equipped with a Data Link Connector DLC A list of the DTCs for each vehicle is included in the Manufacturer Specific sections Up to four submodes are available when Mode F2 DTC is selected Only submodes available for the selected vehicle are displayed in the submode menu Below is a description of the submodes Operating instructions for the submodes are on the following pages The DTC Mode submodes include Submode F1 The tester reads and displays DTCs stored in the ECU On Inactive Toyota or Lexus systems Read DTC s this submode is F1 READ ENTER DTCs Refer to the Toyota or Lexus Specific Instructions Submode F2 The tester displays a list of DTCs available for the selected vehicle F
199. CODES LASER 1 8L 14 SOHC 4G37 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES LASER 2 0L 4 DOHC 4G63 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES LASER 2 0L 4 DOHC TUR 4G63 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES POWER RAM 50 2 4L 4 4G64 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES POWER RAM 50 3 0L V6 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES RAM 50 2 4L I4 4G64 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES RAM 50 3 0L V6 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES SUMMIT 1 5L 4 SOHC 4G15 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES SUMMIT 1 6L 4 DOHC 4G61 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES TALON 1 8L I4 SOHC 4G37 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES TALON 2 0L I4 DOHC 4G63 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES TALON 2 0L 14 DOHC TUR G63 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES VISTA WAGON 2 0L 4 SOHC G63B MPI CHECK AUTOCODES MODEL 1991 ENGINE pinum UE CODE 1991 COLT 1 5L I4 SOHC 4G61 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES COLT 200 1 5L I4 SOHC 4G61 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES COLT VISTA 2 0L I4 SOHC G63B MPI CHECK AUTOCODES LASER 1 8L 4 SOHC 4G37 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES LASER 2 0L I4 DOHC 4G63 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES LASER 2 0L 14 DOHC TUR 4663 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES POWER RAM 50 2 4L I4 4G64 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES POWER RAM 50 3 0L V6 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES RAM 50 2 4L I4 4G64 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES STEALTH 3 0L V6 DOHC 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES CHRYSLER IMPORTS 5 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS KREWNI ADAPTER cone Te STEALTH 3 0L V6 DOHC TUR 6672 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES STEALTH 3 0L V6 SOHC 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES SUMMIT 1 5L 4 SOHC 4G61 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES TALON 1 8L 14 SOHC 4G37 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES TALON 2 0L I4 DOHC 4G63 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES TALON 2 0L 14 DOHC TUR 4G63 MPI CHECK AUTO
200. COMM ECT1 83 TCM COMM ESA1 84 TCM COMM ESA2 85 TCM COMM ESA3 26 LEXUS DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS 9 DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS The Asian Imports Cartridge is capable of displaying a wide variety of ECU parameters in Data List and Snapshot This section provides a description of every parameter that can be displayed for Lexus vehicles Remember not all models are capable of displaying all parameters Only parameters available for the selected vehicle are displayed by the tester There are two basic types of ECM parameters discrete and analog Discrete parameters are bits of information and can be in only one of two distinct states on off open closed etc Switches and solenoids are examples of discrete parameters Analog parameters are used to represent quantities and are displayed as a value with appropriate units Examples of analog parameters include Engine Speed Coolant Temperature Oxygen Sensor Voltage etc AIC CLUTCH SIG STATES Air Conditioning switch status as input to vehicle ECM based on state of dashboard A C switch position commanded on OFF lt A C commanded off AFM OUTPUT A F METER RATIO m3 h 0 255 m3 h Air Flow Meter AFM output signal sent as an input to vehicle ECM from the Air Flow Meter and calculated into cubic meter hour by the ECM based on the rate of air flow through the AFM AFM OUTPUT AIF METER RATIO VOLTS 0 5V
201. CRIPTION Type 3 Cable Chrysler Imports Hyundai Mitsubishi Adapter The Chrysler Imports Hyundai Mitsubishi Adapter P N 02001921 must be connected to the end of the tester DLC Adapter Cable to perform certain tests on these vehicles The tester informs you where to connect the adapter to the DLC connector on the vehicle Chrysler Imports Hyundai Mitsubishi Adapter Cable Yellow Daihatsu Jumper To perform certain tests on Daihatsu vehicles the Daihatsu 6 Pin Jumper P N 02002073 must be connected to the vehicle diagnostic connector The tester informs you where to connect the jumper to the diagnostic connector on the vehicle Daihatsu Jumper GENERAL INFORMATION ASIAN IMPORTS CARTRIDGE KIT DESCRIPTION Mazda Adapter When testing Mazda vehicles a 1 6 17 14 Pin DLC adapter cable P N 02001922 must be used The appropriate orange end of the cable is then connected to the vehicle DLC A chart at the beginning of the Mazda Specific Instructions indicates which adapter cable connector to use for the selected vehicle Mazda Adapter Cable Orange Nissan Check Adapter To perform certain tests on Nissan vehicles the Nissan 12 14 Pin Check adapter P N 02001897 must be connected to the end of the tester DLC Adapter Cable The Red end of the cable is then connected to the vehicle DLC The tester informs you where to connect the Check Adapter cable to the DLC on the vehicle Nissan Check Adapter
202. CRIPTOR CONTINUED 39 FRONT O2 SENSOR OR CKT 41 INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE 43 EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR 44 IGNITION COIL OR CKT FAILURE IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 1 amp 4 CYL 52 IGN SIGNAL OR NO 2 amp 5 CYL 53 IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 3 amp 6 CYL 55 SERVO VALVE POS SENSOR OR CKT 61 TORQUE REDUCED SIGNAL A T 62 INDUCTION CNTRL VALVE POS SNSR YEAR 1993 DESCRIPTOR 1993 0 ECU OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 11 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE FRONT HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE REAR HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT 12 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 13 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 14 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 15 ISC MOTOR POS SWITCH OR CKT 21 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR 22 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 23 CAMSHAFT ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 24 SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 25 BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 31 KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE 32 MAP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 36 IGNITION TIMING ADJUSTMENT 39 FRONT HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT 41 INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE CHRYSLER IMPORTS 29 CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1993 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 42 FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE 43 EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR 44 IGNITION COIL OR CKT FAILURE IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 1 amp 4 CYL 52 IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 2 amp 5 CYL 53 IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 3 amp 6 CYL 55 IAC VALVE POS
203. CT MODE menu 2 Select any of the available trigger types from SNAPSHOT menu 20 COMMON TEST MODES II TEST MODES 3 Data from only one ECU can be saved in tester memory Therefore if multiple ECUs are detected you will be asked to select one of the ECUs 4 To choose which snapshot parameters are displayed press G to select DATA SETUP from the SNAPSHOT menu After selecting F9 DATA SETUP refer to 0 ALL PARMS and 1 CUSTOM LIST PARAMETERS in the DATA LIST section for displaying all parameters or selecting a custom list of parameters Submode F4 Trigger Point Trigger Types In the SNAPSHOT mode data is saved in the tester while it is waiting for a trigger condition Once the trigger occurs data continues to be saved in the tester s memory until the memory is full Snapshot menu allows you to start the snapshot process by selecting a trigger mode Three types of triggers can be selected KEYPRESS DESCRIPTION ANY Snapshot trigger on the occurrence of any Fl SINGLE DTC Snapshot trigger on the occurrence of a single DTC that you specify F2 MANUAL TRIG Snapshot trigger by an MED GB G key press Trigger Point Setup The snapshot menu allows you to select how much data is saved after trigger occurs by selecting F4 TRIG POINT from the SNAPSHOT menu screen To change the trigger point select the key next to the desired point This trigger point is saved as long as the tester has powe
204. CUIT MALFUNCTION SECONDARY AIR INJECTION SYSTEM MALFUNCTION PNP SWITCH FAILURE GENERATOR FIELD NOT SWITCHING ASD FUEL PUMP RELAY CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION IGNITION COIL PRIMARY CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION CYLINDER MISFIRE BATTERY TEMP SENSOR OUT OF RANGE CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW FUEL SYSTEM LEAN 34 MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS DESCRIPTOR 52 FUEL SYSTEM RICH 53 PCM FAILURE SPI COMMUNICATIONS 54 NO CAM SIGNAL AT PCM 62 PCM FAILURE SRI MILE NOT STORED 63 PCM FAILURE EEPROM WRITE DENIED 64 CATALYTIC CONVERTER EFFICIENCY FAILURE 65 PSP SWITCH FAILURE 66 NO CCD MESSAGES FROM TCM MITSUBISHI 35 MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS OBD II SYSTEMS YEAR 1995 98 DESCRIPTOR 1995 98 OBD II P0100 Volume Air Flow Circuit Malfunction P0105 BARO Pressure Circuit Malfunction P0106 BARO Pressure Sensor Out of Range P0107 MAP Sensor Low Voltage P0108 MAP Sensor High Voltage P0110 IAT Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0112 IAT Sensor Low Voltage P0113 IAT Sensor High voltage P0115 ECT Circuit Malfunction P0117 ECT Sensor Low voltage P0118 ECT Sensor High Voltage P0120 TPS Circuit Malfunction P0121 TPS Voltage Does not Match MAP P0122 TPS Low Voltage P0123 TPS High Voltage P0125 Excessive Time to Enter Closed Loop P0130 Right Front O2 Sensor Malfunction P0131 Upstream HO2
205. CUT SOL OPEN SHORT 26 ACCUMULATOR CUT SOL OPEN SHORT 27 RESERVOIR CUT SOL OPEN SHORT 31 RF SPEED SENSOR MALFUNCTION 32 LF SPEED SENSOR MALFUNCTION INCTION 37 SPD SENSOR ROTOR WHEEL FAILURE 43 TRAC SYS DECEL SENSOR 44 DECELERATION SENS OPEN SHORT 45 DECELERATION SENSOR 46 DECELERATION SENSOR 47 DECELERATION SENSOR 51 ACTUATOR PUMP MOTOR LOCKED 53 TRAC MOTOR OVER OPERATING DUR 54 TRAC MOTOR OVER OPERATING FREQ 55 LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL 56 PRESSURE SENSOR OPEN OR SHORT 57 PRESSURE SENSOR STICKING 22 LEXUS LEXUS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1990 94 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 61 TRAC ECU COM LINE OPEN SHORT 62 ECU MALFUNCTION 71 RF SENSOR LOW VOLTAGE 72 SENSOR LOW VOLTAGE 73 RR SENSOR LOW VOLTAGE 74 LR SENSOR LOW VOLTAGE 75 RF SENSOR ABNORMAL FREQ 76 LF SENSOR ABNORMAL FREQ 77 SENSOR ABNORMAL FREQ 78 LR SENSOR ABNORMAL FREQ 79 DECELERATION SENSOR MALF AIR CONDITIONING YEAR 1990 94 DESCRIPTOR 1990 1994 11 ROOM TEMP SENSOR OPEN OR SHORT 12 AMBIENT TEMP SENS OPEN SHORT 13 EVAPORATOR TEMP SENS OPEN SHORT 14 WATER TEMP SENS OPEN SHORT 15 DUCT SENSOR OPEN SHORT Dr 16 SENSOR OPEN SHORT Pa 21 SOLAR SENSOR OPEN SHORT Pa 22 COMPRESSOR LOCKED 23 REFRIGERANT PRESS MALFUNCTION 24 SOLAR SENSOR OPEN SHORT Dr 31 AIR MIX POSITION SENSOR 32 AIR INLET POSITION SEN
206. Cable Red Honda Acura SCC Jumper The Honda Acura 2 Pin Service Check Connector SCC Jumper P N 02001935 is required for certain tests on Honda and Acura vehicles The tester informs you where to connect the jumper to the SCC connector on the vehicle 8 GENERAL INFORMATION ASIAN IMPORTS CARTRIDGE KIT DESCRIPTION Honda Acura SCC Jumper Toyota Lexus TDCL and Check Adapter Cables For Toyota and Lexus vehicles certain tests require the green 17 14 Pin TDCL P N 02001895 or the blue 21 14 Pin Check P N 02001896 Adapter Cable to be connected to connects to the end of the tester DLC Cable The color coded end of the adapter cable connects to the vehicle Check connector or TDCL connector 5 resa Toyota Lexus Check Adapter Cable Blue Toyota Lexus TDCL Adapter Cable Green Suzuki Adapter A GM 12 14 Pin DLC adapter is reguired for connecting the tester to Suzuki vehicles GM 12 14 Pin DLC Adapter GENERAL INFORMATION 9 ASIAN IMPORTS CARTRIDGE KIT DESCRIPTION Isuzu 3 pin Adapters When testing some Isuzu vehicles a 3 Pin DLC adapter must be used The adapter required depends on the ECU manufacturer A chart at the beginning of the Isuzu Specific Instructions indicates which adapter the Isuzu Delco P N 02001325 or the Isuzu Hitachi P N 02001326 to use for the selected vehicle Note that the adapter must be used in conjunction with the GM 12 14 Pin adapter included in the MASTERTECH
207. Cs from the ECU 2 Use F2 SCC LOCATION from the Information menu for help in locating the Service Check Connector SCO or F5 ECU LOCATION from the Information menu for help in locating the engine electronic control module 3 If required connect the Honda Acura Code jumper P N 02001935 into the SCC 4 Turn the ignition key to RUN 5 The MIL and the ECU LED will flash DTCs if stored in ECU memory 6 The 10 s digit corresponds to a long pulse and the 1 s digit corresponds to a short pulse 7 Use F1 ENTER DTCs and type manually read DTCs into the tester or select it from F2 DTC LIST 8 The resulting code will appear on the tester along with a brief description HONDA 13 TEST MODES 9 If used remove the Honda Acura Code jumper from the SCC 10 Use F4 CLEAR DTCs for DTC clear code information 11 Turn ignition key off when diagnosis is finished NOTE For further information refer to the Factory Service Manual for the vehicle EH you are testing Submode F2 DTC List This submode provides you with a text description of the numeric DTC that was selected on the tester display screen As you scroll through the available DTCs you can select the DTC that matches the DTC output by the ECU After you perform this step simply select the DTC on the tester screen for later review or printing Submode F3 Review DTC This submode provides you with a review of the DTCs that you entered or selected in t
208. D MANCODES NONE GL 10 1 8L H4 MPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE RX SEDAN 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO M T ECULED MANCODES NONE SEDAN 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE XT COUPE 1 8L H4 MPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE XT GL 10 COUPE 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE 3 ADAPTER 1986 3 DOOR 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO M T ECULED MANCODES NONE DL 1 8L H4 ECC M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 1 8L H4 ECC A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 1 8L H4 MPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE RX SEDAN 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO M T ECULED MANCODES NONE XT COUPE 1 8L H4 MPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE XT GL 10 COUPE 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE SUBARU 3 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS ES AR 1987 DL 3 DOOR 1 8L H4 SPFI M T ECULED MANCODES NONE DL SEDAN WAGON 1 8L H4 SPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 3 DOOR 1 8L H4 SPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 3 DOOR 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 1 8L H4 SPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 10 1 8L H4 SPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 10 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE JUSTY 1 2L I3 ECC M T ECULED MANCODES NONE RX 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO M T ECULED MANCODES NONE XT 1 8L H4 MPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE XT 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO M T ECULED MANCODES NONE XT GL 10 COUPE 1 8L H4 MPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE XT GL 10 CO
209. D II AUTOCODES For OBD II Adapter Type use Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information ENGINE ADAPTER MODEL 1997 ENGINE TYPE TYPE CODE 1997 SERIES 2 3L I4 EFI OBD II AUTOCODES B SERIES 3 0L V6 EFI OBD II AUTOCODES B SERIES 4 0L V6 EFI OBD II AUTOCODES MILLENIA 2 3L V6 EFI KJ OBD II AUTOCODES MILLER MILLENIA 2 5L V6 EFI KL OBD II AUTOCODES MPV 3 0L V6 EFI JE OBD II AUTOCODES MX5 MIATA 1 8L 14 SFI BP OBD II AUTOCODES MX6 2 0L 4 SFI FS OBD II AUTOCODES MX6 2 5LV6 SFI KL OBD II AUTOCODES PROTEGE 1 5L 14 EFI Z5 OBD II AUTOCODES PROTEG 1 8L 14 EFI BP OBD II AUTOCODES 626 2 0L I4 SFI FS OBD II AUTOCODES 626 2 5LV6 SFI KL OBD II AUTOCODES For OBD II Adapter Type use Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information MODEL 1998 ENGINE BE predla CODE 1998 SERIES 2 5L 14 EFI OBD II AUTOCODES B SERIES 3 0L V6 EFI OBD II AUTOCODES MAZDA 9 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1998 ENGINE ADAPTER CONTINUED ENGINE TYPE TYPE POPE IPE B SERIES 4 0L V6 EFI OBD II AUTOCODES MILLENIA 2 5L V6 MEFI KL OBD II AUTOCODES MILLENIA 2 3L V6 MEFI KI OBD II AUTOCODES MILLER MPV 3 0L V6 MEFI JE OBD II AUTOCODES MX5 MIATA 1 8L 14 MEFI BP OBD II AUTOCODES PROTEGE 1 5L I4 MEFI Z5 OBD II AUTOCODES PROTEG 1 8L 14 MEFI BP OBD II AUTOCODES 626 2 0L 4 MEFI FS
210. D MT 49ST CAN 2 SPEC CODE FWD ECVT 49ST CAN SPEC CODE MT CAL 3 SPEC CODE 4WD MT 49ST CAN SPEC CODE AT 49ST CAN 4 SPEC CODE 4WD ECVT 49ST CAN SPEC CODE AT CAL SPEC CODE MT FED CAN SPEC CODE MT CAL SPEC CODE AT FED CAN SPEC CODE AT CAL SPEC CODE FWD MT CAL 11 CRANK ANGLE SNSR REF PULSE OR CKT CKP SENSOR OR CKT CAM SIG OK CKP SNSR OR CKT START SIG OK 12 STARTER SW POS ON OFF FAILURE STARTER SWITCH IGN SIG FAILURE STARTER SW ON OFF CRANKING 13 CYL DISTINCTION SNSR CKP SIG OK CKP SNSR OR CKT CRANK SIG OK CKP SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 14 FUEL INJ 1 OR CIRCUIT FAILURE FUEL INJ OUTPUT OR CKT FAILURE DUTY SOLENOID VALVE OR CKT FUEL INJ 1 amp 2 OR CKT FAILURE 15 FUEL INJ 2 OR CKT FAILURE CFC SYSTEM OR CIRCUIT FAILURE FUEL INJ 3 amp 4OR CKT FAILURE 16 FUEL INJ 3 OR CKT FAILURE FEEDBACK SYSTEM OR CKT FAILURE 17 FUEL INJ 4 OR CKT FAILURE FUEL PUMP AUTO CHOKE OR CKT 20 SPEC CODE FWD ECVT CAL 21 WATER TEMP SNSR SIGNAL OR CKT WATER TEMP SNSR OR CKT FAILURE 22 KS SNSR MONITOR CKT VOLTAGE VLC SOLENOID VALVE OR CKT KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE 32 SUBARU SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1990 CONTINUED 23 24 25 26 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 49 51 52 DESCRIPTOR PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE AIR FLOW SNSR SIGNAL VOLT
211. DEL 1989 ENGINE piss T EE BREE CODE 1989 GALANT 2 0L I4 DOHC 4G63 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES GALANT 2 0L 14 SOHC 8V 4663 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES MIRAGE 1 5L I4 SOHC 4G15 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES MIRAGE 1 6L 14 DOHC 4G61 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES MONTERO 3 0L V6 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES SIGMA 3 0L V6 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES STARION 2 6L I4 TUR INT G54B ECIEFI CHECK AUTOCODES 4 MITSUBISHI VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1989 CONTINUED ENGINE ENGINE ADAPTER CODE TYPE VAN WAGON 2 4L 14 4G64 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES MODEL 1990 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE 1990 ECLIPSE ECLIPSE ECLIPSE GALANT GALANT GALANT MIRAGE MIRAGE MONTERO PRECIS SIGMA TRUCK TRUCK VAN WAGON 1 8L I4 2 0L 4 2 0L 4 TURBO 2 0L 4 DOHC 2 0L 4 DOHC TUR 2 0L I4 SOHC 8V 1 5L I4 SOHC 1 6L I4 DOHC 3 0L V6 1 5L 14 3 0L V6 2 4L I4 3 0L V6 2 4L 14 4G37 4G63 4G63 4G63 4G63 4G63 4G15 4G61 6G72 G4AM 6G72 4G64 6G72 4G64 MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES
212. DEL 1991 ENGINE ENGINE FUEL TYPE SYSTEM JUMPER TYPE 1991 INTEGRA LEGEND SEDAN LEGEND COUPE NSX MODEL 1992 1 8L 14 B18Al MPFI 3 2L V6 C32A1 MPFI 3 2L V6 C32A1 MPFI 3 0L V6 C30A1 MPFI ENGINE ENGINE FUEL TYPE SYSTEM ECU LED MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED NONE SCC SCC SCC JUMPER 1992 INTEGRA LEGEND SEDAN LEGEND COUPE NSX VIGOR 1 7L 14 B17A1 MPFI 1 8L 14 B18Al MPFI 3 2L V6 C32A1 MPFI 3 2L V6 C32A1 MPFI 3 0L V6 C30A1 MPFI 2 5L V6 G25A1 MPFI MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED SCC SCC SCC SCC SCC SCC MODEL 1993 ENGINE ENGINE FUEL TYPE SYSTEM JUMPER TYPE 1993 INTEGRA LEGEND SEDAN LEGEND COUPE NSX 1 7L 14 B17A1 MPFI 1 8L 14 B18Al MPFI 3 2L V6 C32A1 MPFI 3 2L V6 C32A1 MPFI 3 0L V6 C30A1 MPFI MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED SCC SCC SCC SCC SCC ACURA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1993 ENGINE ENGINE FUEL JUMPER CONTINUED TYPE SYSTEM TYPE VIGOR 2 5L V6 G25A1 MPFI MIL LED SCC MODEL 1994 ENGINE v k STEN EE 1994 INTEGRA 1 7L 14 B17A1 MPFI MIL LED SCC 1 8L 14 B18Al MPFI MIL LED SCC LEGEND SEDAN 3 2L V6 C32A1 MPFI MIL LED SCC LEGEND COUPE 3 2L V6 C32A1 MPFI MIL LED SCC NSX 3 0L C30A1 MPFI MIL LED SCC VIGOR 2 5L V6 G25A1 MPFI MIL LED SCC 4 ACURA ACURA SPECIFIC INFORMATION 2 ACURA SPECI
213. DES Detailed operating instructions for using Modes 1 Entry and F2 with Chrysler Imports vehicles are included in the following procedure F1 Entry is automatically displayed and F2 is automatically displayed with Chrysler Imports vehicles that have as the adapter type listed in Section 1 NOTE Follow the Submode F0 Prepare Vehicle instructions to ensure proper vehicle preparation prior to testing The vehicle must be completely EH warmed up in order for the tester to communicate properly with the vehicle MODE F1 DTC ENTRY When Mode F1 DTC Entry is selected the tester displays submodes which after your selection can provide information on how to read diagnostic trouble codes DTCs from the vehicle how to clear DTCs from the vehicle or tester memory buffer obtain a text description of entered or selected DTCs and review entered or selected DTCs as a result of manually retrieving codes from the ECU DTC Entry Submodes F0 HOW TO READ F1 ENTER DTC s F2 DTC LIST F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC s Manually Reading DTCs To manually read Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs on Chrysler Import vehicles from 1984 95 there are 2 methods that can be used The most common method requires an analog voltmeter Using the analog voltmeter set to a 20 volt scale and connected to the Data Link Connector DLC the DTC can be interpreted from the analog voltmeter needle flashes The secon
214. DES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK TDCL CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK MODEL 1991 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER 1991 CAMRY CELICA COROLLA CRESSIDA MR2 2 0L I4 2 5L V6 1 6L 14 2 0L TURBO 14 ALL TRAC 2 2L 14 1 6L 14 1 6L 14 3 0L V6 2 0L TURBO 14 2 2L 4 3S FE 2VZ FE 4A FE 3S GTE 5S FE 4A FE 4A GE 7M GE 3S GTE 5S FE PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES amp DATA CODES CODES CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK TDCL CHECK CHECK TOYOTA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1991 CONTINUED ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER PREVIA SUPRA TERCEL LAND CRUISER 4RUNNER 2WD amp 4WD TRUCK 2WD amp 4WD 2 4L 4 3 0L 16 3 0L TURBO 16 1 5L 14 4 0L 16 2 4L 4 3 0L V6 2 4L 4 3 0L V6 2TZ FE 7M GE 7M GTE 3E E 3F E 22R E 3VZ E 22R E 3VZ E PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK MODEL 1992 ENGINE ENGIN
215. DTC Submode F4 Clear DTC s HONDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS Using the Asian Imports Cartridge the following Honda vehicles can be diagnosed ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL SYSTEM CODE JUMPER TYPE 1985 ACCORD SEI CIVIC CRX SI 1 8L 14 1 5L 14 ES3 EW3 MPFI MPFI ECU LED ECU LED NONE NONE ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL SYSTEM CODE TYPE JUMPER 1986 ACCORD ACCORD LXI CIVIC CRX SI CIVIC SI PRELUDE 2 0L 14 2 0L 14 1 5L 14 1 3L 14 2 0L 14 BS BT EW3 Evl BT 2V CARB MPFI MPFI 3V CARB MPFI ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED gt O 9 O m m m m m ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL SYSTEM CODE TYPE JUMPER TYPE 1987 ACCORD CIVIC CIVIC CRX SI PRELUDE 2 0L 14 1 5L 14 1 5L 14 2 0L 14 A20A3 DISA3 D15A3 A20A3 MPFI MPFI MPFI MPFI ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED NONE NONE NONE NONE ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL SYSTEM CODE TYPE JUMPER TYPE 1988 ACCORD CIVIC 2 0L 14 1 5L 14 A20A3 D15B2 MPFI TBI ECU LED ECU LED NONE NONE HONDA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL SYSTEM CODE JUMPER CIVIC CRX 1 5L 14 D15B6 MPFI
216. DTC Repetition Loop of DTC 1122 5 Ground the pin 10 again for 2 5 seconds The next DTC will be displayed on the MIL Keep grounding pin 10 until all DTCs are read and the last output is end of output MIL flashes 3 3 3 3 6 If no malfunctions are present MIL will flash 4 4 4 4 7 After recording DTCs turn ignition switch off 8 Disconnect jumper leads 9 Erase DTCs when all repairs are completed On certain Hyundai vehicles the instrument panel MIL will flash out four digit DTCs When four digit DTCs are manually read from the engine ECU use F2 DTC LIST instead of F1 ENTER DTC s to select DTCs NOTE flashed on the MIL The F2 DTC LIST mode displays both the four digit and the corresponding two digit DTC DTC 23 3145 ECT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE Submode F2 DTC List This submode provides you with a way to view all possible ECU DTCs including DTC numbers and descriptions You can also select the DTCs obtained from the analog voltmeter as an alternative to entering DTCs into the tester s memory As you scroll through the available DTCs you can view a description of the DTC obtained from the analog voltmeter or MIL You can Select the DTC on the tester screen for later review or printing Refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further information Submode F3 Review DTC This submode provides you with a review of the DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The des
217. DTCs manually do the following 1 Before testing check the following initial conditions Battery voltage of 11 volts or more throttle valve fully closed all accessory switches turned OFF 2 Locate the 6 pin Diagnostic Jumper Connector DJC 3 Jump TEST T and GROUND terminals by connecting the 6 pin Daihatsu Jumper P N 02002073 to the vehicle s 6 pin diagnosis jumper connector 4 Turn ignition switch to ON but do not start the engine 5 Dashboard MIL will begin flashing DTCs If DTCs are stored in the ECU the MIL will begin indicating the DTCs 4 5 seconds after the ignition is switched ON MIL flash is 0 5 seconds ON and each flash is separated by 0 5 seconds Each DTC is separated by a 2 5 second interval series is separated by a 4 5 second interval If no DTCs are stored in ECU the normal condition 1 will be flashed on the MIL 6 The normal DTC condition is one MIL flash in 5 seconds 7 Disconnect 6 pin Daihatsu Jumper when finished 8 Erase DTCs when all repairs are completed 1 sl aaa 1 Submode 2 List This submode provides you with a way to view all possible ECU DTCs including DTC numbers and descriptions You can also select the DTCs obtained from the MIL as an alternative way of entering DTCs into the tester s memory As you scroll through the available DTCs you can view a description of the DTC obtained from the MIL You can Select th
218. Diagnostic capability to diagnose emissions related failures of the engine control system These diagnostic requirements have been designated as OBD II On Board Diagnostics Phase II with a goal of monitoring of the emissions related components on board the vehicle for proper operation CARB s intent with the OBD II program is to permit the State s Inspection and Maintenance Program to evolve into a check of the on board computer for the presence of Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs underhood and tailpipe inspections would no longer be required CARB has left the task of defining the Standards and Recommended Practices needed to implement their OBD II requirements to the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE The SAE committees that define these documents are made up of worldwide representatives from the vehicle manufacturers tool manufacturers service industry and regulatory agencies plus other related automotive disciplines The glossary in Appendix D contains a brief description of the SAE J documents which provide these definitions Part of the OBD II program is for the vehicle to provide a standard interface for off board diagnostic test equipment This standard interface includes a standard test connector referred to as the J1962 connector a standard communication protocol SAE J1850 or ISO9141 2 and a standard set of diagnostic test modes defined by SAE J1979 In addition to defining the California mandated emissio
219. E ADAPTER 1992 CAMRY CELICA COROLLA CRESSIDA MR2 PASEO PREVIA SUPRA TERCEL LAND CRUISER 4RUNNER 2WD amp 4WD TRUCK 2WD amp 4WD 3 0L V6 2 2L 14 2 01 TURBO 14 ALL TRAC 1 6L 14 2 2L 14 1 6L 14 3 0L V6 2 0L TURBO 14 2 2L 14 1 5L 14 2 4L 4 3 0L I6 3 0L TURBO I6 1 5L 14 4 0L I6 2 4L 4 3 0L V6 2 4L 14 3 0L V6 3VZ FE 5S FE 3S GTE 4A FE 5S FE 4A FE 7M GE 3S GTE 5S FE 5E FE 2TZ FE 7M GE 7M GTE 3E E 3F E 22R E 3VZ E 22R E 3VZ E PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PRI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI PFI CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES amp DATA CODES CODES amp DATA CODES CODES amp DATA CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES CODES amp DATA CODES CODES amp DATA CHECK TCDL CHECK TDCL CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK TDCL CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK TOYOTA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1993 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL SYST ADAPTER 1993 CAMRY CELICA COROLLA CRESSIDA MR2 PASEO PREVIA SUPRA TERCEL LAND CRUISER T100 4RUNNER 2WD amp 4WD TRUCK 2WD amp 4WD 3 0L V6 2 2L 14 2 01 TURBO 14 ALL TRAC 1 6L 14 2 2L 14 1 6L 14 1 8L 14
220. E WASTE GATE DUTY SOLENOID TURBO BOOST PRESSURE CONTROL 45 VACUUM SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 51 FUEL PUMP RESISTOR RELAY 71 INJECTOR FRONT SECONDARY 73 INJECTOR REAR SECONDARY 36 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1991 DESCRIPTOR NOTE For 1991 Navajo DTCs see table beginning on page 40 1991 1 IGNITION PULSE IGNITION PULSE IGNITER IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL TRAILING SIDE IG PULSE CIRCUIT 2 NE SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR NE SIGNAL CRANK ANGLE SENSOR NE SIGNAL 3 G SIGNAL Gl SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR G1 SIGNAL CRANK ANGLE SENSOR G SIGNAL 4 G2 SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR G2 SIGNAL 5 KNOCK SENSOR OR KNOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT KNOCK SENSOR OR KNOCK SENSOR CONTROL UNIT KNOCK SENSOR 8 AIRFLOW METER AIRFLOW SENSOR 9 WATER THERMOSENSOR WATER THERMOSENSOR OR CIRCUIT 10 INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR AIRFLOW METER 11 INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR DYNAMIC CHAMBER INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR ENGINE 12 THROTTLE SENSOR THROTTLE SENSOR FULL RANGE 13 PRESSURE SENSOR INTAKE MANIFOLD PRESSURE VACUUM SENSOR OR CIRCUIT 14 ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR IN ECU ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR ATP ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR OR CIRCUIT 15 O2 SENSOR LEFT SIDE O2 SENSOR O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT 16 EGR POSITION SENSOR EGR POSITION SENSOR OR CIRCUIT 17 FEEDBACK SYSTEM FEEDBACK SYSTEM LEFT SIDE MAZDA 3
221. E COOLANT TEMP SENSOR 22 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 23 TDC SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT 1 amp 4 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT CHRYSLER IMPORTS 27 CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1991 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 24 SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 25 BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 31 DETONATION SNSR OR CKT FAILURE 36 IGNITION TIMING ADJUSTMENT 39 FRONT O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 41 INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE 43 EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR 44 IGNITION COIL OR CKT FAILURE IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 1 amp 4 CYL 52 IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 2 5 CYL 53 IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 3 amp 6 CYL 61 TORQUE REDUCED SIGNAL A T 62 INDUCTION CNTRL VALVE POS SNSR YEAR 1992 DESCRIPTOR 1992 0 ECU OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 11 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE REAR O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 12 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 13 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 14 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 15 MOTOR POSITION SENSOR OR CKT 21 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR 22 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 23 1 amp 4 CYL TDC SENSOR TDC SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT 24 SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 25 BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 31 DETONATION SNSR OR FAILURE 36 IGNITION TIMING ADJUSTMENT 28 CHRYSLER IMPORTS CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES YEAR 1992 DES
222. E IDLE SWITCH FAILURE 24 TRANS SWITCH OR CIRCUIT FAILURE PARK NEUTRAL SW OR CKT FAILURE 31 A C OR A C CIRCUIT FAILURE 32 STARTER SIGNAL MALFUNCTION 34 KNOCK SENSOR OR KS CKT FAILURE 41 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE FUEL TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 44 NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECU YEAR 1985 DESCRIPTOR 1985 11 CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL 12 AIR FLOW METER CIRCUIT FAILURE 13 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE CYL HEAD TEMP SENSOR FAILURE 14 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 28 NISSAN NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1985 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 21 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 22 FUEL PUMP OR FP CIRCUIT FAILURE 23 THROTTLE IDLE SWITCH FAILURE 24 TRANS SWITCH OR CIRCUIT FAILURE PARK NEUTRAL SW OR CKT FAILURE 31 F I C D SYSTEM MALFUNCTION LOAD SIGNAL OR CIRCUIT FAILURE A C OR A C CIRCUIT FAILURE 32 STARTER SIGNAL MALFUNCTION 34 KNOCK SENSOR OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE 41 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE DISREGARD IF DISPLAYED FUEL TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 44 NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECU YEAR 1986 DESCRIPTOR 1986 11 CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAILURE 12 AIR FLOW METER CIRCUIT FAILURE 13 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE CYL HEAD TEMP SENSOR FAILURE 14 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 21 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 22 FUEL PUMP OR FP CIRCUIT FAILURE 23 THROTTLE IDLE SWITCH FAILURE 24 TRANS SWITCH OR CIRCUIT FAILURE PARK NEUTRAL SW OR CKT FAILURE CLUTCH N
223. E UNITS RANGE Angle of throttle plate in throttle body as sent to the vehicle ECM and calculated by the ECM based on current position of throttle position sensor VEHICLE SPEED MPH 0 125 Vehicle speed signal as input to vehicle ECM and calculated by the ECM based on vehicle speed sensor input 30 LEXUS VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MAZDA SPECIFIC INFORMATION TEST MODES AVAILABLE GETTING STARTED SELECTING THE VEHICLE TEST MODES Mode F1 Entry Submode F0 How To Read Submode F1 Enter DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC Submode F4 Clear DTC s Mode F2 DTC Submode F1 Read DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC Submode F4 Clear DTC s 7 OBD CONTROLS Mode F4 OBD Controls Submode F0 Switch Test Submode F1 O2S Monitor MAZDA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS Using the Asian cartridge the following Mazda vehicles can be diagnosed pini ENGINE pie AE CODE 1983 GLC 1 5L 14 CARB 5 AUTOCODES 626 2 0L I4 CARB FE CHECK AUTOCODES 1984 GLC 1 5L 14 CARB 5 AUTOCODES 626 2 0L 14 CARB FE CHECK AUTOCODES RX7 1 3L R2 EGI EFI 13B CHECK AUTOCODES 1985 GLC 1 5L 14 CARB 5 AUTOCODES 626 2 0L 14 CARB FE CHECK AUTOCODES RX7 1 3L R2 EGI EFI 13B CHECK AUTOCODES 1986 323 1 6L 14 EGI EFI B6 CHECK AUTOCODES 626 2 0L I4 EGI EFI FE CHECK AUTOCODES 626 2 0L I4 TURBO EGI EFI
224. E VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CONTINUOUS MEMORY HEGO SENSOR CIRCUIT INDICATES SYSTEM LEAN ENGINE RUNNING NO HEGO SWITCH DETECTED CONTINUOUS MEMORY HEGO SENSOR CIRCUIT INDICATES SYSTEM RICH ENGINE RUNNING COIL 1 2 OR 3 FAILURE CONTINUOUS MEMORY ECT INDICATED 40 F CIRCUIT OPEN KOEO CONTINUOUS MEMORY TP CIRCUIT ABOVE MAXIMUM VOLTAGE KOEO CONTINUOUS MEMORY ACT INDICATED 40 CIRCUIT OPEN KOEO CONTINUOUS MEMORY 40 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1991 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR 56 61 63 64 66 67 67 72 73 74 77 79 86 87 89 95 96 98 MAF CIRCUIT ABOVE MAXIMUM VOLTAGE KOEO CONTINUOUS MEMORY ECT INDICATED 254 F CIRCUIT GROUNDED KOEO CONTINUOUS MEMORY TP CIRCUIT BELOW MINIMUM VOLTAGE KOEO CONTINUOUS MEMORY ACT INDICATED 254 F CIRCUIT GROUNDED KOEO CONTINUOUS MEMORY MAF CIRCUIT BELOW MINIMUM VOLTAGE CONTINUOUS MEMORY NEUTRAL DRIVE SWITCH NDS CIRCUIT OPEN A C ON KOEO CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT FAILURE CONTINUOUS MEMORY INSUFFICIENT MAF CHANGE DURING DYNAMIC RESPONSE TEST ENGINE RUNNING INSUFFICIENT TP CHANGE DURING DYNAMIC RESPONSE TEST ENGINE RUNNING BRAKE ON OFF BOO CIRCUIT FAILURE NOT ACTUATED ENGINE RUNNING OPERATOR ERROR DYNAMIC RESPONSE CYLINDER BALANCE TESTS ENGINE RUNNING A C ON DEFROST ON DURING SELF TEST SHIFT SOLENOID CIRCUIT FAILURE KOEO PRIMARY FUEL PUMP C
225. ECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES FORDCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES MODEL 1993 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE 1993 323 PROTEGE 323 PROTEGE 323 PROTEGE 626 MX6 626 MX6 929 NAVAJO MPV MPV MX3 1 6L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 DOHC 2 0L 14 2 5L V6 3 0L V6 4 0L V6 3 0L V6 2 6L 14 1 8L V6 EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI B6 BP BP FS KL JE JE G6 K8 CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK NONE CHECK CHECK CHECK AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES MAZDA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1993 CONTINUED ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE MX3 MX5 MIATA RX7 B2200 B2200 B2600i 1 6L I4 1 6L 14 1 3L R2 TURBO 2 2L 14 2 2L 14 2 6L 14 EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI CARB EGI MFI EGI MFI 13B F2 F2 G6 CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES MODEL 1994 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE 1994 3
226. ECM based on engine load and left O2 sensor signal inputs to ECM ON feedback enabled OFF feedback disabled LEFT A F TARGET VOLTS 0 5V Target commanded air fuel ratio in left hand exhaust manifold as calculated by vehicle ECM LEFT O2S SIGNAL RICH LEAN Left Oxygen Sensor state flag based on input to vehicle ECU based on oxygen content in left exhaust stream RICH air fuel ratio above 14 7 LEANcair fuel ratio below 14 7 1 NEUTRAL SWITCH STATES Neutral Safety switch status as input to vehicle ECM based on the current gear selection of the transmission P N current gear is PARK or NEUTRAL R DL current gear is REVERSE DRIVE or LOW RIGHT A F FB ON OFF Right side air fuel feedback signal state as commanded by vehicle ECM based on engine load and right O2 sensor signal inputs to ECM ON feedback enabled OFF feedback disabled LEXUS 29 DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS RIGHT A F TARGET UNITS RANGE Target commanded air fuel ratio in right hand exhaust manifold as calculated by vehicle ECM RIGHT O2S SIGNAL RICH LEAN Right Oxygen Sensor state flag based on input to vehicle ECU based on oxygen content in right exhaust stream RICH air fuel ratio above 14 7 LEAN air fuel ratio below 14 7 1 SPARK ADVANCE DEGREES 30 90 Ignition timing Spark Advance Retard signal based on output calculated by the vehicle ECU based on engine load engine RPM and Throttle Position THROTTLE ANGL
227. ECT CLUTCH SPD SENSOR SIG 68 KICK DOWN SWITCH 73 DIFF LOCK SOLENOID OPEN 74 DIFF LOCK SOLENOID OPEN 76 NO 3 SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID 86 ENGINE SPEED SENSOR 88 COMMUNICATION ERROR TCM ECM ENGINE YEAR 1990 94 DESCRIPTOR 1990 1994 11 ECU B 12 RPM SIGNAL CRANKING 13 RPM SIGNAL OR PHASE MALF 14 IGNITION SIGNAL IGF1 15 IGNITION SIGNAL IGF2 16 AT CONTROL SIGNAL 17 Gl SIGNAL 18 G2 SIGNAL 21 MAIN 025 SIGNAL 4 HEATER FAIL 22 COOLANT TEMP SENSOR SIGNAL 23 INTAKE TEMP SENSOR SIGNAL 24 INTAKE TEMP SENSOR SIGNAL 25 AIR FUEL RATIO LEAN MALFUNCTION 26 AIR FUEL RATIO RICH MALFUNCTION 27 SUB LH O2S SIG amp HEATER FAIL LEXUS 25 LEXUS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1990 94 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 28 MAIN O2S SIGNAL amp HEATER FAIL 29 SUB 02 SIG amp HEATER FAIL 31 VAF MAF METER MAP SENSOR SIG 32 VAF METER SIGNAL 33 IAC MALFUNCTION 34 TURBO PRESSURE MALFUNCTION 35 BARO TURBO PRESS SENSOR SIGNAL 36 CPS SENSOR 41 THROTTLE POS SENSOR SIGNAL 42 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 43 STARTER SIGNAL 47 SUB THROTTLE POS SENSOR SIGNAL 48 AIR PUMP EAP MALFUNCTION 51 SWITCH CONDITION SIGNAL 52 KNOCK SENSOR SIGNAL 53 KNOCK CONTROL PART IN ECU 54 INTERCOOLER 55 KNOCK SENSOR SIGNAL 56 COOLING FAN PRESSURE SWITCH 71 EGR SYSTEM MALFUNCTION 72 AIR CONDITIONER RELAY OPEN 78 FUEL PUMP CONTROL SIGNAL 79 FUEL PUMP CONTROL SIGNAL 81 TCM
228. ECU CKT FAILURE 1 O2 SENSOR 025 CKT FAILURE 1 FRONT O2S OR O2S CKT FAILURE FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE REAR 025 OR 025 CKT FAILURE MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE R N N FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE CK ANGLE OR CK ANG CKT FAILURE MAP SENSOR MAP FAILURE SENSOR OR ECT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL SENSOR OR IAT FAILURE 14 ACURA ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1988 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 11 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 12 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE 13 BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE 14 ELECTRONIC IDLE CONTROL SENSOR 15 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE IGNITION OUTPUT SIG OR CKT FAIL 17 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 18 IGNITION TIMING CONTROL UNIT 19 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE YEAR 1989 DESCRIPTOR 1989 0 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 1 O2 SENSOR OR 028 CKT FAILURE FRONT O2S OR O2S CKT FAILURE REAR O2S OR 02 CKT FAILURE MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE R N CK ANGLE OR CK ANG CKT FAILURE MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 9 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL 10 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 12 EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE 13 BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE 14 E
229. ECU LED NONE D15B2 TBI ECU LED NONE CIVIC CRX SI 1 6L 14 D16A6 MPFI ECU LED NONE PRELUDE 2 0L I4 B20A3 2 1V CARB ECU LED NONE PRELUDE 2 0L I4 B20A5 MPFI e CU LED NONE ENGINE ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM CODE TYPE EET 1989 ACCORD 2 0L 14 A20A3 MPFI ECU LED NONE CIVIC 1 5L 14 01581 TBI ECU LED NONE CIVIC CIVIC 1 6L 14 D16A6 MPFI ECU LED NONE WAGON CIVIC CIVIC 1 5L 14 D15B2 TBI ECU LED NONE WAGON CRX CRX HF 1 5L 14 D15B6 MPFI ECU LED NONE CRX SI 1 6L 14 D16A6 MPFI ECU LED NONE PRELUDE 2 0L 14 B20A3 2 1V CARB ECU LED NONE PRELUDE 2 0L 14 B20A5 MPFI MIL LED SCC ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL SYSTEM CODE TE 1990 ACCORD 2 2L I4 F22A1 F22A4 MPFI MIL LED SCC MPFI MIL LED SCC CIVIC 1 5L I4 DISBI TBI ECU LED NONE CIVIC 1 6L 14 D16A6 MPFI ECU LED NONE CRX 1 5L I4 D15B2 MPFI ECU LED NONE D15B6 MPFI ECU LED NONE CRX SI 1 6L I4 D16A6 MPFI ECU LED NONE PRELUDE 2 0L I4 B20A3 2 2V CARB ECU LED NONE PRELUDE SI 2 0L I4 B20A5 MPFI MIL LED SCC PRELUDE SI 2 1L 14 B21A1 MPFI MIL LED SCC HONDA 3 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS JUMPER ENGINE TYPE ENGINE TYPE FUEL SYSTEM CODE TYPE 1991 ACCORD CIVIC CIVIC CRX CRX SI PRELUDE PRELUDE SI PRELUDE SI 2 2L 14 1 5L 14 1 6L 4 1 5L 14 1 6L 14 2 0L I4 2 0L 14 2 1L 14 F22A1 F22A4 15 1 D16A6 D15B2 D15B6 D16A6 B20A3 B20A5 B
230. ED do the following 1 Warm engine to normal operating temperature turn all accessories switches OFF 2 Turn key OFF 3 Connect Test Mode connectors Use F4 DJC LOCATION from the Information menu for test mode connectors location 4 Turn key ON Do not start engine ECS Lamp should flash an identification on the O2 Monitor Lamp Use F5 ECU LOCATION from the Information menu for ECU location information 5 Start engine ECS Lamp should OFF 6 Drive vehicle for over 60 feet then idle engine for 1 minute 7 Perform 2 brief WOT and run engine at 2500 RPM until ECS Lamp turns ON 8 If ECS Lamp stays ON record DTC S that are flashed by the O2 Monitor Lamp The long segment 1 2 seconds represents the tens digit The short segment 0 2 seconds represents the ones digit Each is separated by a 1 8 second delay If the ECS Lamp blinks the system is normal Turn the key OFF and disconnect the Test Mode Connectors To manually read Test Mode DTCs from 1984 EFI Turbo Subaru vehicles using the Electronic Control System ECS Lamp and LED 02 Monitor LED do the following 1 Warm engine to normal operating temperature turn all accessories switches OFF 2 Turn key OFF 3 Connect Test Mode connectors Use F4 DJC LOCATION from the Information menu for test mode connectors location Turn key ON Do not start engine ECS Lamp should turn ON and the fuel pump should cycle every 1 5 seconds
231. EHICLE OBD CONTROLS SUBMODES Mazda F0 Switch Test F1 O2S Monitor Nissan F0 AFR Monitor A F1 AFR Monitor B F2 Switch Test F3 RT DTC Monitor Asian F0 EVAP Leak Manufacturers with OBD II compliant Powertrain systems that support this control NOTE Isuzu and Suzuki OBD Controls are described in the Isuzu and Suzuki Operator s Manuals 24 GENERAL INFORMATION GETTING STARTED 5 GETTING STARTED Before operating the ASIAN IMPORTS CARTRIDGE do the following la TECH 1 OR TECH 1A TESTER Insert the cartridge into the Master Cartridge slot on the bottom of the tester Verify that no other Master cartridge is installed in the top slot Refer to the TECH 1 or TECH 1A Operator s Manual for further information 1b MASTERTECH TESTER Insert the cartridge into the slot at the top of the tester Refer to the Mastertech Operator s Manual for further information Make sure the tester is turned OFF When testing Lexus Toyota and OBDII compliant vehicles the Asian Imports Cartridge can also be operated in Enhanced Mode when a program card is installed in the Mastertech Refer to the Program Card Operator s Manual for Enhanced Mode operating instructions 2 Connect the DLC cable to the tester and tighten the screws The DLC cable is not required when testing Acura Daihatsu and Honda vehicles It is also not required when testing select vehicles by the NOTE Kia Nissan and Subaru Refer
232. ENSOR AIRFLOW METER INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR ON DYNAMIC CHAMBER INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR THROTTLE SENSOR THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR THROTTLE SENSOR FULL RANGE PRESSURE SENSOR VACUUM SENSOR OR CIRCUIT ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR IN ECU BAROMETRIC ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR BAROMETRIC ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR IN PCME ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR BAROMETRIC ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR OR CIRCUIT O2 SENSOR INACTIVATION HEATED O2 SENSOR HEATED O2 SENSOR LH O2 SENSOR O2 SENSOR LEFT SIDE O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT EGR FUNCTION SENSOR CALIFORNIA EGR FUNCTION SENSOR EGR POSITION SENSOR EGR SWITCH CALIFORNIA ONLY EGR POSITION SENSOR OR CIRCUIT O2 SENSOR INVERSION CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM LH FEEDBACK SYSTEM FEEDBACK SYSTEM INVERSION FEEDBACK SYSTEM LEFT SIDE THROTTLE SENSOR NARROW RANGE MIXTURE CONTROL SOLENOID OR CIRCUIT METERING OIL PUMP POSITION SENSOR SLOW FUEL CUT SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT HEATED O2 SENSOR RH O2 SENSOR RIGHT SIDE FUEL THERMOSENSOR COASTING RICHER SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM RH FEEDBACK SYSTEM RIGHT SIDE SOLENOID VALVE PRESSURE REGULATOR SOLENOID VALVE PRESSURE REGULATOR CONTROL MAZDA 45 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1993 CONTINUED 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 50
233. ENSOR OR CKT FAILURE VSS OR CKT FAILURE BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE YEAR 1993 DESCRIPTOR 1993 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 21 22 23 ECU OR CIRCUIT FAILURE FRONT O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE ECU OR CIRCUIT ROM FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE ECU OR CIRCUIT RAM FAILURE MOTOR POSITION SWITCH OR CKT ECU OR CIRCUIT ROM RAM FAIL ECU FAILURE KNOCK CONTROL ECU FAILURE KNOCK EVAL CKT ECT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT MAF SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT TDC SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE HYUNDAI 19 HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1993 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR 24 25 26 27 29 31 33 36 37 38 39 41 42 43 44 45 47 48 53 59 61 62 63 65 69 81 82 83 SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE CAMSHAFT POSIT SENSOR OR CKT BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE BATTERY VOLTAGE OR ALTERNATOR A C COMPRESSOR OR CKT FAILURE BOOST SENSOR FAILURE HIGH BOOST SENSOR CNTRL DEV FAULT BOOST CONTROL VAL
234. ENSOR SIGNAL OR CKT SUB O2 SENSOR HEATER OR SIGNAL NO 2 O2 SENSOR HEATER OR CKT AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE HAC SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE TURBO PRESSURE SIG FUEL CUTOFF ALTITUDE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE TURBO PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT HAC SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR CKT IDL PSW FAIL TP SENSOR OR CKT VTA FAILURE TP SENSOR OR CKT THS FAILURE TP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OR CKT STARTER SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE A C P N ON TPS OFF DURING DIAG A C ON TPS OFF DURING DIAG A C ON IDL NSW OFF DURING DIAG A C ON TPS OFF DURING DIAG A C ON N S OFF DURING DIAG CK A C ON IDL NSW NG DURING DIAG KS OR KS CKT FAILURE ECU OR CIRCUIT FAILURE KS OR KS CKT FAILURE INTERCOOLER OR SYSTEM FAILURE EGR SYSTEM MALFUNCTION FUEL CUT SOL OR CIRCUIT FAILURE TOYOTA 39 TOYOTA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS AIR BAG YEAR 1989 94 DESCRIPTOR 1989 1994 11 SQUIB W H GND OR FRNT SENS SHORT 12 SQUIB W H SHORT 13 SQUIB MALF SHORT 14 SQUIB MALF OPEN 15 FRONT SENSOR W H OPEN 22 WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT 24 AIRBAG SENSOR CONNECTION FAIL 31 SENSOR ASSEMBLY 41 MALF RECORDED IN MEMORY 53 SQUIB SHORT 54 SQUIB OPEN 63 SQUIB SHORT PRELOADER LEFT 64 SQUIB OPEN PRELOADER LEFT 73 SQUIB SHORT PRELOADER RT 74 SQUIB OPEN PRELOADER RT ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM YEAR 1989 94 DESCRIPTOR 1989 1994 11 SOLENOID RELAY OPEN 12 SOLENOID RELAY SHORT 13 PUMP MOT
235. ER THAN EXPECTED 125 TP SENSOR VOLTAGE LOWER THAN EXPECTED 129 INSUFFICIENT MAF MAP CHANGE DURING DYNAMIC RESPONSE TEST 136 LEFT BANK HO2 SENSOR OUTPUT CONTINUES LEAN CONDITION 137 LEFT BANK HO2 SENSOR OUTPUT CONTINUES RICH CONDITION 139 LEFT BANK HO2 SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN SHORT 144 RIGHT BANK HO2 SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN SHORT 157 MAF CIRCUIT BELOW 0 4v 158 MAF CIRCUIT ABOVE 4 5v 159 MAF OUT OF EXPECTED RANGE 50 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1992 1994 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR 167 171 172 173 175 176 177 179 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 191 192 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 INSUFFICIENT TP CHANGE DURING DYNAMIC RESPONSE TEST RIGHT BANK ADAPTIVE FUEL CONTROL EXCEEDS LIMITS HEGO UNABLE TO SWITCH RIGHT BANK HO2 SENSOR OUTPUT CONTINUES LEAN CONDITION RIGHT BANK HO2 SENSOR OUTPUT CONTINUES RICH CONDITION LEFT BANK HO2 SENSOR OUTPUT CONTINUES LEAN CONDITION LEFT BANK HO2 SENSOR OUTPUT CONTINUES RICH CONDITION LEFT BANK HO2 SENSOR OUTPUT CONTINUES RICH CONDITION RIGHT BANK FUEL SYSTEM AT LEAN ADAPIIVE LIMIT AT PART THROTTLE SYSTEM RICH RIGHT BANK FUEL SYSTEM AT RICH ADAPIIVE LIMIT AT PART THROTTLE SYSTEM LEAN RIGHT BANK FUEL SYSTEM AT LEAN ADAPTIVE LIMIT AT IDLE SYSTEM RICH RIGHT BANK FUEL SYSTEM AT RICH ADAPIIVE LIMIT AT IDLE SYSTEM LEAN MAF HIGHER THAN EXPECTED MAF LOWER THAN EXPECTED INJEC
236. ESCRIPTOR 1986 1 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 2 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 3 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 4 PRESSURE SNSR OR CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE ISC MOTOR POS SENSOR OR CKT ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR SPEED SENSOR FAILURE YEAR 1987 DESCRIPTOR 1987 1 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 2 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE IGNITION PULSE OR CKT AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE R BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE SENSOR TPS FAILURE 6 ISC MOTOR POS SENSOR MPS OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 7 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR 8 NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT YEAR 1988 DESCRIPTOR 1988 1 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 2 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT IGNITION PULSE OR CKT FAILURE W AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE A BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 6 ISC MOTOR POS SENSOR OR CKT MPS OR CIRCUIT FAILURE CHRYSLER IMPORTS 25 CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1988 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR 7 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR 8 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT YEAR 1989 DESCRIPTOR 1989 0 ECU OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 1 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 2 IGNITION PULSE OR CKT FAILURE 3 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 5 SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 6 ISC MOTOR POS SENSOR OR CKT 7 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR 11 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 12 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR
237. EUT SW OR CKT FAILURE 31 IDLE CONTROL CIRCUIT FAILURE F I C D SYSTEM MALFUNCTION LOAD SIGNAL OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 32 STARTER SIGNAL MALFUNCTION 33 025 OR O2S CIRCUIT FAILURE 34 KNOCK SENSOR OR KS CKT FAILURE 41 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE FUEL TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE NISSAN 29 NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1986 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 42 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 43 FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 44 NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECU YEAR 1987 DESCRIPTOR 1987 11 CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL 12 AIR FLOW METER CIRCUIT FAILURE 13 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE CYL HEAD TEMP SENSOR FAILURE 21 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 22 FUEL PUMP OR FP CIRCUIT FAILURE ERRATIC IDLE SPEED CONTROL 23 THROTTLE IDLE SWITCH FAILURE 31 A C OR A C CIRCUIT FAILURE 32 STARTER SIGNAL MALFUNCTION 33 O2S OR O2S CIRCUIT FAILURE 34 KNOCK SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE KS OR KS CKT FAILURE VG30ET 41 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE FUEL TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 43 ERRATIC MIXTURE RATIO CONTROL FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 44 NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECU YEAR 1988 DESCRIPTOR 1988 11 CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL 12 AIR FLOW METER CIRCUIT FAILURE 13 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE CYL HEAD TEMP SENSOR FAILURE 14 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 30 NISSAN NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1988 DESCR
238. EXHAUST GAS TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT 41 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 43 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 45 INJECTOR LEAK INJECTOR LEAK CA ONLY 51 FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 54 FAULTY A T CONTROL UNIT 55 NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECU YEAR 1990 DESCRIPTOR 1990 11 CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL 12 AIR FLOW METER CIRCUIT FAILURE 13 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE 14 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 21 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 22 FUEL PUMP OR FP CIRCUIT FAILURE 23 THROTTLE IDLE SWITCH FAILURE 25 A A C VALVE CIRCUIT FAILURE 31 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 32 EGR SENSOR OR EGR CKT FAILURE 33 025 OR 025 CIRCUIT FAILURE LEFT O2S OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 34 KNOCK SENSOR OR KS CKT FAILURE 32 NISSAN NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1990 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 35 EXHAUST GAS TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT 41 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 43 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 45 INJECTOR LEAK 51 FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 53 RIGHT 02 OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 54 TCM TO ECU CIRCUIT FAILURE FAULTY A T CONTROL UNIT 55 NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECU YEAR 1991 DESCRIPTOR 1991 11 CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL 12 AIR FLOW METER CIRCUIT FAILURE 13 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE 14 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 21 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 22 FUEL PUMP OR FP CIRCUIT FAILURE 31 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 3
239. FECT INTAKE CONTROL 38 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1991 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 42 SOLENOID VALVE WASTE GATE DUTY SOLENOID TURBO BOOST PRES SURE CONTROL 45 VACUUM SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 51 FUEL PUMP RESISTOR RELAY 71 INJECTOR FRONT SECONDARY 73 INJECTOR REAR SECONDARY MAZDA 39 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS Mazda DTCs 1991 Navajo YEAR 1991 DESCRIPTOR 1991 Navajo 11 12 13 14 15 15 16 18 18 19 21 22 23 24 26 29 41 41 42 45 51 53 54 SYSTEM PASS CANNOT CONTROL RPM DURING SELF TEST HIGH RPM CHECK ENGINE RUNNING CANNOT CONTROL RPM DURING SELF TEST LOW RPM CHECK ENGINE RUNNING PIP CIRCUIT FAILURE CONTINUOUS MEMORY READ ONLY MEMORY ROM TEST FAILED ECA KEEP ALIVE MEMORY KAM TEST FAILED CONTINUOUS MEMORY IGNITION DIAGNOSTIC MONITOR IDM SIGNAL NOT RECEIVED KOEO SAW CIRCUIT FAILURE ENGINE RUNNING LOSS IDM INPUT TO PROCESSOR IDM CIRCUIT FAILURE CONTINUOUS MEMORY FAILURE IN ECA INTERNAL VOLTAGE KOEO ECT OUT OF SELF TEST RANGE KOEO ENGINE RUNNING BP OUT OF SELF TEST RANGE KOEO ENGINE RUNNING CONTINUOUS MEMORY TP OUT OF SELF TEST RANGE KOEO ENGINE RUNNING AIR CHARGE TEMP ACT OUT OF SELF TEST RANGE KOEO ENGINE RUNNING MAF OUT OF SELF TEST RANGE KOEO ENGINE RUNNING INSUFFICIENT INPUT FROM TH
240. FI MFI MFI SFI SFI SFI MIL LED NONE MIL LED NONE MIL LED CHECK MIL LED NONE MIL LED NONE MIL LED NONE MIL LED CHECK MIL LED CHECK MIL LED NONE MIL LED NONE MIL LED NONE ADAPTER 1993 240SX 300ZX ALTIMA 2 4 4 3 0 3 0L V6 TURBO 2 4L 4 KA24DE VG30DE VG30DETT KA24DE SFI SFI SFI MIL LED NONE MIL LED NONE MIL LED NONE NISSAN VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL ENGINE ENGINE FUEL ECU ADAPTER CONTINUED TYPE MAXIMA 3 0L V6 VG30E SFI 5 MIL LED NONE MAXIMA 3 0L V6 VE30DE SFI 2 MIL LED CHECK NX COUPE 2 0L 14 SR20DE SFI 2 MIL LED NONE NX COUPE 1 6L 14 GA16DE SFI 2 MIL LED NONE PATHFINDER 3 0L V6 VG30E MFI 5 MIL LED CHECK TRUCK TRUCK 2 4L 14 KA24E 5 MIL LED CHECK QUEST 3 0L V6 VG30E SFI 2 MIL LED JUMPER SENTRA 2 0L 14 SR20DE SFI 2 MIL LED NONE SENTRA 1 6L 14 GA16DE SFI 2 MIL LED NONE ENGINE ENGINE ECU CODE ADAPTER TYPE 1994 240SX 2 414 KA24DE SFI 2 MIL LED NONE 300ZX 3 0 3 0L V6 VG30DE SFI 2 MIL LED NONE TURBO VG30DETT ALTIMA 2 4L 4 KA24DE SFI 2 MIL LED NONE MAXIMA 3 0L V6 VG30E SFI 5 MIL LED CHECK MAXIMA 3 0L V6 VE30DE SFI 2 MIL LED NONE PATHFINDER 3 0L V6 VG30E SFI 5 MIL LED CHECK TRUCK TRUCK 2 4L 4 KA24E SFI 5 MIL LED CHECK OUEST 3 0L V6 VG30E SFI 2 MIL LED JUMPER NX COUPE 1 6L 14 GA16DE SFI 2 MIL LED NONE SENTRA 2 0L 14 SR20DE SFI 2
241. FI SIGNAL A A T FI SIGNAL B TC STB SIGNAL TCFC SIGNAL 025 HEATER OR CIRCUIT FAILURE LEFT O28 HEATER OR FAILURE FRONT O2S HEATER FAILURE RIGHT 02 HEATER OR CKT FAILURE REAR O2S HEATER OR CKT FAILURE FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM LEFT FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM FRONT FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM RIGHT FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM REAR FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM LEFT FUEL SUPPLY METERING FUEL SUPPLY METERING FRONT FUEL SUPPLY METERING RIGHT FUEL SUPPLY METERING REAR FUEL SUPPLY METERING FAULTY FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE REAR SPOOL SOLENOID VALVE ACURA 19 ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1992 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 52 RR VALVE TIMING OIL PRESSURE SW 53 RIGHT KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE REAR KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE 54 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 2 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR B 59 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL 2 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL B YEAR 1993 DESCRIPTOR 1993 0 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 1 HEATED O2S OR HO2S CKT FAILURE FRONT HO2S OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 2 REAR HO2S OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 3 MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE 4 CK ANGLE OR CK ANG CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR NO 1 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR A MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR TDC O N CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 1 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL A 10 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 12 EGR SYSTEM 1 8L
242. FIC INFORMATION TWO WAYS TO DIAGNOSE ACURA Acura powertrain diagnosis can be performed with the Asian Imports cartridge installed in a Tech 1 Tech or Mastertech tester Additionally Acura vehicles can be diagnosed with the aftermarket version of the Acura OEM level program card software using the Mastertech tester only Operating instructions and test mode information are available for the OEM level software in the Acura Honda Program Card Operator s Manual If you do not have the necessary Program Card and Mastertech tester to perform OEM level diagnostics you can use the Asian Imports Cartridge for reduced model year coverage The following Acura section includes the test modes available how to connect the tester to the vehicle operating instructions for DTC entry and the applicable DTCs for each model year ACURA 5 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 3 TEST MODES AVAILABLE The following test modes are available when testing Acura vehicles Operating instructions for test modes other than DTC entry are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section There are also Acura specific instructions for operating the test modes Refer to TEST MODES on page 10 A description for DTCs specific to Acura is included in ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs on page 13 MODE F1 DTC ENTRY SUBMODE F0 HOW TO READ SUBMODE F1 ENTER DTC s SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST SUBMODE F3 REVIEW DTC SUBMODE F4 CLEAR DTC s MODE F5 SYSTEM TESTS
243. GENERAL INFORMATION VEHICLE COVERAGE MITSUBISHI MODEL ENGINE 1993 97 MX6 2 5L V6 1991 94 Navaho 4 0L V6 1988 Proteg 1 6L I4 1988 Proteg 1 6L I4 Turbo 1990 94 Proteg 1 8L I4 DOHC 1990 94 Proteg 1 8L I4 SOHC 1991 94 Proteg 1 6L I4 SOHC 1995 98 Proteg 1 5L I4 1996 98 Proteg 1 8L I4 1984 91 RX7 1 3L R2 1987 95 RX7 1 3L R2 Turbo YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1991 98 3000GT 3 0L V6 DOHC 1991 98 3000GT 3 0L V6 DOHC Turbo 1984 88 Cordia 1 8L I4 Turbo 1992 96 Diamante 3 0L V6 SOHC 1992 96 Diamante 3 0L V6 DOHC 1997 98 Diamante 3 5L V6 SOHC 1993 95 Diamante Wagon 3 0L V6 1990 94 Eclipse 1 8L I4 SOHC 1990 98 Eclipse 2 0L I4 DOHC 1990 98 Eclipse 2 0L I4 DOHC Turbo 1996 Eclipse 2 4L I4 SOHC 1997 98 Eclipse Spyder 2 0L 14 DOHC Turbo 1997 98 Eclipse Spyder 2 4L 14 SOHC 1992 96 Expo 2 4L I4 1992 96 Expo LRV 1 8L 14 1993 96 Expo LRV 2 4L 14 1985 87 Galant 2 4L I4 1989 93 Galant 2 0L I4 SOHC GENERAL INFORMATION 17 VEHICLE COVERAGE YEAR MODEL ENGINE 1989 93 Galant 2 0L 4 DOHC 1990 92 Galant 2 0L I4 DOHC Turbo 1993 Galant 2 0L 14 SOHC 16V 1994 95 Galant 2 4L 4 DOHC 1994 98 Galant 2 4L 14 SOHC 1985 88 Mirage 1 6L I4Turbo 1987 Mirage 1 6L 14 1989 92 Mirage 1 6L 4 DOHC 1989 98 Mirage 1 5L 4 SOHC 1993 98 Mirage
244. GETTING STARTED 4 GETTING STARTED Before operating the Asian Imports Cartridge with a Kia vehicle the following steps must be performed 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Plug the tester power cable into the vehicle cigarette lighter The power cable may also be directly connected to the battery via the optional battery adapter cable P N 02001636 NOTE Since the cigarette lighter can be switched some tests require that the EH power cable be directly connected to the battery via the battery adapter cable 3 Turn on the tester and select the application software that you will be using Verify that the correct screen is displayed The tester should display a screen similar to the one below ASIAN IMPORTS 83 98 lt ENTER gt Tester stand alone display 4 If the display is correct press 19 9 If the display is not correct refer to Appendix D 5 Follow the instructions on the following page to select the vehicle type you are testing by entering required vehicle information into the tester KIA 5 SELECTING THE VEHICLE 5 SELECTING THE VEHICLE Once you ve pressed 033 from power up screen the following steps must be performed to select the manufacturer model year model and engine type of the vehicle being tested Remember if you make a mistake you can always press 248 to go back to the previous menu SELECTING THE MANUFACTURER A menu of manufacturers available for testing
245. GINE FUEL ADAPTER MODEL 1988 ENGINE TYPE CODE 1988 COLT 1 5L 4G15 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES COLT 1 6L TURBO G32B MPI CHECK AUTOCODES COLT 1 6L TURBO G32B ECI NONE AUTOCODES COLT VISTA 2 0L I4 SOHC G63B MPI CHECK AUTOCODES CONQUEST 2 6L I4 TUR INT G54B ECI EFI CHECK AUTOCODES MODEL 1989 ENGINE pubem tl CODE TYPE 1989 COLT 1 5L 14 SOHC 4G15 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES COLT 1 6L 14 DOHC 4G61 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES COLT 1 6L 14 DOHC TUR 4661 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES COLT 2000 1 5L 14 SOHC 4G15 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES COLT 2000 1 6L 14 DOHC 4G61 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES COLT 2000 1 6L 14 DOHC TUR 4661 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES COLT VISTA 2 0L 14 SOHC G63B MPI CHECK AUTOCODES COLT WAGON 1 5L 14 SOHC 4G15 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES COLT WAGON 1 8L 14 SOHC 4G37 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES CONQUEST 2 6L 14 SOHC TUR G54B ECI EFI CHECK AUTOCODES RAM RAIDER 3 0L V6 DOHC 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES SUMMIT 1 5L 14 SOHC 4G15 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES SUMMIT 1 6L 4 DOHC 4G61 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES VISTA WAGON 2 0L I4 SOHC G63B MPI CHECK AUTOCODES ENGINE ADAPTER MODEL 1990 ENGINE TYPE TYPE CODE TYPE 1 5L 14 SOHC AUTOCODES 1 6L I4 DOHC AUTOCODES 4 CHRYSLER IMPORTS VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS TEE FUEL Lm COLT 200 1 5L I4 SOHC 4G15 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES COLT 200 1 6L 4 DOHC 4G61 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES COLT VISTA 2 0L 14 SOHC G63B MPI CHECK AUTOCODES COLT WAGON 1 5L 14 SOHC G15 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES COLT WAGON 1 8L I4 SOHC 4G37 MPI CHECK AUTO
246. Gear Incorrect Ratio TCC System Malfunction TCC Mechanical System Performance TCC Solenoid Valve Stuck ON Torque Converter Clutch System Electrical Problem Pressure Control Solenoid Malfunction Electrical Pressure Control Solenoid Performance Shift Solenoid A Malfunction 60 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 1998 DTC CONTINUED NO P0751 P0752 P0755 P0756 P0757 P0760 P0761 P0765 P0781 P0782 P0783 P0784 P1000 P1001 P1100 P1101 P1102 P1103 P1110 P1112 P1113 P1116 P1117 P1120 P1121 P1122 P1124 P1125 P1127 P1128 P1129 P1130 DESCRIPTOR Shift Solenoid A Performance Shift Solenoid 1 Stuck ON Shift Solenoid B Malfunction Shift Solenoid B Performance Shift Solenoid 2 Stuck ON Shift Solenoid C Malfunction Shift Solenoid C Performance Shift Solenoid 4 Open Short or PCM Driver Failure Ist to 2nd Shift Error 2nd to 3rd Shift Error 3rd to 4th Shift Error 4th to 5th Shift Error OBDII Monitor Drive Cycle Incomplete KOER Self Test not Complete MAF Sensor Intermittent MAF Sensor Out of Range MAF Inconsistent with TPS Lower than Expected Inconsistent with TPS Greater than Expected IAT Sensor Dynamic Chamber Open or Short IAT Sensor Intermittent or Out of Range IAT Sensor Circuit Lysholm Compressor Open or Short ECT Sensor Out of Range ECT Sensor Intermittent TP Sensor Out of Range Low TP Sensor Inconsistent with MAF
247. H CONDITION EXIT EXIT 4 If the tester is unable to set the ECU to the selected mode the following screen is displayed Press to return to OBD Controls menu UNABLE TO SET REQUESTED MISC TEST MODE EXIT ENTER Used when instructions on each screen have been completed EXIT Return to OBD Controls menu Select test Submode F1 AFR Monitor B The AFR Monitor B miscellaneous test is available for all 1987 89 and select 1990 95 Nissan vehicles If you are unsure of test application check the ECU Modes column in the Nissan Vehicles and Systems table If the ECU Modes column indicates 5 Modes then the vehicle supports AFR Monitor B The AFR Monitor B test monitors and displays the ECU loop status and the percent AFR mixture Rich Lean content of the exhaust emissions The loop status can either be Open or Closed depending on the commanded ECU state And the AFR Monitor B gives you information about the percent Lean or Rich of engine exhaust emissions Ifthe oxygen sensor detects exhaust emissions to be more than 5 lean of normal normal being 14 7 1 the stoichiometric equivalent of 14 7 parts of air to 1 part of fuel which 15 the ideal NISSAN 23 CONTROLS air fuel ratio more than 5 Rich of normal or between 5 lean and 5 rich of normal then the tester will display an indication of the detected exhaust emission condition NOTE When performing the AFR Monitor B test mak
248. HAFT POS SENSOR OR CKT 24 SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 25 BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 31 KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE 41 INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE 43 EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR 44 IGNITION COIL OR CKT FAILURE IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 28 MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1991 DESCRIPTOR 1991 0 ECU OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 11 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE REAR BANK O2 OR CKT FAILURE HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 12 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 13 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 14 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 15 MOTOR POSITION SENSOR OR CKT ISC MOTOR POS SENSOR OR CKT 21 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR 22 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 23 NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT NO 1 amp 4 TDC SENSOR OR CKT TDC SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE CAMSHAFT POS SENSOR OR CKT 24 SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 25 BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 31 KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE 36 IGNITION TIMING ADJUSTMENT 39 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE FRONT BANK O2 SENSOR OR CKT 41 INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE 43 EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR 44 IGNITION COIL OR CKT FAILURE IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 1 amp 4 CYL 52 IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 2 amp 5 CYL 53 IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 3 amp 6 CYL 61 TORQUE REDUCED SIGNAL OR CKT 62 INDUCTION CNTRL VALVE POS SNSR MITSUBISH
249. HC 4G73 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES TALON 2 0L I4 DOHC 420A MFI OBD II AUTOCODES TALON 2 0L 14 DOHC TUR 4663 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES For OBD II Adapter Type use Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information MODEL 1998 ENGINE TET RE EE CODE 1998 AVENGER 2 0L 4 DOHC 420A MFI OBD II AUTOCODES AVENGER 2 5L V6 SOHC 4G73 OBD II AUTOCODES SEBRING 2 0L I4 DOHC 420A MFI OBD II AUTOCODES SEBRING 2 5L V6 SOHC 4G73 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES TALON 2 0L I4 DOHC 420A OBD II AUTOCODES TALON 2 0L 14 DOHC 4663 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES For OBD I Adapter Type use Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information 10 CHRYSLER IMPORTS CHRYSLER IMPORTS SPECIFIC INFORMATION 2 CHRYSLER IMPORTS SPECIFIC INFORMATION The Chrysler Imports vehicles covered by the Asian Imports Cartridge are separated into two different sections within the Asian Imports Operator s Manual The vehicle s on board system will determine which section of the Operator s Manual will need to be used Vehicles that are OBD II certified have information about the operating test modes in the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section of the Operator s Manual Vehicles that have OBD or OBDI systems have test mode information in this section of the Operator s Manual In these sections you will find operating instructions how to connect the tester to the
250. HICLE MANUFACTURER AY ISUZU KIA gt LEXUS ENTER LEXUS 1990 1994 SELECT MODEL YEAR 192 SELECT MODEL ES250 YESINO Displayed only if 2 SELECT engine option or RANS transmission option ENGINE TRANS 2 7 exists for selected YES NO vehicle 1991 LEXUS ES250 2VZ FE SFI TO SYSTEM INQUIRY Example of Lexus Vehicle Selection 63 or 3 sec 12 LEXUS SELECTING THE VEHICLE SYSTEM INQUIRY Once the vehicle type is entered the tester displays which adapter s can be used on the selected vehicle and then displays information screens which describe the operating differences between Active and Inactive Lexus OBD systems Use the up and down arrows to scroll through the information displays If a system is Active the tester can read DTCs directly from the ECU and show the number and description on the tester display Active systems are identified in the Select System menu with ok or ng no good is displayed to indicate an active system that does not have DTCs stored in the ECU No Good is displayed to indicate an active system that does have DTCs stored in the ECU during the inquiry process the tester determines if the system ECU has stored DTCs or not VEHICLE HAS AY CHECK AND TDCL VEHICLE HAS CHECK DLC USE BLUE ADAPTER AY DLC USE BLUE OR GREEN ADAPTE
251. I CIS MFI SFI SFI SFI SFI EFI EFI EFI BP Z5 FS KL JE JE G6 B6 K8 BP 13B OBD II OBD II CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK OBD II OBD II OBD II AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES For OBD II Adapter Type use Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information MODEL 1996 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE 1996 PROTEGE PROTEGE MILLENIA MILLENIA MPV MX5 MIATA MX6 MX6 626 1 5L 14 1 8L 14 2 5L V6 2 3L V6 3 0L V6 1 8L I4 2 0L 4 2 5L V6 2 0L 4 EFI EFI EFI EFI MILLER EFI SFI SFI SFI SFI Z5 BP KL KJ JE BP FS KL FS OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES MAZDA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1996 ENGINE ENGINE ADAPTER Cope TYPE 626 2 5L V6 SFI KL OBD AUTOCODES B SERIES 2 3L I4 EFI OBD II AUTOCODES B SERIES 3 0L V6 EFI OBD II AUTOCODES B SERIES 4 0L V6 EFI OB
252. I OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES For Adapter Type OBD II see COMMON TEST MODES II section for operating instructions and test mode information MODEL 1998 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE 1998 3000GT 3000GT DIAMANTE ECLIPSE ECLIPSE ECLIPSE SPYDER ECLIPSE SPYDER GALANT MIRAGE MIRAGE MONTERO 3 0L V6 3 0L V6 TURBO 3 5L V6 2 0L 14 2 0L 14 TURBO 2 4L 14 2 0L 14 TURBO 2 4L 14 1 5L 14 1 8L 14 3 5L V6 6G72 6G72 6674 420 4663 4664 4663 4064 4615 4093 6074 MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD II AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU AU TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES 10 MITSUBISHI VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1998 ENGINE FUEL ADAPTER CONTINUED ENGINE RODE DVE MONTERO SPORT 2 4L 14 4G64 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES MONTERO SPORT 3 0L V6 6G72 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES
253. I 29 MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1992 DESCRIPTOR 1992 0 ECU OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 11 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE REAR BANK HEATED O2 SNSR OR CKT 12 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 13 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 14 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 15 MOTOR POSITION SENSOR OR CKT 21 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR 22 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 23 TDC SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT NO 1 amp 4 TDC SENSOR OR CKT CAMSHAFT POS SENSOR OR CKT 24 SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 25 BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 31 KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE 36 IGNITION TIMING ADJUSTMENT 39 FRONT BANK O2 SENSOR OR CKT 41 INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE 43 EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR 44 IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 1 amp 4 CYL IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 52 IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 2 amp 5 CYL 53 IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 3 amp 6 CYL 55 IAC VALVE POS SENSOR OR CKT 61 TORQUE REDUCED SIGNAL OR CKT 62 INDUCTION CNTRL VALVE POS SNSR 71 VACUUM CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 72 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 30 MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1993 DESCRIPTOR 1993 0 ECU OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 11 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE O2 SNSR OR FRONT HEATED O2 SNSR FRONT O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE REAR BANK HEATED O2 SNSR OR CKT 12 VOLUME AIR FLOW SNSR OR CKT 13 IAT SE
254. IDLE SWITCH IN ON OFF POS O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE IDLE SWITCH ON OFF FAILURE 24 SUBARU SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1985 CONTINUED 24 25 31 32 33 34 35 41 42 43 52 53 54 55 62 63 64 65 71 72 73 74 DESCRIPTOR WOT SWITCH IN ON OFF POS THERMO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE WOT SWITCH ON OFF FAILURE PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE VEHICLE SPEED SNSR OR CIRCUIT SPEED SNSR FAIL ABOVE 6 MPH O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE DUTY SOLENOID VALVE OR CKT COOLANT THERMO SNSR OR CIRCUIT FEEDBACK SYSTEM TEST MODE ONLY ASPIRATED AIR THERMOSENSOR BACK UP SYSTEM OR CKT FAILURE EGR SOL SWITCH ON OFF OR CKT EGR SOL DRIVER CKT FAILURE BARO SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE FUEL INJ FIXED IN ON OFF POS CLUTCH SW OR CKT AT amp 4WD KDLH RELAY FIXED IN ON OFF POS KDLH DRIVER CKT FAILURE ASV SOL VALVE OR CIRCUIT FAILURE FUEL PUMP OR CIRCUIT FAILURE AUTO CHOKE CNTRL OR CKT FAILURE SHIFT UP CNTRL SYSTEM AT ONLY EGR SOL VALVE OR CKT FAILURE CANP SOL VALVE OR CKT FAILURE VLC SOL VALVE OR CKT FAILURE FCV SOL VALVE OR CKT FAILURE IGN PULSE ENG OFF 5MT FF CA IGN PULSE ENG OFF AT FF CA IGN PULSE ENG OFF SMT 4WD CA IGN PULSE ENG OFF AT 4WD CA SUBARU 25 SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1986 DESCRIPTOR 1986 11 IG PULSE OR CKT NO IG PULSE IG PULSE ENG OFF 5MT 2WD 49ST IGN SW SIGNAL OR CK
255. ILURE ACCENT SCOUPE IGNITION COIL TRANSISTOR OR CKT FAILURE ALL EXCEPT ACCENT SCOUPE NO 4 INJECTOR ACCENT SCOUPE EVAP PURGE VALVE OR CKT FAILURE ISA OR CKT FAILURE REAR HO2S OR CKT FAILURE CAL ELANTRA ALL SONATA A F LEAN LEAKING OR CLOGGED INJECTOR HYUNDAI 23 HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 82 A F RICH LEAKING OR CLOGGED INJECTOR 85 IAT SENSOR SHORT CKT 24 HYUNDAI HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS OBD II SYSTEMS YEAR 1996 98 DESCRIPTION 1996 98 OBD II P0100 P0102 P0103 P0105 P0110 P0112 P0113 P0115 P0116 P0117 P0118 P0120 P0121 P0122 P0123 P0125 P0130 P0131 P0132 P0133 P0134 P0135 P0136 P0137 P0138 P0141 P0170 P0201 P0202 P0203 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Malfunction MAF Sensor Circuit Low Input MAF Sensor Circuit High Input BARO Pressure Circuit Malfunction IAT Sensor Circuit Malfunction IAT Sensor Circuit Low Input IAT Sensor Circuit High Input ECT Circuit Malfunction ECT Circuit Out of Range ECT Circuit Low Input ECT Circuit High Input TPS Circuit Malfunction TPS Circuit Range Does not Agree with MAF Sensor TPS Circuit Low Input TPS Circuit High Input Coolant Temp Low no Closed Loop Fuel Control 02 Circuit Malfunction Bank 1 Sensor 1 O2S Circuit Low Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 1 028 Circuit High Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 1 028 Circuit Slow Respons
256. INE TYPE FUEL TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE 1993 COLT COLT COLT VISTA COLT VISTA LASER LASER LASER POWER RAM 50 POWER RAM 50 RAM 50 STEALTH STEALTH STEALTH SUMMIT SUMMIT SUMMIT WAGON SUMMIT WAGON TALON TALON TALON 1 5L 4 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 2 4L 4 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 2 0L 4 DOHC 2 0L 14 DOHC TUR 2 4L 14 SOHC 3 0L V6 DOHC 2 4L 14 SOHC 3 0L V6 DOHC 3 0L V6 DOHC TUR 3 0L V6 SOHC 1 5L I4 SOHC 1 8L I4 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 2 4L 14 SOHC 1 8L I4 SOHC 2 0L I4 DOHC 2 0L 4 DOHC TUR 4G15 4G93 4G93 4G64 4G37 4G63 4G63 4G64 6G72 4G64 6G72 6G72 6G72 4G15 4G93 4G93 4G64 4G37 4G63 4G63 MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES MODEL 1994 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE 1994 COLT COLT COLT VISTA COLT VISTA
257. INFINITI TEST MODES F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC s Submode F0 How To Read This submode provides information on how to manually read DTCs from the vehicle Step by step screen instructions provide information to correctly set up the vehicle ECU This is performed by following the tester instruction screens If you have trouble additional DTC retrieval information is described below If you refer to the factory service manual for this information make sure that you are following the correct steps for the system you are working on Submode F1 Enter DTC s This submode provides you with a description of how to obtain DTC information from the ECU and how to enter this information into the tester On Infiniti vehicles there is one method to enter manually read DTCs which is the Enter DTC submode The Enter DTC submode has two question marks on the tester display for entering the DTC The tester screen prompts you to enter the DTCs read off the ECU LED s or the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Be careful when reading the from the ECU LED s or MIL Incorrect ECU LED or MIL interpretation can cause the wrong DTC description to be displayed Once all DTCs have been manually read and recorded enter each DTC into the tester as described in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section To manually read DTCs from 1990 95 Infiniti ECU s do the following 1 Locate the Vehicle ECU 2 Turn the ignition key to the ON position
258. IPTOR CONTINUED 15 ERRATIC MIXTURE RATIO CONTROL 21 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 22 FUEL PUMP OR FP CIRCUIT FAILURE 23 THROTTLE IDLE SWITCH FAILURE 24 FULL THROTTLE SWITCH FAILURE 25 ERRATIC IDLE SPEED CONTROL 31 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 32 EGR CKT FAILURE CA ONLY EGR SENSOR OR EGR CKT FAILURE 33 O2S OR O2S CIRCUIT FAILURE 34 KNOCK SENSOR OR KS CKT FAILURE KS OR KS CKT FAILURE VG30ET 35 EXHAUST GAS TEMP CKT CA ONLY EXHAUST GAS TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT 41 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL TEMP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE TPS OR TPS CKT FAIL CA ONLY TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 44 NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECU 45 INJECTOR LEAK CA ONLY INJECTOR LEAK 51 FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 55 NO DTCs DETECTED BY ECU YEAR 1989 DESCRIPTOR 1989 11 CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL 12 AIR FLOW METER CIRCUIT FAILURE 13 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE 13 CYL HEAD TEMP SENSOR FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE 14 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 21 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 22 FUEL PUMP OR FP CIRCUIT FAILURE NISSAN 31 NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1989 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 23 THROTTLE IDLE SWITCH FAILURE 24 FULL THROTTLE SWITCH FAILURE 25 A A C VALVE CIRCUIT FAILURE 31 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 32 EGR SENSOR OR EGR CKT FAILURE 33 025 OR 025 CIRCUIT FAILURE 34 KS OR KS CKT FAILURE VG30ET KNOCK SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 35
259. IRCUIT FAILURE KOEO CONTINUOUS MEMORY CLUTCH CONVERTER OVERRIDE CIRCUIT FAILURE KOEO FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT OPEN ECA TO MOTOR GROUND KOEO CONTINUOUS MEMORY FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT OPEN BATTERY TO ECA KOEO CONTINUOUS MEMORY HARD FAULT PRESENT ENGINE RUNNING MAZDA 41 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1992 DESCRIPTOR NOTE For 1992 Navajo DTCs see table beginning on page 50 1992 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 IGNITION PULSE IGNITION PULSE IGNITER IGNITION COIL IG PULSE CIRCUIT NE SIGNAL NE2 SIGNAL NE2 SIGNAL CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 2 DISTRIBUTOR NE SIGNAL G SIGNAL Gl SIGNAL G SIGNAL CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 1 DISTRIBUTOR NE SIGNAL G2 SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL CRANK ANGLE SENSOR DISTRIBUTOR G2 SIGNAL KNOCK SENSOR OR KNOCK SENSOR CONTROL UNIT KNOCK SENSOR LEFT SIDE KNOCK SENSOR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SPEED SIGNAL RIGHT SIDE KNOCK SENSOR AIRFLOW METER AIRFLOW SENSOR WATER THERMOSENSOR WATER THERMOSENSOR OR CIRCUIT INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR AIRFLOW METER INTAKE AIR THERMOSENSOR DYNAMIC CHAMBER THROTTLE SENSOR VACUUM SENSOR OR CIRCUIT ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR IN ECU ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR OR CIRCUIT O2 SENSOR INACTIVATION O2 SENSOR LEFT SIDE O2 SENSOR O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT EGR POSITION SENSOR CALIFORNIA ONLY EGR POSITION SENSOR EGR POSITION
260. K FED ECU LED STANZA 2 4L 14 KA24E EFI 2 CA MIL LED NONE FED ECU LED AXXESS 2 4L 14 KA24E MPFI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK FED ECU LED PATHFINDER 2 4L 14 KA24E MPFI 5 CA MIL LED CHECK TRUCK FED ECU LED PATHFINDER 3 0L V6 VG30E MPFI 5 MIL LED CHECK TRUCK ENGINE ENGINE ECU CODE ADAPTER TYPE MODES TYPE TYPE 1991 240SX 2 4L 4 KA24E EFI 2 MIL LED NONE 300ZX 3 0 3 0L V6 VG30DE EFI 2 MIL LED NONE TURBO VG30DETT MAXIMA 3 0L V6 VG30E EFI 5 MIL LED CHECK SENTRA 1 6 2 0L 14 GAI6DE EFI 2 MIL LED NONE SR20DE NISSAN 5 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL CONTINUED ENGINE ENGINE TYPE NX COUPE STANZA PATHFINDER TRUCK PATHFINDER TRUCK 1 6 2 0L 14 2 4L 4 2 4L 14 2 4L 4 3 0L V6 3 0L V6 GA16DE SR20DE KA24E KA24E KA24E VG30E VG30E EFI EFI MPFI MPFI MPFI MPFI ADAPTER TYPE MIL LED NONE MIL LED NONE MIL LED CHECK MIL LED CHECK MIL LED CHECK MIL LED CHECK ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE 1992 240SX 300ZX MAXIMA MAXIMA SENTRA SENTRA PATHFINDER PICKUP PATHFINDER PICKUP NX COUPE NX COUPE STANZA 2 4L 14 3 0 3 0L V6 TURBO 3 0L V6 3 0L V6 2 0L 14 1 6L 14 3 0L V6 2 4L 14 2 0L 14 1 6L 14 2 4L 14 ENGINE KA24DE VG30DE VG30DETT VG30E VE30DE SR20DE GA16DE VG30E KA24E SR20DE GA16DE KA24E ENGINE SFI SFI SFI SFI SFI S
261. K SENSOR 1 ABNORMAL VOLTAGE IN MONITOR CIRCUIT RIGHT BANK SVX AIR FLOW SENSOR ABNORMAL VOLTAGE BYPASS AIR CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT FAILURE KNOCK SENSOR 2 ABNORMAL VOLTAGE IN MONITOR CIRCUIT LEFT BANK NO CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 2 SIGNAL TWO SIGNALS ENTERED FROM CAM SENSOR THROTTLE SENSOR ABNORMAL VOLTAGE O2 SENSOR INOPERATIVE LEGACY O2 SENSOR 1 INOPERATIVE RIGHT BANK SVX O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE IMPREZA VSS 2 CIRCUIT FAILURE EGR SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT FAILURE PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT FAILURE AIR SUCTION SOLENOID VALVE FAILURE OR CIRCUIT OPEN SHORT O2 SENSOR 2 INOPERATIVE LEFT BANK ENGINE TORQUE CONTROL SHORT BETWEEN ECU AND TCU A F LEARNING CONTROL FAULTY IDLE SWITCH ABNORMAL VOLTAGE WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE INOPERATIVE SUBARU 39 SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1994 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 45 ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR FAULTY LEGACY NON TURBO PRESSURE SENSOR EXCHANGE SOLENOID VALVE FAULTY LEGACY TURBO ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR FAULTY SENSOR IN ECU SVX 49 IMPROPER AIR FLOW SENSOR IN USE 51 NEUTRAL SWITCH ABNORMAL VOLTAGE FROM INHIBITOR SWITCH SVX INHIBITOR SWITCH ABNORMAL SIGNAL A T NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ABNORMAL SIGNAL M T 52 PARKING SWITCH ABNORMAL SIGNAL 55 EGR GAS TEMP SENSOR FAULTY 56 EGR SYSTEM FAILURE YEAR 1995 DESCRIPTOR 1995 11 CKP SENSOR OR CIRCUIT F
262. LANT TEMP 40 104 F MANI AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F T TRIGGER HAS OCCURRED TECH 1 MEMORY FULL OR DATA COOLANT TEMP DISPLAY 40 104 F MANI AIR TEMP 0 TRIGGER POSITION See Steps 7 12 40 C 104F 0 BEFORE TRIGGER OCCURRED AFTER TRIGGER OCCURRED YES Use and G 9 to view different Data ters Seo cyc OTHER DATA Use to toggle between LIST SCREENS SAMPLE INDEX and SAMPLE TIME Snapshot Mode Flowchart 26 COMMON TEST MODES I MODE F4 CONTROLS 6 MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS The OBD Controls mode is used to select a submenu of tests available for the selected vehicle The tests vary according to vehicle manufacturer Instructions for selecting and operating the OBD Controls are included in the Manufacturer Specific Instructions To select OBD Controls mode do the following 1 Press to display a list of tests available for the selected vehicle SELECT MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS Manufacturer Specific OBD Controls 2 Refer to the Manufacturer Specific Instructions for the vehicle you are testing for operating instructions 3 Press SP to return to the Select Mode menu COMMON TEST MODES I 27 MODE F5 SYSTEM TESTS 7 MODE FS SYSTEM TESTS SUBMODE F0 PREP VEHICLE The System Tests submode ensures that the vehicle system is properly warmed and preconditioned in order to ensure accurate diagnosis The Prepare Vehicle system test 15 available for all vehicles
263. LE CODES DTCS 15 EPIS SNP ZU ES 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS uade o ttt tret ul ho het ar 2 HYUNDAI SPECIFIC INFORMATION se err nn 6 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 7 GETTING STARTED a PORRO s o E dea 8 SBLECTING THE VEHICILE rr Er etm cmm ener dite 9 Selang The EU Tee Re Ed REO ERE PEE 9 eheimo be Mage ks vske ko o asa a po o podes 9 SOME V EN 20 Kod ee ea EPA ma 9 Selecting the Engine And Engine Type 9 Dia SOL redes oe ae eh ied Ed be 9 BERE Mode Monu 10 TOC 4 Asian Imports TEST MODES EE TE 11 POP COVES 11 PR EIT Gia PE OR ODO ls a MR pude lec e RO RUE ue 11 Manually Reading DIOS 6 256486 RAGS LAGS ERR HRS EARS BE RIKA KREK 11 DE reb e i bad ae 15 HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 17 PODA dee dq d pride pide bod idiot door dab dede 17 CBD SSIS sa euo eio dope he EP RO WEG Ra 25 RN NE dob boe etae dO o 1 VEHICLES ANEESYSTEMS 2220002 UE D PUERTA DER RR RR Re isi 2 INFINITI SPECIFIC INFORMATION 5 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 6 GETTING STARTED ue octan dut a cx dice
264. LE DLC ENTER TURN IGNITION SWITCH TO ON POSITION ENTER To test results display ENTER ENTER 3 The tester displays the results of the test OK is displayed if the sensor is functioning properly or NG Not Good is displayed if a fault is detected Examples are shown below CRANK SENSOR IGN SIGNAL OK CRANK SENSOR NG IGN SIGNAL OK AIRFLOW METER OK IN PROCESS AIRFLOW METER NG IN PROCESS 4 Press SD to return to the OBD Controls menu 5 If the tester is unable to set the ECU to the selected mode the following screen is displayed Press to return to the OBD Controls menu UNABLE TO SET REOUESTED MISC TEST MODE EXIT Select test Used when instructions on each screen have been completed EXIT Return to OBD Controls menu NISSAN 27 NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 8 NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS DTCs available for Nissan vehicles are listed in the following charts Some code numbers have different descriptors depending on the selected vehicle Only codes available for the selected vehicle are displayed by the tester OBD OBD I SYSTEMS YEAR 1984 DESCRIPTOR 1984 11 CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL 12 AIR FLOW METER CIRCUIT FAILURE 13 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE CYL HEAD TEMP SENSOR FAILURE 14 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 21 IGNITION SWITCH OR CKT FAILURE 22 FUEL PUMP OR FP CIRCUIT FAILURE 23 THROTTL
265. LECTRONIC IDLE CONTROL SENSOR 15 IGNITION OUTPUT SIG FAIL 16 FUEL INJECTOR FAILURE 17 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 18 IGNITION TIMING CONTROL UNIT ACURA 15 ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1989 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 19 LOCK UP CONTROL SOL VALVE FAIL FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 20 ELECTRIC LOAD SENSOR FAILURE 21 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE YEAR 1990 DESCRIPTOR 1990 0 0 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 1 02 SENSOR OR 025 CKT FAILURE FRONT O2S OR O2S CKT FAILURE 2 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE REAR 025 OR 025 CKT FAILURE 3 MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE A FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE CK ANGLE OR CK ANG CKT FAILURE MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 9 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL 10 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 12 EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE 13 BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE 14 ELECTRONIC IDLE CONTROL SENSOR 15 IGNITION OUTPUT SIG OR CKT FAIL 16 FUEL INJECTOR FAILURE 17 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 18 IGNITION TIMING CONTROL UNIT 19 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 30 A T FISIGNAL A 31 A T FI SIGNAL B 43 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM 16 ACURA ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1991 1991 o N O o 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 23 23 30 31 35 36 41 42 DESCRIPTOR FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT
266. LENOID VALVE VICS VRIS SOLENOID VALVE NOI VRIS SOLENOID VALVE 42 SOLENOID VALVE TURBO PRECONTROL 43 SOLENOID VALVE WASTEGATE CONTROL 44 SOLENOID VALVE TURBO CONTROL 45 SOLENOID VALVE CHARGE CONTROL 46 VRIS SOLENOID VALVE NO2 SOLENOID VALVE CHARGE RELIEF 50 SOLENOID VALVE DOUBLE THROTTLE CONTROL 51 FUEL PUMP RELAY SPEED 54 AIR PUMP RELAY 55 VEHICLE SPEED PULSE GENERATOR 60 1 2 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 61 2 3 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 62 3 4 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 63 LOCKUP SOLENOID VALVE MAZDA 49 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1994 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 65 A C SIGNAL PCMT 67 COOLANT FAN RELAY 67 COOLANT FAN RELAY NOI 71 INJECTOR FRONT SECONDARY 73 INJECTOR REAR SECONDARY 76 SLIP LOCK UP OFF SIGNAL PCMT 77 TORQUE REDUCED SIGNAL Mazda DTCs 1992 1994 Navajo 1994 B Series 1994 626 MX6 W EEC IV and ATX YEAR 1992 1994 DESCRIPTOR 1992 1994 Navajo 111 SYSTEM PASS 1994 B Series 112 IAT SENSOR OUTPUT BELOW 0 2v INDICATED 254 1994 626 MX6 113 IAT SENSOR OUTPUT ABOVE 4 6v INDICATED 40 w EEC IV and ATX 114 IDLE AIR TEMP OUT OF EXPECTED RANGE 116 ECT OUT OF EXPECTED RANGE 117 ECT SENSOR OUTPUT BELOW 0 2v INDICATED 254 F 118 ECT SENSOR OUTPUT ABOVE 4 6v INDICATED 40 121 TP OUT OF EXPECTED RANGE INCONSISTENT WITH MAF 122 TPS OUTPUT BELOW 0 5v 123 TPS OUTPUT ABOVE 4 6v 124 SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH
267. LEXUS 1989 1994 SELECT MODEL YEAR 19 SELECT MODEL 4RUNNER YES NO Displayed only if i i SELECT engine option or 2509 ENGINE TRANS transmission option 22R E 2WD AT exists for selected YES NO vehicle 1994 TOYOTA ARUNNE 22R E 2WD AT PFI R O or 3 sec Example of Toyota Vehicle Selection SYSTEM INOUIRY 1989 94 VEHICLES ONLY Once the vehicle type is entered the tester displays which adapter s can be used on the selected vehicle and then displays information screens which describe the operating differences between Active and Inactive Toyota OBD systems Use the up and down arrows to scroll through the information displays If a system is Active the tester can read DTCs directly from the ECU and show the DTC number and description on the tester display Active systems are identified in the Select System menu with an It is displayed to indicate an active system that does not have DTCs stored in the ECU ng no good is displayed to indicate an active system that does have DTCs stored in the ECU during the inquiry process the tester determines if the system ECU has stored DTCs or not If a system is Inactive the tester cannot read DTCs directly from the ECU so the DTCs must be manually read from the dashboard MIL and then entered into the tester using Mode F2 Submode 1 READ ENTER DTCs Note that some Inactive systems listed in the Possible Sy
268. MALFUNCTION BARO TURBO PRESS SENSOR SIGNAL CPS SENSOR THROTTLE POS SENSOR SIGNAL VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL STARTER SIGNAL SUB THROTTLE POS SENSOR SIGNAL AIR PUMP EAP MALFUNCTION SWITCH CONDITION SIGNAL KNOCK SENSOR SIGNAL TOYOTA 45 TOYOTA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1989 94 CONTINUED DTC DESCRIPTOR 53 54 55 56 71 72 78 79 81 83 84 85 KNOCK CONTROL PART IN ECU INTERCOOLER KNOCK SENSOR SIGNAL COOLING FAN PRESSURE SWITCH EGR SYSTEM MALFUNCTION AIR CONDITIONER RELAY OPEN FUEL PUMP CONTROL SIGNAL FUEL PUMP CONTROL SIGNAL TCM COMM ECTI TCM COMM ESA1 TCM COMM ESA2 TCM COMM ESA3 46 TOYOTA DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS 9 DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS The Asian Imports Cartridge is capable of displaying a wide variety of ECM parameters in Data List and Snapshot This section provides a description of every parameter that can be displayed for Toyota vehicles Remember not all models are capable of displaying all parameters Only parameters available for the selected vehicle are displayed by the tester There are two basic types of ECM parameters discrete and analog Discrete parameters are bits of information and can be in only one of two distinct states on off open closed etc Switches and solenoids are examples of discrete parameters Analog parameters are used to represent quantities and are displaye
269. METER OR CKT FAILURE 41 TP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OR CKT 43 STARTER SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 51 N S OFF DURING DIAG CK YEAR 1985 DESCRIPTOR 1985 1 NO DTCs NORMAL OPERATION 2 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE 3 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE NO IGNITER PULSE 4x OR CKT FAIL 4 WATER THERMO SENSOR OR CKT 5 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 6 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE NO RPM SIGNAL ABOVE 1000 RPM 7 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 8 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 10 STARTER SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 34 TOYOTA TOYOTA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1985 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 11 TPS OFF DURING DIAG CK A C SW ON DURING DIAGNOSIS MAIN RELAY OR ECU CKT FAILURE 12 KS OR KS CKT FAILURE NO ECU RPM SIG DURING CRANKING 13 KS OR KS CKT FAILURE NO ECU IGN SIG ABOVE 1000 RPM 14 NO IGNITER SIG 6x OR CKT FAIL 21 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 22 ECT SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 23 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 31 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE 32 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE 41 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OR CKT 43 STARTER SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 51 A C ON N S OFF DURING DIAG CK 52 KS OR KS CKT FAILURE 53 KS OR KS CKT FAILURE YEAR 1986 DESCRIPTOR 1986 1 NO DTCs NORMAL OPERATION 2 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE 3 NO IGNITER PULSE 4x OR CKT FAIL AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE 4 WATER THERMO SENSOR OR
270. MIL LED NONE SENTRA 1 6L 4 GA16DE SFI 2 MIL LED NONE NISSAN 7 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS ENGINE ENGINE FUEL ECU ADAPTER MODES 1995 240SX 2 4L 4 KA24DE EGI N A AUTOCODES OBD II 300ZX 3 0L V6 VG30DE MPFI 2 MIL LED NONE 300ZX TURBO 3 0L V6 VG30DETT MPFI 2 MIL LED NONE STANZA 2 4L I4 KA24DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II ALTIMA MAXIMA 3 0L V6 VQ30DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II PATHFINDER 3 0L V6 VG30E MPFI 3 LED NONE TRUCK TRUCK 2 4L 4 KA24DE MPFI 3 LED NONE QUEST 3 0L V6 VG30E SFI N A MIL NONE SENTRA 2 0L 4 SR20DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II 200SX SENTRA 1 6L 4 GA16DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II 200SX For Adapter Type OBD II see Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information ENGINE ENGINE FUEL ECU ADAPTER 5 1996 SENTRA 1 6L 4 GA16DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II 200SX 240SX 2 4L I4 KA24DE EGI N A AUTOCODES OBD II 300ZX 3 0L V6 VG30DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II 300ZX TURBO 3 0L V6 VG30DETT MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II STANZA 2 4L I4 KA24DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II ALTIMA MAXIMA 3 0L V6 VQ30DE MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II PATHFINDER 3 0L V6 VG33E MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II OUEST 3 0L V6 VG30E SFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II TRUCK 2 4L 4 KA24E MPFI N A AUTOCODES OBD II For Adapter Type OBD II see Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test
271. N Asian Imports Cartridge Kit Contents VEHICLE COVERAGE TEST MODES AVAILABLE System Tests Available OBD Controls Available GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Reading through this manual before putting your Asian Imports Cartridge and TECH 1 TECHIA or Mastertech tester to work will introduce you to the diagnostic capabilities and tell you how to use them immediately The application software is designed to reduce time consuming reference to manuals as much as possible Once you are familiar with the software and its operation you ll be able to spend more time diagnosing and less time reading Later if questions arise a quick glance at the flow chart for the test you are performing will probably be all you need COMMON TEST MODES DESCRIPTION Operating Procedures for test modes that are common to two or more makes of vehicles are included in the Common Test Modes section These test modes are listed below MODE FO Data List MODE Fl Entry MODE F2 DTC s MODE F3 Snapshot MODE F4 OBD Controls MODE F5 System Tests MODE F8 Information MANUFACTURER SPECIFIC SECTIONS DESCRIPTION Information that 1 specific for the different makes of vehicles is included in the Manufacturer Specific sections Each Manufacturer Specific section includes a chart of the years and models that can be tested a chart of adapters required instructions for connecting the tester to the vehicle and operating procedures for the manufacturer sp
272. N DISPLAY After the vehicle type is selected the tester displays a summary screen of the selected vehicle Information displayed includes the year manufacturer model engine size and type and additional information such as the type of fuel system SELECT MODE MENU When the above steps are completed the Select Mode menu displays the test modes available for the selected vehicle and system Refer to TEST MODES on page 10 and the Common Test Modes OBD OBDI Systems section for operating the test modes with Acura vehicles 8 ACURA SELECTING THE VEHICLE MANUFACTURER TOYOTA gt ACURA CHRYSLER IMP ENTER ACURA 1986 1994 SELECT MODEL YEAR 19 SELECT MODEL INTEGRA YES NO SELECT ENGINE 1 7L 1 8L YES NO 1994 ACURA INTEGRA 1 7 1 8 PGM FI 5 sec SELECT MODE F1 DTC ENTRY F5 SYSTEM TESTS F8 INFORMATION Acura Vehicle Selection Enter model year NO Used to answer questions in tester display Confirm Power up display Return to previous display ACURA TEST MODES 6 TEST MODES When the Select Mode menu is displayed test modes available for Acura vehicles may be selected You may select Mode F1 ENTRY Mode F5 SYSTEM TESTS or Mode F8 INFORMATION without connecting the tester to the vehicle General operating instructions for these test modes are included in the Common Test Modes OBD I Systems section Op
273. N IMPORTS CARTRIDGE KIT DESCRIPTION The Asian Imports Cartridge is used with the TECH 1 TECH 1 Series A TECHIA or Mastertech tester to diagnose Asian Import vehicles manufactured by Acura Chrysler Imports Daihatsu Honda Hyundai Infiniti Isuzu Kia Lexus Mazda Mitsubishi Nissan Subaru Suzuki and Toyota for Isuzu and Suzuki diagnostic test mode descriptions please refer to the Isuzu and Suzuki Operator s Manuals Depending on the vehicle being tested the Asian Imports Cartridge can be used to test engine and transmission controllers or powertrain controllers on vehicles with engine and transmission electronics tests and prompts are specific to the vehicle that you are testing which reduces your dependency on shop manuals For most Asian vehicles the cartridge allows you to read system Data List parameters and Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs input the DTC for a description command different Electronic Control Unit ECU operation modes control idle speed clear diagnostic trouble codes and control various output actuators To reduce the amount of time required to reach a diagnostic solution output actuators can be controlled while Data List parameters are displayed The Snapshot feature of the cartridge greatly simplifies the task of diagnosing difficult intermittent problems by capturing diagnostic parameters either while you are in the service bay or during road testing Data 1s collected both before and after an in
274. N OR SHORT 34 KNOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORT 35 EGR TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORT 43 TPS CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORT 45 FUEL INJECTOR LEAK 46 SECONDARY TPS CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORT 51 FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORT 53 RIGHT HO2 SENSOR CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORT 54 A T COMMUNICATION LINE OPEN OR SHORT 55 NO MALFUNCTION DETECTED BY ECM INFINITI 17 INFINITI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS OBD II SYSTEMS YEAR 1996 98 DESCRIPTOR 1996 98 OBD II P0000 No Failures Indicated P0100 MAF Sensor Circuit P0105 Absolute Pressure Sensor Circuit P0110 IAT Sensor Circuit P0115 ECT Sensor Circuit P0120 TPS Circuit P0125 ECT Sensor Circuit Excessive Time to Enter Closed Loop P0130 Front HO2 Sensor Malfunction no Closed Loop Right Bank Left Bank Q45 P0131 Front HO2 Sensor Lean Shift Monitor Right Bank Left Bank Q45 P0132 Front HO2 Sensor Rich Shift Monitor Right Bank Left Bank Q45 P0133 Front HO2 Sensor Response Monitor Right Bank Left Bank Q45 P0134 Front HO2 Sensor High Voltage Right Bank Left Bank Q45 P0135 Front HO2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction Right Bank Left Bank Q45 P0136 Rear HO2 Sensor Circuit Malfunction Right Bank Left Bank Q45 P0137 Rear HO2 Sensor Minimum Voltage Monitor Right Bank Left Bank Q45 P0138 Rear HO2 Sensor Maximum Voltage Monitor Right Bank Left Bank Q45 P0139 Rear HO2
275. N SHORT CIRCUIT 63 FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR OR CIRCUIT SUBARU 41 SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS OBD II SYSTEMS YEAR 1995 98 DESCRIPTOR 1995 98 OBD II P0100 MAF Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0101 MAF Sensor Range Performance Problem P0102 Sensor Circuit Low Input P0103 MAF Sensor Circuit High Input P0105 Pressure Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0106 Pressure Sensor Circuit Range Performance Problem P0107 Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Input P0108 Pressure Sensor Circuit High Input P0115 ECT Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0116 ECT Sensor Low Input P0117 ECT Sensor High Input P0117 ECT Sensor Low Input 1998 Only P0118 ECT Sensor High Input P0120 TPS Circuit Malfunction P0121 TPS Circuit Range Performance Problem P0122 TPS Circuit Low Input P0123 TPS Circuit High Input P0125 Coolant Temp Low No Closed Loop Fuel Control P0130 O2S Circuit Malfunction Bank 1 Sensor 1 P0133 O2S Circuit Slow Response Bank 1 Sensor 1 P0135 Front O2 Sensor 1 Circuit Slow Response P0136 Front HO2 Sensor 1 Circuit Malfunction P0139 Rear O2 Sensor Slow Response P0141 Rear HO2 Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0142 Front O2 Sensor 2 Circuit Malfunction P0145 Front O2 Sensor 2 Slow Response P0147 Front HO2 Sensor 2 Circuit Malfunction P0170 Fuel Trim Malfunction P0180 Fuel Temp Sensor A Circuit Malfunction 42 SUBARU S
276. NCODES DL 1 6L H4 ECC CARTER M T ECULED MANCODES NONE DL 1 6L H4 ECC HITACHI M T ECULED MANCODES NONE DL 1 8L H4 ECC CARTER M T ECULED MANCODES NONE DL 1 8L H4 ECC HITACHI M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 1 8L H4 ECC CARTER A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 1 8L H4 ECC HITACHI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 1 8L H4 FFI TURBO A T ECULED MANCODES NONE STD 1 6L H4 ECC CARTER M T ECULED MANCODES NONE STD 1 6L H4 ECC HITACHI M T ECULED MANCODES NONE STD 1 8L H4 ECC CARTER M T ECULED MANCODES NONE STD 1 8L H4 ECC HITACHI M T ECULED MANCODES NONE TS me 1984 BRAT 1 8L H4 ECC CARTER A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE BRAT 1 8L H4 ECC HITACHI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE BRAT 1 8L H4 EFI TURBO A T ECULED MANCODES NONE DL 1 6L H4 ECC CARTER M T ECULED MANCODES NONE DL 1 6L H4 ECC HITACHI M T ECULED MANCODES NONE DL 1 8L H4 ECC CARTER M T ECULED MANCODES NONE DL 1 8L H4 ECC HITACHI M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 1 8L H4 ECC CARTER A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE 2 SUBARU VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL ENGINE FUEL ADAPTER CONTINUED SYSTEM TYPE GL 1 8L H4 ECC HITACHI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 1 8L H4 EFI TURBO A T ECULED MANCODES NONE STD 1 6L H4 ECC CARTER M T ECULED MANCODES NONE STD 1 6L H4 ECC HITACHI M T ECULED MANCODES NONE ES 1985 DL 1 8L H4 ECC M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 1 8L H4 ECC A T M T ECULE
277. NE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE 1990 323 PROTEGE 323 PROTEGE 323 PROTEGE 626 MX6 626 MX6 929 929 1 6L 14 1 8L 4 DOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 22L 4 2 2L 14 TURBO 3 0L V6 DOHC 3 0L V6 SOHC EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI B6 BP BP F2 F2 JE JE CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK AU AU AU AU AU AU AU TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES TOCODES MAZDA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1990 CONTINUED ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE MPV MPV MX5 MIATA RX7 RX7 B2200 B2200 B2600i 3 0L V6 2 6L 4 1 6L 14 1 3L R2 1 3L R2 TURBO 2 2L I4 E 2 2L I4 2 6L I4 EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI EGI MFI CARB EGI MFI JE G6 B6 RE13B RE13B F2 F2 G6 CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES MODEL 1991 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE 1991 323 PROTEGE 323 PROTEGE 323 PROTEGE 626 MX6 626 MX6 929 929 NAVAJO MPV MPV MX5 MIATA RX7 RX7 B2200 B2200 B2600i 1 6L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 1 8L 14 DOHC 2 2L 14 2 2L 4 TURBO 3 0L V6 SOHC 3 0L V6 DOHC 4 0L V6 3
278. NSOR OR CKT FAILURE 14 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 15 ISC MOTOR POS SENSOR OR CKT MOTOR POSITION SENSOR OR CKT 21 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR 22 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 23 CAMSHAFT POS SENSOR OR CKT NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT 24 SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 25 BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 31 KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE 32 MAP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 36 IGNITION TIMING ADJUSTMENT 39 FRONT HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT 41 INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE 43 EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR 44 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 1 amp 4 CYL 52 IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 2 amp 5 CYL 53 IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 3 amp 6 CYL 55 IAC VALVE POS SENSOR OR CKT 59 REAR HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT 61 TORQUE REDUCED SIGNAL OR CKT 62 INDUCTION CNTRL VALVE POS SNSR 71 TRACTION CONTROL VACUUM SOLENOID 72 TRACTION CONTROL VENT SOLENOID MITSUBISHI 31 MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1994 DESCRIPTOR 1994 0 ECU OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 11 HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE FRONT HEATED O2 OR CKT FAILURE O2 SNSR OR FRONT HEATED O2 SNSR HTD O2 SNSR OR LF HTD O2 SNSR 12 VOLUME AIR FLOW SNSR OR CKT 13 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 14 SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 15 ISC MOTOR POS SWITCH OR CKT MOTOR POSITION SENSOR OR CKT 21 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR 22 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 23 CAMSHAFT POS SENSOR
279. NTRY The DTC Entry mode is designed for vehicles that are eguipped with On Board Diagnostics which reguire DTCs to be read from the ECU using a manual method Up to five submodes are available when Mode 1 Entry is selected Only submodes available for the selected vehicle are displayed in the submode menu A description of the submodes follows Operating instructions for the submodes are on the following pages How to select and operate the DTC Entry submodes is explained on the following pages Detailed operating instructions for the selected vehicle are included in the Manufacturer Specific Instructions The DTC Entry submodes include Submode F0 On vehicles with no DLC DTCs are displayed only after the ECU is put into a How To Read diagnostic state This submode provides screen text information which explains how to setup the ECU for DTC retrieval Submode F1 Most early OBD systems do not have a DLC so the codes must be manually read Enter DTC s from the ECU LEDs from an analog voltmeter or from the dashboard mounted Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL After codes are obtained using information provided in submode 0 HOW TO READ the codes may be entered into the tester in Submode F2 ENTER DTCs and the tester displays a description of the code Submode F2 The tester displays a list of DTCs available for the selected vehicle From this list the DTC List DTC obtained using F0 HOW TO READ can be selected or deselected
280. O lt DE SELECT DTC 03 MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE FAULT DTC 03 MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE FAULT SELECTED Example of DTC List Displays COMMON TEST MODES I 15 MODE F2 DTC S ACTIVE KEYS Scroll through displayed DTCs YES Select displayed DTC NO Deselect a selected DTC G Print available DTC list Return to DTC Entry menu SUBMODE F3 REVIEW DTC The Review DTC submode displays a list of DTCs that have been entered or selected The DTCs can be printed if the tester is connected to a compatible serial printer To select Review DTC submode do the following 1 Press to select DTC Entry from the Select Mode menu 2 Press to select Review DTC from the DTC menu 3 An instruction screen explains how to view the DTCs Press to display the stored DTCs 4 The DTC number is displayed on the first line followed by a description of the DTC Press to advance to the next code or press to hold the displayed code 5 When all DTCs have been displayed press 1959 to display a summary screen of all entered DTCs 6 Press G to print entered or selected current DTCs 7 Press RB to return to the DTC Entry menu 16 COMMON TEST MODES I MODE F2 DTC S SELECT MODE F1 DTC ENTRY F2 DTC F3 SNAPSHOT DTC F1 READ DTC s F2 DTC LIST F3 REVIEW DTC DTC 03 ADVANCE CODE V HOLD CODE EXIT QUIT ENTER SUMMARY MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE FAULT ENTER DTC SUMMARY
281. OBD II AUTOCODES 626 2 5L V6 MEFI KL OBD II AUTOCODES For OBD II Adapter Type use Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information ENGINE ADAPTER MODEL 1999 ENGINE TYPE TYPE CODE 1999 MX5 MIATA 1 82L 14 MEFI BP OBDII AUTOCODES For OBD II Adapter use Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information 10 MAZDA MAZDA SPECIFIC INFORMATION 2 MAZDA SPECIFIC INFORMATION The Mazda vehicles covered by the Asian Imports Cartridge are separated into two different sections within the Asian Imports Operator s Manual The vehicle s on board system will determine which section of the Operator s Manual will need to be used Vehicles that are OBD certified have information about the operating test modes in the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section of the Operator s Manual Vehicles that have OBD or OBDI systems have test mode information in this section of the Operator s Manual In these sections you will find information on test modes available how to connect the tester to the vehicle and operating instructions for the different test modes A complete list of Mazda Diagnostic Trouble Codes is included at the back of each section To determine which section of the Operator s Manual to use for diagnostic information and instructions look at Adapter Type of the Vehicle and Systems chart If the vehic
282. OCODES DIAMANTE 3 0L V6 SOHC 6G72 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES DIAMANTE 3 0L V6 DOHC 6G72 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES ECLIPSE 2 0L I4 DOHC 420A OBD II AUTOCODES ECLIPSE 2 0L I4 DOHC TURBO 4G63 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES ECLIPSE 2 4L 14 SOHC 4G64 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES EXPO 2 4L 4 4G64 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES EXPO LRV 2 4L 4 4G64 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES EXPO LRV 1 8L 14 4G93 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES GALANT 2 4L 4 4G64 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES MIRAGE 1 5L 14 4G15 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES MIRAGE 1 8L 14 4G93 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES MONTERO 3 0L V6 12V 4G72 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES MONTERO 3 0L V6 24V 4G72 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES MONTERO 3 0L V6 DOHC 4G74 MFI OBD II AUTOCODES For Adapter Type OBD II see COMMON TEST MODES II section for operating instructions and test mode information MITSUBISHI 9 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1997 ENGINE ENGINE TYPE FUEL TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE 1997 3000GT 3000GT DIAMANTE ECLIPSE ECLIPSE ECLIPSE SPYDER ECLIPSE SPYDER GALANT MIRAGE MIRAGE MONTERO MONTERO SPORT MONTERO SPORT 3 0L V6 3 0L V6 TURBO 3 5L V6 2 4L 14 2 0L 14 TURBO 2 0L 14 TURBO 2 4L 14 2 4L 14 1 5L 14 1 8L 14 3 5L V6 2 4L 14 3 0L V6 6072 6672 6674 420 4663 4663 4664 4064 4615 4093 6074 4664 6672 MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI MFI OBD OBD II OBD II OBD II OBD I
283. OR THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR FUEL PUMP RELAY MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR BAROMETRIC ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR IN PCME BAROMETRIC ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR O2 SENSOR INACTIVATION HEATED O2 SENSOR INACTIVATION LEFT SIDE HEATED O2 SENSOR INACTIVATION HEATED O2 SENSOR LEFT SIDE EGR FUNCTION SENSOR O2 SENSOR INVERSION HEATED O2 SENSOR INVERSION LEFT SIDE HEATED O2 SENSOR INVERSION CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM LEFT SIDE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR NARROW RANGE METERING OIL PUMP POSITION SENSOR HEATED O2 SENSOR RH RIGHT SIDE HEATED O2 SENSOR INACTIVATION FUEL THERMOSENSOR CLOSED LOOP SYSTEM RH RIGHT SIDE HEATED O2 SENSOR INVERSION SOLENOID VALVE PRESSURE REGULATOR PRC SOLENOID VALVE SOLENOID VALVE PURGE CONTROL METERING OIL PUMP STEPPING MOTOR 48 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1994 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 27 METERING OIL PUMP 28 EGR SOLENOID VALVE EGR SOLENOID VACUUM 29 EGR SOLENOID VALVE VENT 30 COLD START INJECTOR RELAY SOLENOID VALVE SPLIT AIR BYPASS 31 SECONDARY AIR BYPASS VALVE 32 SECONDARY AIR SWITCHING VALVE 33 SOLENOID VALVE PORT AIR BYPASS 34 IAC VALVE 35 PRC SOLENOID VALVE NO2 36 RIGHT SIDE HEATED O2 SENSOR HEATER HEATED O2 SENSOR HEATER 37 LEFT SIDE HEATED O2 SENSOR HEATER METERING OIL PUMP 38 SOLENOID VALVE ACCELERATED WARM UP SYSTEM 39 SOLENOID VALVE RELIEF 2 40 SOLENOID VALVE PURGE CONTROL 41 SO
284. OR ATX 60 1 2 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 61 2 3 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 62 3 4 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 63 LOCKUP SOLENOID VALVE 64 SOLENOID VALVE 3 2 TIMING 65 SOLENOID VALVE LOCKUP SIGNAL PCMT 66 SOLENOID VALVE LINE PRESSURE 67 COOLANT FAN RELAY NOI 68 COOLANT FAN RELAY NO2 NO3 69 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAN WATER THERMOSENSOR FAN 71 INJECTOR FRONT SECONDARY 73 INJECTOR REAR SECONDARY 76 SLIP LOCK UP OFF SIGNAL EC AT CU 77 TORQUE REDUCED SIGNAL CU YEAR 1994 DESCRIPTOR NOTE For 1994 B Series Navajo and 626 MX6 w EEC IV and ATX see table beginning on page 50 1994 1 IGF SIGNAL IGNITION PULSE IGNITER IGNITION COIL 2 NE SIGNAL NE2 SIGNAL CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR NO2 NE2 SIGNAL 3 G SIGNAL G SIGNAL CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR NOI Gl SIGNAL SGC SIGNAL SGC SIGNAL CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR 1 SGT SIGNAL MAZDA 47 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1994 CONTINUED 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 23 23 24 25 26 DESCRIPTOR SIGNAL CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR NOI SGC SIGNAL SGT SIGNAL SGT SIGNAL CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR G2 SIGNAL KNOCK SENSOR LEFT SIDE KNOCK SENSOR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR RIGHT SIDE KNOCK SENSOR VOLUME AIRFLOW SENSOR MASS AIRFLOW SENSOR ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENS
285. OR BOOST SENSOR 8 AIR FLOW METER 9 WATER THERMO SENSOR ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR WATER THERMO SENSOR OR CIRCUIT 10 INTAKE AIR THERMO SENSOR AIR FLOW METER 11 INTAKE AIR THERMO SENSOR DYNAMIC CHAMBER 12 THROTTLE SENSOR COIL WITH IGNITER TRAILING SIDE THROTTLE SENSOR VARIABLE RESISTOR TYPE 13 VACUUM SENSOR OR CIRCUIT 14 ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR VACUUM SENSOR OR CIRCUIT 15 O2 SENSOR INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR DYNAMIC CHAMBER INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INTAKE AIR PIPE O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT 16 EGR POSITION SENSOR EGR POSITION SENSOR OR CIRCUIT 17 FEEDBACK SYSTEM 18 A F SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 22 SLOW FUEL CUT SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT MAZDA 31 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1988 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 34 35 40 41 42 45 COASTING RICHER SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT SOLENOID VALVE PRESSURE REGULATOR CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE NO 1 PURGE CONTROL VALVE SOLENOID VALVE PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE NO 2 PURGE CONTROL VALVE PURGE SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT SOLENOID VALVE VACUUM SWITCH VALVE SOLENOID VALVE NO 1 PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE EGR SOLENOID VALVE EGR VACUUM DUTY SOLENOID VACUUM VALVE OR CIRCUIT SOLENOID VALVE EGR VENT DUTY SOLENOID VENT VALVE OR CIRCUIT ACV SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT BAC VALVE IDLE SPEED CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE IDLE SPEED CONTROL IDLE
286. OR CIRCUIT FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR IGNITION COIL OR POWER CYLINDERS 1 4 IGNITION COIL OR POWER CYLINDERS 2 3 4 CYLINDER IGNITION COIL OR POWER CYLINDERS 2 5 6 CYLINDER IGNITION COIL OR POWER CYLINDERS 3 6 IAC VALVE POSITION SENSOR OR CIRCUIT LEFT REAR HO2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT TORQUE REDUCTION SIGNAL INDUCTION VALVE POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT RIGHT REAR HO2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT TRACTION CONTROL VACUUM SOLENOID OR CIRCUIT TRACTION CONTROL VENT SOLENOID OR CIRCUIT MITSUBISHI 33 MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS Mitsubishi Eclipse Non Turbo DTCs DESCRIPTOR 1995 11 13 14 15 16 17 21 22 23 24 25 27 31 32 33 35 36 37 41 42 43 44 46 47 51 LOSS SIGNAL AT PCM OR TIMING BELT SKIPPED NO CHANGE IN MAP SENSOR FROM START TO RUN MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE HIGH OR LOW VSS SIGNAL NOT PRESENT KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION ENGINE TEMP TOO COLD TOO LONG NO CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL HO2 SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION ECT VOLTAGE HIGH OR LOW IAT VOLTAGE HIGH OR LOW TPS VOLTAGE HIGH OR LOW DOES NOT AGREE WITH MAP SENSOR IAC MOTOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION TARGET IDLE NOT REACHED FUEL INJECTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION EVAP SYSTEM MALFUNCTION EGR SOLENOID OR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION A C CLUTCH RELAY OR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION HIGH OR LOW FAN RELAY CIR
287. OR RELAY OPEN 14 PUMP MOTOR RELAY SHORT 15 TRAC BRAKE MAIN RELAY OPEN 16 TRAC BRAKE MAIN RELAY SHORT 17 TRAC PUMP MOTOR RELAY OPEN 18 TRAC PUMP MOTOR RELAY SHORT 21 RF SOLENOID OPEN OR SHORT 22 LF SOLENOID OPEN OR SHORT 23 RR SOLENOID OPEN OR SHORT 40 TOYOTA TOYOTA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1989 94 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR 24 25 26 27 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 51 53 54 55 56 57 61 62 71 72 73 74 LR SOLENOID OPEN OR SHORT MASTER CYL CUT SOL OPEN SHORT ACCUMULATOR CUT SOL OPEN SHORT RESERVOIR CUT SOL OPEN SHORT RF SPEED SENSOR MALFUNCTION LF SPEED SENSOR MALFUNCTION RR SPEED SENSOR MALFUNCTION LR SPEED SENSOR MALFUNCTION LF RR SPEED SENS MALFUNCTION RF LR SPEED SENS MALFUNCTION SPD SENSOR ROTOR WHEEL FAILURE RR SPEED SENSOR MALFUNCTION LR SPEED SENSOR MALFUNCTION VOLTAGE MALFUNCTION HIGH VOLTAGE TRAC SYS DECEL SENSOR MALF DECELERATION SENS OPEN SHORT DECELERATION SENSOR MALF DECELERATION SENSOR MALF DECELERATION SENSOR MALF ACTUATOR PUMP MOTOR LOCKED TRAC MOTOR OVER OPERATING DUR TRAC MOTOR OVER OPERATING FREQ LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL PRESSURE SENSOR OPEN OR SHORT PRESSURE SENSOR STICKING TRAC ECU COM LINE OPEN SHORT ECU MALFUNCTION RF SENSOR LOW VOLTAGE LF SENSOR LOW VOLTAGE RR SENSOR LOW VOLTAGE LR SENSOR LOW VOLTAGE TOYOTA 41 TOYOTA DIAGN
288. ORT CIRCUIT 13 MAP SENSOR OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 14 BARO SENSOR OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 15 02 SENSOR INACTIVE 2 6L MPV 1 6L MX3 RX7 LEFT HO2 SENSOR STUCK OVER 1500 RPM 2 5L 626 MX6 929 1 8L MX3 HO2 SENSOR INACTIVE 2 0L 626 MX6 3 0L MPV MX5 MIATA 16 EGR SENSOR OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT OR STUCK VALVE 17 O2 SENSOR INVERSION INACTIVE RX7 2 6L MPV HO2 SENSOR STICKING 1 6 MX5 MIATA LEFT CLOSED LOOP OPERATION STUCK OVER 1500 RPM 1 8L MX3 LEFT HO2 SENSOR INACTIVE 2 5L 626 MX6 929 HO2 SENSOR INVERSION INACTIVE 2 0L 626 MX6 3 0L MPV 18 TPS NARROW OPEN SHORT 20 OIL PUMP SENSOR OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 23 FUEL THERMOSENSOR OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT RX7 HO2 SENSOR INACTIVE RIGHT BANK 2 5L 626 MX6 929 1 8L MX3 24 RIGHT CLOSED LOOP OPERATION STUCK OVER 1500 RPM 1 8L MX3 RIGHT HO2 SENSOR INACTIVE 2 5L 626 MX6 929 25 PRC SOLENOID VALVE OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 26 PURGE SOLENOID VALVE OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT OIL PUMP STP MOTOR OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT RX7 54 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 27 METER OIL PUMP OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 28 EGR VALVE VAC OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 29 EGR VALVE VENT OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 30 SPLIT AIR BYPASS VALVE OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT RX7 30 COLD START RELAY OPEN SHORT 929 31 SECONDARY AIR BYPASS VALVE OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 32 SECONDARY AIR SWITCHING VALVE OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 33 PORT AIR BYPASS SOLENOID OPEN SH
289. ORT CIRCUIT 34 SOLENOID VALVE OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 35 PRC SOLENOID VALVE 2 OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 36 RIGHT O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT OPEN SHORT 37 METER OIL PUMP LOW BATTERY VOLTS RX7 37 LEFT O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT OPEN SHORT 929 38 WARM UP SYSTEM VALVE OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 39 RELIEF 2 SOLENOID VALVE OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 40 PURGE SOLENOID VALVE OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 41 VICS SOLENOID VALVE OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 929 1 6LMX3 41 VRIS VALVE 1 OPEN SHORT 2 5L 626 MX6 1 8L MX3 42 TURBO PRECONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT 43 WASTEGATE VALVE OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 44 TURBO CONTROL VALVE OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 45 CHARGE CONTROL VALVE OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 46 CHARGE RELIEF VALVE OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT RX7 46 VRIS VALVE 2 OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 2 5L 626 M X6 1 8L MX3 50 DOUBLE THROTTLE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 51 FUEL PUMP RELAY SPEED 54 AIR PUMP RELAY OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 65 A C SIGNAL TCM OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 71 INJECTION FRONT SECONDARY OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 73 INJECTION REAR SECONDARY OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 76 SLIP TCC SIGNAL OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT MAZDA 55 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 77 TORQUE REDUCED SIGNAL OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 56 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS OBD II SYSTEMS YEAR 1995 1998 p DESCRIPTOR NO 1995 98 OBD II P0100 MAF VAF Circuit Malfunction P0102 MAF Sensor Circuit Low Inpu
290. OSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1989 94 CONTINUED 75 76 77 78 79 DESCRIPTOR RF SENSOR ABNORMAL FREO LF SENSOR ABNORMAL FREO RR SENSOR ABNORMAL FREO LR SENSOR ABNORMAL FREO DECELERATION SENSOR MALF 42 TOYOTA TOYOTA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS AIR CONDITIONING YEAR 1989 94 DESCRIPTOR 1989 1994 ROOM TEMP SENSOR OPEN OR SHORT AMBIENT TEMP SENS OPEN SHORT EVAPORATOR TEMP SENS OPEN SHORT WATER TEMP SENS OPEN SHORT DUCT SENSOR OPEN SHORT Dr SENSOR OPEN SHORT Pa SOLAR SENSOR OPEN SHORT Pa COMPRESSOR LOCKED REFRIGERANT PRESS MALFUNCTION SOLAR SENSOR OPEN SHORT Dr AIR MIX POSITION SENSOR AIR INLET POSITION SENSOR AIR MIX MALF OR MODE POTEN SIG AIR INLET MALFUNCTION AIR BYPASS POS SENSOR Pr WATER VALVE POSITION SENSOR AIR MIX MALFUNCTION AIR INLET MALFUNCTION MODE MALFUNCTION AIR BYPASS POS SENSOR Dr AIR BYPASS POS SENSOR Pa WATER VALVE POSITION SENSOR CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM YEAR 1989 94 1989 1994 11 12 13 14 DESCRIPTOR ACTUATOR MALF OPEN OR SHORT CC MAG CLUTCH RELEASE FAIL POSITION SENSOR OPEN OR SHORT ACTUATOR POS SENSOR MALF TOYOTA 43 TOYOTA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1989 94 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 21 VEHICLE SPD SENS SIGNAL METER 22 VEHICLE SPD SENS SIGNAL T M 23 SPEED DECREASED 10 mph 16 Km h 31 RESUME SWIT
291. PH for more than 60 feet 7 Allow engine to idle for over 20 seconds 8 Turn clearance lamps parking lamps rear defogger radiator and heater fans ON and then all OFF 9 Run engine above 2700 RPM until the MIL turns ON If the MIL stays ON check for DTC s by observing the O2 Monitor Lamp mounted on the ECU Use F5 ECU LOCATION from the Information menu for ECU location The long segment 1 2 seconds ON represents the tens digit The short segment 0 2 seconds ON represents the ones digit Each DTC is separated by a 1 8 second delay If the MIL blinks the system is normal 10 Turn the key OFF and disconnect the Test Mode Connectors 11 Erase DTC s when all repairs are completed Use F4 CLEAR DTC s from the DTC Entry menu for instructions on how to clear the DTC s from the vehicle and the tester To manually read Test Mode DTCs from 1989 1990 Subaru Justy vehicles using the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL and ECU LED 02 Monitor LED do the following 1 Connect the green Test Mode connectors Use F4 DJC LOCATION from the Information menu for test mode connectors location 2 Turn key ON Do not start engine The MIL should turn ON The DTC that is flashed should correctly identify the vehicle under test Use F5 ECU LOCATION from the Information menu for ECU location 3 Start engine The MIL should turn OFF 4 Warm engine to normal operating temperature SUBARU 19 TEST MODES 5 Depress clutch pedal complet
292. R ACTIVE SYSTEMS Y INDICATED BY ok OR ng ng DTCs IN ECU z INACTIVE SYS v NO ok ng DISP TESTER CAN START DTC MIL FLASH NOTE VEHICLE v MAY NOT SUPPORT ALL DISPLAYED INACTIVE SYSTEMS e TO POSSIBLE SYSTEMS SUPPORTED DISPLAYS If a system is Inactive the tester cannot read DTCs directly from the ECU so the DTCs must be manually read from the dashboard MIL and then entered into the tester using Mode F2 Submode F1 READ ENTER DTCs Note that some Inactive systems listed in the Possible System lists may not be supported by the vehicle under test Inactive systems do not display ok or ng on the right hand side of the page see Select System Menu section The System Inquiry information screens then display possible Active systems available using the Lexus Check or TDCL Data Link Connector s DLCs LEXUS 13 SELECTING THE VEHICLE POSSIBLE SYSTEMS SUPPORTED DISPLAYS When adapter cable and Active Inactive information screens have been displayed the tester instructs you to connect the adapter cable to the tester DLC cable and the vehicle DLC If you are not sure where the vehicle DLC is located press at any time during system inquiry for DLC Location information When the tester is connected to the vehicle turn the ignition key to the ON position then press 551559 to continue with the system inquiry This portion of the system inquiry can take up to 30 sec
293. R O2S CKT FAILURE REAR 025 OR 025 FAILURE N MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR O N O CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL IAT SENSOR OR IAT FAILURE 11 IDLE MIXTURE ADJ SENSOR CKT FAIL 12 EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE 13 BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE 14 ELECTRONIC IDLE CONTROL SENSOR YEAR 1987 DESCRIPTOR 1987 0 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 1 O2 SENSOR 025 CKT FAILURE FRONT O2S OR O2S CKT FAILURE 2 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE REAR O2S OR 02 CKT FAILURE 3 MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE 4 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 5 MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE ACURA 13 ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 1987 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 6 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE 7 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 8 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR TDC 9 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL 10 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 11 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE IDLE MIXTURE ADJ SENSOR CKT FAIL 12 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE 13 BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE 14 ELECTRONIC IDLE CONTROL SENSOR 15 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE IGNITION OUTPUT SIG OR CKT FAIL 17 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 18 IGNITION TIMING CONTROL UNIT 19 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE YEAR 1988 DESCRIPTOR 1988 0 FAULTY ECU OR
294. R OR IAT CKT FAILURE FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE IDLE MIXTURE ADJ SENSOR CKT FAIL 16 HONDA HONDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1987 pie DESCRIPTOR NO 12 EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 13 BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE 14 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 15 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE YEAR 1988 DIC DESCRIPTOR NO 1988 0 FAULTY ECU OR ECU FAILURE 1 O2 SENSOR A OR O2S A CKT FAIL 02 OR O2S CIRCUIT FAILURE 2 O2 SENSOR B OR 025 B CKT FAIL VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 3 MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE A CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL VAC SWITCH OR VAC SWITCH CKT MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CIRCUIT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR IGNITION COIL SYS OR CKT FAIL 9 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL NO 1 CYLINDER POS SENSOR 10 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 12 EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE 13 BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE 14 ELECTRONIC IDLE CONTROL FAILURE 15 IGNITION OUTPUT SIG ORCKT FAIL 16 FUEL INJECTOR FAILURE 17 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 19 LOCK UP CONTROL SOL VALVE 20 ELECTRIC LOAD SENSOR HONDA 17 HONDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1989 PIS DESCRIPTOR NO 1989 0 ECU FAULTY OR ECU CKT FAILURE 1 O2 SENSOR A OR O2S CKT FAIL 02 OR O2S CIRCUIT FAILURE 2 O2 SENSOR OR 02 CKT FAIL VSS O
295. R TPS CKT FAILURE ISC MOTOR POS SWITCH OR CKT ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR NO 1 CYL SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE O ao NORMAL OPERATION YEAR 1987 DESCRIPTOR 1987 1 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 2 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 3 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE A PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE ISC MOTOR POS SWITCH OR CKT ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR YEAR 1988 DESCRIPTOR 1988 1 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 2 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 3 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 4 PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 5 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 6 ISC MOTOR POS SWITCH OR CKT MOTOR POSITION SENSOR OR CKT 7 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR 8 NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT 11 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 26 MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1988 DESCRIPTOR YEAR 1989 12 13 14 21 22 23 24 25 41 42 43 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR DESCRIP
296. R VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 3 MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE CKP SENSOR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL VAC SWITCH OR VAC SWITCH CKT MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE SENSOR OR TPS CIRCUIT FAILURE Mm CRANK ANGLE SENSOR TDO IGNITION COIL SYS OR CKT FAIL 9 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL 10 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 11 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 12 EGR SENSOR OR EGR CKT FAILURE 13 BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE 14 ELECTRONIC IDLE CONTROL FAILURE 15 IGNITION OUTPUT SIG OR CKT FAIL 16 FUEL INJECTOR FAILURE 17 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 19 LOCK UP CONTROL SOL VALVE 20 ELECTRIC LOAD SENSOR 18 HONDA HONDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1990 DAG DESCRIPTOR NO 1990 0 FAULTY ECU OR ECU FAILURE 1 02 SENSOR OR 025 CKT FAILURE O2 SENSOR A OR O2S A CKT FAIL 2 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE O2 SENSOR OR O2S CKT FAIL 3 MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE 4 CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL VAC SWITCH OR VAC SWITCH CKT FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 5 MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE 6 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE 7 TP SENSOR OR TPS CIRCUIT FAILURE M T COOLANT SW A T SHFT POS SW 8 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR IGNITION COIL SYS OR CKT FAIL 9 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL CK ANGLE SENSOR CYL HF amp Si 10 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 11 ELECTRONIC IDLE CONTROL FAILURE 12 EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE EGR SYSTEM FAIL HF Ca
297. RMAL SIGNAL FROM IGN SWITCH SVX STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT FROM ECM TO SWITCH OPEN OR SHORT IMPREZA 13 CAM ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL FAILURE 14 INJECTOR NO 1 INOPERATIVE 15 INJECTOR NO 2 INOPERATIVE 16 INJECTOR NO 3 INOPERATIVE 17 INJECTOR NO 4 INOPERATIVE 18 INJECTOR NO 5 INOPERATIVE 19 INJECTOR NO 6 INOPERATIVE 21 ECT SENSOR ABNORMAL SIGNAL 22 KNOCK SENSOR ABNORMAL VOLTAGE IN MONITOR CIRCUIT LEGACY KNOCK SENSOR 1 ABNORMAL VOLTAGE IN MONITOR CIRCUIT RIGHT BANK SVX 23 AIR FLOW SENSOR CIRCUIT FAILURE 24 BYPASS IDLE AIR CONTROL CIRCUIT FAILURE 28 KNOCK SENSOR 2 ABNORMAL VOLTAGE LEFT BANK 29 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT FAILURE SUBARU 37 SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1993 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 31 THROTTLE SENSOR CIRCUIT FAILURE 32 O2 SENSOR INOPERATIVE LEGACY O2 SENSOR 1 INOPERATIVE RIGHT BANK SVX O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT OPEN OR SHORT TO ECM IMPREZA 33 VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 34 EGR SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 35 PURGE CONTROL VALVE OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 36 AIR SUCTION SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 37 O2 SENSOR 2 INOPERATIVE LEFT BANK 38 ENGINE TORQUE CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT FROM ECU TO TCU 41 A F LEARNING CONTROL FAULTY 42 IDLE SWITCH ABNORMAL VOLTAGE 44 WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE INOPERATIVE 45 ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR FAULTY LEGACY NON TURBO PRESSURE SENSOR EXCHANGE VALVE FAULTY LEGACY TURBO ATMOSPHERIC PRE
298. RMATION SELECT MODE Y F1 DLC LOCATION F2 SCC LOCATION F3 ID INFO Year and manufacturer 1994 ACURA Model VIGOR Engine displacement and type 2 5L Fuel system PGM FI 4 If the information does not match the vehicle being tested press until the Asian Cartridge Power up screen is displayed then perform the vehicle selection procedure 5 If the information matches the vehicle being tested press 9 to return to the Information menu EXIT Return to Information menu Press repeatedly to return to Power up display 32 COMMON TEST MODES I MODE F8 INFORMATION SUBMODE F4 DJC LOCATION Submode F4 DJC Location is available for select Chrysler Import and Nissan vehicles and all Daihatsu Hyundai Kia Mitsubishi and Subaru vehicles The DJC Location test mode displays where the Diagnostic Jumper Connector DJC for the selected ECU is located on the vehicle Depending on the vehicle being tested there may be one or more different DJCs for the various ECUs The tester informs you if the DJC location is not applicable for the selected system To select DJC Location submode do the following 1 Press G to select Information from the Select Mode menu 2 Press G9 to select DJC Location from the Information menu 3 The tester displays the DJC Location of the ECU for the selected vehicle or system Some examples of DJC Location displays are shown in the follow
299. RMATION F2 S W VERIF NO S W VERIF NO 1 XX XX XX XX S W VERIF NO 2 XX XX XX XX To display the Software Verification Number do the following 1 Select F8 INFORMATION from the SELECT MODE menu 2 Select F2 S W VERIF NO from the SELECT TYPE menu NOTE Multiple Software Verification Numbers may be reported by an ECU Each Software Verification Number will correspond to a unigue Software Calibration ID number NOTE Turn the engine off when reguesting the Software Verification Number from the vehicle ECU Failure to turn the engine off may cause the ECU to EB require more time to calculate the calibration number and may therefore not respond to the request MODE F9 II TOOLPAK The OBD II Toolpak is used to help diagnose and troubleshoot OBD II compliant powertrain control systems Using the OBD II Toolpak mode provides you with pertinent text and data so you can learn about and more efficiently diagnose the vehicle under test Examples of data features contained within the program are Vehicle preparation 28 COMMON TEST MODES II TEST MODES Diagnostic procedures Repair verification Diagnostic data parameter descriptions Diagnostic data parameter common values Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC Library Readiness Test description Oxygen sensor location information Oxygen sensor type information Onxygen sensor maintenance information When using this applic
300. RY SUBMODES F0 HOW TO READ F1 ENTER DTC s F2 DTC LIST F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC s MANUALLY READING DTCS To manually read Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs on Hyundai vehicles from 1989 95 there are 2 methods that can be used The most common method requires an analog voltmeter Using the analog voltmeter set to a 20 volt scale and connected to the Data Link Connector DLC the DTC can be interpreted from the analog voltmeter needle flashes The second method requires the use of a single wire jumper that is intermittently placed across one pin of the DLC and ground to flash DTCs out on the dashboard mounted Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL For the automobile manufacturers that mention the use of an analog voltmeter to read manual DTCs the Mastertech Oscilloscope may be used Set up the single channel oscilloscope and make connections the same way as the analog voltmeter above Choose the 20v division scale and a slow time division e g 1 2 sec division HYUNDAI 11 TEST MODES the DTCs will be shown as a waveform on the display Note that manually retrieving DTCs from 1993 95 Hyundai Scoupe requires you to locate and jumper the Diagnostic Connector then watch the instrument panel MIL Refer to the section on manually reading DTCs from the 1993 95 Hyundai vehicles in this section Follow the detailed instructions on the following pages to manually read the DTCs Once the DTCs have been manually read from the ECU th
301. S DTCS 13 ERG 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS IRR Ret ete prt dee 3 CHRYSLER IMPORTS SPECIFIC INFORMATION 11 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 12 GETTING OTARTBIN eb eed 13 SELECTING THE VEHICLE emt Ro Foe enn 14 Me 14 beia aa be bob A ad dude prie 14 2222554 TT 14 Selecting the Engine And Enoine Tipe 14 PO 14 Sete i Mode MENE 25 eh HERE ERICH 4400 0440 ddd ed 14 MODES L a oo seen A K k Ka eden ee 16 PAIMIO CONES NU ERR A WE 16 Mog Pr DILE qid dau Vicar ptos Ede Krug RR Re RU 16 MOGESZ DIE osa va ane taak dote Job b dob obe LDS LAE ASE RER d ORE AER 22 CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 24 ED ODD dud deeecandamdaduumddasuhqee tied dedi 24 ORDU SEME kaavaa 344 4041441 okt abc ed dodo hh oe 33 1 VEHICLESAND 2 DAIHATSU SPECIFIC INFORMATION 3 Asian Imports TOC 3 TEST MODES AVAILABLE lee sist rer Yb SES ES 4 GETTING STARTED hee ue np ex oC pe etd da OP A 5 SBLECTING THE VEHICLE i oeste E net s podio 6 ad bane ebb di bale ddd ia
302. S Circuit Malfunction P0725 Engine RPM Signal Malfunction P0731 A T Ist Gear Shift Signal Malfunction P0732 A T 2nd Gear Shift Signal Malfunction P0733 A T 3rd Gear Shift Signal Malfunction P0734 A T 4th Gear Shift Signal Malfunction P0740 TCC Valve Solenoid Malfunction P0744 A T TCC Solenoid Valve Improper Lock Up Operation P0745 A T Line Pressure Solenoid Valve Malfunction P0750 Shift Solenoid Valve A Malfunction P0755 Shift Solenoid Valve B Malfunction P1105 MAP BARO Switch Solenoid Valve Malfunction P1110 Intake Valve Timing Control Left Bank Q45 P1120 Secondary TPS Circuit Malfunction 20 INFINITI INFINITI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1996 98 DESCRIPTOR P1125 Tandem Throttle Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction P1135 Intake Valve Timing Control Right Bank Q45 P1140 Intake Valve Timing Position Sensor Left Bank Q45 P1145 Intake Valve Timing Position Sensor Right Bank Q45 P1148 Closed Loop Malfunction Right Bank Left Bank Q45 P1168 Closed Loop Malfunction Left Bank Right Bank Q45 P1220 Fuel Pump Control Module Circuit P1320 Ignition Signal Primary Circuit Malfunction P1335 Crankshaft Position Sensor Reference Circuit Malfunction P1336 Crankshaft Position Sensor OBD or Flywheel Malfunction P1400 EGR Control Solenoid Valve Malfunction P1401 EGR Temp Sensor Circuit P1402 EGR System Malfunction P1440 EV
303. S sensor change intervals To display information about O2S contamination do the following 1 Press to select OBD II Toolpak from the Select Mode menu 2 Press to select O2S Information from the OBD II Toolpak menu 3 Press GE to select Maintenance from the O2S Information menu 38 COMMON TEST MODES II TEST MODES 4 Press to select Inspection from the select maintenance menu The key help screen will be displayed Press 11959 or wait to advance 5 Press to advance through the text description screens Press to back up through the text description screens These text screens contain oxygen sensor O2S contamination information how to check O2S sensor full range operation and expected O2S sensor signal range 6 Press 8B to return to the previous menu ACTIVE KEYS Scroll up and down Select Inspection m Select Maintenance Select 025 Information Advance program from current screen Exit to the previous test menu Submode F1 Torque Specification Mode Fl Torque Specification provides information about O2S installation and O2S Torque requirements To display information about O2S installation and O2S Torque requirements do the following 1 Press QE to select OBD II Toolpak from the Select Mode menu 2 Press to select O2S Information from the OBD II Toolpak menu 3 Press to select Maintenance from the O2S Information menu 4 Press Gp to select Torque Specificatio
304. SENSOR OR CIRCUIT 42 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1992 CONTINUED 17 18 22 23 24 25 26 28 29 30 34 35 36 37 41 42 45 46 55 60 61 62 63 DESCRIPTOR O2 SENSOR INVERSION FEEDBACK SYSTEM LEFT SIDE FEEDBACK SYSTEM FEEDBACK SYSTEM INVERSION AIR FUEL SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT SLOW FUEL CUT SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT RIGHT SIDE 02 SENSOR COASTING RICHER SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT RIGHT SIDE FEEDBACK SYSTEM SOLENOID VALVE PRESSURE REGULATOR SOLENOID VALVE PRESSURE REGULATOR CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PURGE CONTROL PURGE SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT SOLENOID VALVE EGR SOLENOID VALVE EGR VACUUM DUTY SOLENOID VACUUM VALVE OR CIRCUIT SOLENOID VALVE EGR VENT DUTY SOLENOID VENT VALVE OR CIRCUIT RELAY COLD START INJECTOR ACV SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT ISC VALVE IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE BAC VALVE IDLE UP SOLENOID VALVE FOR A C OR CIRCUIT SOLENOID VALVE IDLE SPEED CONTROL IDLE UP SOLENOID VALVE FOR A T OR CIRCUIT RIGHT SIDE O2 SENSOR HEATER O2 SENSOR HEATER LEFT SIDE O2 SENSOR HEATER SOLENOID VALVE VICS SOLENOID VALVE VRIS 1 SOLENOID VALVE WASTE GATE VACUUM SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT SOLENOID VALVE VRIS 2 PULSE GENERATOR 1 2 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 2 3 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE 3 4 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE LOCKUP SOLENOID VALVE MAZDA 43 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS
305. SENSOR OR CKT 59 REAR HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT 61 TOROUE REDUCED SIGNAL A T 62 INDUCTION CONT VALVE POS SNSR YEAR 1994 DESCRIPTOR 1994 0 ECU OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 11 FRONT HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 12 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 13 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 14 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 15 ISC MOTOR POS SNSR OR CKT 21 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR 22 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 23 CAMSHAFT ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 24 SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 25 BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 31 KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE 32 MAP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 36 IGNITION TIMING ADJUSTMENT 39 HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE FRONT HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT 41 INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE 30 CHRYSLER IMPORTS CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES YEAR 1994 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR 43 44 52 53 55 59 61 62 69 EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR IGNITION COIL OR CKT FAILURE IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 1 amp 4 CYL IGN SIGNAL OR 2 amp 5 CYL IGN SIGNAL OR CKT NO 3 amp 6 CYL IAC VALVE POS SENSOR OR CKT REAR HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT TORQUE REDUCED SIGNAL OR CKT INDUCTION CONT VALVE POS SNSR REAR HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT YEAR 1995 DESCRIPTOR 1995 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 21 22 23 FRONT HO2 SENSOR CIRCUI
306. SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 02 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT TP SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE SPEED SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE STARTER SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE SWITCH SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE EGR CIRCUIT FAILURE YEAR 1989 1989 DTC NO O o N Q a DESCRIPTOR NO DTCs NORMAL OPERATION PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE O2 SENSOR AND OR FUEL SYSTEM CKT O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE STARTER SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE SWITCH SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE DAIHATSU 11 DAIHATSU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1989 DTC NO DESCRIPTOR 12 EGR CIRCUIT FAILURE 15 AIR FUEL RATIO RICH FAILURE 16 AIR FUEL RATIO LEAN FAILURE YEAR 1990 DTC NO DESCRIPTOR 1990 1 NO DTCs NORMAL OPERATION 2 PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 3 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 4 ECT SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 5 O2 SENSOR AND OR FUEL SYSTEM CKT O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 6 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 7 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 8 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 9 SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 10 STARTER SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 11 SWITCH SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 12 EGR CIRCUIT FAILURE 15 AIR FUEL RATIO RICH FAILURE 16 AIR FUEL RATIO LEAN FAIL
307. SOR 33 AIR MIX MALF OR MODE POTEN SIG 34 AIR INLET MALFUNCTION 35 AIR BYPASS POS SENSOR Pr 36 WATER VALVE POSITION SENSOR 41 AIR MIX MALFUNCTION LEXUS 23 LEXUS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1990 94 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 42 AIR INLET MALFUNCTION 43 MODE MALFUNCTION 44 AIR BYPASS POS SENSOR Dr 45 AIR BYPASS POS SENSOR Pa 46 WATER VALVE POSITION SENSOR CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM YEAR 1990 94 DESCRIPTOR 1990 1994 11 ACTUATOR MALF OPEN OR SHORT 12 CC MAG CLUTCH RELEASE VLV FAIL 13 POSITION SENSOR OPEN OR SHORT 14 ACTUATOR POS SENSOR MALF 21 VEHICLE SPD SENS SIGNAL METER 22 VEHICLE SPD SENS SIGNAL T M 23 SPEED DECREASED 10 mph 16 Km h 31 RESUME SWITCH ALWAYS ON 32 CONTROL SWITCH GROUND SHORT 33 SET amp RES SW ON SIMULIANEOUSLY 34 CONTROL SWITCH OFF MALFUNCTION 41 MOTOR ACTUATE MALFUNCTION 42 SOURCE VOLTAGE DROP ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION YEAR 1990 94 DESCRIPTOR 1990 1994 37 DIRECT CLUTCH SPD SENSOR SIG 38 ATF TEMP SENSOR SIGNAL 41 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 42 SPD SENSOR SIGNAL METER 44 SPEED SENSOR REAR 24 LEXUS LEXUS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1990 94 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 46 ACCUMULATOR CONTROL SOLENOID 61 SPD SENSOR SIGNAL T M 62 NO 1 SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID 63 NO 2 SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID 64 LOCK UP CONTROL SOLENOID 65 TIMING SOLENOID 67 OD DIR
308. SOR OR CKT FAILURE N O Q N IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE STARTER SWITCH SIGNAL FAILURE MAIN RELAY OR ECU CKT FAILURE ECU POWER SUPPLY INTERM FAILURE A C P N ON TPS OFF DURING DIAG 12 NO ECU NE G SIG DURING CRANKING NO ECU TAC SIG DURING CRANKING NO ECU NE G SIG DURING CRANK RUN KS OR KS CKT FAILURE 13 NO ECU NE SIG ABOVE 1000 RPM NO ECU NE SIG ABOVE 1500 RPM KS OR KS CKT FAILURE 14 NO ECU IGF SIG 4 5x OR CKT FUEL CUTOFF HIGH TURBO BOOST NO IGNITER SIG 4 11x OR CKT NO IGNITER SIG 8 11x OR CKT NO IGNITER SIG 4x OR CKT FAIL NO IGNITER SIG 6x OR CKT FAIL NO ECU IGF SIG 6 8x OR CKT 21 O2 SENSOR LEAN INDICATION O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE O2 SENSOR OR O2 SENSOR HEATER 22 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE SW TWS1 OR TWS2 CIRCUIT 23 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 24 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 25 AFR LEAN MALF FB FREQ HIGH AFR LEAN MALFUNCTION AFR LEAN MALF FB COMP HIGH AFR LEAN MALF O2S FI ECM AFH O2 SENSOR LEAN INDICATION 38 TOYOTA TOYOTA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1988 CONTINUED 26 27 28 32 34 35 41 42 43 51 52 53 54 71 72 DESCRIPTOR AFR RICH FB FREO HIGH AFR RICH MALF FB COMP LOW AFR RICH MALF FB COMP HIGH O2 SENSOR RICH INDICATION AIR FUEL RATIO RICH MALFUNCTION AFR RICH MALF FB FREQ HIGH AFR RICH MALF FB COMP LOW AFR RICH EBCV SYSTEM SUB O2 S
309. SSURE SENSOR FAULTY SENSOR IN ECU SVX 49 IMPROPER AIR FLOW SENSOR IN USE 51 NEUTRAL SWITCH ABNORMAL SIGNAL SVX INHIBITOR SWITCH ABNORMAL SIGNAL A T NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ABNORMAL SIGNAL M T 52 PARKING SWITCH ABNORMAL SIGNAL 55 EGR GAS TEMP SENSOR ABNORMAL SIGNAL SENSOR FAILURE 56 EGR SYSTEM VALVE OR HOSE MALFUNCTION YEAR 1994 DESCRIPTOR 1994 11 NO CRANK ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL ENTERED LEGACY CRANK SENSOR 1 NO SIGNAL FOR MORE THAN 3 SEC W START SWITCH ON SVX CRANK POSITION SENSOR NO SIGNAL BUT CAM SIGNAL PRESENT IMPREZA 12 STARTER SWITCH ABNORMAL SIGNAL LEGACY STARTER SWITCH ABNORMAL SIGNAL FROM IGNITION SWITCH SVX STARTER SWITCH ABNORMAL SIGNAL OR OPEN IN CIRCUIT IMPREZA 38 SUBARU SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1994 CONTINUED 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 22 23 24 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 41 42 44 DESCRIPTOR NO ANGLE SIGNAL 2 REVOLUTION SIGNAL FROM CRANK SENSOR LEGACY NO ANGLE SIGNAL SIGNAL FROM CRANK SENSOR I SVX NO CAM POSITION SIGNAL CRANK POSITION SIGNAL PRESENT IMPREZA INJECTOR NO 1 INOPERATIVE INJECTOR NO 2 INOPERATIVE INJECTOR NO 3 INOPERATIVE INJECTOR NO 4 INOPERATIVE INJECTOR NO 5 INOPERATIVE INJECTOR NO 6 INOPERATIVE SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE KNOCK SENSOR ABNORMAL VOLTAGE IN MONITOR CIRCUIT LEGACY KNOC
310. T FAILURE 12 STARTER SW OR CKT IN OFF MODE 13 STARTER SW OR CKT IN ON MODE 14 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE 15 PRESSURE SWITCH IN ON OFF POS 16 CKP SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 17 STARTER SWITCH OR CKT FAILURE 21 AIR FLOW METER FLAP SEIZED 22 VEHICLE SPEED SNSR OR CIRCUIT PRESSURE SWITCH IN ON OFF POS VACUUM SWITCH IN ON OFF POS 23 O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE IDLE SW OR CKT ON OFF FAILURE 24 THERMO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE WOT SW OR CKT ON OFF FAILURE 25 PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE TPS IDLE SWITCH OR CKT FAILURE 31 VEHICLE SPEED SNSR OR CIRCUIT 32 DUTY SOLENOID VALVE OR CKT O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 33 FEEDBACK SYSTEM TEST MODE ONLY COOLANT THERMO SNSR OR CIRCUIT 34 BACK UP SYSTEM OR CKT FAILURE ASPIRATED AIR THERMOSENSOR 35 EGR SOL SWITCH ON OFF OR CKT AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE 41 BARO SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 42 CLUTCH SW OR CKT EXC AT amp 4WD FUEL INJ FIXED IN ON OFF POS FUEL INJECTOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 43 KDLH RELAY FIXED IN ON OFF POS 46 NEUT PARKING SW OR CKT FAILURE 52 ASV SOL VALVE OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 53 FUEL PUMP CNTRL OR CKT FAILURE FUEL PUMP OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 26 SUBARU SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1986 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 54 AUTO CHOKE CNTRL OR CKT FAILURE 55 SHIFT UP CNTRL SYSTEM AT ONLY KDLH CONTROL SYSTEM OR CKT 57 CANP SOL VALVE OR CKT FAILURE 58 AIR CNTRL VALVE OR CKT FAILURE 62 EGR SOL VALVE OR CKT FAILURE 63 C
311. T MALFUNCTION 14 LEFT BANK HO2 SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION V6 CAM CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL MALFUNCTION AVENGER SEBRING VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION IAT SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION MAP SENSOR CIRCUIT NO PRESSURE CHANGE 2 0L AVENGER SEBRING TPS CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION MAP SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION AVENGER SEBRING NO VSS SIGNAL TO PCM KNOCK SENSOR NO I CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION 2 0L AVENGER SEBRING ENGINE TEMP TOO LOW NO CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL ECT SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION HEATED O2 SENSOR SYSTEM MALFUNCTION AVENGER SEBRING CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION ECT SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION AVENGER SEBRING CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION IAT SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION CHRYSLER IMPORTS 31 CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 24 VSS REED SWITCH CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION TPS CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION AVENGER SEBRING 25 BARO PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION IAC CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION AVENGER SEBRING 27 FUEL INJECTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION 31 EVAP PURGE SOLENOID CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION EVAP SYSTEM MALFUNCTION 2 0L AVENGER SEBRING KNOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION STEALTH DOHC 32 EGR SYSTEM MALFUNCTION AVENGER SEBRING MAP SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION 1 5L COLT SUMMIT 33 A C CLUTCH RELAY CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION 35 FAN CONTROL RELAY CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION 36 IGNITION TIMING
312. T SMT N A AUTOCODES OBDII LEGACY 2 2L H4 MPFI 4AT SMT N A AUTOCODES OBDII LEGACY 2 5L H4 MPFI 4AT SMT N A AUTOCODES OBDII FORESTER 2 5L H4 MPFI 4AT 5MT N A AUTOCODES OBDII For Adapter Type OBD II see Common Tet Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information 8 SUBARU SUBARU SPECIFIC INFORMATION 2 SUBARU SPECIFIC INFORMATION The Subaru vehicles covered by the Asian Imports Cartridge are separated into two different sections within the Asian Imports Operator s Manual The vehicle s on board system will determine which section of the Operator s Manual will need to be used Vehicles that are OBD II certified have information about the operating test modes in the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section of the Operator s Manual Vehicles that have OBD or OBDI systems have test mode information in this section of the Operator s Manual In these sections you will find information on test modes available how to connect the tester to the vehicle and operating instructions for the different test modes A complete list of Subaru Diagnostic Trouble Codes is included at the back of each section To determine which section of the Operator s Manual to use for diagnostic information and instructions look at Adapter Type of the Vehicle and Systems chart If the vehicle you are testing has an OBD II adapter type use the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section of the Operator
313. TA TOYOTA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1987 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR 11 12 13 14 21 22 23 24 31 32 34 41 42 43 51 52 53 TP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OR CKT STARTER SWITCH SIGNAL FAILURE 11 MAIN RELAY OR ECU CKT FAILURE P N ON TPS OFF DURING DIAG A C ON IDLE SW OFF DURING DIAG TPS OFF N S ON DURING DIAG NO ECU RPM SIG DURING CRANKING NO ECU NE G SIG DURING CRANKING KS OR KS CKT FAILURE NO RPM SIGNAL ABOVE 1000 RPM KS OR KS CKT FAILURE 14 NO IGNITER SIG 4x OR CKT FAIL NO IGNITER SIG 4 11x OR CKT NO IGNITER SIG 6x OR CKT FAIL ABNORMAL TURBO PRESS TUR OR AFM O2 SENSOR LEAN INDICATION O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE HAC SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE TURBO PRESSURE MALFUNCTION TP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OR CKT STARTER SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE P N ON TPS OFF DURING DIAG A C ON N S OFF DURING DIAG CK KS OR KS CKT FAILURE ECU OR CIRCUIT FAILURE TOYOTA 37 TOYOTA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1988 DESCRIPTOR 1988 NO DTCs NORMAL OPERATION AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE NO IGNITER PULSE 4x OR CKT FAIL WATER THERMO SENSOR OR CKT O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE NO ECU NE SIG ABOVE 1500 RPM TP SEN
314. TC List This submode provides you with a text description of the numeric DTC that was selected on the tester display screen As you scroll through the available DTCs you can select the DTC that matches the DTC output by the ECU After you perform this step simply select the DTC on the tester screen for later review or printing Submode F3 Review DTC This submode provides you with a review of the DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The description of the entered or selected DTC will be displayed along with a numerical summary of the entered or selected DTC Review DTC is intended to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTCs that you have encountered during diagnosis Submode F4 Clear This submode has two options for you to choose Option FO is to view text screens that provide information on how to clear the DTCs from ECU memory This is performed by tester keypad presses Option F1 clears the tester memory of DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester 12 ACURA ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 7 ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs DTCs available for Acura vehicles are listed in the following tables Some code numbers have different descriptors depending on the selected vehicle Only codes available for the selected vehicle are displayed by the tester YEAR 1986 DESCRIPTOR 1986 0 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 1 O2 SENSOR OR 025 CKT FAILURE FRONT O2S O
315. TC available for the selected vehicle DTCs may be selected by pressing the key or deselected by pressing the key The entire DTC list can be printed if the tester is connected to a compatible serial printer To select the DTC List submode do the following 1 Press GD to select DTC Entry from the Select Mode menu 2 Press to select DTC List from the DTC Entry menu 3 An instruction screen explains how to view select and deselect the DTCs Press to display the DTC List 4 Use the and keys to scroll through the DTCs 5 Press to select a displayed SELECTED is displayed at the bottom of the screen To deselect a DTC press when the code is displayed 6 Press Gf to print the entire DTC list 7 Press to return to the DTC Entry menu 8 COMMON TEST MODES MODE F1 ENTRY SELECT MODE F1 DTC ENTRY F4 OBD CONTROLS F5 SYSTEM TESTS DTC ENTRY AV F0 HOW TO READ F1 ENTER DTC s F2 DTC LIST USE 8 Y TO GO THROUGH DTC LIST YES SELECT NO DE SELECT DTC 03 MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE FAULT MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE FAULT SELECTED Example of DTC List Displays ACTIVE KEYS Scroll through displayed DTCs YES Select displayed DTC o Deselect a selected DTC G Print available DTC list Return to DTC Entry menu SUBMODE F3 REVIEW DTC The Review DTC submode displays a list of DTCs stored in the tester memory The list of DTCs can be
316. TEM LEAN CONDITION FEEDBACK SYSTEM OR CKT FAILURE 42 IDLE SWITCH CIRCUIT FAILURE 44 WASTEGATE SOL OR CKT FAILURE 45 KDWN CNTRL RLY ON OFF POS 51 NEUTRAL SW CKT REMAINS ON 52 CLUTCH SWITCH OR CKT FAILURE 61 PARKING SW CKT REMAINS ON 62 IDLE UP SYS OR CKT CL REAR DEF 63 IDLE UP SYS CKT HTR RAD FAN YEAR 1988 DESCRIPTOR 1988 1 SPEC CODE FWD 49ST CAN SPEC CODE MT 49ST CAN 2 SPEC CODE FWD CAL SPEC CODE MT CAL 3 SPEC CODE AT 49ST CAN 28 SUBARU SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1988 CONTINUED 11 12 13 14 15 21 22 23 24 25 31 32 33 34 35 41 42 45 DESCRIPTOR SPEC CODE AT CAL SPEC CODE 4WD 49ST CAN SPEC CODE MT 49ST CAN SPEC CODE 4WD CA SPEC CODE MT CAL SPEC CODE AT 49ST CAN SPEC CODE AT CAL CRANK ANGLE SNSR REF PULSE OR CKT STARTER SW ON OFF CRANKING CKP SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE FUEL INJ 1 amp 2 OR CKT FAILURE FUEL INJ 5 amp 6 OR CKT FAILURE FUEL INJ OUTPUT OR CKT FAILURE DUTY SOLENOID VALVE OR CKT FUEL INJ 3 amp 4OR CKT FAILURE FUEL INJ 1 amp 2 OR CKT FAILURE CFC SYSTEM OR CIRCUIT FAILURE WATER TEMP SNSR SIGNAL OR CKT KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE VLC SOLENOID VALVE OR CKT AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE BYPASS AIR CONT VALVE OR CIRCUIT AIR CONTROL VLV OR CKT FAILURE IDLE UP SOLENOID OR CKT FAILURE FUEL INJ 3 amp 4OR CKT
317. TEST MODES AVAILABLE The following test modes are available when testing Honda vehicles Operating instructions for test modes other than DTC Entry are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section There are also specific instructions for operating the test modes See TEST MODES on page 11 MODE F1 DTC ENTRY SUBMODE F0 HOW TO READ SUBMODE F1 ENTER DTC s SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST SUBMODE F3 REVIEW DTC SUBMODE F4 CLEAR DTC s MODE F5 SYSTEM TESTS SUBMODE F0 PREP VEHICLE MODE F8 INFORMATION SUBMODE F2 SCC LOCATION SUBMODE F3 ID INFO SUBMODE F5 ECU LOCATION Not available on certain Honda vehicles HONDA 7 GETTING STARTED 4 GETTING STARTED Before operating the Asian Imports Cartridge with a Honda vehicle the following steps must be performed 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Plug the tester power cable into the vehicle cigarette lighter The power cable may also be directly connected to the battery via the optional battery adapter cable P N 02001636 NOTE Since the cigarette lighter can be switched some tests require that the power cable be directly connected to the battery via the optional battery adapter cable 3 Turn on the tester and select the application software that you will be using Verify that the correct screen is displayed The tester should display a screen similar to the one below ASIAN IMPORTS 83 02 lt ENTER gt FIGURE 1 1 Teste
318. THE MASTERTECH TECH 1A OR TECH 1 The tester must be provided with an external power source e g vehicle power or an AC DC power supply OBD II compliant vehicles provide power at the Data Link Connector DLC so when using a Mastertech or Tech 1A the tester only needs to be connected to the vehicle DLC With the Tech 1 you must connect the DC Power Cable to the vehicle cigarette lighter or to an AC DC power supply ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION By selecting the vehicle for testing you are now at the main menu You can initialize communication between the tester and the vehicle s ECU S by selecting 0 Powertrain The SELECT MODE menu will be displayed SELECT MODE 4 Y FO Data List F1 Freeze Data F2 DTCs If a snapshot has been saved in the tester s memory a menu will be displayed to allow the selection of Fl REPLAY DATA before initialization begins Replay of snapshot data does not reguire communication with the vehicle and can be displayed with power to the tester Main Menu FO Powertrain F1 Replay Data F9 OBD II Toolpak If the vehicle you are testing contains more than one OBD II ECU the tester will display a list of all ECUs which have responded during the initialization process See Multiple ECUs on page 11 2 ECUs RESPONDED 10 ENGINE 18 TRANS COMMUNICATION FAILURE If the tester fails to get a response from the vehicle it will display a retry count and one of two error messages At that point
319. TION SENSOR EGR POSITION SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FEEDBACK SYSTEM THROTTLE SENSOR NARROW RANGE AIR FUEL SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT METERING OIL PUMP POSITION SENSOR SLOW FUEL CUT SOL VALVE OR CKT COASTING RICHER SOL VALVE OR CKT SOLENOID VALVE PRESSURE REGULATOR CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE NO 1 PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE NO 2 PURGE CONTROL STEP MOTOR METERING OIL PUMP SOLENOID VALVE NO 2 PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE NO 1 CONTROL METERING OIL PUMP MOP SOLENOID VALVE EGR SOLENOID VALVE EGR VACUUM SOLENOID VALVE EGR VENT MAZDA 33 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1989 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 30 SPLIT AIR SOLENOID VALVE ACV SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 31 SOLENOID VALVE RELIEF 32 SOLENOID VALVE SWITCH 33 PORT AIR SOLENOID VALVE 34 SOLENOID VALVE IDLE SPEED CONTROL IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE ISC VALVE IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE BAC VALVE SOLENOID VALVE BYPASS AIR CONTROL 35 IDLE UP SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 37 METERING OIL PUMP MOP 38 SOLENOID VALVE ACCELERATED WARM UP SYSTEM SOLENOID VALVE ACCELERATED WARM UP SYSTEM OR AIR SUPPLY VALVE ASV 40 SOLENOID VALVE TRIPLE INDUCTION CONTROL SYSTEM OR 02 SENSOR RELAY AUXILIARY PORT VALVE 41 SOLENOID VALVE VARIABLE RESONANCE INDUCTION SYSTEM SOLENOID VALVE VARIABLE DYNAMIC EFFECT INTAKE CONTROL 42 SOLENOID VALVE WASTE GATE DUTY SOLENOID
320. TIVE SUBMODE Fl READ ENTER DTCs IF SYSTEM IS INACTIVE SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST SUBMODE F3 REVIEW DTC SUBMODE F4 CLEAR DTC s SUBMODE F5 SENSITIVE DTC ENGINE ONLY MODE F3 SNAPSHOT ENGINE SYSTEM ONLY IF ENGINE SYSTEM IS ACTIVE MODE F5 SYSTEM TESTS SUBMODE F0 PREP VEHICLE MODE F8 INFORMATION SUBMODE F1 DLC LOCATION SUBMODE F3 ID INFO 8 LEXUS GETTING STARTED 5 GETTING STARTED Before operating the Asian Imports Cartridge with a Lexus vehicle do the following 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 If the vehicle you are testing is equipped with Overdrive turn the O D switch to the ON position NOTE If the O D switch is not in the ON position the tester may not be able to EH read DTCs from the transmission ECU 3 When testing a Lexus vehicle either the Check Adapter Cable or the TDCL Adapter Cable is used to connect the tester to the vehicle DLC Which adapter cable to use is determined by which system you wish to test The following chart lists the systems that can be tested with each adapter cable ADAPTER ACTIVE SYSTEMS THAT CAN BE TESTED ENGINE AIR BAG ENGINE ECT ABS CCS A C Attach the appropriate cable to the end of the tester DLC Cable then connect the colored end of the cable to the vehicle DLC Toyota Lexus Toyota Lexus Check Connector Cable Blue TDCL Connector Cable Green 4 If the Check connector cable is used the tester may be powered thro
321. TOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES MODEL 1994 ENGINE ENGINE ADAPTER CODE TYPE 1994 DIAMANTE DIAMANTE DIAMANTE WAGON ECLIPSE ECLIPSE 3 0L V6 DOHC 3 0L V6 SOHC 3 0L V6 SOHC 1 8L 14 SOHC 2 0L 14 DOHC 6G72 6G72 6G72 4G37 4G63 MPI MPI MPI MPI MPI JUMPER JUMPER JUMPER CHECK CHECK MANCODE MANCODE MANCODE AUTOCODES AUTOCODES MITSUBISHI VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1994 ENGINE FUEL ADAPTER CONTINUED ENGINE TYPE TYPE PODE ECLIPSE 2 0L 4 DOHC TUR 4G63 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES EXPO 2 4L 14 SOHC 4G64 MPI JUMPER MANCODE EXPO LRV 1 8L 14 SOHC 4G93 MPI JUMPER MANCODE EXPO LRV 2 4L I4 SOHC 4G64 MPI JUMPER MANCODE GALANT 2 4L 14 DOHC 4G64 MPI JUMPER MANCODE GALANT 2 4L 14 SOHC 4G64 MPI JUMPER MANCODE MIRAGE 1 5L 4 SOHC 4G15 MPI NONE MANCODE MIRAGE 1 8L 4 SOHC 4G93 MPI NONE MANCODE MONTERO 3 0L V6 SOHC 6G72 MPI NONE MANCODE MONTERO 3 5L V6 DOHC 6674 MANCODE PRECIS 1 5L 14 G4AJ MPI CHECK AUTOCODES TRUCK 2 4L 14 4G64 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES TRUCK 3 0L V6 6G72 MPI CHECK AUTOCODES ENGINE ADAPTER MODEL 1995 ENGINE TYPE TYPE CODE TYPE 1
322. TOR 1989 11 12 13 14 15 21 22 23 24 ECU OR CIRCUIT FAILURE O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE ISC MOTOR POS SWITCH OR CKT ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE MOTOR POSITION SENSOR OR CKT ISC MOTOR POS SENSOR OR CKT ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT TDC SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE CAMSHAFT POS SENSOR OR CKT SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE MITSUBISHI 27 MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1989 DESCRIPTOR 25 BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 31 KS OR KS CIRCUIT FAILURE 41 INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE 43 EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR 44 IGNITION COIL OR CKT FAILURE IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE YEAR 1990 DESCRIPTOR 1990 0 ECU OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 11 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 12 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 13 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 14 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 15 MOTOR POSITION SENSOR OR CKT ISC MOTOR POS SENSOR OR CKT 21 ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR 22 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 23 NO 1 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT 1 amp 4 CYL TDC SENSOR OR CKT TDC SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE CAMS
323. TOR PULSE WIDTH HIGHER THAN EXPECTED INJECTOR PULSE WIDTH LOWER THAN EXPECTED LEFT BANK FUEL SYSTEM AT LEAN ADAPTIVE LIMIT AT PART THROTTLE SYSTEM RICH LEFT BANK FUEL SYSTEM AT RICH ADAPTIVE LIMIT AT PART THROTTLE SYSTEM LEAN LEFT BANK FUEL SYSTEM AT LEAN ADAPTIVE LIMIT AT IDLE SYSTEM RICH LEFT FUEL SYSTEM AT RICH ADAPTIVE LIMIT AT IDLE SYSTEM LEAN NO CAMSHAFT POSITION SIGNAL PIP CIRCUIT FAILURE IGNITION DIAGNOSTIC MONITOR IN IGNITION CONTROL MODULE NO SIGNAL SPARK OUTPUT OPEN SAW SPOUT CIRCUIT CAMSHAFT POSITION SIGNAL OPEN SHORT COIL 1 PRIMARY CIRCUIT OPEN SHORT COIL 2 PRIMARY CIRCUIT OPEN SHORT COIL 3 PRIMARY CIRCUIT OPEN SHORT MAZDA 51 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1992 1994 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR 218 219 222 223 224 226 232 241 244 326 327 332 335 336 337 341 411 412 415 416 452 511 512 513 519 519 521 522 IGNITION DEAGNOSTIC MONITOR LEFT IN IGNITION CONTROL MODULE NO SIGNAL SPARK OUTPUT OPEN SAW SPOUT CIRCUIT INGITION DIAGNOSTIC MONITOR RIGHT IN IGNITION CONTROL MODULE NO SIGNAL NO DUAL PLUG OPERATION COIL 1 2 3 OR 4 PRIMARY CIRCUIT OPEN NO IGNITION DIAGNOSTIC MONITOR IN IGNITION CONTROL MODULE NO SIGNAL COIL 1 2 OR PRIMARY CIRCUIT FAILURE OCTANE ADJUST CIRCUIT OPEN CYLINDER IDENTIFICATION DISPLAY CIRCUIT DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR OUTPUT LESS THAN EXPECTED DIFFERENTI
324. Term Fuel Trim Multiplicative System Too Rich Long Term Fuel Trim Multiplicative System Too Lean Load Detection Sensor TPS and MAF do not Match MDP Sensor Circuit Malfunction Idle Control Valve Opening Coil Circuit Shorted Idle Control Valve Opening Coil Circuit Open P S Pressure Switch Signal Malfunction Idle Control Valve Closing Coil Circuit Shorted Idle Control Valve Closing Coil Circuit Open MT AT Encoding Circuit not Rational Acceleration Circuit Malfunction Acceleration Circuit not Rational MIL Request Signal Circuit Low Input MIL Request Signal Circuit High Input Elantra Tiburon MIL Request Signal Circuit High Input Accent TCM Component Malfunction Power Stage Group A Malfunction Power Stage Group B Malfunction Throttle Position Sensor Open Circuit Throttle Position Sensor Short Circuit TPS Malfunction or Improper Adjustment Kickdown Servo Switch Circuit Closed Throttle Position Switch Circuit Pulse Generator Assembly Malfunction 28 HYUNDAI HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1996 98 DESCRIPTION CONTINUED P1744 Damper Clutch System Malfunction P1750 Solenoid Assembly Malfunction HYUNDAI 29 HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 30 HYUNDAI INFINITI VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS INFINITI SPECIFIC INFORMATION TEST MODES AVAILABLE GETTING STARTED SELECTING THE VEHICLE TEST MODES Mode F1 Entry Submode 0 How T
325. Toolpak from the Select Mode menu 2 Press to select O2S Info from the OBD II Toolpak menu 3 Press QD to select Type from 025 Information menu The key help screen will be displayed Press I iz or wait to advance 4 Press QD to select upstream oxygen sensor or to select downstream oxygen sensor 5 Press to select heated oxygen sensor or SD to select non heated oxygen sensor 6 Press to advance through the text description screens Press to back up through the text description screens These text screens contain oxygen sensor O2S signal information and O2S use information for each sensor type Using this information will help your understanding of the OBD II system 7 Press CAI to return to the previous menu ACTIVE KEYS Scroll up and down GI Select upstream or heated O2S G Select downstream or non heated O2S Advance program from current screen Exit to the previous test menu Submode F2 Maintenance Mode F2 Maintenance provides three submodes of text based information on the inspection torque specification and standard removal amp replacement description for oxygen sensors Using F2 Maintenance can help you understand and review O2S sensor inspection O2S sensor torgue reguirements and guidelines for O2S sensor removal and replacement Submode FO Inspection Mode 0 Inspection provides information about O2S contamination how to check signal full range operation and recommended O2
326. Trouble Codes DTCs 71979 Mode 3 e Display Freeze Frame Data captured by the vehicle along with a 171979 Mode 2 Clear DTCs and Freeze Frame Data from the on board controller s memory J1979 Mode 4 2 APPENDICES UNDERSTANDING OBD II Display results of Oxygen Sensor Monitoring Tests J1979 Mode 5 Display status of the vehicle s on board Readiness Tests In addition to these required OBD II Scan Tool functions the Vetronix testers provide a number of enhancements to the basic OBD II diagnostic functions Road test support through the capture of sequences of data parameters Snapshot mode User selectable parameter list allowing the user to trade off update rate for amount of data Display results of on board monitoring tests both Continuous and Non Continuous 11979 Modes 6 and 7 Print data parameters Displays results for control of on board system test or component J1979 Mode 8 Displays vehicle specific information such as VIN and calibration IDs J1979 Mode 9 II COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS One of the OBD II requirements is that the vehicle contain a standard serial communication link to off board test equipment This standard communication link turns out to be three separate links two defined by the SAE and one defined by ISO 41850 10 4K VPW Protocol Uses a single wire 7 volt bus communicating at 10 400 bits second using Variable Pulse Width VPW data encodin
327. U Modes column indicates 5 Modes then the vehicle supports Real Time DTC Monitor 26 NISSAN CONTROLS The Real Time Monitor provides you with guided procedure which monitors the condition of the crankshaft angle sensor ignition primary signal and the air flow meter output signal If any component intermittently fails the vehicle ECU will output a real time diagnostic trouble code The tester monitors this operation and changes from OK to NG not good signaling the real time detection of a faulty component In some cases the detection of a real time intermittent failure by the ECU will cause to be stored in ECU memory do not confuse this with RT DTCs as they cannot be stored into non volatile ECU memory After performing submode F3 RT DTC MONITOR always check the ECU for DTCs using submode F1 READ DTC s in the F2 DTC test mode NOTE When performing the Real Time DTC Monitor make sure the vehicle is properly warmed up and is tested in a well ventilated area Also driving EB the vehicle in this mode can be helpful in duplicating intermittent problem s To perform the Real Time DTC Monitor test do the following 1 Press GF to select RT DTC Monitor from the OBD Controls menu 2 The tester displays instructions for preparing the vehicle to perform the test Press 19 9 when the instructions on each screen have been completed CONNECT CHECK ADAPTER RED TO VEHIC
328. UBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 98 CONTINUED DTC P0181 P0182 P0183 P0201 P0202 P0203 P0204 P0205 P0206 P0261 P0262 P0264 P0265 P0267 P0268 P0270 P0271 P0301 P0302 P0303 P0304 P0305 P0306 P0325 P0335 P0336 P0340 P0341 P0385 P0400 P0403 P0410 DESCRIPTOR Fuel Temp Sensor A Circuit Range Performance Fuel Temp Sensor A Circuit Low Input Fuel Temp Sensor A Circuit High Input Fuel Injector No 1 Circuit Malfunction Fuel Injector No 2 Circuit Malfunction Fuel Injector No 3 Circuit Malfunction Fuel Injector No 4 Circuit Malfunction Fuel Injector No 5 Circuit Malfunction Fuel Injector No 6 Circuit Malfunction Fuel Injector Circuit No 1 Low Input Fuel Injector Circuit No 1 High Input Fuel Injector Circuit No 2 Low Input Fuel Injector Circuit No 2 High Input Fuel Injector Circuit No 3 Low Input Fuel Injector Circuit No 3 High Input Fuel Injector Circuit No 4 Low Input Fuel Injector Circuit No 4 High Input Cylinder No 1 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 2 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 3 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 4 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 5 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 6 Misfire Detected Knock Sensor Circuit 1 Crankshaft Position Sensor No 1 Circuit Malfunction Crankshaft Position Sensor Circuit Out of Range Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit R
329. UIT 20 METERING OIL PUMP POSITION SENSOR 22 SLOW FUEL CUT SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 23 RIGHT SIDE O2 SENSOR COASTING RICHER SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 24 FEEDBACK SYSTEM RIGHT SIDE 25 SOLENOID VALVE PRESSURE REGULATOR SOLENOID VALVE PRESSURE REGULATOR CONTROL MAZDA 35 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1990 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 26 SOLENOID VALVE PURGE CONTROL STEP MOTOR METERING OIL PUMP PURGE SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 27 METERING OIL PUMP MOP 28 SOLENOID VALVE EGR SOLENOID VALVE EGR VACUUM DUTY SOLENOID VACUUM VALVE OR CIRCUIT 29 SOLENOID VALVE EGR VENT DUTY SOLENOID VENT VALVE OR CIRCUIT 30 SPLIT AIR SOLENOID VALVE ACV SOLENOID VALVE OR CIRCUIT 31 SOLENOID VALVE RELIEF 32 SOLENOID VALVE SWITCH 33 PORT AIR SOLENOID VALVE 34 ISC VALVE IDLE SPEED CONTROL VALVE BAC VALVE SOLENOID VALVE IDLE SPEED CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE BYPASS AIR CONTROL IDLE UP SOLENOID VALVE FOR A C OR CIRCUIT 35 IDLE UP SOLENOID VALVE FOR A T OR CIRCUIT 36 O2 SENSOR HEATER RELAY 37 METERING OIL PUMP MOP 38 SOLENOID VALVE ACCELERATED WARM UP SYSTEM SOLENOID VALVE ACCELERATED WARM UP SYSTEM OR AIR SUPPLY VALVE 40 SOLENOID VALVE TRIPLE INDUCTION CONTROL SYSTEM OR 02 SENSOR HEATER AUXILIARY PORT VALVE 41 SOLENOID VALVE VICS SOLENOID VALVE VARIABLE RESONANCE INDUCTION SYSTEM SOLENOID VALVE VARIABLE DYNAMIC EFFECT INTAKE CONTROL 42 SOLENOID VALV
330. UPE 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO M T ECULED MANCODES NONE ENGINE FUEL TRANS ECU ADAPTER SYSTEM MODES 1988 DL 1 8L H4 SPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 1 8L H4 SPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 10 1 8L H4 SPFI A T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 10 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE JUSTY 1 2L I3 ECC M T ECULED MANCODES NONE RX 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO M T ECULED MANCODES NONE XT 1 8L H4 MPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE XT6 2 7L H6 MPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE 4 SUBARU VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS TS E 1989 DL 1 8L H4 SPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 1 8L H4 SPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO A T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 10 1 8L H4 SPFI A T ECULED MANCODES NONE GL 10 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE JUSTY 1 2L I3 ECC M T ECULED MANCODES NONE RX 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO M T ECULED MANCODES NONE XT 1 8L H4 MPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE XT6 2 7L H6 MPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE TS E 1990 JUSTY 1 2L I3 ECC M T ECULED MANCODES NONE JUSTY 1 2L I3 MPFI M T ECULED MANCODES NONE JUSTY 1 21 I3 MPFI ECVT ECULED MANCODES NONE LEGACY 2 2L H4 MPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE LOYALE 1 8L H4 SPFI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE LOYALE 1 8L H4 MPFI TURBO A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE XT 1 8L H4
331. URE 556 FUEL PUMP OPEN SHORT 558 EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID OPEN SHORT 559 A C RELAY CIRCUIT FAULT 563 HIGH FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT FAILURE 565 CANISTER PURGE SOLENOID VALVE OPEN SHORT 566 3 4 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A T ONLY OPEN SHORT 571 EGR SOLENOID VALVE VENT OUTPUT CIRCUIT 572 EGR SOLENOID VALVE VACUUM OUTPUT CIRCUIT 629 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID OPEN SHORT 998 PCM IS IN FAIL SAFE MODE HARD FAULT PRESENT YEAR 1995 DESCRIPTOR 1995 1 IGF SIGNAL NOT PRESENT 2 CRANKSHAFT SENSOR NO NE SIGNAL V6 626 MX6 V6 MX3 RX7 NE SIGNAL NOT PRESENT 929 2WD MPV CAMSHAFT SENSOR NO SGT SIGNAL 2 0L 626 MX6 SGT SIGNAL NOT PRESENT 2 6L MPV MAZDA 53 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED 3 CRANKSHAFT SENSOR NO G SIGNAL RX7 SGC SIGNAL NOT PRESENT 929 2 6L MPV 1 6L MX3 CAMSHAFT SENSOR NO SGC SIGNAL V6 626 MX6 DISTRIBUTOR G1 SHORT CIRCUIT MPV V6 SGT SIGNAL NOT PRESENT 5 4 CAMSHAFT SENSOR NO SGT SIGNAL 1 8L MX3 SGT SIGNAL NOT PRESENT 929 1 6L MX3 SGC SIGNAL NOT PRESENT 5 DISTRIBUTOR G2 SHORT CIRCUIT 3 0L MPV LEFT KNOCK SENSOR OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT VSS NO SIGNAL RIGHT KNOCK SENSOR OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT MAF AIR FLOW SENSOR OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT o N ECT SENSOR OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT SENSOR OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 11 IAT SENSOR OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT 12 TPS OPEN SH
332. URE YEAR 1991 DTC NO DESCRIPTOR 1991 1 NO DTCs NORMAL OPERATION 2 PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 3 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 4 ECT SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 5 O2 SENSOR AND OR FUEL SYSTEM CKT O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 6 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 7 TP SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 8 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 9 SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 12 DAIHATSU DAIHATSU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1991 DTC NO DESCRIPTOR 10 STARTER SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 11 SWITCH SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 12 EGR CIRCUIT FAILURE 15 AIR FUEL RATIO RICH FAILURE 16 AIR FUEL RATIO LEAN FAILURE YEAR 1992 DTC NO DESCRIPTOR 1992 1 NO DTCs NORMAL OPERATION 2 PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 3 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 4 ECT SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 5 O2 SENSOR AND OR FUEL SYSTEM CKT O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 6 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 7 TP SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 8 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 9 SPEED SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 10 STARTER SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 11 SWITCH SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 12 EGR CIRCUIT FAILURE 15 AIR FUEL RATIO RICH FAILURE 16 AIR FUEL RATIO LEAN FAILURE DAIHATSU DAIHATSU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 14 DAIHATSU VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS HONDA SPECIFIC INFORMATION TEST MODES AVAILABLE GETTING STARTED SELECTING THE VEHICLE TEST MODES Mode F1 Entry Submode F0 How to Read Submode F1 Enter DTCs Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review
333. USER LIST PARAMETERS from the DATA LIST SETUP menu The message WAITING FOR DATA will be displayed The tester will display either ALL PARAMETERS or CUSTOM LIST PARAMETERS depending on which selection was made Submode F0 All Parameters The selection of FO ALL PARMS will monitor all of the information available from the ECU Depending on the number of diagnostic data parameters in the data list the update rate can be 3 seconds or longer 10 COMMON TEST MODES II TEST MODES Submode F1 User List Parameters The selection of F1 USER LIST PARAMETERS will display a list of parameters from which to select FI USER LIST PARAMETERS allows you to select any combination to monitor from 1 parameter to all parameters Parameters are selected by scrolling through the list using the and keys and then pressing and MS to select and deselect the listed parameter When the parameters have been selected press to go to the display mode The tester will remember the selected parameters until the tester is turned OFF so you won t have to re select them every time Engine Speed Selected YES Select NO De Select If there are multiple OBD II ECUs and the DATA SETUP mode is selected an additional DATA LIST SETUP menu is available The F0 Select ECU menu allows you to select which ECU s will contribute to the data list Once the ECU s that will contribute data are selected press F1 DATA SETUP to choose all parameters availab
334. Use F5 ECU LOCATION from the Information menu for ECU location Disconnect the Clear Memory connectors Start engine The ECS Lamp should turn OFF Drive vehicle above 6 MPH for over 1 minute o 4 Run engine above 2500 RPM until the ECS Lamp turns ON Ifthe ECS Lamp stays ON check for DTC s by observing the O2 Monitor Lamp mounted on the ECU Use F5 ECU LOCATION from the Information menu for ECU location The long segment 1 2 seconds ON represents the tens digit The short segment 0 2 seconds ON represents the ones digit Each DTC is separated by a 1 8 second delay 10 Ifthe ECS Lamp blinks the system is normal Turn the key OFF and disconnect the Test Mode Connectors To manually read Test Mode DTCs from 1987 1995 SPFI and MPFI Subaru vehicles except Justy and SVX using the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL and ECU LED O2 Monitor LED do the following 1 Warm engine to normal operating temperature turn all accessories switches OFF 2 Turn key OFF 3 Connect Test Mode connectors Use F4 DJC LOCATION from the Information menu for test mode connectors location 4 Turn key ON Do not start engine The MIL should turn ON 18 SUBARU TEST MODES 5 Depress accelerator pedal to WOT then return it to half throttle and hold it for 2 seconds Then release pedal completely 6 Start engine The MIL should turn OFF If the MIL stays ON note the DTC s and continue 7 Perform brief WOT then drive the v
335. VE FAILURE BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE NO 1 INJECTOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE NO 2 INJECTOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR NO 3 INJECTOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE NO 4 INJECTOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE PURGE CNTRL SOL VALVE OR CKT ISC ACTUATOR FAILURE OPENING ISC ACTUATOR FAILURE CLOSING FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE REAR O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE ECU FAILURE INJ OR PURGE SOL ECU FAILURE IDLE ACT OR A C RLY ECU FAILURE DRIVING CKT A ECU FAILURE INJ PCV ISA A C RLY ECU FAILURE DRIVING AIR FUEL CONTROL FAILURE A F ADAPTIVE FAILURE MULTIP A F ADAPTIVE FAILURE A N 20 HYUNDAI HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1993 CONTINUED DESCRIPTOR 84 A F ADAPTIVE FAILURE ADDITIVE YEAR 1994 DESCRIPTOR 1994 0 ECU CIRCUIT FAILURE 11 FRONT HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT HEATED O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 12 VOLUME AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT 13 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE ECU OR CIRCUIT ROM FAILURE 14 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE ECU OR CIRCUIT RAM FAILURE 15 MOTOR POSITION SENSOR OR CKT 16 ECU OR CIRCUIT ROM RAM FAIL 17 ECU FAILURE KNOCK CONTROL 19 ECU FAILURE KNOCK EVAL CKT 21 ECT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 22 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT MAF SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 23 C
336. YUNDAI VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS HYUNDAI SPECIFIC INFORMATION TEST MODES AVAILABLE GETTING STARTED SELECTING THE VEHICLE TEST MODES Mode F1 DTC Entry Submode F0 Submode F1 Submode F2 Submode F3 Submode F4 Mode F2 DTC Submode F1 Submode F2 Submode F3 Submode F4 How To Read Enter DTC s DTC List Review DTC Clear DTC s Read DTC s DTC List Review DTC Clear DTC s 7 HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs OBD II Systems 1996 98 OBDII VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS Using the Asian cartridge the following Hyundai vehicles can be diagnosed ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE 1989 SONATA 2 4L 14 G4AS MPI CHECK AUTOCODES SONATA 3 0L V6 G6AT MPI CHECK AUTOCODES ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE 1990 EXCEL SONATA SONATA 1 5L 14 2 4L 14 3 0L V6 ENGINE G4AJ G4AS G6AT ENGINE TYPE MPI MPI MPI CHECK CHECK CHECK ADAPTER TYPE AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES CODE TYPE 1991 EXCEL SCOUPE SONATA SONATA 1 5L 14 1 5L 14 2 4L 14 3 0L G4AJ G4DJ G4AS G6AT MPI MPI MPI MPI CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES AUTOCODES ENGINE ENGINE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE CODE TYPE
337. ZDA 23 CONTROLS 7 CONTROLS The Controls mode is used to select submenu of tests applicable to Mazda vehicles Pressing from the Select Mode menu displays a list of tests available To return to the Select Mode menu press 2 419 Once you have selected the test mode operation begins Detailed operating instructions for each OBD Control test are on the following pages There are descriptions of tvo OBD Controls available in the Mazda specific section Each output control test can provide you with enhanced diagnostic information which will help to pin point Air Fuel Ratio AFR problems and ECU switch input problems Mazda output tests can guide you through ECU Switch Input tests and O2S Monitor tests NOTE EH Test results may not be accurate when a Tech 1 is used MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS Submode FO Switch Test Available on selected 1988 95 Mazda passenger cars and trucks switch tests can be used to monitor the switch inputs to the engine ECU On Mazda vehicles the switch monitor lamp circuit is monitored by the tester during certain test conditions so you can determine switch operation When you select a vehicle the available switch tests will be listed in the OBD Controls menu under F0 SWITCH TESTS Supported Mazda Switch Tests Air Conditioning A T Hold Backup 5th gear Blower Motor Brake Clutch Cooling Fan Cooling Fan Relay Daytime Running Lamp DRL Fog Lamp Headlamp Inhibitor
338. able then connect the orange connector end to the vehicle check connector Mazda Check Adapter Cable 3 Plug the tester power cable into the vehicle cigarette lighter The power cable may also be directly connected to the battery via the optional battery clip adapter P N 02001636 NOTE Since the cigarette lighter can be switched some tests require that the power cable be directly connected to the battery via the battery clip adapter 4 Turn on the tester and select the application software that you will be using Verify that the correct screen is displayed The tester should display a screen similar to the one below ASIAN IMPORTS 83 98 lt ENTER gt Tester Stand alone Diaplay 5 If the display is correct press RH If the display is not correct refer to Appendix D 6 Follow the instructions on the following page to select the vehicle type you are testing by entering reguired vehicle information into the tester CAUTION When removing the Mazda Check Adapter Cable from the vehicle DLC remember to depress the retaining tab on the vehicle DLC Failure to do so could cause wiring harness damage MAZDA 13 SELECTING THE VEHICLE 5 SELECTING THE VEHICLE Once you ve pressed 19 9 from the power up screen the following steps must be performed to select the manufacturer model year model and engine type of the vehicle being tested Remember if you make a mistake you can always press 248
339. ain a text description of entered or selected DTCs and review entered or selected DTCs as a result of manually retrieving codes from the ECU DTC ENTRY SUBMODES F0 HOW TO READ F1 ENTER DTC s F2 DTC LIST F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC s Manually reading DTCs To manually read Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs on Mitsubishi vehicles from 1984 95 there are 2 methods that can be used The most common method requires an analog voltmeter Using the analog voltmeter set to a 20v scale and connected to the Data Link Connector DLC the DTC can be interpreted from the analog voltmeter needle flashes The second method requires the 16 pin Mitsubishi Jumper P N 02002095 which connects 2 pins of the 16 pin DLC to flash DTCs on the instrument panel mounted Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL For the automobile manufacturers that mention the use of an analog voltmeter to read manual DTCs the Mastertech Oscilloscope may be used Set up the single channel oscilloscope and make connections the same way as the analog voltmeter above Choose the 20v division scale and a slow time division e g 1 2 sec division the DTCs will be shown as a waveform on the display Note that manually retrieving DTCs from select 1994 95 Mitsubishi vehicles requires you to locate and jumper the 16 pin Diagnostic Connector The vehicles that require the use of a jumper are noted as Jumper in the Adapter Type column in the Mitsubishi coverage table found at the beginnin
340. al Circuit from A T to ECM Malfunction ECM Malfunction Park Neutral Inhibitor Switch Malfunction Trans Fluid Temp Sensor Out of Range A T VSS Circuit Malfunction Engine RPM signal Malfunction A T Ist Gear Shift Signal Malfunction A T 2nd Gear Shift Signal Malfunction A T 3rd Gear Shift Signal Malfunction A T 4th Gear Signal or TCC Malfunction TCC Solenoid Valve Malfunction A T TCC Signal Improper Lock Up Operation Line Pressure Solenoid Valve Malfunction Shift Solenoid A Malfunction Shift Solenoid B Malfunction MAP BARO Switch Solenoid Valve Malfunction Valve Timing Control Valve System Malfunction Swirl Control Solenoid Valve Malfunction W G Control Solenoid Valve Right Bank W G Control Solenoid Valve Left Bank Turbo Boost Sensor Circuit Malfunction Swirl Control Valve Vacuum Check Switch Malfunction NISSAN 39 NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 98 DTC CONTINUED NO P1168 P1220 P1320 P1335 P1336 P1400 P1401 P1402 P1440 P1441 P1443 P1444 P1445 P1446 P1447 P1448 P1550 P1605 P1705 P1706 P1760 P1775 P1776 P1900 DESCRIPTION Front HO2 Sensor Circuit Malfunction no Closed Loop Left Bank Fuel Pump Control Module Circuit Malfunction Ignition Signal Primary Circuit Malfunction CKP Sensor Reference Circuit Malfunction CKP Sensor OBD or Flywheel Malfunction EGR Valve and Canister Control Solenoid Valve Malfunction EGR Temp Sensor Ci
341. al from the A C and or heater switch 14 If the vehicle has factory air conditioning cycle the air conditioner switch and heater fan switch OFF ON OFF 15 Observe the ECU LEDs for DTC 44 The presence of this DTC indicates that the ECU has not detected conditions to set a DTC and is not currently storing any DO s 16 Turn diagnostic mode selector fully counterclockwise or change the diagnostic slide switch to the OFF position and turn off the engine NOTE If the ECU has output any other DTCs than DTC 44 refer to factory EH service manuals for DTC decoding and diagnostics NISSAN 17 TEST MODES To manually read DTCs from all 1987 89 and select 1990 95 Nissan ECUS with the 2 LED 5 mode system do the following NOTE This procedure is reference only Use Mode F1 Read DTC s to let the tester retrieve DTCs 1 Locate the vehicle ECU 2 Turn the ignition key to run note ECU LEDs they should light briefly for a bulb check 3 Turn the diagnostic mode selector fully clockwise or change the diagnostic slide switch to the ON position 4 Observe the ECU LEDs when the LEDs flash three consecutive times turn diagnostic mode selector fully counterclockwise or change the diagnostic slide switch to the OFF position 5 Read the 2 digit DTCs from the ECU LEDs Note that the RED LED is the 10 s digit and the GREEN LED is the 15 digit 6 Write down all received DTCs The DTCs will be repor
342. al the 10 s digit of a 2 digit DTC After a 1 5 second pause the second number of flashes will equal the 1 s digit If there are 2 or more codes there will be a 2 5 second pause between each On a single digit the MIL will blink a number of times equal to the Single digit DTCs are separated by a 3 0 or 4 5 second pause If no DTCs are stored in ECU MIL will flash normal code SERIES SSE DTC 32 rne DTC 41 gt SEPERATION 71 Next DTC MLJ 12v ene WIE Indication ov seconds 38 5s 5s Lod S loss Lg t 591 0 5s 6 For Toyota vehicles there are three types of normal code conditions One is 4 flashes in 1 second late models the second is 1 flash in 3 0 seconds and the third is 1 flash in 4 5 seconds late models 7 Disconnect Toyota single wire jumper 8 Erase DTCs when all repairs are completed To manually read DTCs From 1983 85 Toyota Vehicles except 1983 84 Celica Supra and Cressida using the Instrument Panel Malfunction Indicator Lamp do the following 1 Set the vehicle initial conditions by making sure that battery voltage is 11 volts or more throttle valve fully closed throttle position sensor IDL contacts closed transmission or transaxle in Neutral position accessories switched OFF engine at normal operating temperature 2 Turn ignition key to ON engine OFF 3 Locate the 2 pin Check Diagnostic Jumper Connector press F8 DJC LOCATION from the Information men
343. and select the application software that you will be using Verify that the correct screen is displayed The tester should display a screen similar to the one below ASIAN IMPORTS 83 98 lt ENTER gt Tester Stand Alone Display 4 If the display is correct press 11959 If the display is not correct refer to Appendix D 5 Follow the instructions on the following page to select the vehicle type you are testing by entering required vehicle information into the tester SUBARU 11 SELECTING THE VEHICLE 5 SELECTING THE VEHICLE Once you ve pressed 19 9 from the power up screen the following steps must be performed to select the manufacturer model year model and engine type of the vehicle being tested Remember if you make a mistake you can always press 248 to go back to the previous menu SELECTING THE MANUFACTURER A menu of manufacturers available for testing is displayed in a scrolling menu You can scroll down one screen at a time by pressing or up one screen at a time by pressing M Press or OI to scroll one manufacturer at a time until the arrow is opposite Subaru Then press to select SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR Once the manufacturer is selected the Select Model Year menu is displayed Press the last two digits of the year model being tested for 1989 models for 1990 models and so on SELECTING THE MODEL The Model Select menu displays models available for testing Press
344. ange Performance Crankshaft Position Sensor 2 Circuit Malfunction EGR Flow System Malfunction EGR Solenoid Circuit Malfunction Secondary Air Injection System Malfunction SUBARU 43 SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 98 DTC CONTINUED NO 0412 P0420 P0440 P0441 P0443 P0446 P0450 P0451 P0452 P0453 P0461 P0462 P0463 P0480 P0483 P0500 P0505 P0506 P0507 P0600 P0601 P0703 P0705 P0710 P0720 P0725 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0740 P0743 DESCRIPTOR Secondary Air Injection Switching Valve Malfunction Catalyst Efficiency Below Threshold EVAP Control System Malfunction EVAP Purge System Incorrect Flow EVAP System Purge Control Valve Malfunction EVAP System Vent Control Valve Malfunction EVAP System Pressure Sensor Malfunction EVAP System Pressure Sensor Range Performance Problem EVAP System Pressure Sensor Low Input EVAP System Pressure Sensor High Input Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Range Performance Problem Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Low Input Fuel Level Sensor Circuit High Input Cooling Fan Relay 1 Circuit Low Input Cooling Fan Function Problem VSS Malfunction Idle Control System Malfunction Idle Control System RPM Lower Than Expected Idle Control System RPM Higher Than Expected Serial Communication Link Malfunction Internal Control Module Memory Check Sum Error Brake Input Switch Malfunction Transmission Range Sensor Circuit Malfunction Transmiss
345. ank Q45 Fuel Injection System Rich Right Bank Left Bank Q45 Fuel Injection System Lean Left Bank Right Bank Q45 Fuel Injection System Rich Left Bank Right Bank Q45 Temp Sensor in Fuel Tank Circuit Malfunction Multiple Cylinder Misfire Cylinder No 1 Misfire Cylinder No 2 Misfire Cylinder No 3 Misfire Cylinder No 4 Misfire Cylinder No 5 Misfire Cylinder No 6 Misfire Knock Sensor Circuit Left Bank Q45 Knock Sensor Circuit Right Bank Q45 INFINITI 19 INFINITI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1996 98 DESCRIPTOR P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor OBD Circuit Malfunction P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0400 EGR System Malfunction P0402 EGR Control BPT Valve Function P0420 3 Way Catalyst Malfunction Right Bank Left Bank Q45 P0430 3 Way Catalyst Malfunction Left Bank Right Bank Q45 P0440 EVAP System Small Leak Detected P0443 EVAP Purge Valve or Solenoid Valve Circuit Malfunction P0446 EVAP Vent Control Valve Circuit Malfunction P0450 EVAP System Pressure Sensor Malfunction P0500 VSS Circuit Malfunction 0505 IAC Valve Aux Air Control Valve Malfunction P0510 Closed Throttle Position Switch Malfunction P0600 Signal Circuit from A T to ECM Malfunction P0605 ECM Malfunction P0705 Park Neutral Switch or Inhibitor Switch Circuit P0710 Trans Fluid Temp Sensor Circuit P0720 A T VS
346. ant Temperature input as sent to the vehicle ECM and calculated by the ECM based on cooling system thermostat condition and engine operation mode ENGINE SPEED UNITS RANGE RPM Engine Speed signal as input to the vehicle ECU and calculated by the ECU based on the signal from the distributor pulse generator IDLE SWITCH ON OFF Idle Switch signal status as sent to the vehicle ECM based on idle switch state in throttle position sensor ON switch closed engine idling OFF switch open engine off idle NOTE When testing the idle switch make sure the engine 1 running INJECTOR P W mSec 0 33 Injector solenoid Pulse Width on time based on output calculated by the vehicle ECU based on engine load engine RPM and Throttle Position INTAKE AIR PRES mmHg 0 1244 Intake Air Pressure Vacuum signal sent as an input to the vehicle ECM from the MAP VAC sensor based on engine load INTAKE AIR VOL g S 0 510 Intake Air Volume is a measure of engine intake air volume through the air Flow Meter in grams per second g s The more throttle opening the greater intake air volume into the engine This parameter applies to AFM equipped engines only ISC DUTY CYCLE 0 100 Idle Speed Control ISC valve percentage opening based on output calculated by the vehicle ECU based on engine load engine RPM and Throttle Position 48 TOYOTA DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ISC VALVE UNITS RANGE Idl
347. anufacturer at a time until the gt arrow is opposite Toyota Then press 1959 to select REPLAY SNAPSHOT DATA If Snapshot data is stored in the tester memory the tester asks 1f you wish to replay saved Snapshot data Press to replay the saved data or press to proceed to the Vehicle Selection displays SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR Once the manufacturer is selected the Select Model Year menu is displayed Press the last two digits of the year model being tested for 1990 models 6 D for 1991 models and so on SELECTING THE MODEL The Select Model menu displays models available for testing Press the key until the model being tested is displayed then press the key SELECTING THE ENGINE The Select Engine menu displays available engines for the selected model Press until the engine type of the vehicle is displayed then press VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY After the vehicle type is selected the tester displays a summary screen of the selected vehicle Information displayed includes the year manufacturer model engine size and type The tester displays the summary screen for three seconds then automatically advances to the System Inquiry displays If the summary screen 15 not correct press 248 to go backward through the vehicle selection displays until you reach the information that needs to be changed 18 TOYOTA SELECTING THE VEHICLE MANUFACTURER SUZUKI gt TOYOTA ACURA
348. arette lighter The power cable may also be directly connected to the battery via the optional battery clip adapter P N 02001636 NOTE Since the cigarette lighter can be switched some tests require that the power cable be directly connected to the battery via the battery clip adapter 4 Turn on the tester and select the application software that you will be using Verify that the correct screen is displayed The tester should display a screen similar to the one below ASIAN IMPORTS 83 02 ENTER Tester stand alone display 5 If the display is correct press If the display is not correct refer to Appendix D 6 Follow the instructions on the following page to select the vehicle type you are testing by entering required vehicle information into the tester 8 HYUNDAI SELECTING THE VEHICLE 5 SELECTING THE VEHICLE Once you ve pressed from the power up screen the following steps must be performed to select the manufacturer model year model and engine type of the vehicle being tested Remember if you make a mistake you can always press 248 to go back to the previous menu SELECTING THE MANUFACTURER A menu of manufacturers available for testing is displayed in a scrolling menu You can scroll down one screen at a time by pressing or up one screen at a time by pressing Press or to scroll one manufacturer at a time until the gt arrow is opposite Hyundai Then press to
349. as power enrichment or deceleration reduction Open Loop due to fault condition for FUEL STATUS parameter Used to indicate that the fuel system is operating open loop due to a detected system fault A test mode where the results of the on board tests are reported for tests which are run on non continuously monitored systems These tests are manufacturer specific and are reported for manufacturer assigned test IDs TIDs and component IDs CIDs Test values are reported by the ECU along with minimum and or maximum acceptable limits for the test The tester displays the PASS FAIL status for each TID CID combination This test mode is not supported by all vehicles Passive Belt Park or Neutral Power Control Module Powertrain Control Module The module which controls vehicle engine and transmission operation and communicates diagnostic data information to the technician Pressure Control Solenoid Pending DTCs PFI PID PMP POS POTEN PRC PREP PRESS PRNDL PROM PSSV PSM PSP PWM PWM A test mode where the results are reported for tests which are run on continuously monitored systems These test results are reported the same way DTCs are reported using code designations of the form Pxxxx These test results can indicate a condition which could cause a DTC to be set if the condition persists This test mode is not supported by all vehicles Port Fuel Injection Parameter Ident
350. at describe how to read DTCs ECU mounted LEDs In addition some Subaru vehicles use an ECU mounted single LED O2S monitor lamp to flash DTCs 1985 86 model Honda vehicles have four ECU mounted LEDs that flash DTCs When entering DTCs for these vehicles the tester displays a flashing where the state of the LED is to be entered Press D if the LED is on or press 9 if the LED is off Repeat this process until all four digits have been entered then press 3439 ENTER STATE OF 4 LEDs 1 ON 0 OFF 7777 ENTER Some Nissan vehicles have two ECU mounted LEDs that flash DTCs and some Nissan and Infiniti vehicles have a single ECU mounted LED that flashes DTCs Refer to the Nissan and Infiniti specific sections that describe how to read DTCs on ECU mounted LEDs Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light Late model Acura Chrysler Imports Honda Hyundai Infiniti Nissan Mitsubishi and Subaru vehicles have an instrument panel malfunction indicator lamp MIL that flashes DTCs In addition all Daihatsu and Kia vehicles use a MIL for DTC output Refer to the manufacturer specific section that describes how to read DTCs from the MIL Analog Voltmeter Some Chrysler Imports Mitsubishi and Hyundai vehicles require the use of an analog voltmeter to read DTCs In this case the meter is set to the 20 volt scale and meter needle sweeps are counted Refer to the manufacturer specific section that describes how to
351. ata SNAPSHOT MODE ENTER ECM CODE TO TRIGGER ON XX THEN PRESS ENTER SNAPSHOT OPTIONS F0 ANY CODE F1 SINGLE CODE F2 MANUAL TRIG F3 REPLAY DATA F9 TRIG POINT REPLAY PREVIOUSLY Code then CAPTURED DATA COOLANT TEMP 40 104 F MANI AIR TEMP 40 C 104 C DATA CAPTURE COOLANT TEMP PHASE 40 C 104 F MANI AIR TEMP 40 C 104 C More Data Parameters Snapshot Setup Phase SNAPSHOT DATA Trigger point at BEGINNING Trigger point at CENTER Trigger point at END data is collected after the data that occured before data that occured before snapshot trigger point and after the snapshot the snapshot trigger point trigger point ACTIVE KEYS Select Snapshot Function 0 0 Enter specific trouble code digits Manual trigger ENTER Enter selected trouble code Cause trigger during data capture EXIT Terminate Snapshot mode and return to Select Mode menu Cause trigger during data capture and terminate further data capture Terminate data capture after Snapshot trigger has occurred 22 COMMON TEST MODES I MODE F3 SNAPSHOT Data Capture Phase To select the data capture phase of Snapshot mode do the following 3 Once you ve specified the trigger condition the tester starts saving data in its memory During this time you can examine all of the data in the same manner as you do in the F0 Data List mode You can even create your own pairs d
352. ation On Board Diagnostic and On Board Diagnostic generation I I system s oxygen sensor O2S has been a major component within an electronic powertrain control system In those systems the upstream ahead of catalytic converter O2S sensor 1 used to detect air fuel ratios ahead of the catalytic converter With OBD II the system now uses an additional oxygen sensor that is placed downstream of the catalytic converter The addition of a downstream oxygen sensor enables the PCM to perform a catalytic converter efficiency test As a result of OBD II s downstream oxygen sensors vehicle equipment may include many oxygen sensors on a vehicle for example a vehicle with dual exhaust and two separate catalytic converters can have four O2 sensors Using F4 O2S Information a text based description of expected O2S locations nomenclature type used plus how to inspect torque and remove and replace O2Ss is displayed Submode F0 Location This mode is used to obtain information on oxygen sensor identification bank number and sensor number for the vehicle under test A sample of actual vehicles with OBD II was used to determine the unique types of exhaust type number of catalytic converters and oxygen sensors This information was then arranged in a way that you can select the configuration based on vehicle equipment Using this mode can assist you in learning about the OBD II system s new oxygen sensor naming and location conventi
353. ation cartridge on 1994 to current OBD II compliant PCM vehicles the cartridge will display diagnostic data parameters based on Society of Automotive Engineers SAE recommended practice J1979 Additionally the basic functions contained within this cartridge are required by California Air Resources Board California ARB as part of the On Board Diagnostics level II OBD II Selecting OBD II Toolpak Mode The OBD II Toolpak functions can be entered in two ways from the main menu or from the Select Mode menu From the Menu Entering F9 II Toolpak from the main menu is available any time power 1 applied to the tester From the Select Mode Menu Entering F9 OBD II Toolpak from the Select Mode menu is only available after communication with the OBD II compliant vehicle has been initialized COMMON TEST MODES II 29 TEST MODES OBD II communications initialized with vehicle MAIN MENU F0 Powertrain F1 Replay Data F9 OBD II Toolpak OBD II SELECT MODE Y o OBDII F8 Information communications F9 OBD II Toolpak with vehicle OBD II TOOLPAK F0 Diagnostics F1 Parameters F2 DTC Library OBD II TOOLPAK Y F3 Monitor Info F4 O2S Info FIGURE 1 4 Selecting II Toolpak from the Select Mode Menu Submode F0 Diagnostics The F0 Diagnostics mode provides the following information How to prepare a vehicle powertrain system for testing How
354. automatically choose which test mode to display depending on your vehicle selection 12 CHRYSLER IMPORTS GETTING STARTED 4 GETTING STARTED Before operating the Asian Imports Cartridge with a Chrysler Imports vehicle the following steps must be performed 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Refer to the chart in Section 1 to see if the vehicle you are testing requires the Check Adapter Cable If so connect the Chrysler Imports Check Adapter Cable to the end of the DLC cable then connect the yellow connector end to the vehicle Check connector CHRYSLER IMPORTS CHECK ADAPTER CABLE 3 Plug the tester power cable into the vehicle cigarette lighter The power cable may also be directly connected to the battery via the optional battery clip adapter P N 02001636 NOTE Since the cigarette lighter can be switched some tests require that the power cable be directly connected to the battery via the battery clip adapter 4 Turn on the tester and select the application software that you will be using Verify that the correct screen is displayed The tester should display a screen similar to the one below ASIAN IMPORTS 83 98 lt ENTER gt Tester stand alone display 5 If the display is correct press AH If the display is not correct refer to Appendix D 6 Follow the instructions on the following page to select the vehicle type you are testing by entering reguired vehicle information into t
355. ay respond with a manufacturer defined reason the test cannot be run or may not respond at all If the vehicle PCM does not support OBD CONTROLS the tester will display No Control Tests Supported when the OBD CONTROLS test mode is selected COMMON TEST MODES II 23 TEST MODES MODE F5 SYSTEM TESTS Submode F0 O2S Results The Oxygen Sensor 025 Results mode allows the tester to display the results of the oxygen sensor testing performed by the vehicle s engine controller These tests are per trip tests and are performed after the ignition is turned on under conditions defined by the vehicle manufacturer The O2S RESULTS mode is not available for all vehicles Some vehicles use the other results test mode to report results of O2S testing F5 SYSTEM TESTS FO 025 RESULTS Fn O2S BANK X Fn SENSOR X R gt L Sw Tim O 16 Secs User selected LR Sw X Vehicle dependent 0 088 Secs To display O2S Results do the following 1 Select F5 SYSTEM TEST from the SELECT MODE menu 2 Select FO O28 RESULTS from the SELECT TEST menu 3 Select the desired bank from SELECT BANK menu 4 Select the desired oxygen sensor from the BANK and SENSOR menu The message WAITING FOR DATA is displayed followed by the Oxygen Sensor data display If the tester displays the warning message indicating that the O2S MONITORING TEST RESULTS may not be valid the vehicle ECU is reporting that the O2S tests have not
356. ayed on the vehicle system ECU then press 443 An example of the ENTER DTC display for Lexus vehicles is shown below ENTER DTC ENTER LEXUS 17 TEST MODES AII late model Lexus vehicles with Engine and optional Transmission ABS Cruise Control Air Conditioning and Air bag systems flash DTCs on the dashboard MIL On select vehicles the Air Conditioning system does not have a MIL for DTC reading DTCs are flashed with the 10 s digit first followed by 15 digit There is a 1 5 second period between 10 s and 15 digit and a 2 5 second period between individual DTCs 5 When 30434 is pressed the tester displays the DTC number and a short description of the code 6 After you enter the DTC the tester asks for additional trouble code entry Press to enter another DTC If M9 is pressed the tester displays an instruction screen describing the functions available 1 ADVANCE CODE z HOLD CODE EXIT QUIT ENTER SUMMARY 7 Press to move to the next DTC If you wish to hold a DTC screen press to freeze the automatic scrolling feature DTC 03 MAP SENSOR VOLTAGE FAULT 8 Press to view a summary screen of all entered DTCs DTC SUMMARY 03 9 Press DD to return to the DTC menu KEYS Enter the displayed Also display summary screen Enter another DTC NO Advance to instruction screen 0 6 Enter DTC number Move to the next Stop th
357. c L 3 sec 5 se 5 If no malfunctions are present meter will read 12 volts once per second 6 After recording D TCs turn ignition switch off 7 Disconnect voltmeter leads 8 Erase DTCs when all repairs are completed 18 CHRYSLER IMPORTS TEST MODES To manually read DTCs from 1987 88 Chrysler Imports Colt Vista with Digital Decimal output do the following The DLC type is vehicle dependent refer to the information displayed on the tester FO HOW TO READ for the DLC type 1 Locate the 12 pin Diagnostic Connector Use F4 DJC Location from the Information menu for diagnostic connector location 2 Connect an analog voltmeter red lead to pin 1 diagnosis terminal and the voltmeter black lead to pin 12 12 pin or terminal of diagnosis connector Pin 1 EII N SS Each single DTC output cycle takes 16 seconds The first 12 volt deflection corresponds to a 3 second start indication second 12 volt deflection corresponds to a decimal value of 1 third 12 volt deflection corresponds to a decimal value of 2 fourth 12 volt deflection corresponds to a decimal value of 4 fifth 12 volt deflection corresponds to a decimal value of 8 sixth 12 volt deflection corresponds to a decimal value of 16 followed by a 0 volt stop indication for 3 seconds DTCs are decoded by interpreting the ON time of meter 12 volt deflections 2 6 If the meter displays 12 volts for 1 5 seconds then that digital va
358. cartridge into the Master cartridge slot at the bottom rear of the tester 3 Be sure the vehicle ignition switch is off 4 Remove any adapters installed on the Data Link Connector DLC cable 5 Connect the DLC cable to the tester and tighten the screws 6 Connect the 16 14 Pin OBD II Adapter Cable to the DLC cable 7 Connect the OBD II Adapter Cable to the vehicle DLC 8 Power and ground are provided through the DLC connector so connecting the 12V power cable to the vehicle is not required 9 Turn the vehicle ignition switch on to begin diagnostics 10 Refer to this manual and the application cartridge operator s manual for software operating instructions DLC Cable Application Cartridge 16 14 Pin OBD II Adapter Cable P N 02001969 FIGURE 1 2 Tech 1A Setup COMMON TEST MODES II 5 HARDWARE REQUIRED TECH 1 To set up the Tech 1 tester to test OBD II compliant vehicles do the following 1 1 Insert the Asian Imports application cartridge into the Master cartridge slot at the bottom rear of the tester 2 Be sure the vehicle ignition switch is off 3 Remove any adapters installed on the Data Link Connector DLC cable 4 Connect the DLC cable to the tester and tighten the screws 5 Connect the Tech 1 14 12 Pin VIM Adapter to the DLC cable 6 Connect the Tech 1 OBD II Vehicle Interface Module VIM to the Tech 1 14 12 Pin VIM Adapter 7 Connect the 16 24 Pin OBD Adapter Cable to the VIM 8
359. cation Submode F3 ID Info Submode F4 DJC Location TOYOTA 15 GETTING STARTED 5 GETTING STARTED Before operating the Asian Imports Cartridge with a Toyota vehicle do the following 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 If the vehicle you are testing is equipped with Overdrive turn the O D switch to the ON position NOTE If the O D switch is not in the ON position the tester may not be able to EH read DTCs from the transmission ECU 3 When testing a 1989 94 Toyota vehicle either the Check Adapter Cable or the TDLC Adapter Cable is used to connect the tester to the vehicle DLC Which adapter cable to use is determined by which system you wish to test The following chart lists the systems that can be tested with each adapter cable ADAPTER ACTIVE SYSTEMS THAT CAN BE TESTED CHECK ENGINE AIRBAG TDCL ENGINE ECT ABS CCS A C Attach the appropriate adapter cable to the end of the tester DLC Cable then connect the colored end of the cable to the vehicle DLC Toyota Lexus Toyota Lexus Check Connector Cable Blue TDCL Connector Cable Green 4a 1989 94 TOYOTA VEHICLES ONLY If the Check connector cable is used the tester may be powered through the Check connector and it might not be necessary to use the cigarette lighter plug If the TDCL connector is used plug the tester DC Power Cable into the vehicle cigarette lighter NOTE Since the cigarette lighter and Check DLC can be switche
360. ce Check Connector SCC jumper P N 02001935 is required to retrieve DTCs If available use submode F2 SCC LOCATION from the Information menu to locate the service check connector Service Check Connector Jumper ACURA 7 SELECTING THE VEHICLE 5 SELECTING THE VEHICLE Once you ve pressed 033 from the power up screen the following steps must be performed to select the manufacturer model year model and engine type of the vehicle being tested Remember if you make a mistake you can always press 248 to go back to the previous menu SELECTING THE MANUFACTURER A menu of manufacturers available for testing is displayed in a scrolling menu You can scroll down one screen at a time by pressing or up one screen at a time by pressing Press or to scroll one manufacturer at a time until the arrow is opposite the manufacturer you wish to select Then press 1959 to select SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR Once the manufacturer is selected the Select Model Year menu is displayed Press the last two digits of the year model being tested for 1990 models 6 D for 1991 models and so on SELECTING THE MODEL The Model Select menu displays models available for testing Press the M key until the model being tested is displayed then press the key SELECTING THE ENGINE Next the Engine Select menu is displayed Press Qe until the engine type of the vehicle is displayed then press the key VEHICLE INFORMATIO
361. ch the tester will display EXHAUST RICH 6 If the tester displays EXHAUST RICH or EXHAUST LEAN prolonged period of engine idling time raise and hold the engine RPM above 2000 for 3 minutes The tester display should begin to change rich or lean again 7 When finished press 24 to return to the OBD Controls menu ENTER Used when each step has been completed EXIT Return to OBD Controls menu SELECT MODE F0 SWITCH TEST F1 02 MONITOR KE CONNECT CHECK ADAPTER ORANGE TO VEHICLE DLC ENTER ENTER TURN ACCESSORIES OFF SET PARKING BRAKE TER PLACEAJT IN PARK OR IN NEUTRAL ENTER ENTER START ENGINE AND WARM TO NORMAL OPERATING TEMP ENTER ENTER RAISE LOWER ENG SPEED TO CHANGE 025 OUTPUT ENTER Ne ENTER 025 MONITOR 02 MONITOR Rich exhaust Lean exhaust condition condition Note on O2S Monitor operation On some early 1983 84 Mazda vehicles it is necessary to disconnect the throttle position sensor before O2S monitor can begin Consult factory service manual for additional information MAZDA 27 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 8 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS DTCs available for Mazda vehicles are listed in the following charts Some code numbers have different descriptors depending on the selected vehicle Only codes available for the selected vehicle are displayed by the tester
362. cle Speed Limiter Reached P1309 Misfire Detection Monitor not Enabled P1345 No SGC Signal P1351 Ignition Diagnostic Monitor Circuit Malfunction P1352 Ignition Coil 1 Primary Circuit Malfunction P1353 Ignition Coil 2 Primary Circuit Malfunction P1354 Ignition Coil 3 Primary Circuit Malfunction P1358 Ignition Diagnostic Monitor Out of Range P1359 Spark Output Circuit Malfunction P1360 Ignition Coil A Secondary Circuit Malfunction P1361 Ignition Coil B Secondary Circuit Malfunction P1362 Ignition Coil C Secondary Circuit Malfunction P1364 Ignition Coil Primary Circuit Malfunction 62 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 1998 DTC CONTINUED NO P1365 P1390 P1400 P1401 P1402 P1403 P1405 P1406 P1407 P1408 P1409 P1410 P1443 P1444 P1445 P1449 P1450 P1451 P1455 P1457 P1460 P1464 P1474 P1479 P1485 P1486 P1487 P1496 P1497 P1498 P1499 1500 DESCRIPTOR Ignition Coil Secondary Circuit malfunction Octane Adjust Out of Range Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Circuit Low Voltage Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Circuit High Voltage EGR Valve Position Sensor Open or Short Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Hoses Reversed Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Upstream Hose Off Plugged Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor Downstream Hose Off Plugged EGR Valve no Flow Detected EGR Flow Out
363. cleared and the system sends a pass DTC If no malfunctions are present the MIL will flash DTC 111 MAZDA 19 TEST MODES 6 Disconnect jumper leads FAST KOEO TYPE CONTINUOUS SLOW KOEO SEPARATOR SLOW CONTINUOUS CODES CODE CODE CODE CODE CODE 21 amp 11 21 21 10 11 11 BATTERY KM O FT KT VOLTAG Hite BH c be E a D N D Ie B 34 ue Example Of EEC IV Fast And Slow KOEO and Continuous Codes Submode F2 DTC List This submode provides you with a way to view all possible ECU DTCs including DTC numbers and descriptions You can also select the DTCs obtained from the analog voltmeter as an alternative way of entering DTCs into the tester s memory As you scroll through the available DTCs you can view a description of the DTC obtained from the analog voltmeter You can Select the DTC on the tester screen for later review or printing Refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further information Submode F3 Review DTC This submode provides you with a review of the DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The description of the entered or selected DTC will be displayed along with a numerical summary of the entered or selected DTC Review DTC is intended to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTCs that you have encountered during diagnosis Submode F4 Clear This submode has two options for you to chose Option
364. command the ECU into Sensitive DTC Mode an information screen will be displayed with test status or retry test TOYOTA a TEST MODES DTC TEST MODE MENU TEST INCREASES ECU SENSITIVITY RECEIVE FAULT CODE INFORMATION PLEASE WAIT XX TO DETECTION DONE YES TURN A C SW OFF RECEIVING FAULT PUT TRANSMISSION CODE INFORMATION IN NEUTRAL GEAR PLEASE WAIT DONE YES 24 TURN IGNITION 4 ADVANCE CODE KEY OFF CLOSE Y HOLD CODE THROTTLE EXIT QUIT DONE YES ENTER SUMMARY 2 es TEST NOT SUPPORTED TURN IGN KEY TO BY ECU OR RETRY TEST ON CONFIRM ENG DTC 24 EXI MIL FLASHING INTAKE TEMP DONE YES SENSOR SIGNAL ENTER START ENGINE AND ROADTEST ABOVE 6 pr C SUMMARY MPH TO CHK DTCs DONE YES ROADTEST DONE DTC STOP VEHICLE AND F1 READ DTC S PREPARE FOR DTCs F3 REVIEW DTC S DONE YES F4 CLEAR YES Example of Sensitive DTC Submode Instructions ACTIVE KEYS Advance to next DTC or hold displayed DTC YES Confirm instructions on display are completed NO Confirm MIL not flashing Display DTC Summary Return to DTC Entry menu 32 TOYOTA TOYOTA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 8 TOYOTA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS DTCs available for Toyota vehicles are listed in the following charts Some code numbers have different descriptors depending on the selected vehicle On
365. correction strategy for the injection of fuel into the engine Long Term Fuel Trim represents the ECU s steady long term adjustment to fuel strategy determined from a lookup table in its memory This parameter changes slowly over time at a rate slower than Short Term Fuel Trim and varies with engine design and engine operating conditions The numeric character in LT FT 1 and LT FT 2 define the cylinders that are grouped as a bank for fuel feedback 42 COMMON TEST MODES II ASIAN IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC DATA PARAMETERS correction Bank 1 is the bank which contains cylinder number 1 Expected values for this parameter are 10 0 warm engine at idle MAF R UNITS Ib min 0 to 86 gm s 0 to 655 Mass Air Flow MAF sensor is an input to the ECU and represents the amount of air that the engine is taking into the manifold displayed as a flow rate pounds per minute or grams per second MAF flow rate will increase with engine load and is typically 4 7 gm sec at idle or 17 20 gm sec at 2500 RPM warm engine Note that the R in parenthesis indicates the parameter is rate related MAP P kPa 0 to 255 inHg 0 to 75 Manifold Absolute Pressure MAP sensor is a measure of the pressure within the intake manifold relative to atmospheric pressure Depending on MAP sensor design a frequency or analog output signal can be generated by a MAP sensor for input to the vehicle ECU Atmospheric pressure equals th
366. creen for later review or printing Refer to Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further information Submode F3 Review This submode provides a way of reviewing DTCs that you selected or entered in the tester The description of the entered or selected DTC will be displayed along with a numerical summary of the entered or selected DTC Review DTC is intended to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTCs that you have encountered during diagnosis Submode F4 Clear This submode has two options for you to chose Option FO is to view text screens that provide information on how to clear the DTCs from ECU memory This is performed by tester keypad presses Option F1 clears the tester memory of DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The clear DTC s mode is helpful and provides information that you would normally have to locate in a service manual 12 INFINITI INFINITI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 7 INFINITI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS DTCs available for Infiniti vehicles are listed in the following tables Some code numbers have different descriptors depending on the selected vehicle Only codes available for the selected vehicle are displayed by the tester OBD OBD I SYSTEMS YEAR 1990 DESCRIPTOR 1990 11 CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL 12 AIR FLOW METER CIRCUIT FAILURE 13 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE 14 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 16 TCS SIGN
367. cription of the entered or selected DTC will be displayed along with a numerical summary of the entered or selected DTC Review DTC is intended to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTCs that you have encountered during diagnosis Submode F4 Clear DTC s This submode has two options for you to choose Option FO is a series of instructions screens which inform you how to clear DTC s from the ECU This is performed by tester keypad presses Option F1 clears DTCs 14 HYUNDAI TEST MODES from the tester s memory that you entered or selected The clear DTC s mode is helpful and provides information that you would normally have to locate in a service manual MODE F2 DTC To read DTCs on 1989 95 vehicles you will need to locate the vehicle DLC and connect the Hyundai Check Adapter to the tester and vehicle To locate the DLC select F1 DLC Location from the Information menu If necessary refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further instructions When Mode F2 1 selected the tester displays four submodes DTC SUBMODES Fl READ DTC s F2 DTC LIST F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC s Submode F1 Read DTC s This submode provides automated DTC retrieval from the vehicle ECU Step by step screen instructions guide you to connect the YELLOW Mitsubishi Chrysler Imports Hyundai Check adapter to the vehicle DLC and start and warm the engine to normal operating temperature
368. ctions provide information to correctly set up the vehicle ECU This 1s performed by following the tester instruction screens If you have trouble additional DTC retrieval information is described below If you refer to the factory service manual for this information make sure that you are following the correct steps for the system you are working on Submode F0 U Check This mode is functioning during normal vehicle operation as long as the check connectors are NOT connected If a DTC is detected the ECS Lamp will light up to indicate that inspection 1s necessary This mode is a user oriented mode which only diagnoses the necessary components for start up and driveability Submode F1 Read Memory To activate this submode connect the Read Memory Connector while the Test Mode Connectors are disconnected Use this mode to read past problems that have been stored in the vehicle ECU Faults can be stored even when the monitor lamps are not lit It effectively detects poor contact or loose connections of connectors harnesses etc Step by step screen instructions provide information on DTC retrieval Submode F2 D Check To activate this mode connect the Test Mode connector while the Read Memory Connector are disconnected Use this mode to check the entire fuel system and to detect faulty parts Step by step screen instructions provide information on DTC retrieval SUBARU 15 TEST MODES Submode F1 Enter DTC s On Subaru vehicles
369. d some tests such as the Sens DTC Test reguire that the power cable be directly EH connected to the battery via the optional battery adapter cable P N 02001636 16 TOYOTA GETTING STARTED 4b 1983 88 TOYOTA VEHICLES ONLY Plug the tester power cable into the vehicle cigarette lighter The power cable may also be directly connected to the battery via the optional battery adapter cable P N 02001636 5 Turn on the tester and select the application software that you will be using Verify that the correct screen is displayed The tester should display a screen similar to the one below ASIAN IMPORTS 83 02 lt ENTER gt Tester stand alone display 6 If the display is correct press If the display is not correct refer to Appendix D 7 Follow the instructions on the following pages to select the vehicle type you are testing TOYOTA SELECTING THE VEHICLE 6 SELECTING THE VEHICLE Once you ve pressed 19 9 from power up screen the following steps must be performed to select the manufacturer model year model and engine type of the vehicle being tested Remember if you make a mistake you can always press 248 to go back to the previous menu SELECTING THE MANUFACTURER A menu of manufacturers available for testing 1s displayed in a self scrolling menu You can scroll down one screen at a time by pressing or up one screen at a time by pressing Me Press D or GB to scroll one m
370. d alone display 4 If the display is correct press Gas If the display is not correct refer to Appendix D 5 Follow the instructions on the following page to select the vehicle type you are testing by entering required vehicle information into the tester INFINITI 7 SELECTING THE VEHICLE 5 SELECTING THE VEHICLE Once you ve pressed 19 9 from the power up screen the following steps must be performed to select the manufacturer model year model and engine type of the vehicle being tested Remember if you make a mistake you can always press 248 to go back to the previous menu SELECTING THE MANUFACTURER A menu of manufacturers available for testing 15 displayed in a scrolling menu You can scroll down one screen at a time by pressing or up one screen at a time by pressing Qe Press D or EF to scroll one manufacturer at a time until the arrow is opposite the manufacturer you wish to select Then press 1959 to select SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR Once the manufacturer is selected the Select Model Year menu is displayed Press the last two digits ofthe year model being tested for 1990 models D for 1991 models and so on SELECTING THE MODEL The Model Select menu displays models available for testing Press the TO key until the model being tested is displayed then press the key SELECTING THE ENGINE Next the Engine Select menu is displayed Press until the engine type of the vehicle is
371. d as a value with appropriate units Examples of analog parameters include Engine Speed Coolant Temperature Oxygen Sensor Voltage etc AIC CLUTCH SIG STATES Air Conditioning switch status as input to vehicle ECM based on state of dashboard A C switch position commanded on OFF lt A C commanded off AFM OUTPUT A F METER RATIO m3 h 0 255 m3 h Air Flow Meter AFM output signal sent as an input to vehicle ECM from the Air Flow Meter and calculated into cubic meter hour by the ECM based on the rate of air flow through the AFM AFM OUTPUT AIF METER RATIO VOLTS 0 5V Air Flow Meter AFM output voltage signal sent to the vehicle ECM from the Air Flow Meter based on the rate of air flow through the AFM AFM SIG PERIOD mS 0 66 Time period of Karman Vortex airflow meter sent as an input to the vehicle from the Karman Vortex airflow meter based on the rate of air flow through the KV AFM CRANK SIGNAL ON OFF Crank starter motor signal input as sent to vehicle ECU during engine cranking ON crank switch on OFF crank switch off TOYOTA 47 DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS DTC RESULT STATES Result of ECM diagnostic self test which checks for malfunction codes NOT SET no diagnostic trouble codes SET ECM has detected and stored diagnostic trouble codes ENG COOLANT TEMP DEGREES UNITS RANGE DEGREES F 58 260 DEGREES C 50 127 Engine Cool
372. d method requires the 16 pin Mitsubishi Chrysler Imports jumper P N 02002095 which connects 2 pins of the 16 pin DLC In a similar fashion the are instead flashed out on the instrument panel mounted Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL For the automobile manufacturers that mention the use of an analog voltmeter to read manual DTCs the Mastertech Oscilloscope may be used Set up the single channel oscilloscope and make connections the same way as the analog voltmeter above Choose the 20v division scale and a slow time division e g 1 2 sec division the DTCs will be shown as a waveform on the display 16 CHRYSLER IMPORTS TEST MODES Note that manually retrieving DTCs from select 1995 Chrysler Import vehicles requires you to locate and jumper the 16 pin Diagnostic Connector The vehicles that require the use of a jumper are noted in the column Adapter Type in the Chrysler Import coverage table found at the beginning of this section Refer to the section on manually reading DTCs from the 1995 Chrysler Import vehicles in this section Follow the detailed instructions on the following pages to manually read the DTCs Once the DTCs have been manually read from the ECU the tester can define the code A complete list of Chrysler Imports DTCs is also included in CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs on page 24 Submode F0 How To Read This submode provides information on how to manually read DTCs from the vehicle S
373. dapter cable connection Single 6 pin DLC Use Connector A and ground lead 1 pin and 6 pin DLCs Use Connectors A and B and ground lead Single 17 pin DLC Use Connector C and ground lead All views are vehicle side MAZDA 21 TEST MODES NOTE When reading DTC s from Mazda vehicles make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature and testing is performed in a well ventilated area Reading DTCSs from all 1983 95 Mazda ECU using the F1 Read DTCs mode in Asian Imports cartridge 1 Insert Asian cartridge into MASTERTECH or TECH 1A 2 Connect Mazda Check adapter Orange to data link cable Tester will display the correct adapter connection to use 3 Connect the Check adapter to the vehicle DLC Press F1 DLC location from the Information menu for Data Link Connector location assistance 4 Connect ground clip to vehicle engine or chassis 5 Power MASTERTECH or TECH with 12v power cable 6 Select Mazda vehicle to test 7 Press F2 DTCs from Mazda test mode menu 8 Press 1 READ DTCs submode from test menu Follow instructions on the tester display 9 Tester will automatically command the vehicle ECU into the correct mode required to read DTCs and will display all received DTCs on the tester display Submode F2 DTC List This submode provides you with a way to view all possible ECU DTCs including DTC numbers and descriptions You can also selec
374. de or Rotary Switch LEDs 1 or 2 Typical ECU To Manually Read DTCs from 1984 86 Nissan ECUs with the 2 LED System do the following Non turbocharged models 1 Verify that the diagnostic mode selector is turned fully counterclockwise or diagnostic slide switch is in the OFF position 2 Turn ignition switch to ON 3 Check for LED lamp illumination on ECU bulb check 4 Turn the diagnostic mode selector fully clockwise or change the diagnostic slide switch to the ON position 5 Observe the ECU LEDs for DTCs 23 and 31 The presence of these DTCs indicates that the ECU has not received input switch signals from the Accelerator and A C and or heater switch 6 Depress and release accelerator pedal 16 NISSAN TEST MODES 7 Observe the ECU LEDs for DTC 31 The presence of DTC 31 indicates that the ECU has not received an input switch signal from the A C and or heater switch 8 Ifthe vehicle has factory air conditioning cycle the air conditioning heater fan switch OFF ON OFF 9 Observe the ECU LEDs for DTC 44 The presence of this DTC indicates that the ECU has not detected conditions to set a DTC and is not currently storing any DTCs 10 Turn diagnostic mode selector fully counterclockwise or change the diagnostic slide switch to the OFF position and turn the engine off 11 Ifthe ECU outputs any other DTCs than DTC 44 refer to factory service manuals for DTC decoding and diagnostics Turbocharged models
375. ding DTCs turn off ignition switch and disconnect jumper lead from DLC 4 Reading Key On Engine Running DTCs Warm engine to normal operating temperature Turn the ignition key off and wait 10 seconds Now start the engine 5 indication will begin on dashboard MIL Rotate steering wheel 1 2 turn depress and release brake pedal If a single MIL flash occurs depress and release throttle pedal Wait for PCM to exercise all outputs The dashboard MIL will flash DTCs For 3 digit DTCs the first set of flashes will equal the 100s digit After a 2 0 second pause the second set of flashes will equal the 10s digit After another 2 0 second pause the third set of flashes will equal the 15 digit If there are 2 or more DTCS there will be a 4 0 second pause between each DTC After recording DTCs turn off ignition switch and disconnect jumper lead from DLC 6 If no malfunctions are present the MIL will flash DTC 111 7 Disconnect jumper leads 8 Erase all DTCs when all repairs are completed Manually Clearing DTCs from Mazda Vehicles using Ford EEC IV engine control system and Ford s 6 pin plus 1 pin Data Link Connector 1 Turn ignition key off wait 10 seconds 2 Connect jumper from STI line in 1 pin DLC to ground 3 Turn ignition key to run 4 When MIL begins to flash DTCs remove jumper from ground Turn off ignition key disconnect jumper lead from DLC 5 Perform KOEO test to confirm that DTCs have been
376. displayed then press VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY After the vehicle type is selected the tester displays a summary screen of the selected vehicle Information displayed includes the year manufacturer model engine size and type and additional information such as the type of fuel system SELECT MODE MENU When the above steps are completed the Select Mode menu displays the test modes available for the selected vehicle and system Refer to TEST MODES on page 10 and the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for operating the test modes with Infiniti vehicles 8 INFINITI SELECTING THE VEHICLE ACTIVE KEYS MANUFACTURER HONDA HYUNDAI gt INFINITI ENTER INFINITI 1990 2002 SELECT SELECT MODEL G20 YES NO SELECT ENGINE 2 0L 14 YES NO EL 1994 INFINITI G20 2 0L 14 SMPI O or 5 sec SELECT MODE F1 DTC ENTRY F5 SYSTEM TESTS F8 INFORMATION FIGURE 1 2 Infiniti Vehicle Selection GO Enter model year Used to answer questions in tester display Confirm Power up display Return to previous display INFINITI TEST MODES 6 TEST MODES When the Select Mode menu is displayed test modes available for Infiniti vehicles may be selected You may select Mode 1 ENTRY Mode F5 SYSTEM TESTS or Mode F8 INFORMATION without connecting the tester to the vehicle General operating instructions for
377. e Bank 1 Sensor 1 025 Circuit no Activity Detected Bank 1 Sensor 1 028 Heater Circuit Malfunction Bank 1 Sensor 1 02 Circuit Malfunction Bank 1 Sensor 2 028 Circuit Low Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 2 028 Circuit High Voltage Bank 1 Sensor 2 O2S Heater Circuit Malfunction Bank 1 Sensor 2 Fuel Trim Malfunction Fuel Injector No 1 Circuit Malfunction Fuel Injector No 2 Circuit Malfunction Fuel Injector No 3 Circuit Malfunction HYUNDAI 25 HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1996 98 CONTINUED DESCRIPTION P0204 P0205 P0206 P0300 P0301 P0302 P0303 P0304 P0305 P0306 P0326 P0335 P0336 P0340 P0342 P0343 P0400 P0403 P0420 P0421 P0422 P0440 P0441 P0442 P0443 P0444 P0445 P0446 P0447 P0448 P0450 Fuel Injector No 4 Circuit Malfunction Fuel Injector No 5 Circuit Malfunction Fuel Injector No 6 Circuit Malfunction Random Misfire Detected Cylinder No 1 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 2 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 3 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 4 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 5 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 6 Misfire Detected Knock Sensor Circuit Out of Range Crankshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction Crankshaft Position Sensor Circuit Out of Range Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit Low Input Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit High Input EGR Flow System Malfunction EGR Solenoid Circu
378. e Eagle ud ban Wala bka wat Rd 12 Chrysler haports Plymouth o 13 E 00 O OD itu dt P dos P E 13 SOB R ee RC nde UE op 13 PUI IN sat as babae a dacs de dd 14 DUE NIN VI em 15 A RZECE WD WEWN NENA 15 TOUS eee eir b biz 15 VISTAN h bk A heb Ped vescisdi dd bid 15 MSN ee ee Aiii dA a EN PP iila 17 NES laa sa saa tes eR ee que eM verd dad sad saam Kis zaa deed e dud 18 SOE 19 JONON Rd ob ZY 20 TEST MODES AVAILABLE doe 22 sun ied PE WAG dd ups dh Giby Too GE 22 Tost Modes Ade vana dh i edo LARS ARE ARE ZA RR EGRE RR KAR RER RARE DETUR 23 System Jess AvallabtE pwd dun dan dan Cala AR Da Ga bih id aan da dad EAS 23 OBD Controls da dd aped dA ARRA 24 GETTING SIRRTED 25 COMMON TEST MODES I 1 SELECTING TEST MODES bt CE 2 MODE FO DATA LISI sea skn 3 Asian Imports TOC 1 MODBEDPIDIPCENIRY otek nina eg 5 Submode F0 How TO 525522559544 EKG RES 5 van an wah snik WEAR Dueb DECRE 6 Submode FX DIC LM 8 Review DIC O o 9 Submoge Clear DICIS
379. e AFR Monitor A test monitors and displays the ECU loop status and exhaust emission Rich Lean content The loop status can either be Open or Closed depending on the commanded ECU state And exhaust emission content can be Rich or Lean depending on the level of oxygen present in exhaust emissions which is detected by the oxygen sensor Since this test monitors the operation of the green LED on the ECU you can determine the operation of the green LED without locating and watching the ECU mounted LED This test can help you to determine faulty fuel and emission system components in the service bay or on a road test 22 NISSAN CONTROLS When performing the AFR Monitor A test make sure the vehicle is properly warmed up and is tested in a well ventilated area To perform the AFR Monitor A test do the following 1 Press to select AFR Monitor A from OBD Controls menu 2 The tester displays instructions for preparing the vehicle to perform the test Press 19 9 when the instructions on each screen have been completed CONNECT CHECK START ENGINE AND INCREASE ENGINE ADAPTER RED TO WARM TO NORMAL RPM AND HOLD AT VEHICLE DLC OPERATING TEMP 2000 RPM ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER 3 When the preparations are complete the tester displays the status of the test Press to return to the OBD Controls menu AFR MONITOR A OPEN LOOP AFR MONITOR A AFR MONITOR A CLOSED LOOP CLOSED LOOP RIC
380. e DTC on the tester screen for later review or printing Refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further information Submode F3 Review DTC This submode provides a way of reviewing DTCs that you selected or entered in the tester The description of the entered or selected DTC will be displayed along with a numerical summary of the entered or selected DTC Review DTC is intended to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTCs that you have encountered during diagnosis Submode F4 Clear This submode has two options for you to choose Option FO is to view text screens that provide information on how to clear the DTCs from ECU memory This is performed by tester keypad presses Option F1 clears the tester memory of DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The clear DTC s mode is helpful and provides information that you would normally have to locate in a service manual 10 DAIHATSU DAIHATSU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 7 DAIHATSU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS DTCs available for Daihatsu vehicles are listed in the following charts Some code numbers have different descriptors depending on the selected vehicle Only codes available for the selected vehicle are displayed by the tester YEAR 1988 DTC NO DESCRIPTOR 1988 O O oO R N OA lx N NO DTCs NORMAL OPERATION PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE IGNITION
381. e F1 DTC ENTRY is selected the tester displays five submodes F0 HOW TO READ Fl ENTER DTC s F2 DTC LIST 10 ACURA TEST MODES F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC s Submode F0 How To Read This submode provides information on how to manually read DTCs from the vehicle Step by step screen instructions provide information to correctly set up the vehicle ECU This is performed by following the tester instruction screens If you have trouble additional DTC retrieval information is described below If you refer to the Factory Service Manual for this information make sure that you are following the correct steps for the system that you are working on Submode F1 Enter DTC s This submode provides you with a text description of the numeric DTC that was entered into the tester For Acura vehicles the DTCs are entered manually after reading the single LED mounted on the ECU Acura service and repair information indicates that code 0 is supported for OBD systems Code 0 refers to ECU related failures and is valid when the engine MIL does not illuminate or will not illuminate for 2 seconds when the ignition is turned on Refer to the service manual for the current vehicle for further explanation of code0 The Enter DTC s submode displays two question marks for entering the DTC The tester screen prompts you to enter the DTCs read off the ECU LED or the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Be careful when reading the DTC from the ECU LED
382. e MENU sua osansa ssa cou vaa eas Reading Codes nan ai d n earn Mode FL DIC Zi qase x Mode F2 DIG a Kas a le can ni qapa ADT ade heeds Anti Lock Brake System 2 TEST NONE 2022 K E En Ek sio OE A A bus in TOYOTA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 50494 Bed Cruise Control System vaa Electronic Controlled Transmission BRE ea Jan DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS coc sss en IIE SOE TOO OBD II Communication Protocols OBD II Interface Circuitry Not Installed Tester Is Unable to Communicate with the Vehicle Tester Loses Communication with the Vehicle cis Ee Tp pra d Ud MEE AS Not All Parameters Displayed Tester Displays TEST RESULTS Message Wrong Display Power ls Applied 12 13 13 13 13 15 16 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 19 20 21 22 22 24 24 24 29 33 40 40 43 43 44 45 47 O O O WANN N N Asian Imports TOC 9 TOC 10 Asian Imports GENERAL INFORMATION Introduction Common Test Modes Description Manufacturer Specific Sections Description Flow Chart Description Test Selection Menu Description OPERATING PRECAUTIONS ASIAN IMPORTS CARTRIDGE KIT DESCRIPTIO
383. e Speed Control ISC valve step based on output calculated by the vehicle ECU based on engine load engine RPM and Throttle Position KNOCK SIGNAL ON OFF Knock sensor signal correction as commanded by vehicle ECM based on engine load and indicates that the advance retard strategy 1s controlling ignition timing ON correction enabled OFF correction disabled LEAN MIX SENSOR mA 0 72 Lean mixture sensor current as input to the vehicle ECM based on air fuel ratio O2 content of exhaust gases LEFT A F FB STATES Left side air fuel feedback signal state as commanded by vehicle ECM based on engine load and left O2 sensor signal inputs to ON feedback enabled OFF feedback disabled LEFT A F TARGET VOLTS 0 5V Target commanded air fuel ratio in left hand exhaust manifold as calculated by vehicle ECM LEFT O2S SIGNAL RICH LEAN Left Oxygen Sensor state flag based on input to vehicle ECU based on oxygen content in left exhaust stream RICH air fuel ratio above 14 7 LEAN air fuel ratio below 14 7 1 NEUTRAL SWITCH STATES Neutral Safety switch status as input to vehicle ECM based on the current gear selection of the transmission P N current gear is PARK or NEUTRAL R DL current gear is REVERSE DRIVE or LOW RIGHT A F FB ON OFF Right side air fuel feedback signal state as commanded by vehicle ECM based on engine load and right O2 sensor signal inputs to feedback
384. e addition of manifold and vacuum pressures MAP pressure increases with engine load and depending on altitude is typically 40 kPa at idle warm engine at sea level Note that the P in parenthesis indicates the parameter Is pressure related MIL STATUS OFF ON Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL Status is an indication of the current MIL state If no emission related faults exist the MIL will be OFF If a DTC is stored in the ECU due to a system fault or the vehicle is operated in a condition that causes tailpipe emissions to exceed 1 5 times the allowed value for that vehicle the MIL will be ON In most cases if a hard fault exists the MIL will remain illuminated Also the MIL can illuminate then extinguish while driving the vehicle which means the vehicle exceeded tailpipe emission standards OBD CERT OBD II OBD OBD2 OBD OBD 1 NO OBD On Board Diagnostics OBD Certification displays the level of OBD that the vehicle ECU is certified to The states of OBD certification can be to OBD II California Air Resources Board requirements OBD federal requirements OBD II and OBD requirements OBD I requirements or No OBD requirements This information can be helpful when determining certification and ordering parts O2S B1 1 O2S B2 1 O2S B1 S2 O28 B2 2 O2S B1 S3 O2S B2 S3 O2S B1 S4 O2S B2 S4 Volts 0 to 1 25 Oxygen Sensor 025 Bx Sx is the output voltage of O2S that is input to the ECU The O2S signal is a mea
385. e automatic scrolling Return to DTC menu 18 LEXUS TEST MODES Submode F5 Sens DTC The Sensitive DTC test submode applies to Lexus engine controllers and is only available when the engine system is Active Lexus engine ECUs have the capability to enter an increased sensitivity mode to detect fault code conditions The SENS DTC submode is helpful for diagnosing intermittent problems If you are using a TECH 1 or TECH IA tester power the tester directly from the battery via the optional battery adapter cable P N 02001636 To select Sensitive DTC submode do the following 1 Press to select DTCs from the Select Mode menu 2 Press GB to select SENS DTC from the DTC menu 3 The tester displays instructions for preparing the vehicle to capture DTCs in the Sensitive Mode Follow the instructions on each display then press to continue 4 When the vehicle preparations are complete the tester checks for DTCs then displays the codes on line four 5 The tester displays instructions for viewing the DTCs Press amp to view the DTCs 6 The tester displays the first DTC Press to scroll through the captured DTCs A DTC can be held by pressing the key while the code is displayed Press the amp key to resume display of the DTCs An example of a DTC display is shown below 7 Press 19 9 to display a summary of the captured DTCs 8 Press to return to the DTC menu NOTE In some cases Lexus ECUs do no
386. e displayed Not All Vehicle System Readiness Tests Have Been Completed If the tester determines that the ECU has not completed all of the readiness tests it will display a warning message You can then select the READINESS tests menu item from the SELECT MODE menu to examine the status of these tests For information on how to complete any of the readiness tests refer to service information from the vehicle manufacturer F1 READINESS SELECT ECU x For vehicles with multiple ECUs only READINESS TEST Misfire Monitoring SUPPORTED To display the status of the vehicle s on board monitors do the following 1 Select F1 READINESS from the SELECT MODE menu 2 Select the ECU from which you choose to monitor data for vehicles with multiple ECUs only The message WAITING FOR DATA is displayed followed by the READINESS TEST information W The first three items on the display indicate the vehicle s monitoring capability for continuously monitored systems Misfire monitoring Fuel system monitoring Comprehensive component monitoring These are indicated as either being supported or NOT SUPPORTED N A depending on the vehicle s ECU The other 8 display items indicate the status of the tests which are performed at least per trip Catalyst monitoring Heated catalyst monitoring Evaporative system monitoring Secondary air system monitoring A C system refrigerant monitor
387. e sure the vehicle is properly warmed up and is tested in a well ventilated area To perform the AFR Monitor B test do the following 1 Press QD to select AFR Monitor B from the OBD Controls Tests menu 2 The tester displays instructions for preparing the vehicle to perform the test Press when the instructions on each screen have been completed CONNECT CHECK START ENGINE AND INCREASE ENGINE ADAPTER RED TO WARM TO NORMAL RPM AND HOLD AT VEHICLE DLC OPERATING TEMP 2000 RPM ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER 3 When preparations are complete the tester displays the status of the test Press to return to the OBD Controls menu AFR MONITOR B AFR MONITOR B CLOSED LOOP CLOSED LOOP AFR gt 5 RICH AFR gt 5 LEAN EXIT EXIT AFR MONITOR B AFR MONITOR B OPEN LOOP CLOSED LOOP CONDITION 5 ln lt AFR lt 5 RCH EXIT EXIT 4 If the tester is unable to set the ECU to the selected mode the following screen is displayed Press 3 49 to return to the OBD Controls menu UNABLE TO SET REQUESTED MISC TEST MODE EXIT G Select test ENTER Used when instructions on each screen have been completed EXIT Return to OBD Controls menu 24 NISSAN CONTROLS Submode F2 Switch Test The Switch Test is available for all 1987 89 and select 1990 95 Nissan vehicles If you are unsure of test application check the ECU Modes column in the Nissan Vehicle and Systems table
388. e tester can define the code A complete list of Hyundai DTCs is also included in Chapter 7 Submode F0 How To Read This submode provides information on how to manually read DTCs from the vehicle Step by step screen instructions provide information to correctly set up the vehicle ECU This is performed by following the tester instruction screens If you have trouble additional DTC retrieval information is described below If you refer to the manual for this information make sure that you are following the correct steps for the system that you are working on Submode F1 Enter On Hyundai vehicles the Enter DTCs submode allows you to enter manually read DTCs This submode provides you with a text description of the numeric DTC that was entered into the tester The Enter DTC Submode displays two question marks for DTC Entry The tester screen prompts you to enter the DTCs read from the analog voltmeter Be careful when reading DTCs from the analog voltmeter Incorrect voltmeter needle interpretation can cause the wrong DTC description to be displayed Once all DTCs have been manually read and recorded enter each into the tester as described in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section Hyundai service and repair information indicates that code 0 is supported for OBD systems Code 0 refers to ECU related failures and is valid when the engine MIL does not illuminate or will not illuminate for 2 seconds when turning ignit
389. e tester is connected to the vehicle DLC to command the ECU for the system under test into the diagnostic mode When that process is started the DTC can be read from the MIL The DTC can then be entered into the tester for a description Refer to Section 6 Selecting the Vehicle System Inquiry for more information on Inactive system detection Which systems are covered by the Asian Imports application cartridge software on the vehicle you are testing In order to take advantage of all possible systems available on the vehicle the Asian Imports application cartridge incorporates an advanced system inquiry strategy that identifies the systems on the vehicle as active or inactive Some Toyota vehicles can have a single active system where others can have up to six So the best possible way to identify the systems on your vehicle is to connect the tester to the Check and TDCL DLCs to determine the available active systems Refer to Section 6 Selecting the Vehicle System Inquiry for more information on Inactive system detection The following chart lists Toyota ECUs that can be tested using the Asian Imports Cartridge the test modes available for each system and the DLC Cable adapter required Not all vehicles are equipped with every ECU TOYOTA 15 TOYOTA OBD SYSTEMS ECU DATA LIST DTC S SNAPSHOT ADAPTER ENGINE TDCL CHECK ECT bi TDCL ABS TDCL CCS x TDCL A C TDCL AIRBAG If
390. eading DTCs from the 1988 92 Daihatsu vehicles in this section 8 DAIHATSU TEST MODES Malfunction Indicator Lamp Submode F0 How To Read This submode provides information on how to manually read DTCs from the vehicle Step by step screen instructions provide information to correctly set up the vehicle ECU This is performed by following the tester instruction screens If you have trouble additional DTC retrieval information is described below If you refer to the factory service manual for this information make sure that you are following the correct steps for the system you are working on Submode F1 Enter DTC s This submode provides you with a description of how to obtain DTC information from the ECU and how to enter this information into the tester On Daihatsu vehicles there is one method to enter manually read DTC s which is the Enter DTC submode The Enter DTC submode has two question marks on the tester display for entering the DTC The tester screen prompts you to enter the DTC s read off the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Be careful when reading the DTC from the MIL Incorrect MIL interpretation can cause the wrong DTC description to be displayed Once all DTCs have been manually read and recorded enter each DTC into the tester as described in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section Jumper Connector Hold Down Example 1991 Rocky DAIHATSU 9 TEST MODES To read Daihatsu MIL
391. ecific test modes Also included in the Manufacturer Specific section is a complete list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs for each vehicle For vehicles capable of providing serial data to the tester a list of the parameters available and a description of each parameter 1s provided FLOW CHART DESCRIPTION The flow charts in this manual consist of screen displays enclosed in boxes The displays are arranged in the order in which they appear while using the tester If you are using a Mastertech tester full screen displays are available when operating in Enhanced Mode Refer to the Multi Function Tester Program Card Operator s Manual for Enhanced Mode operating instructions Keys on the tester keypad are shown in the manual as white letters in small black boxes There is a list of the active tester keys and their functions at the end of each operating procedure Some display screens such as vehicle selection and test mode menus require input from you To respond when the tester asks for information just press the appropriate key on the tester keypad In the example below pressing the key causes the tester to display the screen to the right and pressing causes the lower screen to be displayed Although there are exceptions pressing the key generally takes you back to the previous screen 2 GENERAL INFORMATION WOULD YOU LIKE TO CLEAR THE DTCs YES NO CLEARING CODES SELECT MODE F0 DATA LIST F1 DTC ENTRY F
392. econd 12v deflection corresponds to a decimal value of 1 third 12v deflection corresponds to a decimal value of 2 fourth 12v deflection corresponds to a decimal value of 4 fifth 12v deflection corresponds to a decimal value of 8 sixth 12v deflection corresponds to a decimal value of 16 followed by a Ov Stop indication for 3s DTCs are decoded by interpreting the ON time of meter 12v deflections 2 6 If the meter displays 12v for 1 5 sec then that digital value is 1 If the meter displays 12v for 0 5 sec then that digital value is 0 To get the value of the add the decimal value of digital 1 s obtained in the meter deflection order DTCs are separated by 12v 3 sec reading after the Stop indication 4 The normal DTC condition is indicated by meter indications 2 6 which are 12v 1 5 sec deflections separated by Ov 0 5 sec 5 After recording DTCs turn ignition switch off 6 Disconnect voltmeter leads 7 Erase DTCs when all repairs are completed SINGLE DTC CYCLE 16 SECONDS 4 METER DEFLECTION ORDER 1 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 1 1 1 1 1 1 DOS TFT eT bera VALUE 11515 DECIMAL VALUE z DTC 4 1 Digital value corresponds with a 4 decimal value 20 MITSUBISHI TEST MODES To manually read DTCs from Models that use 2 pin or 3 pin DLC and analog voltmeter do the following DLC type is vehicle dependent refer to information displayed on tester FO HOW TO READ for DLC type 1 Locate
393. ection Exhaust Gas Recirculation Exhaust Gas Recirculation Temperature Electronic Ignition ignition systems without a distributor or distributorless Engine Electronic Spark Control Evaporative Emission Electronic Vacuum Regulator Valve Full Time Failure Feed Back FDBK FI E LC D FLD Freeze Frame FREQ FRNT FRT FT FT O2S B1 S1 FTP FTR FUEL STATUS 1 Federal Communications Commission Feedback Fuel Injection Fast Idle Control Device Field Front Fuel Pump Fuel Pressure Regulator Control An OBD II test mode where the tester displays diagnostic data parameters which were saved by the vehicle at the time a Diagnostic Trouble Code occurred Frequency Front Front Fuel Trim Short Term Fuel Trim for oxygen sensor 1 on Bank 1 This parameter indicates the amount of adjustment of the fuel injected into the engine based on feedback from this oxygen sensor Federal Test Procedure A test procedure used to determine compliance of light duty motor vehicles with federal emissions standards The FTP simulates on road operation and includes cold start up idle operation acceleration deceleration a variety of part throttle speed load conditions and hot start up Fuel Trim Fuel System Status for Bank 1 This parameter indicates whether the fuel control system for Bank 1 is operating Open Loop or Closed Loop using feedback from one o
394. ed Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs unlock top parameter if fixed Toggle the data descriptor line with the Parameter Identification PID number and the ECU number Toggle the data descriptor line with the Test Identification TID number and the oxygen bank and sensor Toggle the data descriptor line with the Test Identification TID number and the hexadecimal equivalent of the received data The calculated value line is toggled with the Min and Max values received from the ECU for that TID Print data list if equipped with serial printer Return to SELECT MODE menu Submode F1 Other Results The OTHER RESULTS test mode is similar to the 2 sensor test results Some manufacturers use this mode as an alternate means of reporting O2 sensor test results In this mode the vehicle s ECU reports data for various Test IDs TIDs and Component IDs CIDs that are specified by the vehicle manufacturer Descriptions for the TIDs and CIDs are available in the vehicle service manual or from the manufacturer If the vehicle you are testing contains more than one OBD II ECU you will be asked to select which ECU information you would like displayed F5 SYSTEM TESTS F1 OTHER RESULTS SELECT ECU x TID CID RESULT Pass Fail For vehicles with multiple ECUs only To display Other Results do the following 1 Select F5 SYSTEM TESTS from the SELECT MODE menu
395. ed in the ECU On Inactive Toyota or Lexus systems this Submode is F1 READ ENTER DTCs Submode F2 DTC LIST allows you to scroll through a list of DTCs applicable to the vehicle being tested Submode REVIEW DTC allows you to review DTCs that have been selected or entered into the tester memory Submode F4 CLEAR DTC s automatically clears ECU DTCs or describes how to clear DTCs from the vehicle being tested or clears DTCs from the tester memory Submode F5 SENSITIVE DTC for Toyota and Lexus vehicles commands the engine ECU to check the system more frequently for the environment required to set DTCs The increased sensitivity is more efficient for identifying intermittent problems F3 SNAPSHOT Records data before and after the occurrence of an intermittent trouble condition Trigger conditions are selectable and include trigger on a specific DTC any DTC or by a manual key press F4 OBD CONTROLS Allows manufacturer dependent test for specialized diagnostics Tests available for each vehicle are described in the manufacturer specific sections F5 SYSTEM TESTS This mode is used to select a submenu for vehicle preparation prior to testing 22 GENERAL INFORMATION TEST MODES AVAILABLE F8 INFORMATION This mode contains submodes with information about ECU DLC SCC and DJC locations It also contains vehicle ID information TEST MODES AVAILABLE Following is a list of test modes available for each manufactu
396. ed in the following charts Some code numbers have different descriptors depending on the selected vehicle Only codes available for the selected vehicle are displayed by the tester AIR BAG YEAR 1990 94 DESCRIPTOR 1990 1994 11 SQUIB W H GND OR FRNT SENS SHORT 12 SQUIB W H B SHORT 13 SQUIB MALF SHORT 14 SQUIB MALF OPEN 15 FRONT SENSOR W H OPEN 22 WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT 24 AIR BAG SENSOR CONNECTION FAIL 31 SENSOR ASSEMBLY 41 MALF RECORDED IN MEMORY 53 SQUIB SHORT 54 SQUIB OPEN 63 SQUIB SHORT PRELOADER LEFT 64 SQUIB OPEN PRELOADER LEFT 73 SQUIB SHORT PRELOADER RT 74 SQUIB OPEN PRELOADER RT ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM YEAR 1990 94 DESCRIPTOR 1990 1994 11 SOLENOID RELAY OPEN 12 SOLENOID RELAY SHORT 13 PUMP MOTOR RELAY OPEN 14 PUMP MOTOR RELAY SHORT 15 TRAC BRAKE MAIN RELAY OPEN LEXUS 21 LEXUS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1990 94 CONTINUED 33 RR SPEED SENSOR MALFUNCTION 34 LR SPEED SENSOR MALFUNCTION 35 LF RR SPEED SENS MALFUNCTION 36 RF LR SPEED SENS MALFU 38 RR SPEED SENSOR MALFUNCTION 39 LR SPEED SENSOR MALFUNCTION 41 VOLTAGE MALFUNCTION 42 HIGH VOLTAGE DESCRIPTOR 16 TRAC BRAKE MAIN RELAY SHORT 17 TRAC PUMP MOTOR RELAY OPEN 18 TRAC PUMP MOTOR RELAY SHORT 21 RF SOLENOID OPEN OR SHORT 22 LF SOLENOID OPEN OR SHORT 23 RR SOLENOID OPEN OR SHORT 24 LR SOLENOID OPEN OR SHORT 25 MASTER CYL
397. een of the selected vehicle Information displayed includes the year manufacturer model engine size and additional information such as the type of fuel system SELECT MODE MENU When the above steps are completed the Select Mode menu displays the test modes available for the selected vehicle and system Refer to Section 6 Test Modes and the Common Test Modes OBD OBDI Systems sections for instructions on operating the test modes with Chrysler Imports vehicles 14 CHRYSLER IMPORTS SELECTING THE VEHICLE MANUFACTURER AY ACURA CHRY IMPORTS DAIHATSU CHRYSLER IMPORTS 1984 2002 SELECT SELECT MODEL COLT YES NO SELECT ENGINE 1 5L 14 SOHC YES NO SELECT TYPE CA YES NO 1991 CHRY IMPORT COLT 1 5L 14 SOHC SELECT MODE Y F1 DTC ENTRY F2 DTC F5 SYSTEM TESTS CHRYSLER IMPORTS VEHICLE SELECTION Enter model year Used to answer questions in tester display Return to previous display CHRYSLER IMPORTS 15 TEST MODES 6 TEST MODES When the Select Mode menu is displayed test modes available for Chrysler Imports vehicles may be selected How to select Modes F1 Entry F2 F4 DJC Location and F1 DLC Location are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section You may select Mode F4 DJC Location or F1 DLC Location from the Information menu without connecting the tester to the vehicle READING CO
398. ehicle greater than 7 MPH for at least 1 minute and shift up to 4th gear for manual transmissions 8 Run the engine above 2000 RPM until the MIL turns ON If the MIL stays ON record DTC s that are flashed by the MIL or O2 Monitor Lamp depending on the model being tested Use F5 ECU LOCATION from the Information menu to observe the O2 Monitor Lamp located on the ECU The long segment 1 2 seconds ON represents the tens digit The short segment 0 2 seconds ON represents the ones digit Each DTC is separated by a 1 8 second delay If the MIL blinks the system is normal 9 Turn the key OFF and disconnect the Test Mode Connectors 10 Erase DTC s when all repairs are completed Use F4 CLEAR DTC s from the DTC Entry menu for instructions on how to clear the DTC s from the vehicle and the tester To manually read Test Mode DTCs from 1987 1988 Subaru Justy vehicles using the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL and ECU LED 02 Monitor LED do the following 1 Warm engine to normal operating temperature turn all accessories switches OFF 2 Turn key OFF 3 Connect the green Test Mode connectors Use F4 DJC LOCATION from the Information menu for test mode connectors location 4 Turn key ON Do not start engine The MIL should turn ON The DTC that is flashed should correctly identify the vehicle under test Use F5 ECU LOCATION from the Information menu for ECU location 5 Start engine The MIL should turn OFF 6 Drive vehicle above 3 M
399. ehicle must be completely NOTE warmed up in order for the tester to communicate properly with the vehicle When reading DTCs from Chrysler Imports vehicles make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature and testing is performed in a well ventilated area Submode F1 Read DTC s This submode provides automated retrieval from the vehicle ECU Step by step screen instructions guide you to connect the YELLOW Chrysler Imports Check adapter to the vehicle DLC and start and warm the engine to normal operating temperature This 1s performed by following the tester instruction screens If you have trouble additional F1 READ retrieval information is described below This submode is available for all 1988 93 and select 1987 1994 and 1995 Chrysler Imports vehicles If you are unsure of the Read DTC test application check the Code Type column in the Chrysler Imports Vehicle Coverage table found at the beginning of this section If the ECU Modes column indicates Autocodes then the vehicle supports F1 READ DTC s 22 CHRYSLER IMPORTS TEST MODES To read DTCs from all 1988 93 and select 1987 1994 and 1995 Chrysler Imports ECUS using the F1 Read DTCs mode in Asian Imports cartridge do the following 1 Insert Asian cartridge into MASTERTECH or TECH 1 TECHIA 2 Connect Chrysler Imports Check adapter Yellow to DLC 3 Connect the Check adapter to the vehicle DLC Press F1 DLC location from the Informa
400. elect Clear DTC s submode do the following 1 Press a to select DTC Entry from the Select Mode menu 2 Press G9 to select Clear DTC from the DTC Entry menu 3 For some vehicles the tester will ask 1f you want to clear codes from the vehicle or from the tester Press GD for information screens that describe how to clear ECU codes or press G to clear entered or selected codes that are stored in the tester memory 4 When F0 FROM ECU is selected one or more instruction screens explain how to clear the DTCs The instructions are specific to the vehicle selected Examples of Clear DTC instructions are shown on the following page 5 When F1 FROM TESTER is selected the DTCs stored in the tester are cleared DTC DATA HAS BEEN CLEARED FROM TESTER EXIT 6 Press to return to the DTC Entry menu ACTIVE KEYS Display how to clear ECU codes information Clear codes stored in tester memory Return to DTC Entry menu Return to DTC Entry menu COMMON TEST MODES I 11 MODE F1 ENTRY DTC ENTRY Ay F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR CLEAR DTC s F0 FROM ECU F1 FROM TESTER TOYOTA LEXUS VEHICLES TURN IGNITION OFF REMOVE EFI FUSE FOR 60 SEC ENTER NISSAN INFINITI VEHICLES DISCONNECT THE NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL WAIT ENTER 15 SECONDS RECONNECT THE BATTERY TERMINAL ENTER RECHECK THE VEHICLE TROUBLE
401. ely then slowly release pedal completely 6 Turn clearance lamps parking lamps rear defogger and heater fans ON and then all OFF 7 Drive vehicle above 30 MPH and at engine speed over 2500 RPM 8 Keep engine speed above 2700 RPM until the MIL turns ON If the MIL stays ON check for DTC s by observing the O2 Monitor Lamp mounted on the ECU Use F5 ECU LOCATION from the Information menu for ECU location The long segment 1 2 seconds represents the tens digit The short segment 0 2 seconds ON represents the ones digit Each DTC is separated by a 1 8 second delay If the MIL blinks the system is normal 9 Turn the key OFF and disconnect the Test Mode Connectors 10 Erase DTC s when all repairs are completed Use F4 CLEAR DTC s from the DTC Entry menu for instructions on how to clear the DTC s from the vehicle and the tester To manually read Test Mode DTCs from 1990 Subaru Justy MPFI vehicles using the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL and ECU LED O2 Monitor LED do the following 1 Start the engine and warm to normal operating temperature 2 Turn key OFF 3 Connect the green Test Mode connectors Use F4 DJC LOCATION from the Information menu for test mode connectors location 4 Turn key ON Do not start engine The MIL should turn ON The DTC that is flashed should correctly identify the vehicle under test Use F5 ECU LOCATION from the Information menu for ECU location 5 Depress accelerator pedal to floor and then
402. em is operating closed loop even though a fault with at least one oxygen sensor has been detected The ECU may be using a single oxygen sensor for fuel control Camshaft Position Control Communication Communication Control Control Converter Control Cylinder The Data List mode is used to examine the state of the current diagnostic data parameters SAE J1979 mode 1 Deceleration Defroster Degree Distributor Ignition ignition systems with a distributor Differential Diagnostic Jumper Connector The Data Link Connector provides the link between the tester and the vehicle Diagnostic Link Connector Double Overhead Cam Drive Cycle DTC DUR ECM ECT 9 ECU ECU EFE EFFI EFI EGR EGRT EL ENG ESC EVAP EVRV F T FAIL FB A single key on to key off cycle where the engine has been started then shut down Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs indicate fault conditions found by the vehicle s on board controller while it is monitoring the vehicle s operation Refer to discussion of Pxxxx Duration Engine Control Module Engine Coolant Temperature Engine Coolant Temperature in degrees The Unit Conversion function can be used to switch between F and C Electronic Control Unit The module which performs the OBD II testing and communicates with the OBD II Scan Tool Engine or Electronic Control Unit Early Fuel Evaporation Efficiency Electronic Fuel Inj
403. en Loop due to vehicle being driven at wide open throttle or coasting OL DRIVE Open Loop due to fault with the OBD II system OL FAULT Closed Loop with only one oxygen sensor being used for fuel control and a fault with at least one oxygen sensor CL FAULT or a display of a reserved status RESERVED which is used for future support IAT F 40 to 419 40 to 215 Intake Air Temperature is an analog input to the ECU This parameter provides a temperature indication of engine intake air temperature as it flows across the IAT sensor IAT sensors can be located in the intake manifold intake air plumbing or airbox Typical IAT is 140 F warm engine at idle Note that the in parenthesis indicates the parameter 1s temperature related IGN TIMING UNITS RANGE Spark Advance IGN Timing is the amount of ignition electronic spark advance that the ECU is currently commanding The amount of ignition spark advance is based on several inputs to the ECU engine load throttle angle engine temperature etc and a lookup table in the ECU s memory For OBD II systems Spark Advance should be the timing advance for cylinder number 1 and does not include mechanical advance if applicable Spark Advance increases with engine RPM and a typical value is 10 20 degrees at idle warm engine LT FT 1 LT FT 2 100 to 100 Long Term Fuel Trim LT FT is the measure of adaptive or feedback fuel
404. en or the OBD II Toolpak menu ACTIVE KEYS Scroll up and down Enter Number View DTC description Exit to the previous test menu Submode F3 Readiness Information Readiness Tests represent a segment of new legislated diagnostic information that can be displayed by the tester A Readiness Test is a specific test that the ECU performs When the ECU runs a Readiness Test it tests the particular portion of the electronic powertrain control system Catalyst O2S Sensor etc for the respective monitor Readiness Tests can reveal the status of the system and it is recommended that service technicians become familiar with Readiness Tests when working on OBD II compliant systems COMMON TEST MODES II 35 TEST MODES display Readiness Test information do the following 1 Press G to select OBD II Toolpak from the Select Mode menu 2 Press to select Readiness Test from the OBD II Toolpak menu The key help screen will be displayed 3 Press D or to move the cursor to the desired Readiness test 4 Press NIEG to display the first text screen for the selected Readiness test Press to advance through the text description screens Press to view the previous text description screen 5 Press to return to the select monitor list or the OBD II Toolpak menu Scroll up and down ENTER Select monitor to view EXIT Exit to the previous test menu Submode F4 O2S Inform
405. enabled OFF feedback disabled TOYOTA 49 DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS RIGHT A F TARGET UNITS RANGE Target commanded air fuel ratio in right hand exhaust manifold as calculated by vehicle ECM RIGHT O2S SIGNAL RICH LEAN Right Oxygen Sensor state flag based on input to vehicle ECU based on oxygen content in right exhaust stream RICH air fuel ratio above 14 7 LEAN air fuel ratio below 14 7 1 SPARK ADVANCE DEGREES 30 90 Ignition timing Spark Advance Retard signal based on output calculated by the vehicle ECU based on engine load engine RPM and Throttle Position THROTTLE ANGLE UNITS RANGE Angle of throttle plate in throttle body as sent to the vehicle ECM and calculated by the ECM based on current position of throttle position sensor VEHICLE SPEED MPH 0 125 Vehicle speed signal as input to vehicle ECM and calculated by the ECM based on vehicle speed sensor input APPENDICES UNDERSTANDING OBD II DEFINITION OF CODE TYPE A B OBD II OXYGEN SENSOR LOCATION INFORMATION C D E IF YOU RE HAVING PROBLEM IF YOU ARE USING A TECH 1 TESTER GLOSSARY OF TERMS ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS UNDERSTANDING II A UNDERSTANDING OBD II WHAT IS OBD II The California Air Resource Board CARB requires that by model year 1996 all vehicles sold in California under 8500 GVWR contain a certain minimum On Board
406. engine starts and the ECS Lamp turns ON check for DTC s by observing the O2 Monitor Lamp If engine starts and the ECS Lamp turns OFF run the engine at idle for 1 minute 6 Perform 5 brief WOT place the transmission in gear and run the engine up to stall speed in order to operate the pressure switch 7 Run the engine at 2500 RPM until the ECS Lamp turns ON 8 If ECS Lamp stays ON record DTC s that are flashed by the O2 Monitor Lamp The long segment 1 2 seconds ON represents the tens digit The short segment 0 2 seconds ON represents the ones digit Each DTC is separated by a 1 8 second delay 9 If the ECS Lamp blinks the system is normal Turn the key OFF and disconnect the Test Mode Connectors To manually read Test Mode DTCs from 1986 SPFI Subaru vehicles using the Electronic Control System ECS Lamp and ECU LED O2 Monitor LED do the following 1 Warm engine to normal operating temperature turn all accessories switches OFF 2 Turn key OFF 3 Connect the green Test Mode connectors Use F4 DJC LOCATION from the Information menu for test mode connectors location 4 Connect the Clear Memory connectors Use F4 DJC LOCATION from the Information menu for test mode connectors location u Turn key ON Do not start engine ECS Lamp should turn ON The DTC that is flashed should correctly identify the vehicle under test DTC 11 identifies a California emissions vehicle DTC 12 identifies a Federal emissions vehicle
407. erating instructions for Mode 1 ENTRY are included in this section Note that early model Acura vehicles did not have a Service Check Connector SCC To obtain DTCs from these vehicles it is not necessary to use the SCC jumper The Information Mode Menu will display F5 ECU LOCATION if the SCC jumper is not required or it will display F2 SCC LOCATION if the SCC jumper is required Detailed operating instructions for using Mode 1 ENTRY with Acura vehicles are included in the following procedure When Mode F1 ENTRY and F0 HOW TO READ are selected the tester informs you if the Service Check Connector SCC jumper must be connected to the vehicle SCC The location of the SCC is available by selecting Mode F2 SCC LOCATION from the Information menu If necessary connect the jumper to the SCC Honda Acura Service Typical Acura ECU Check Connector Jumper To read DTC codes on Acura vehicles you must locate the ECU and observe the flashing LEDs If you are not sure where the ECU is located select Submode F5 ECU LOCATION from the Information Mode menu If necessary refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further instructions Follow the detailed instructions on the following pages to read the DTCs Once the DTCs have been read the tester can define the code A complete list of Acura is also included in ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs on page 13 MODE F1 DTC ENTRY When Mod
408. es NISSAN 13 SELECTING THE VEHICLE MANUFACTURER Y MAZDA MITSUBISHI gt NISSAN NISSAN 1984 2002 SELECT MODEL YEAR SELECT MODEL 240 SX YES NO SELECT ENGINE 2 4L 14 YES NO 1994 NISSAN 240 SX 2 4L 14 KA24DE O or 5 sec SELECT MODE F1 DTC ENTRY F5 SYSTEM TESTS F8 INFORMATION Nissan Vehicle Selection O O Enter model year o9 Used to answer questions in tester display EXIT Return to previous display 14 NISSAN TEST MODES 6 TEST MODES When the Select Mode menu is displayed test modes available for Nissan vehicles may be selected Operating instructions for test modes other than DTC ENTRY DTCs and OBD Controls are included in Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section You may select these modes without connecting the tester to the vehicle READING CODES Detailed operating instructions for using Modes F1 DTC Entry and F2 DTC with Nissan vehicles are included in the following procedures Remember that 1 Entry is automatically displayed with Nissan vehicles that have NONE as the adapter type listed in the Vehicles and Systems table and F2 is automatically displayed with Nissan vehicles that have as the adapter type listed in the Vehicles and Systems table Operating instructions for Mode F4 OBD Controls are included in OBD CONTROLS on page 22 NOTE Before testing perform the System Test Sub
409. est Modes OBD II Systems section for operating instructions and test mode information HYUNDAI 5 HYUNDAI SPECIFIC INFORMATION 2 HYUNDAI SPECIFIC INFORMATION The Hyundai vehicles covered by the Asian Imports Cartridge are separated into two different sections within the Asian Imports Operator s Manual The vehicle s on board system will determine which section of the Operator s Manual will need to be used Vehicles that are OBD II certified have information about the operating test modes in the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section of the Operator s Manual Vehicles that have OBD or OBDI systems have test mode information described in this section of the Operator s Manual In these sections you will find information on test modes available how to connect the tester to the vehicle and operating instructions for the different test modes A complete list of Hyundai Diagnostic Trouble Codes is included at the back of each section To determine which section of the Operator s Manual to use for diagnostic information and instructions look at Adapter Type of the Vehicle and Systems chart If the vehicle you are testing has an OBD II adapter type use the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section of the Operator s Manual If the vehicle you are testing does not have the OBD II Adapter Type use this section to diagnose the vehicle under test 6 HYUNDAI TEST MODES AVAILABLE 3 TEST MODES AVAILABLE The following test modes are ava
410. ester display ENTER Confirm Power up display EXIT Return to previous display 10 HONDA TEST MODES 6 TEST MODES When the Select Mode menu is displayed test modes available for Honda vehicles may be selected You may select Mode 1 ENTRY Mode F5 SYSTEM TESTS or Mode F8 INFORMATION without connecting the tester to the vehicle General operating instructions for the test modes are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section Note that early model Honda vehicles did not have a Service Check Connector SCC To obtain DTCs from these vehicles it is not necessary to use the SCC jumper The Information menu will display F5 ECU LOCATION ifthe SCC jumper is not reguired or it will display F2 SCC LOCATION ifthe SCC jumper is reguired Detailed operating instructions for using Mode F1 ENTRY with Honda vehicles are included in the following procedure READING CODES When Mode F1 ENTRY and F0 HOW TO READ are selected the tester informs you if the Service Check Connector SCC jumper must be connected to the vehicle SCC The location of the SCC is available by selecting Mode F2 SCC LOCATON from the Information menu If necessary connect the jumper to the SCC To read DTC codes on Honda vehicles you must locate the ECU and observe the flashing LEDs If you are not sure where the ECU is located select Mode F5 ECU LOCATION from the Information menu If necessary refer to the Common Test Mode
411. evious test menu Submode F2 DTC Library An OBD II ECU is capable of setting a which indicates the failed circuit or component In some cases reading DTCs from the ECU may reveal multiple stored DTCs However the ECU is programmed to potentially store several hundred DTCs F2 DTC Library enables you to obtain text description information for each powertrain DTC available for display The DTC Library consists of a combination of DTCs defined by the manufacturer specifically for the vehicle under test and DTCs defined by the Society of Automotive Engineers SAE For any number that is not defined by the manufacturer of the vehicle under test a description defined by Society of Automotive Engineers SAE recommended practice J2012 will be displayed A specific DTC may be entered individually or you can scroll through the entire DTC list To display the DTC Library do the following 1 Press QE to select OBD II Toolpak from the Select Mode menu 2 Press GE to select DTC Library from the OBD II Toolpak menu The key help screen will be displayed 3 Use the tester keys 9 to enter the four digit number of the for which information is desired 4 Press ENIE to display the DTC number and text description Use or D to scroll through the DTC list Holding the or D key causes continuous scrolling A text description of the code will be displayed 5 Press 2 0 to return to the enter DTC number scre
412. facturers that mention the use of an analog voltmeter to read manual DTCs the Mastertech Oscilloscope may be used Set up the single channel oscilloscope and make connections the same way as the analog voltmeter above Choose the 20v division scale and a slow time division e g 1 2 sec division the DTCs will be shown as a waveform on the display Note that manually retrieving DTCs from 1983 88 Toyota vehicles requires you to locate and jumper the Diagnostic Connector The vehicles that require the use of a jumper are noted in the column Adapter in the Toyota coverage table found at the beginning of this section Refer to the section on manually reading DTCs from the 1983 88 Toyota vehicles in this section Submode F0 How To Read This submode provides information on how to manually read DTCs from the vehicle Step by step screen instructions provide information to correctly set up the vehicle ECU This is performed by following the tester instruction screens If you have trouble additional DTC retrieval information is described below If you refer to the factory service manual for this information make sure that you are following the correct steps for the system you are working on Submode F1 Enter This submode provides you with a description of how to obtain DTC information from the ECU and how to enter this information into the tester On Toyota vehicles there is one method to enter manually read DTCs which is t
413. fewer parameters using the CUSTOM LIST function Select only the parameters needed for a test For example you can look at just an oxygen sensor signal and get an update of 7 or 8 times a second 8 APPENDICES IF YOU RE HAVING A PROBLEM NOT ALL PARAMETERS DISPLAYED Possible Cause The vehicle is not reporting all of the parameters The Asian Imports software queries the vehicle s ECU to determine what parameters are supported by the ECU on OBD II compliant vehicles The tester then creates a data list based on these parameters If the vehicle contains a particular sensor but does not tell the TESTER that it supports that parameter e g a downstream oxygen sensor the software will not display that parameter Recommendation Diagnosis must be performed based on other diagnostic data or procedures TESTER DISPLAYS TEST RESULTS MESSAGE NO ON BOARD TEST RESULTS ENTER Possible Cause This mode is not supported by this vehicle Recommendation Try a different test mode This display can occur in O2S Results mode if the vehicle manufacturer supports O2S testing via a different mode Some manufacturers use the non continuous version of the On Board Tests mode to report the results of oxygen sensor testing WRONG DISPLAY AFTER POWER IS APPLIED ALL 87 89 FORD 81 89 ECA ECM PLUS SELECT F0 STAR MODE MOLDEL YEAR 198 F1 TECH 1 MODE Possible Causes Wrong master cartridge is i
414. from the vehicle how to clear DTCs from the vehicle or tester memory obtain a text description of entered or selected DTCs and review entered or selected DTCs as a result of manually retrieving codes from the ECU Typical ECU ECU LED 1 02 MONITOR LAMP A EG ECU LED TEST CONNECTORS 02 MONITOR LAMP Manually Reading DTCs To read DTC codes on Subaru vehicles you must connect the Read Memory or Test Mode connectors on the vehicle then observe the instrument panel ECS lamp If the ECS lamp is on locate the ECU and observe the flashing LED If you do not know where the ECU is located select Mode F5 ECU Location from the Information menu If necessary refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further instructions Follow the detailed instructions on the following pages to manually read the DTCs Once the DTCs have been manually read from the ECU you can input the DTC into the tester so the tester can define the code A 14 SUBARU TEST MODES complete list of Subaru DTCs is also included in SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs page 22 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP MIL MODE F1 DTC ENTRY When Mode F1 DTC ENTRY is selected the tester displays five submodes FO HOW TO READ 1 ENTER DTC s F2 DTC LIST F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC s Submode F0 How To Read This submode provides information on how to manually read DTCs from the vehicle Step by step screen instru
415. g J1850 41 6K PWM Protocol Uses a two wire 5 volt bus communicating at 41 600 bits second using Pulse Width Modulation PWM data encoding ISO 9141 2 Protocol Uses a single wire 12 volt bus communicating at 10 400 bits second using UART data encoding A vehicle manufacturer can satisfy the OBD II requirements by implementing any one of the three protocols The OBD II Scan Tool must provide support for all three protocols in order to allow it to communicate with all OBD II vehicles APPENDICES 3 II OXYGEN SENSOR LOCATION INFORMATION B OBD II OXYGEN SENSOR LOCATION INFORMATION OBD compliant engine management systems use a new naming convention for oxygen sensors 025 The need for this sensor convention was required because of the OBD II system s use of a downstream O2S O2S location information is divided into cylinder bank and O2S location Bank 1 contains the sensor that is downstream from the engine cylinder bank which has number 1 cylinder Bank 2 contains the sensor opposite the cylinder Bank 1 Additionally O2S location is separated into upstream and downstream relative to the catalytic converter For in line engines and V configuration engines with Y exhaust systems and one O2S ahead of the catalytic converter O2S 1 15 the upstream sensor and O2S 2 is the downstream sensor This results in the naming convention bank location Examples are O2S BI SI bank 1 upstream O2S B1 S2 bank 1 downstream
416. g of this section Refer to the section on manually reading DTCs from the 1994 95 Mitsubishi vehicles in this section MITSUBISHI 17 TEST MODES To manually read DTCs on select 1994 95 Mitsubishi vehicles locate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL and observe the flashing MIL Follow the detailed instructions on the following pages to manually read the DTCs Once the DTCs have been manually read from the ECU the tester can define the code A complete list of Mitsubishi DTCs is also included in MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs on page 25 Submode F0 How To Read This submode provides information on how to manually read DTCs from the vehicle Step by step screen instructions provide information to correctly set up the vehicle ECU This 15 performed by following the tester instruction screens If you have trouble additional DTC retrieval information 1s described below If you refer to the manual for this information make sure that you are following the correct steps for the system that you are working on Submode F1 Enter DTC s On Mitsubishi vehicles the Enter DTCs submode allows you to enter manually read DTCs This submode provides you with a text description of the numeric DTC that was entered into the tester The Enter DTC Submode displays two question marks for DTC Entry The tester screen prompts you to enter the DTCs read from an analog voltmeter or Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Be careful when readin
417. g the DTC from the analog voltmeter or MIL Incorrect voltmeter or MIL interpretation can cause the wrong DTC description to be displayed Once all DTCs have been manually read and recorded enter each DTC into the tester as described in the COMMON TEST MODES I section Mitsubishi service and repair information indicates that Code 0 1s supported for OBD systems Code 0 refers to ECU related failures and 1s valid when the engine MIL does not illuminate or will not illuminate for 2 seconds when turning ignition on Refer to the service manual for further explanation of Code 0 Refer to the appropriate procedure for manually reading ECU LED DTCs on the following pages Malfunction Indicator Lamp FIGURE 1 4 Malfunction Indicator Lamp To manually read DTCs from models that use 12 pin or 12 pin and 16 pin DLC and analog voltmeter do the following DLC type is vehicle dependent refer to information displayed on tester FO HOW TO READ for DLC type 1 Locate the 12 pin or 12 pin and 16 pin Diagnostic Connector 18 MITSUBISHI TEST MODES 2a 12 PIN DLC ONLY Connect analog voltmeter red lead to pin 1 diagnostic terminal and voltmeter black lead to pin 12 ground terminal of diagnostic connector PIN 1 PIN 12 FIGURE 1 5 Most Mitsubishi Vehicles 2b 12 PIN and 16 PIN DLC ONLY Connect analog voltmeter red lead to pin 25 of 12 pin DLC and black lead to pin 5 of 16 pin DLC PIN 5 PIN 25 E E
418. ghter The power cable may also be directly connected to the battery via the optional battery clip adapter P N 02001636 NOTE Since the cigarette lighter can be switched some tests require that the power cable be directly connected to the battery via the battery clip adapter 4 Turn on the tester and select the application software that you will be using Verify that the correct screen is displayed The tester should display a screen similar to the one below ASIAN IMPORTS 83 98 lt ENTER gt Tester Stand Alone Display 5 If the display is correct press 243 If the display is not correct refer to IF YOU RE HAVING A PROBLEM on page 7 of APPENDICES 6 Follow the instructions on the following page to select the vehicle type you are testing by entering required vehicle information into the tester NOTE When removing the Nissan Check Adapter Cable from the vehicle DLC remember to depress the retaining tab on the vehicle DLC Failure to do so could cause wiring harness damage 12 NISSAN SELECTING THE VEHICLE 5 SELECTING THE VEHICLE Once you ve pressed GUAE from the power up screen the following steps must be performed to select the manufacturer model year model and engine type of the vehicle being tested Remember if you make a mistake you can always press 248 to go back to the previous menu SELECTING THE MANUFACTURER A menu of manufacturers available for testing is displayed i
419. he Enter DTC submode The Enter DTC submode has two question marks on the tester display for entering the DTC The tester screen prompts you to enter the DTCs read off the analog voltmeter or the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Be careful when reading the DTC from the analog voltmeter or MIL Incorrect MIL interpretation can cause the wrong DTC description to be displayed Once all DTCs have been manually read and recorded enter each DTC into the tester as described in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section Specific instructions for manually reading Toyota analog voltmeter or MIL DTCs are on the following page manually read DTCs From 1986 88 Toyota Vehicles using the Instrument Panel Malfunction Indicator Lamp do the following 1 Set the vehicle initial conditions by making sure that battery voltage is 11 volts or more throttle valve fully closed throttle position sensor IDL contacts closed transmission or transaxle in Neutral position accessories switched OFF engine at normal operating temperature 2 Turn ignition key to ON engine OFF 3 Locate the 17 pin Diagnostic Jumper Connector press F8 DJC LOCATION from the Information menu for help on DJC location 4 Jumper T or TE1 and EI terminals by connecting the single wire Toyota Jumper P N 02002075 to the vehicle s 17 pin DJC TOYOTA 25 TEST MODES 5 Dashboard MIL will begin flashing DTCs The first number of MIL flashes will equ
420. he tester CHRYSLER IMPORTS 13 SELECTING THE VEHICLE 5 SELECTING THE VEHICLE Once you ve pressed 19 9 from the power up screen the following steps must be performed to select the manufacturer model year model and engine type of the vehicle being tested Remember if you make a mistake you can always press 248 to go back to the previous menu SELECTING THE MANUFACTURER A menu of manufacturers available for testing is displayed in a scrolling menu You can scroll down one screen at a time by pressing or up one screen at a time by pressing M Press or to scroll one manufacturer at a time until the arrow is opposite CHRY IMPORTS Then press to select SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR Once the manufacturer is selected the Select Model Year menu is displayed Press the last two digits of the year model being tested for 1990 models 6 D for 1991 models and so on SELECTING THE MODEL The Model Select menu displays models available for testing Press the key until the model being tested is displayed then press the key SELECTING THE ENGINE AND ENGINE TYPE Next the Engine Select menu is displayed Press Qe until the engine and engine type of the vehicle is displayed then press For some vehicles you will also be asked to select the emissions type CA or FED and or the drive type AWD or FWD VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY After the vehicle type is selected the tester displays a summary scr
421. he tester The description of the entered or selected DTC will be displayed along with a numerical summary of the entered or selected DTC Review DTC is intended to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTCs that you have encountered during diagnosis Submode F4 Clear DTC s This submode has two options for you to choose Option is to view text screens that provide information on how to clear the DTCs from ECU memory This is performed by tester keypad presses Option F1 clears the tester memory of DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester 14 HONDA HONDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 7 HONDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS DTCs available for Honda vehicles are listed in the following tables Some code numbers have different descriptors depending on the selected vehicle Only codes available for the selected vehicle are displayed by the tester YEAR 1995 DC DESCRIPTOR NO 1985 0 FAULTY ECU OR MIL CIRCUIT 1 02 OR O2S CIRCUIT FAILURE FAULTY ECU MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE R N FAULTY ECU MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE SENSOR OR TPS CIRCUIT FAILURE CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL O N O CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL SENSOR OR IAT FAILURE 11 IDLE MIXTURE ADJ SENSOR CKT FAIL 12 EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE FAULTY ECU 13 BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE 14 FAULTY ECU 1
422. he voltmeter needle will deflect between 2 5 and 5 volts every 0 6 seconds 8 Disconnect Toyota single wire jumper 9 Erase DTCs when all repairs are completed 29 TEST MODES Submode F2 DTC List This submode provides you with a way to view all possible ECU DTCs including DTC numbers and descriptions You can also select the DTCs obtained from the analog voltmeter or MIL as an alternative way of entering DTCs into tester s memory As you scroll through the available DTCs you can view a description of the DTC obtained from the analog voltmeter or MIL You can Select the DTC on the tester screen for later review or printing Refer to Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further information Submode F3 Review DTC s This submode provides a way of reviewing DTCs that you selected or entered into the tester The description of the entered or selected DTC will be displayed along with a numerical summary ofthe entered or selected DTC Review DTC is intended to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTCs that you have encountered during diagnosis Submode F4 Clear This submode has two options for you to choose Option FO is to view text screens that provide information on how to clear the DTCs from ECU memory This is performed by tester keypad presses Option F1 clears the tester memory of DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The clear DTC s mode is
423. helpful and provides information that you would normally have to locate in a service manual MODE F2 DTC Submode F1 Read Enter DTC s This submode is available on 1989 94 Toyota Vehicles The purpose of the Read Enter submode is to command the Inactive system ECU to flash DTCs on the dashboard MIL After the DTC is read from the MIL a description of the DTCs can then be displayed on the tester screen If a Toyota or Lexus system is determined as Inactive the tester will command the ECU to begin flashing the DTC on the system MIL The F1 READ ENTER DTC s submode displays a message informing you that the tester has initiated DTC flashing on the MIL and will hold in that mode until you have read the DTC s on the MIL After the DTC is read from the MIL the tester screen will change to a DTC entry screen At that screen type in the DTC to obtain a description of the DTC To access the Read Enter DTC s submode do the following 1 Press B to select DTCs from the select mode menu 2 Press to select READ ENTER DTC s from the DTCs menu 3 The tester displays a message indicating DTCs are being flashed on the MIL Look at the MIL to read the flashes and determine the DTC When the DTC cycle is repeated on the MIL and you have recorded the DTC press TOYOTA 29 TEST MODES DTCS BEING OUTPUT READ ON MIL DONE YES 4 Use the tester keypad to enter the DTC displayed on the vehicle system ECU then press 19 9
424. hicle being tested Remember if you make a mistake you can always press 248 to go back to the previous menu SELECTING THE MANUFACTURER A menu of manufacturers available for testing is displayed in a scrolling menu You can scroll down one screen at a time by pressing or up one screen at a time by pressing Press or OI to scroll one manufacturer at a time until the gt arrow is opposite Daihatsu Then press 1959 to select SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR Once the manufacturer is selected the Select Model Year menu is displayed Press the last two digits of the year model being tested for 1990 models 6 D for 1991 models and so on SELECTING THE MODEL The Model Select menu displays models available for testing Press the M key until the model being tested is displayed then press the key SELECTING THE ENGINE Next the Engine Select menu is displayed Press until the engine type of the vehicle is displayed then press VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY After the vehicle type is selected the tester displays a summary screen of the selected vehicle Information displayed includes the year manufacturer model engine size and type and additional information such as the type of fuel system SELECT MODE MENU When the above steps are completed the Select Mode menu displays the test modes available for the selected vehicle and system Refer to TEST MODES on page 8 and the Common Test Modes OBD OBDI Systems sectio
425. ifier PIDs are hexadecimal numbers used to identify parameters used by the Data List SNAPSHOT and Freeze Frame modes Pump Position Potentiometer Pressure Regulator Control Prepare Pressure Park Reverse Neutral Drive Low Programmable Read Only Memory Power Steering Solenoid Vacuum Valve Pressure Switch Module Power Steering Pressure Pulse Width Module Pulse Width Modulation The method used to encode the data in the 41 6 Kbit sec version of the J1850 protocol Pxxxx Readiness Tests RECIRC REF REG RF R amp R RR RS232 RST RT S R Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC xxxx The SAE has defined a standardized set of five character alpha numeric DTCs At this time only Powertrain P codes have been defined In the future DTCs will be defined for chassis faults C codes body faults B codes and vehicle network faults U codes The SAE defined Powertrain DTCs are in the range P0100 to P0999 DTCs with designations of P1000 or greater are unique to the individual manufacturers Rear Radiator The Readiness Tests mode allows you to display the status of the vehicle s on board monitors which monitor the operation of the emissions related components These monitors must be run in order for the DTC and Test Result displays to accurately reflect the condition of the vehicle s emissions related components Recirculation Reference Regulator Right Front Re
426. ighter The power cable may also be directly connected to the battery via the optional battery clip adapter P N 02001636 NOTE Since the cigarette lighter can be switched some tests require that the power cable be directly connected to the battery via the battery clip adapter 4 Turn on the tester and select the application software that you will be using Verify that the correct screen is displayed The tester should display a screen similar to the one below ASIAN IMPORTS 83 02 lt ENTER gt FIGURE 1 2 Tester stand alone display 5 If the display is correct press 244 If the display is not correct refer to JF YOU RE HAVING A PROBLEM on page 7 of APPENDICES 6 Follow the instructions in SELECTING THE VEHICLE on page 15 to select the vehicle type you are testing by entering required vehicle information into the tester 14 MITSUBISHI SELECTING THE VEHICLE 5 SELECTING THE VEHICLE Once you ve pressed from the power up screen the following steps must be performed to select the manufacturer model year model and engine type of the vehicle being tested Remember if you make a mistake you can always press 248 to go back to the previous menu SELECTING THE MANUFACTURER A menu of manufacturers available for testing is displayed in a scrolling menu You can scroll down one screen at a time by pressing or up one screen at a time by pressing Qe Press D or to scroll one manufacturer at a time
427. ilable when testing Hyundai vehicles Operating instructions for test modes other than F1 DTC Entry and F2 DTC are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section There are Hyundai specific instructions for operating the test modes in Section 6 Test Modes MODE F1 DTC ENTRY SUBMODE F0 HOW TO READ SUBMODE Fl ENTER DTC s SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST SUBMODE F3 REVIEW DTC SUBMODE F4 CLEAR DTC s MODE F2 DTC SUBMODE F1 READ DTC s SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST SUBMODE F3 REVIEW DTC SUBMODE F4 CLEAR DTC s MODE F5 SYSTEM TESTS SUBMODE F0 PREP VEHICLE MODE F8 INFORMATION SUBMODE F1 DLC LOCATION SUBMODE F3 ID INFO SUBMODE F4 DJC LOCATION 1 Note that not all models support or DLC Location test modes The Tester will automatically choose which test mode to display depending on your vehicle selection HYUNDAI 7 GETTING STARTED 4 GETTING STARTED Before operating the Asian Imports Cartridge with a Hyundai vehicle the following steps must be performed 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Refer to the chart in Section 1 to see if the vehicle you are testing requires the Check Adapter Cable If so connect the Mitsubishi Chrysler I mports Hyundai Check Adapter Cable to the end of the DLC cable then connect the yellow connector end to the vehicle Check connector Mitsubishi Chrysler Imports Hyundai CHECK ADAPTER CABLE 3 Plug the tester power cable into the vehicle cig
428. inactive of the A C system AIR BAG DTCS Lexus AB DTCs are available on select late model Lexus vehicles equipped with the air bag system AB DTCs are set by the AB ECU when problems with but not limited to the ECU squib malfunction and warning light circuit are detected The Asian Imports application cartridge supports reading AB DTCs automatically or manually depending on the state active or inactive of the AB system A NOTE ABOUT THE MIL On some of the above systems the DTC output line is routed to the dashboard mounted system MIL which flashes out the DTC when the ECU is commanded to the diagnostic mode In this case the tester is connected to the vehicle DLC to command the ECU for the system under test into the diagnostic mode When that process is started the DTC can be read from the MIL The DTC can then be entered into the tester for a description Refer to System Inquiry on page 13 in for more information on inactive system detection SYSTEMS COVERED BY THE SOFTWARE In order to take advantage of all possible systems available on the vehicle the Asian Imports application cartridge incorporates an advanced system inquiry strategy that identifies the systems on the vehicle as active or inactive Some Lexus vehicles can have a single active system where others can have up to six So the best possible way to identify the systems on your vehicle is to connect the tester to the Check and TDCL DLCs to determine the available acti
429. ing 14 COMMON TEST MODES II TEST MODES Oxygen sensor monitoring Oxygen sensor heater monitoring EGR system monitoring These tests can be Completed Not Completed or Not Supported Readiness Test Operation OBD II System and Vehicle Information The OBD II system is capable of identifying the likely area of a malfunction within the electronic engine control system Observe the following before beginning diagnostic service MIL OPERATION When excessive tailpipe emissions or powertrain component failure are detected by the OBD II system the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL will illuminate LOW FUEL TANK LEVEL Automobile manufacturers may disable READINESS tests which can be affected by running the vehicle out of fuel e g a monitor may become disabled when fuel tank volume 1 below 1596 of maximum fuel tank capacity ALTITUDE Automobile manufacturers may disable READINESS tests which can be affected by altitude e g READINESS test may become disabled when vehicle is operated above 8 000 feet elevation AMBIENT TEMPERATURE Automobile manufacturers may disable READINESS tests which can be affected by ambient temperature e g a READINESS test may become disabled when a vehicle is started below 20 F ambient POWER TAKE OFF UNIT Automobile manufacturers may disable READINESS tests which can be affected by power take off unit operation e g READINESS test may become disabled when a vehicle po
430. ing figure Remember the displays for other vehicles will be different SELECT MODE F1 DTC ENTRY F5 SYSTEM TESTS F8 INFORMATION SELECT MODE F4 DJC LOCATION F5 ECU LOCATION IN ENGINE AY COMPARTMENT BELOW THE MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR ON BRACKET BOLTED TO THE TRANSAXLE 4 Press 6 to return to the Information menu EXIT Return to Information menu COMMON TEST MODES 33 MODE F8 INFORMATION SUBMODE F5 ECU LOCATION Submode F5 ECU Location is available for select Nissan vehicles and all Acura Honda Infiniti Kia and Subaru vehicles The ECU Location test mode displays where the selected Electronic Control Unit ECU is located on the vehicle Depending on the vehicle being tested there may be one or more different ECUs The tester informs you if the ECU location is not applicable for the selected system To select ECU Location submode do the following 1 Press GE to select Information from the Select Mode menu 2 Press to select ECU Location from the Information menu 3 The tester displays the location ofthe selected ECU on the selected vehicle Some examples of ECU Location displays are shown in the following figure Remember the displays for other vehicles will be different SELECT MODE Y F1 DTC ENTRY F5 SYSTEM TESTS F8 INFORMATION SELECT MODE Y F4 DJC LOCATION F5 ECU LOCATION UNDER THE Y CARPET IN THE RT FRONT PASSENGER FOOTWELL
431. ing test modes are available when testing Mitsubishi vehicles Operating instructions for test modes other than the Entry and are included in the COMMON TEST MODES I section There are also Mitsubishi specific instructions for operating the test modes Refer to TEST MODES on page 17 MODE F1 DTC ENTRY Submode 0 How To Read Submode F1 Enter DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC Submode F4 Clear DTC s MODE F2 DTC Submode F1 Read DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC Submode F4 Clear DTC s MODE F5 SYSTEM TESTS Submode 0 Prep Vehicle MODE F8 INFORMATION Submode F1 DLC Location Submode F3 ID Info Submode F4 DJC Location Note that not all models support DJC or DLC Location Test modes The tester will automatically choose which test mode to display depending on your vehicle selection MITSUBISHI 13 GETTING STARTED 4 GETTING STARTED Before operating the Asian Imports Cartridge with a Mitsubishi vehicle the following steps must be performed 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Refer to the Vehicles and Systems table to see if the vehicle you are testing requires the Check Adapter Cable If so connect the Mitsubishi Check Adapter Cable to the end of the DLC cable then connect the yellow connector end to the vehicle Check connector FIGURE 1 1 Mitsubishi Check Adapter Cable 3 Plug the tester power cable into the vehicle cigarette l
432. inter EXIT Return to SELECT MODE menu Submode F2 Clear Info The Clear Information mode is used to clear DTCs from all vehicle ECUs along with any other diagnostic information which the controller has saved such as Freeze Data Clearing diagnostic information also clears the status of readiness tests NOTE making them incomplete It can take 30 to 60 minutes of vehicle drive and engine run time and in some cases longer to complete all of these EH tests if they are cleared Some inspection and maintenance programs require that the readiness tests be complete before the inspection can proceed When you select F2 CLEAR INFO you are first prompted with a warning message This 15 to prevent inadvertent clearing of codes If you press or in response to the prompt the tester will return to the DTC menu If you press in response to the prompt the tester will cause all OBD II controllers to clear all emissions related DTCs FREEZE DATA and READINESS TEST results When the function is complete the tester will display the screen ALL DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION CLEARED F2 CLEAR INFO Clear Al Diagnostic Info YES Continue NO Quit To clear DTCS do the following 1 Select F2 DTCs from the SELECT MODE menu 2 Select F2 CLEAR INFO from the DTCs menu 3 Press to clear DTCs A warning message will appear to prevent accidental clearing of codes A screen will then appear to confirm deletion of diagn
433. ion Fluid Temp Sensor Malfunction Output Speed Sensor VSS 1 Circuit Malfunction Engine Speed Input Circuit Malfunction Gear 1 Incorrect Ratio Gear 2 Incorrect Ratio Gear 3 Incorrect Ratio Gear 4 Incorrect Ratio Torque Converter Clutch System Malfunction Torque Converter Clutch System Electrical Problem 44 SUBARU SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 98 CONTINUED DTC P0748 P0753 P0758 P0760 P0763 P1100 P1101 P1102 P1103 P1104 P1107 P1108 P1120 P1121 P1122 P1124 P1141 P1142 P1143 P1144 P1300 P1400 P1401 P1402 P1420 P1421 P1422 P1423 P1440 P1441 P1442 DESCRIPTOR Pressure Control Solenoid Electrical Problem Shift Solenoid A Electrical Problem Shift Solenoid B Electrical Problem Shift Solenoid C Malfunction Shift solenoid C Electrical Problem Starter Switch Circuit Malfunction Neutral Position Switch Circuit Malfunction Pressure Sources Switching Solenoid Valve Circuit Malfunction Engine Torque Control Signal Circuit Malfunction TCS signal Circuit Malfunction Air Injection System Diagnosis Solenoid Valve Circuit Induction Control Solenoid Valve Circuit Starter Switch Circuit High Input Neutral Position Switch Circuit Low Input Pressure Sources Switch Solenoid Valve High Input TCS Signal Circuit High Input MAF Sensor Range Performance Problem High Input TPS Circuit Range Performance Problem Low Input Pressure Se
434. ion on Refer to the service manual for the current vehicle for further explanation of code 0 Refer to the appropriate procedure for manually reading analog voltmeter and MIL ECU DTCs on the following pages Manually reading DTCs from Hyundai vehicles that use 12 pin DLC and analog voltmeter 1 Locate the 12 pin Diagnostic Connector Use F1 DLC Location or F4 DJC Location from the Information menu for help on diagnostic connector location 2 Connect analog voltmeter red lead to pin 1 diagnosis terminal and voltmeter black lead to pin 12 ground terminal of diagnosis connector Set analog voltmeter to 20 volt scale PIN 12 PIN 1 3 Turn ignition switch to ON 12 HYUNDAI TEST MODES 4 DTC indication will begin on voltmeter Voltmeter will fluctuate 0 volts to 12 volts if DTCs are stored in the ECU If a DTC is stored in the ECU the first number of 12 volt 1 5 second indications will equal the 10 s digit of a 2 digit DTC After a 2 0 second pause the second number of 12 volt 0 5 second indications will equal the 1 s digit DTCs are separated by 0 volt indication for 3 0 seconds DTC 12 4 DTC SEPARATION Next DTC ay Indication Oseconas 3 sec 1 5 sec 2 2 sec 3 sec 5 If no malfunctions are present meter will read 12 volts once per second 6 After recording DTCs turn ignition switch off 7 Disconnec
435. is displayed in a scrolling menu You can scroll down one screen at a time by pressing or up one screen at a time by pressing M Press or OI to scroll one manufacturer at a time until the gt arrow is opposite KIA Then press to select SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR Once the manufacturer is selected the Select Model Year menu is displayed Press the last two digits of the year model being tested for 1994 models SELECTING THE MODEL The Model Select menu displays models available for testing Press the key until the model being tested is displayed then press the key SELECTING THE ENGINE Next the Engine Select menu is displayed Press until the engine type of the vehicle is displayed then press VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY After the vehicle type is selected the tester displays a summary screen of the selected vehicle Information displayed includes the year manufacturer model engine size and type and additional information such as the type of fuel system SELECT MODE MENU When the above steps are completed the Select Mode menu displays the test modes available for the selected vehicle and system Refer to Section 6 Test Modes and the Common Test Modes OBD OBDI Systems section for operating the test modes with Kia vehicles 6 KIA SELECTING THE VEHICLE MANUFACTURER ISUZU KIA LEXUS ENTER KIA 1994 SELECT SELECT MODEL SEPHIA YES NO SELECT ENGINE
436. is located select Mode F1 DLC LOCATION from the Information menu If necessary refer to Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further instructions Follow the detailed instructions on the following pages to manually read the DTCs Once the DTCs have been manually read from the MIL you can input the DTC into the tester so the tester can define the code A complete list of Kia is also included in Section 7 MODE F1 DTC ENTRY When Mode F1 ENTRY is selected the tester displays five submodes F0 HOW TO READ F1 ENTER DTC s F2 DTC LIST F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC s Manually Reading DTCs In order to manually read Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs on Kia vehicles for 1994 you must locate and jumper the data link connector then read the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL This method requires the single wire Kia jumper P N 02002075 that is placed across 2 pins of the 20 pin DLC The DTCs are flashed out on the dashboard mounted MIL Refer to the section on manually reading DTCs from the 1994 Kia vehicles in this section 8 KIA TEST MODES Instrument Panel Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Submode F0 How To Read This submode provides information on how to manually read DTCs from the vehicle Step by step screen instructions provide information to correctly set up the vehicle ECU This 15 performed by following the tester instruction screens If you have trouble additional DTC retrieval infor
437. is supported by the vehicle ECU F8 INFORMATION VIN XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX ENTER To display the VIN do the following 1 Select F8 INFORMATION from the SELECT MODE menu 2 Select F0 VIN from the SELECT TYPE menu Submode F1 S W CALIB ID The S W CALIBRATION ID selection is used for identification of the software calibration contained within the vehicle ECU Each software calibration ID uniquely identifies the software installed in the ECU Multiple calibration IDs may be reported for a ECU depending on software architecture A calibration ID number will have at least one unique software verification number This mode is only selectable when it is supported by the vehicle ECU COMMON TEST MODES II 27 TEST MODES F8 INFORMATION 1 S W ID S W CALIB ID 1 ESS 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX S W ID 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX To display the Software Calibration ID do the following 1 Select F8 INFORMATION from the SELECT MODE menu 2 Select F1 S W CALIB from the SELECT TYPE menu Submode F2 S W VERIF ID The SOFTWARE VERIFICATION NUMBER selection is used for determining whether emission related calibrations within the ECU software have been altered Software Verification Numbers are calculated based on memory content at the time of the reguest Any changes to calibration will be detected in the Software Verification Number This mode is only selectable when it is supported by the vehicle F8 INFO
438. is to view text screens that provide information on how to clear the DTCs from ECU memory This is performed by tester keypad presses Option F1 clears the tester memory from DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The clear DTC s mode is helpful and provides information that you would normally have to locate in a service manual 20 MAZDA TEST MODES MODE F2 DTC To read DTCs on all 1983 95 vehicles you will need to locate the vehicle DLC and connect the Mazda Check Adapter to the tester and vehicle To locate the DLC select F1 DLC Location from the Information menu If necessary refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further instructions When Mode F2 DTC is selected the tester displays four DTC submodes 1 READ F2 LIST F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC s Submode F1 Read DTC s This submode provides automated DTC retrieval from the vehicle ECU Step by step screen instructions guide you to connect the ORANGE Mazda Check adapter to the vehicle DLC and to start and warm the engine to normal operating temperature This is performed by following the tester instruction screens If you have trouble additional F1 READ DTC s retrieval information is described below This submode is available for all 1983 95 Mazda vehicles NOTE The Orange Mazda CHECK adapter has three DLC connectors and a single ground lead For engine diagnostics there are three options to facilitate a
439. it Malfunction Catalyst Efficiency Below Threshold Warm Up Catalyst Efficiency Below Threshold Main Catalyst Efficiency Below Threshold EVAP Control System Malfunction EVAP Purge System Incorrect Flow EVAP Control System Small Leak Detected EVAP Purge Control Valve Circuit Malfunction Purge Control Valve Circuit Open Purge Control Valve Circuit Shorted EVAP Control System Canister Close Valve Stuck Closed EVAP Control System Vent Control Valve Short to Ground EVAP Control System Vent Control Valve Short to Battery Voltage EVAP Control System Fuel Tank Differential Pressure Sensor Malfunction 26 HYUNDAI HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1996 98 CONTINUED DESCRIPTION P0451 P0452 P0453 P0455 P0500 P0501 P0505 P0506 P0507 P0510 P0562 P0563 P0605 P0700 P0705 P0707 P0708 P0712 P0713 P0715 P0717 P0722 P0727 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0740 P0742 P0743 P0747 EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Signal not Plausible EVAP Control System Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Signal Low EVAP Control System Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Signal High EVAP Control System Incorrect Purge Flow Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit Out of Range Idle Speed Control System Malfunction Idle RPM Lower than Expected Idle RPM Higher than Expected Closed Throttle Sensor Idle Switch Malfunction Power Supply System Low Voltage Power Supply System
440. it will continue to retry communication approximately every 3 seconds If the communication problem is resolved e g the ignition is switched to ON and communication begins the tester will automatically proceed to the next phase If communication cannot be established see Appendix D 8 COMMON TEST MODES II TEST MODES 4 TEST MODES Once communication with the vehicle has been established a select mode menu is displayed In some cases a readiness tests warning message is displayed prior to the menu See Mode FI Readiness on page 14 SELECT MODE MENU The Select Mode menu allows you to perform basic testing on the vehicle You can select the desired function by pressing the key indicated to the left of the function The menu automatically scrolls every 3 seconds until you press or GB at which time scrolling stops Pressing or will then cause the menu to manually scroll SELECT MODE AV FO Datalist F1 Readiness F2 DTCs SELECT MODE F3 Snapshot F4 OBD Controls F5 System Tests SELECT MODE F8 Information F9 OBD II Toolpak If the vehicle you are testing contains more than one ECU the tester will display a list of all ECUs which have responded during the initialization process See Multiple ECUs on page 11 MODE F0 DATA LIST The DATA LIST mode allows you to view the current state of diagnostic data parameters as reported by the vehicle s ECUs DATA LIST MENU F0 Display Data F1
441. itsubishi Check adapter to the vehicle DLC and to start and warm the engine to normal operating temperature This is performed by following the tester instruction screens If you have trouble additional F1 READ DTC s retrieval information is described below This submode is available for all 1989 93 and select 1987 1988 and 1994 95 Mitsubishi vehicles If you are unsure of the Read DTC test application check the Code Type column in the Mitsubishi Vehicle Coverage table found at the beginning of this section If the ECU Modes column indicates Autocodes then the vehicle supports F1 READ DTC s NOTE When reading DTCs from Mitsubishi vehicles make sure the engine is at EH normal operating temperature and testing is performed in a well ventilated area To read DTCs from all 1989 93 and selected 1987 1988 and 1994 95 Mitsubishi ECUS using the F1 Read DTCs mode in Asian Imports cartridge do the following 1 Insert Asian cartridge into MASTERTECH or TECH 1 TECH 1A 2 Connect Mitsubishi Check adapter Yellow to DLC 3 Connect the Check adapter to the vehicle DLC Press F1 DLC location from the Information menu for Data Link Connector location assistance 4 Power MASTERTECH or TECH I TECH 1A with 12v power cable 5 Select Mitsubishi vehicle to test 6 Press F2 DTCs from Mitsubishi test mode menu 7 Press F1 READ DTCs submode from DTC test menu Follow instructions on the tester display MITSUBISHI 23 TEST MODES
442. itsubishi Chrysler Imports jumper P N 02002106 Use F4 DJC Location from the Information menu for diagnostic connector location Pin 1 Pin 5 3 Turn ignition switch ON 4 Observe the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL to read DTCs MIL will turn ON OFF if DTCs are stored in ECU If a DTC is stored in ECU the first number of MIL flashes indicates the 10 s digit of a 2 digit DTC After a 2 0 second pause the second number of MIL flashes indicates 15 digit Each DTC is separated by MIL OFF for 3 0 seconds DTC 12 DTC SEPARATION Next DTC a Indication 1 17 0 O seconas 3 sec 1 5 sec gt 2 sec L A 3 sec 5 If no malfunctions are present MIL will read ON once per second 6 After recording DTCs turn ignition switch off 7 Disconnect jumper leads 8 Erase DTCs when all repairs are completed Submode F2 List This submode provides you with a way to view all possible ECU DTCs including DTC numbers and descriptions You can also select the DTCs obtained from the analog voltmeter or MIL as an alternative way of entering DTCs into tester s memory As you scroll through the available DTCs you can view a description of the DTC obtained from the analog voltmeter or MIL You can select the DTC on the tester screen for later review or printing Refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further information CHRYSLER IMPORTS 21 TEST MODES
443. l mode provides information on how to clear DTCs that the user would normally have to locate in the vehicle s service manual Submode F0 From ECU This submode provides step by step text screen instructions on how to clear DTCs from the ECU memory These instructions are specific to the vehicle under test and should be followed closely The dealer uses this mode to clear the DTCs from the memory after the affected part is repaired Submode F0 From Tester This submode clears the tester memory of all DTCs that the user has entered or selected from the tester SUBARU 21 SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 7 SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs DTCs available for Subaru vehicles are listed in the following tables Some code numbers have different descriptors depending on the selected vehicle Only codes available for the selected vehicle are displayed by the tester OBD OBD I SYSTEMS YEAR 1983 DESCRIPTOR 1983 11 IGNITION PULSE FAILURE IGN PULSE SYS ENG OFF CC HA 12 STARTER SWITCH IN OFF MODE IGN PULSE SYS ENG OFF CC SL 13 STARTER SWITCH IN ON MODE DUTY SOLENOID VLV REMAINS OFF 14 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE VACUUM SW 1 OFF TEST MODE ONLY 15 SOLENOID VALVE 3 REMAINS OFF 21 AIR FLOW METER FLAP SEIZED IGN PULSE SYS ENG OFF HC HA 22 PRESSURE SWITCH FIXED ON OFF POS IGN PULSE SYS ENG OFF HC SL 23 IDLE SW FIXED ON OFF POSITION O2 SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 24 FULL SW
444. l through the pre programmed pairs with the or key until you find a pair with ENGINE SPEED Fix ENGINE SPEED by pressing if ENGINE SPEED is the top parameter GD if it is the bottom Then scroll the other half of the display with either the or key until BARO is displayed FIXES TOP PARAMETER ENGINE SPEED 2300 RPM BARO kPa in Hg 102 303 ENGINE SPEED 2300 RPM BARO kPa in Hg 102 30 3 FIKES BOTTOM PARAMETER Figure B Figure A SELECT MODE AV F0 DATA LIST F1 PRINT DATA F2 TROUBLE CODE BAROMETRIC PRESS 100mmHg VEHICLE SPEED 0 KPH 0 MPH COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F VEHICLE SPEED 0 KPH 0 MPH VEHICLE SPEED COOLANT TEMP 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F COOLANT TEMP 40 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F DESIRED IDLE 797 RPM IDLE SWITCH ON COOLANT TEMP 40 104 F DESIRED IDLE 797 RPM COOLANT TEMP DESIRED IDLE 0 0 MPH 40 C 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 C 104 F 40 104 F 797 RPM INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 104 Data List Mode ACTIVE KEYS NO Scroll through displayed data parameters GI Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Return to test mode menu EXIT 4 COMMON TEST MODES I MODE F1 ENTRY 3 MODE Fl E
445. lay Control Circuit Random Misfire Detected Cylinder No 1 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 2 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 3 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 4 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 5 Misfire Detected Cylinder No 6 Misfire Detected Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Malfunction Crankshft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction Camshft Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction Ignition Coil No 1 Primary Circuit Malfunction Ignition Coil No 2 Primary Circuit Malfunction EGR Flow Malfunction EGR System Failure EGR Solenoid Malfunction Bank 1 Catalyst Efficiency Below Threshold Warm Up Catalyst Bank 1 Efficiency Below Threshold Catalytic Converter Efficiency failure Warm Up Catalyst Bank 2 Efficiency Below Threshold MITSUBISHI 37 MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 98 DTC DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED P0440 EVAP Emission Control System Malfunction P0441 Evaporative Purge Flow Monitor Failure P0442 EVAP Control system Small Leak Detected P0443 EVAP Control System Purge Control Valve Circuit Malfunction P0446 EVAP Control System Vent Control Malfunction P0450 EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Malfunction P0455 EVAP Control System Large Leak Detected 0500 VSS Malfunction P0505 Motor Circuit Malfunction P0510 Closed TPS Switch Malfunction P0551 PSP Sensor Circuit P0600 PCM Failure or CCD PCM Communication P0601 Internal Controller Failure
446. le or a custom list of parameters from the chosen ECU s SELECT ECU FO ALL ECUs F1 10 ENGINE F2 18 TRANS DATA LIST SETUP FO Select ECU F1 Select D L Parameters Multiple ECUs Diagnostic parameter data can be selected from all ECUs or individual ECUS that the tester has identified This mode should be set up before display data is selected to ensure your desired ECU data is being displayed F0 DATALIST F1 DATA SETUP FO SELECT ECU XX c description To select multiple ECUs vehicles with multiple only do the following 1 Select F0 DATA LIST from the SELECT MODE menu 2 Select F1 DATA SETUP from the DATA LIST menu 3 Select F0 SELECT ECU from the DATA LIST SETUP menu COMMON TEST MODES II 11 TEST MODES 4 Select FO ALL ECUs or where n user selected and XX a description of the ECU from which you desire information 5 After selecting the desired ECU you are returned to the DATA LIST SETUP menu where the displayed diagnostic data parameters can be selected or you can exit the menu to the DATA LIST menu where the selected data list will be displayed Multiple ECU Display In some vehicles diagnostic information can be sent to the tester by more than one OBD II ECU For example both an engine and a transmission controller may report engine speed and throttle position to the tester The Asian Imports software provides support for multiple OBD II ECUs If there
447. le you are testing has an OBD II adapter type use the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section of the Operator s Manual If the vehicle you are testing does not have the OBD II Adapter Type use this section to diagnose the vehicle under test MAZDA 11 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 3 TEST MODES AVAILABLE The following test modes are available when testing Mazda vehicles Operating instructions for test modes other than the DTC Entry DTCs and OBD Controls are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section There are Mazda specific instructions for operating the test modes in Mazda Sections 6 and7 MODE F1 DTC ENTRY SUBMODE F0 HOW TO READ SUBMODE F1 ENTER DTC s SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST SUBMODE F3 REVIEW DTC SUBMODE F4 CLEAR DTC s MODE F2 DTC SUBMODE F1 READ DTC s SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST SUBMODE F3 REVIEW DTC SUBMODE F4 CLEAR DTC s MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS SUBMODE F0 SWITCH TEST SUBMODE F1 O28 MONITOR MODE F5 SYSTEM TESTS SUBMODE F0 PREP VEHICLE MODE F8 INFORMATION SUBMODE F1 DLC LOCATION SUBMODE F3 ID INFO 12 MAZDA GETTING STARTED 4 GETTING STARTED Before operating the Asian Imports Cartridge with a Mazda vehicle the following steps must be performed 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Refer to the Vehicles and Systems table to see if the vehicle you are testing requires the Check Adapter Cable If so connect the Mazda Check Adapter Cable to the end of the DLC c
448. les the instrument panel MIL flashes out four digit DTCs When DTCs are automatically read from the engine ECU with the tester DTCs are displayed on the tester as two digit The DTC display screen using this method will have both the two digit and four digit DTCs four digit DTC in parentheses For more information on 2 and 4 digit DTCs refer to the factory service manual NOTE DTC 23 3145 ECT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE Follow the Submode F0 Prepare Vehicle instructions to ensure proper vehicle preparation prior to testing The vehicle must be completely warmed up in order for the tester to communicate properly with the vehicle Submode F2 DTC List This submode provides you with a way to view all possible ECU DTCs including DTC numbers and descriptions You can also select the DTCs obtained from the analog voltmeter or MIL as an alternative way of entering DTCs into the tester s memory As you scroll through the available DTCs you can view a description of the DTC obtained from the analog voltmeter or MIL You can Select the DTC on the tester screen for later review or printing Refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further information Submode F3 Review DTC This submode provides you with a review of the DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The description of the entered or selected DTC will be displayed along with a numerical summary of the entered or selected DTC Review DTC is inte
449. lif AT 13 BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE 14 ELECTRONIC IDLE CONTROL FAILURE 15 IGNITION OUTPUT SIG OR FAIL 16 FUEL INJECTOR FAILURE 17 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 19 LOCK UP CONTROL SOL VALVE 20 ELECTRIC LOAD SENSOR 30 A T FI SIGNAL A 31 A T FI SIGNAL B 41 025 HEATER OR O28 HEATER CKT 42 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM 43 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM HONDA 19 HONDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1991 ri DESCRIPTOR NO 1991 0 FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 1 02 OR O2S CIRCUIT FAILURE O2 SENSOR A OR O2S A CKT FAIL 2 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE O2 SENSOR B OR 02 B CKT FAIL 3 MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE 4 CKP SENSOR OR CKP CIRCUIT FAIL VAC SWITCH OR VAC SWITCH CKT FAULTY ECU OR ECU CKT FAILURE 5 MAP SENSOR OR MAP CKT FAILURE 6 ECT SENSOR OR ECT CKT FAILURE 7 TP SENSOR OR TPS CIRCUIT FAILURE M T COOLANT SW A T SHFT POS SW 8 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR TDC IGNITION COIL SYS OR CKT FAIL 9 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR CYL CK ANGLE SENSOR CYL HF amp Si 10 IAT SENSOR OR IAT CKT FAILURE 11 ELECTRONIC IDLE CONTROL FAILURE 12 EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE EGR SYSTEM FAIL HF amp Calif AT 13 BARO SENSOR OR BARO CKT FAILURE 14 ELECTRONIC IDLE CONTROL FAILURE 15 IGNITION OUTPUT SIG OR CKT FAIL 16 FUEL INJECTOR FAILURE 17 VSS OR VSS CIRCUIT FAILURE 19 LOCK UP CONTROL SOL VALVE 20 ELECTRIC LOAD SENSOR 30 A T FI SIGNALA 31 A T FI SIGNAL B 41 025 HEATER O2S HEATER CKT
450. ll read constant 12 volts 7 After recording DTCs turn ignition switch off 8 Disconnect voltmeter and jumper leads 9 Erase DTCs when all repairs are completed NOTE EH connector views are tester side Manually Reading DTCs from Mazda Vehicles using Ford EEC IV engine control system and Ford s 6 pin plus 1 pin Data Link Connector 1 Locate the 1pin and 6pin Diagnostic Link Connector 18 MAZDA TEST MODES Data Link Connector STO Data Link Connector STI Mazda Ford Diagnostic Link Connector 2 6 pin and 1 pin DLC connect a suitable jumper wire from the self test input STI terminal 1 pin DLC single lead shell color gray or black to ground 3 Reading Key On Engine Off KOEO DTCs Warm engine to normal operating temperature Turn the ignition key off and wait 10 seconds Now turn the ignition key to run indication will begin on dashboard MIL The dashboard MIL will flash KOEO DTCs first then a separator code followed by Continuous DTCs see Figure M 2 For 3 digit DTCs the first set of MIL flashes will equal the 100s digit After a 2 0 second pause the second set of flashes will equal the 10 digit After another 2 0 second pause the third set of flashes will equal the 15 digit Then a 6 0 9 0 second pause between the separator code and KOEO or Continuous DTCs will occur If there are 2 or more DTCs of the same type there will be a 4 0 second pause between each DTC After recor
451. ltiple ECUs only The DTC information will then be displayed Generally 6 DTCs can be displayed at one time If more than 6 DTCs are reported by the ECU the tester will display a prompt in the lower right hand corner indicating that more DTCs are present but are not displayed Use the D O and keys to move through the list of DTCs A DTC description can be displayed by moving the next to the desired DTC and pressing 5 59 The and keys will scroll through the DTC descriptions A will display an f after the number to signify that there 15 freeze data available for that You can go directly to the FREEZE DATA display by pressing GP This performs exactly the same function as selecting FREEZE DATA from the SELECT MODE menu but saves you a few key presses 16 COMMON TEST MODES II TEST MODES ACTIVE KEYS Display the description for the selected DTC GB Go directly to FREEZE DATA G Print freeze data list if eguipped with serial printer Move through list of DTCs Return to previous menu Submode F1 Freeze Data The vehicle s ECU stores diagnostic data information about the state of the vehicle when a Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC occurs This data is referred to as Freeze Frame Data and can be read by the tester using the FREEZE DATA mode You can select this mode from the SELECT MODE menu If multiple ECUs are available the SELECT ECU menu is displayed once FREEZE D
452. lue is 1 If the meter displays 12 volts for 0 5 seconds then that digital value is 0 To get the value of the DTC add the decimal value of digital 1 s obtained in the meter deflection order DTCs are separated by 12 volt 3 second reading after the stop indication Pin 12 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON SINGLE DTC CYCLE 16 SECONDS METER DEFLECTION ORDER 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 12v EXP Next Indication seconas iS ls 18 5 5 18 HS sis 8 g of DTC 1 I I 1 1 1 1 DIGITAL VALUE Teej VALUE 4 1 Digital value corresponds with a 4 decimal value 4 The normal DTC condition is indicated by meter indications 2 6 which are 12 volt 1 5 second deflections separated by 0 volts for 0 5 seconds 5 After recording DTCs turn ignition switch off 6 Disconnect voltmeter leads 7 Erase DTCs when all repairs are completed CHRYSLER IMPORTS 19 TEST MODES To manually read DTCs from models that use 2 pin and 3 pin DLC and analog voltmeter do the following The DLC type is vehicle dependent refer to the information displayed on the tester FO HOW TO READ the DLC type 1 Locate the 2 pin or 3 pin Diagnostic Connector Use F4 DJC Location from the Information menu for diagnostic connector location 2a For 2 pin diagnostic connector connect analog voltmeter red lead to pin 1 diagnosis terminal and voltmeter black lead to pin 2 ground te
453. lume CHRYSLER IMPORTS 37 CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1996 98 CONTINUED DTC DESCRIPTOR P1771 P1772 P1775 P1776 P1781 P1782 P1784 P1787 P1788 P1789 P1790 P1791 P1792 P1793 P1794 P1795 P1798 P1799 P1899 Inadeguate Element Volume 2 4 Inadeguate Element Volume OD Solenoid Switch Valve Latched in LU Position Solenoid Switch Valve Latched in LR Position OD Pressure Switch Circuit 2 4 Pressure Switch L R Pressure Switch Circuit OD Hydraulic Pressure Switch Circuit 2 4 Hydraulic Pressure Switch Circuit OD 2 4 Hydraulic Pressure Switch Circuit Error After Shift Check Speed Code Error ECT Level Input to TCM Trans Slips No Pressure Check Fluid Level Battery Power Disconnected Since Last Power Down TRD Link Communication Error Speed Sensor Ground TCM Internal Control Module Malfunction Worn Transmission Fluid Shudder Detected with A C Clutch Calculated Transmission Fluid Temp in Use Park Neutral Switch Malfunction A T 38 CHRYSLER IMPORTS DAIHATSU VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS DAIHATSU SPECIFIC INFORMATION TEST MODES AVAILABLE GETTING STARTED SELECTING THE VEHICLE TEST MODES Mode F1 Entry Submode F0 How To Read Submode F1 Enter DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC Submode F4 Clear DTC s VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS Using the Asia
454. ly codes available for the selected vehicle are displayed by the tester YEAR 1983 DESCRIPTOR 1983 1 NO DTCs NORMAL OPERATION 2 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE 3 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE 4 WATER THERMO SENSOR OR CKT O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 6 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 7 TP SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR SIG OR CKT IDL PSW 11 ECU POWER SOURCE B OR CKT 12 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 13 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 14 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 21 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 22 ECT SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 23 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 31 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE 32 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE 41 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OR CKT 43 STARTER SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 51 N S OFF DURING DIAG YEAR 1984 DESCRIPTOR 1984 1 NO DTCs NORMAL OPERATION 2 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE TOYOTA 33 TOYOTA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1984 DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE WATER THERMO SENSOR OR CKT O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE N O oO w SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR SIG OR CKT IDL PSW 11 ECU POWER SOURCE B OR CKT 12 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 13 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 14 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 21 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 22 ECT SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE 23 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 31 AIR FLOW METER OR CKT FAILURE 32 AIR FLOW
455. mation is described below If you refer to the factory service manual for this information make sure that you are following the correct steps for the system you are working on This submode provides you with a description of how to obtain DTC information from the ECU and how to enter this information into the tester On Kia vehicles there is one method to enter manually read DTCs which is the Enter DTC submode The Enter DTC submode has two question marks on the tester display for entering the DTC The tester screen prompts you to enter the DTCs read off the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Be careful when reading the DTC from the MIL Incorrect MIL interpretation can cause the wrong DTC description to be displayed Once all DTCs have been manually read and recorded enter each DTC into the tester as described in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section Submode F1 Enter DTC s To manually read DTCs from Kia Vehicles Using the Instrument Panel Malfunction Indicator Lamp do the following 1 Locate the 20 pin Data Link Connector DLC 2 Jump ENG TEST and GROUND terminals by connecting the single wire Kia Jumper P N 02002075 to the vehicle s 20 pin diagnostic jumper connector KIA 9 TEST MODES Engine Test Ground 3 Start and warm engine running at 2000 rpm for 3 minutes 4 Dashboard MIL will begin flashing DTCs Long MIL flashes are 10 s digits short flash are 1 s digits with a 1 6 second delay Each DT
456. mode F0 Prepare Vehicle instructions to ensure proper vehicle preparation prior to testing The EH vehicle must be completely warmed up in order for the tester to communicate properly with the vehicle MODE F1 DTC ENTRY When Mode F1 Entry 1 selected the tester displays submodes which can provide information on how to read diagnostic trouble codes DTCs from the vehicle how to clear DTCs from the vehicle or tester memory buffer how to obtain a text description of entered or selected DTCs and review entered or selected DTCs as a result of manually retrieving codes from the ECU DTC ENTRY SUBMODES HOW TO READ F1 ENTER DTC s F2 DTC LIST F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC s Manually Reading DTCs To read DTCs on all 1984 86 and select 1990 95 Nissan vehicles you must locate the ECU and observe the flashing LEDs If you do not know where the ECU is located select Mode F5 ECU location from the Information menu If necessary refer to Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further instructions Follow the detailed instructions on the following pages to manually read the DTCs Once the DTCs have been manually read from the ECU the tester can define the code A complete list of Nissan DTCs is included in NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs on page 28 Note that manually retrieving DTCs from the 1993 95 Nissan Quest requires you to locate disconnect and jumper the Diagnostic Connector In this manual the
457. move and Replace Right Rear Standard Serial Communications interface Reset Right Single Range SCNDRY SDL SEC SENS SEQ SFI SHFT SHT SIG SIR SMPFI Snapshot SNSR SOHC SOL SPD SPEC SPI SPV SRV S T STEP STFT1 SW SYS Society of Automotive Engineers The organization which controls most of the documents defining the interface between the vehicle s OBD II controllers and off board test equipment Secondary Serial Data Link Secondary Sensor Sequential Sequential Fuel Injection Shift Short Signal Supplemental Inflatable Restraint Sequential Multi Port Fuel Injection The snapshot mode is used to capture data over a period of time It can be used to support road testing as well as testing in the service bay Sensor Single Overhead Cam Solenoid Speed Specification Single Port Fuel Injection Solenoid Purge Valve Service Short Term Stepper Short Term Fuel Trim for Bank 1 Switch System TAMAX TBI TC TCC TCM TCS TDC TDCL TEMP THROT TICS TID TMP TP TPI TPS TPS TRAC TRANS Trip UART VAC VAF Throttle Angle Maximum Throttle Body Fuel Injection Traction Control Torgue Converter Clutch Transmission Control Module Traction Control System Top Dead Center Toyota Diagnostic Communication Link Temperature Throttle Triple Induction Control System Test Identifier The TID is used by the O
458. n a scrolling menu You can scroll down one screen at a time by pressing or up one screen at a time by pressing M Press or to scroll one manufacturer at a time until the arrow is opposite Nissan Then press 1959 to select SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR Once the manufacturer is selected the Select Model Year menu is displayed Press the last two digits of the model year being tested for 1990 models for 1991 models and so on SELECTING THE MODEL The Model Select menu displays models available for testing Press the Qe key until the model being tested is displayed then press the key SELECTING THE ENGINE AND ENGINE TYPE Next the Engine Select menu is displayed For Maxima vehicles you will also be asked to select the engine type such as VE30DE Press until the engine and engine type of the vehicle is displayed then press VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY After the vehicle type is selected the tester displays a summary screen of the selected vehicle Information displayed includes the year manufacturer model engine size and type and additional information such as the type of fuel system SELECT MODE MENU When the preceding steps are completed the Select Mode menu displays the test modes available for the selected vehicle and system Refer to TEST MODES on page 15 OBD CONTROLS on page 22 and the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for instructions on operating the test modes with Nissan vehicl
459. n be 2 0 warm engine at idle STORED DTCS none 0 to 127 Stored DTCs is the number of emission related diagnostic trouble codes DTCs that have been stored in the reporting ECU For OBD II systems there can be multiple II compliant ECUs Also more than one ECU can report more than one stored DTC Therefore the number of stored DTCs refers to the ECU whose data is currently being displayed Remember also that OBD II DTCs are 5 characters and are broken into system categories System Pxxxx Powertrain Bxxxx Body Cxxxx Chassis Category x0100 to x0999 SAE defined DTCs x1000 or greater Manufacturer defined DTCs TPS 96 0 to 100 Throttle Position Sensor TPS is an input to the ECU and provides information about throttle plate opening For OBD II systems TPS voltage is converted by the ECU and displayed as a relative or absolute throttle opening value Therefore this indicates how much the throttle is opened off its throttle stop and not in relation to a zero voltage level TPS percentage changes with the movement of the accelerator pedal and should display 0 20 at idle to above 80 at Wide Open Throttle VEHICLE SPEED MPH 0 to 158 km h 0 to 255 Vehicle Speed is an indication of vehicle speed in miles per hour or kilometers per hour The ECU uses vehicle speed to make determinations about current engine operating conditions and the operation of various engine management system outp
460. n cartridge the following Daihatsu vehicles can be diagnosed ENGINE ADAPTER TYPE TYPE ENGINE 1988 CHARADE 1 0L 13 G100 MPI NONE MILCODES ENGINE ADAPTER ENGINE TYPE TYPE 1989 CHARADE 1 0L 13 G100 MPI NONE MILCODES CHARADE 1 3L 14 G102 MPI NONE MILCODES ENGINE ENGINE ADAPTER 1990 CHARADE 1 0L 13 G100 MPI NONE MILCODES CHARADE 1 3L I4 G102 MPI NONE MILCODES ROCKY 1 6L 14 F300 MPI NONE MILCODES ENGINE ENGINE ADAPTER 1991 CHARADE 1 0L 13 G100 MPI NONE MILCODES CHARADE 1 3L I4 G102 MPI NONE MILCODES ROCKY 1 6L 14 F300 MPI NONE MILCODES ENGINE ENGINE ADAPTER 1992 CHARADE 1 0L 13 G100 MPI NONE MILCODES CHARADE 1 3L 14 G102 MPI NONE MILCODES ROCKY 1 6L 14 F300 MPI NONE MILCODES 2 DAIHATSU DAIHATSU SPECIFIC INFORMATION 2 DAIHATSU SPECIFIC INFORMATION The Daihatsu Specific Information section defines the Daihatsu vehicles covered by the Asian Imports Cartridge the test modes available and operating instructions for DTC Entry A complete list of Daihatsu Diagnostic Trouble Codes is also included in Chapter 7 DAIHATSU 3 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 3 TEST MODES AVAILABLE The following test modes are available when testing Daihatsu vehicles Operating instructions for test modes other than Mode 1 ENTRY are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section MODE F1 DTC ENTRY SUBMODE F0 HOW TO READ SUBMODE F1 ENTER DTC s SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST SUBMODE F3
461. n from the select maintenance menu The key help screen will be displayed Press or wait to advance 5 Press to advance through the text description screens Press to back up through the text description screens These text screens contain oxygen sensor 025 installation information and O2S Torque requirements 6 Press 8B to return to the previous menu ACTIVE KEYS Scroll up and down Select Torque Specification GB Select Maintenance Select 025 Information Advance program from current screen Exit to the previous test menu COMMON TEST MODES II 39 TEST MODES Submode F2 Remove and Replace Mode F2 Remove and Replace provides standard O2S removal and replacement information Removal information for O2 sensors describes a proper method of how to remove an O2S from the vehicle and replacement information for O2 sensors describes a proper method of how to replace an O2S into the vehicle This mode describes a sound method of O2S sensor removal and replacement based on automobile manufacturer procedures To display O2S removal and replacement information do the following 1 Press select OBD II Toolpak from the Select Mode menu 2 Press to select O2S Information from the OBD II Toolpak menu 3 Press 6 to select Maintenance from O2S Information menu O2S Removal O2S Removal 4 Press 6 to select Remove from O2S R amp R information menu The key help screen will
462. ncluded in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section READING CODES Instructions for selecting and operating mode F2 Submode F1 READ ENTER DTCs and Submode F5 SENSITIVE DTC are included in this section MODE F2 DTC Submode F1 Read Enter DTC s The purpose of the Read Enter submode is to command the Inactive system ECU to flash DTCs on the dashboard MIL After the DTC is read from the MIL a description of the DTCs can then be displayed on the tester screen If a Toyota or Lexus system is determined as Inactive the tester will command the ECU to begin flashing the DTC on the system MIL The F1 READ ENTER DTC s submode displays a message informing you that the tester has initiated DTC flashing on the MIL and will hold in that mode until you have read the DTC s on the MIL After 1 read from the MIL the tester screen changes to entry screen Type in the to obtain a description of the DTC To select the Read Enter DTC s submode do the following 1 Press GE to select DTCs from the select mode menu 2 Press HD to select READ ENTER DTC s from the DTCs menu 3 The tester displays a message indicating DTCs are being flashed on the MIL Look at the MIL to read the flashes and determine the When cycle is repeated on the MIL and you have recorded the DTC press DTCS BEING OUTPUT READ ON IL DONE YES 4 Use the tester keypad to enter the DTC displ
463. nded to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTC s that you have encountered during diagnosis Submode F4 Clear DTC s This submode has two options for you to chose Option 1 is to view text screens that provide information on how to clear the DTCs from ECU memory Option 2 clears the tester memory from DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The clear DTC s mode is helpful and provides information that you would normally have to locate in a service manual 16 HYUNDAI HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 7 HYUNDAI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS DTCs available for Hyundai vehicles are listed in the following charts Some code numbers have different descriptors depending on the selected vehicle Only codes available for the selected vehicle are displayed by the tester OBD I SYSTEMS YEAR 1989 DESCRIPTOR 1989 0 ECU CIRCUIT FAILURE 11 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 12 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 13 IAT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 14 TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE 15 MOTOR POSITION SWITCH OR CKT 21 ECT SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 22 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR OR CKT 23 NO 1 CYL DTC SENSOR OR CKT 24 VSS OR CKT FAILURE 25 BARO SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 41 FUEL INJECTOR OR CKT FAILURE 42 FUEL PUMP OR CKT FAILURE 43 EGR SYSTEM VALVE SOLENOID VAC OR TEMP SENSOR YEAR 1990 DESCRIPTOR 1990 0 ECU CIRCUIT FAILURE 11 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 12 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT
464. ng The title of this document is II Scan Tool SAE Recommended Practice defining the operating modes to be used by an OBD II Scan Tool for accessing diagnostic data from an OBD II compliant vehicle The title of this document is E E Diagnostic Test Modes SAE Recommended Practice defining the diagnostic trouble codes DTCs to be used by the vehicle s ECU for reporting the status of the on board diagnostic tests The title of this document is Recommended Practice for Diagnostic Trouble Code Definitions SAE Recommended Practice defining possible methods for vehicle manufacturers to implement enhancements to OBD II J2190 implementations are specific to the various manufacturers and are often referred to as Enhanced OBD II The title of this document is Enhanced E E Diagnostic Test Modes SAE Recommended Practice defining a method of expanding an OBD II Scan Tool to support manufacturer specific test modes The title of this document is Expanded Diagnostic Protocol for OBD II Scan Tools KS LAF LED LF LR LT LT LTFT1 MAF MAF R MALF MAP P MAT MFI Kilo pascals Kilometers per Hour Knock Sensor Linear Air Fuel Ratio Light Emitting Diode Left Front Left Rear Light Long Term Long Term Fuel Trim for Bank 1 Manual Transmission Mass Air Flow Air Flow Rate from Mass Air Flow MAF Sensor The Unit Con
465. ngle wire Mitsubishi Chrysler Imports jumper P N 02002106 Use F4 DJC Location for diagnostic connector location PIN 1 PIN 5 3 Tum ignition switch ON 4 Observe the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL to read DTCs MIL will turn ON OFF if DTCs are stored in ECU If a DTC is stored in ECU the first number of MIL flashes indicates the 10s digit of a 2 digit DTC After a 2 0 second pause the second number of MIL flashes indicates the 1 digit Each is separated by MIL OFF for 3 0s 5 If no malfunctions are present MIL will read ON once per second 6 After recording DTCs turn ignition switch off 7 Disconnect jumper leads 8 Erase DTCs when all repairs are completed i DTC 12 4 DTC SEPARATION Next DTC Indication 12v 1517 Ov O seconas 3 sec 1 5 sec gt lt 2 sec 3 sec 5 se Submode F2 DTC List This submode provides you with a way to view all possible ECU DTCs including DTC numbers and descriptions You can also select the DTCs obtained from the analog voltmeter or MIL as an alternative way of entering DTCs into the tester s memory As you scroll through the available DTCs you can view description of the DTC obtained from the analog voltmeter or MIL You can Select the DTC on the tester screen for later review or printing Refer to the COMMON TEST MODES I section for further information Submode F3 Review DTC This submode provides y
466. nnect the RED Nissan Check adapter to the vehicle DLC and start and warm the engine to normal operating temperature This is performed by following the tester instruction screens If you have trouble additional F1 READ retrieval information is described below NOTE When reading DTCs from Nissan vehicles make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature and testing 15 performed in a well ventilated area To read DTCs from all 1987 89 and select 1990 95 Nissan ECUS with the 2 LED 5 mode system do the following 1 Insert Asian cartridge into MASTERTECH or TECH 1A 2 Connect Nissan Check adapter Red to DLC cable 3 Connect the Check adapter to the vehicle DLC Press F1 DLC location from the Information menu for Data Link Connector location assistance 4 Power MASTERTECH or TECH with 12v power cable 5 Select Nissan vehicle to test 6 Turn ignition key to start the engine 7 Press F2 DTCs from Nissan test mode menu 8 Press F1 READ DTCs submode from test menu 9 Tester will automatically command the vehicle ECU into the correct mode required to read DTCs and will display all received DTCs on the tester display 20 NISSAN TEST MODES Submode F2 DTC List This submode provides you with a way to view all possible ECU DTCs including DTC numbers and descriptions You can also select the DTCs obtained from the ECU LED or MIL as an alternative way of entering DTCs into the tester
467. noid Switch Valve Latched in LR Position P1781 OD Pressure Switch Circuit P1782 2 4 Pressure Switch Circuit P1784 L R Pressure Switch Circuit P1787 OD Hydraulic Pressure Switch Circuit P1788 2 4 Hydraulic Pressure Switch Circuit P1789 OD 2 4 Hydraulic Pressure Switch Circuit P1790 Error After Shift Check Speed Code Error P1791 Engine ECT Input to TCM P1791 Transmission Slip or no Pressure P1792 Battery Power was Disconnected Since Power Down P1793 TRD Link communication Error P1794 Speed Sensor Ground P1795 PCM TPS Circuit P1795 ICM Malfunction P1798 Worn Transmission Fluid Shudder Detected with A C Clutch P1799 Calculated Transmission Fluid Temp in Use P1899 PNP Switch Trans Range Switch Failure 40 MITSUBISHI NISSAN VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS NISSAN SPECIFIC INFORMATION TEST MODES AVAILABLE GETTING STARTED SELECTING THE VEHICLE TEST MODES Mode F1 DTC Entry Submode Submode F1 Submode F2 Submode F3 Submode F4 Mode F2 DTC Submode F1 Submode F2 Submode F3 Submode F4 7 OBD CONTROLS How To Read Enter DTC s DTC List Review DTC s Clear DTC s Read DTC s DTC List Review DTC Clear DTC s Mode F4 OBD Controls Submode F0 Submode F1 Submode F2 Submode F3 AFR Monitor A AFR Monitor B Switch Test RT DTC Monitor 8 NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs OBD OBD I Systems OBD II Systems
468. ns for instructions on operating the test modes with Daihatsu vehicles 6 DAIHATSU SELECTING THE VEHICLE MANUFACTURER ACURA CHRYSLER IMP gt DAIHATSU ENTER DAIHATSU 1988 1992 SELECT MODEL YEAR 19 SELECT MODEL CHARADE YES NO SELECT ENGINE 1 0L 13 YES NO 1992 DAIHATSU CHARADE 1 0L 13 MPI O or 5 sec SELECT MODE Y F1 DTC ENTRY F2 SYSTEM TESTS F8 INFORMATION Daihatsu Vehicle Selection ACTIVE KEYS Enter model year o9 Used to answer questions in tester display Confirm Power up display Return to previous display Scrolls through instruction displays DAIHATSU 7 TEST MODES 6 TEST MODES When the Select Mode menu is displayed test modes available for Daihatsu vehicles may be selected You may select Mode F1 Entry Mode F5 System Tests or Mode F8 Information without connecting the tester to the vehicle Operating instructions for Mode F1 DTC Entry are included in Submode Enter DTC s on page 9 Operating instructions for the other test modes are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section Detailed operating instructions for using Mode F1 DTC Entry with Daihatsu vehicles are included in the following procedure READING CODES When Mode 1 Entry is selected the tester displays submodes which after your selection provide information on how to read diagnostic trouble codes DTCs f
469. ns for operating the test modes in TEST MODES on page 15 A description and operating instructions for each Output Test is included in OBD CONTROLS on page 22 MODE 1 ENTRY SUBMODE F0 HOW TO READ SUBMODE F1 ENTER DTC s SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST SUBMODE F3 REVIEW DTC SUBMODE F4 CLEAR DTC s MODE F2 DTC SUBMODE F1 READ DTC s SUBMODE F2 DTC LIST SUBMODE F3 REVIEW DTC SUBMODE F4 CLEAR DTC s MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS SUBMODE F0 AFR MONITOR A SUBMODE F1 AFR MONITOR B SUBMODE F2 SWITCH TEST SUBMODE F3 RT DTC MONITOR MODE F5 SYSTEM TESTS SUBMODE F0 PREP VEHICLE MODE F8 INFORMATION SUBMODE F1 DLC LOCATION SUBMODE F3 ID INFO SUBMODE F4 DJC LOCATION SUBMODE F5 ECU LOCATION Note that not all models support ECU DJC or DLC Location Test modes The tester will automatically choose which test mode to display depending on your vehicle selection NISSAN 11 GETTING STARTED 4 GETTING STARTED Before operating the Asian Imports Cartridge with a Nissan vehicle the following steps must be performed 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Refer to the Vehicle and Systems table to see if the vehicle you are testing requires the Check Adapter Cable If so connect the Nissan Check Adapter Cable to the end of the DLC cable then connect the red connector end to the vehicle Check connector Nissan Check Adapter Cable 3 Plug the tester power cable into the vehicle cigarette li
470. ns testing requirements OBD II satisfies the EPA s federal OBD testing requirements through 1998 Therefore equipment used to access the vehicle s OBD II data can also be used to test vehicles under the federal OBD requirements which are in the process of being implemented in some states OBD II SCAN TOOL Part of the intent of CARB s OBD II program is that a single diagnostic tester can be used to read the diagnostic information from any OBD II compliant vehicle A tester which satisfies this requirement can be designated as an OBD II Scan Tool and is defined by the SAE document J1978 One of the requirements of the OBD II Scan Tool is that it has to work with any OBD II compliant vehicle and be able to automatically determine all information required to communicate with the vehicle The operator does not enter any vehicle specific information such as the vehicle manufacturer model year or engine The OBD II Scan Tool determines what protocol the vehicle uses what diagnostic parameters can be read from the vehicle and what tests are supported by the vehicle The SAE Recommended Practice J1978 defines the basic requirements for an OBD II Scan Tool SAE Recommended Practice J1979 defines the test modes used by both the vehicle and the OBD II Scan Tool to access vehicle information and functions The following test modes are required for a basic OBD II Scan Tool Display Current Diagnostic Data Parameters 71979 Mode 1 Display Diagnostic
471. nsor Range Performance Problem Low Input Pressure sensor Range Performance Problem High Input CKP Sensor 2 Circuit Malfunction Fuel Tank Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Fuel Tank Pressure Control System Problem Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Malfunction Fuel Tank Pressure Solenoid Valve High Input EGR Circuit High Input EVAP System Purge Control Valve High Input EVAP System Vent Control High Input Fuel Tank Pressure System Low Input Fuel Tank Pressure System High Input Fuel Level Sensor Range Performance Problem 2 SUBARU 45 SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 98 CONTINUED DTC NO P1443 P1500 P1501 P1502 P1507 P1520 P1540 P1700 P1701 P1702 P1722 P1742 DESCRIPTOR EVAP System Vent Control Problem Radiator Fan Relay 1 Circuit Malfunction Radiator Fan Relay 2 Circuit Malfunction Radiator Fan Function Problem Idle Control System Malfunction Fail safe Radiator Fan Relay 1 High Input VSS Sensor 2 Malfunction TPS Circuit Malfunction Cruise Control Set Signal Circuit A T Diagnosis Input Signal Circuit Low Input A T Diagnosis Input Signal Circuit High Input A T Diagnosis Input Signal Circuit Malfunction 46 SUBARU VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS TOYOTA SPECIFIC INFORMATION TOYOTA OBD SYSTEMS TEST MODES AVAILABLE GETTING STARTED SELECTING THE VEHICLE TEST MODES Mode F1 Entry Submode 0 How To
472. nstalled Master cartridge is malfunctioning Tester is malfunctioning Recommendations Verify that the cartridge is installed in the bottom slot of the tester and that there isn t a master cartridge e g E K 86 87 SYSTEM in the top slot Try another cartridge Perform the Self test as described in the Operator s Manual APPENDICES 9 IF YOU ARE USING A TECH 1 TESTER E IF YOU ARE USING A TECH I TESTER Using the Asian Imports application cartridge with a TECH 1 Tester When using a TECH 1 tester on Toyota or Lexus vehicles the number of OBD systems that the tester can communicate with will be limited to Engine Data Engine DTCs and Transmission DTCs OBD Systems available will depend on the vehicle example most Toyota and Lexus vehicles have engine diagnostics but may or may not have transmission diagnostics 10 APPENDICES GLOSSARY OF TERMS ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS The following is a list of terms acronyms and abbreviations which are applicable to OBD OBD I and OBD II diagnosis and or the operation of this software 49ST AIC A S A T A A C ABS ACCEL ACV ADJ AFM AIR ALDL ANG ASP ASV AT ATF ATM AUX BLK 49 States Air Conditioning AIR Solenoid Automatic Transmission Auxiliary Air Control Absolute Accelerated or Accelerator Air Control Valve Adjustment Air Flow Meter Secondary Air Injecti
473. nt controllers an OBD II Vehicle Interface Module VIM and 16 24 pin adapter cable will be required When you are using this manual to diagnose a vehicle take the time to determine the type of tester that you are working with and be sure you are using the correct cables and adapters Doing so may prevent misuse of application cartridges and incorrect vehicle diagnosis USING THIS CARTRIDGE WITH A MASTERTECH TESTER In addition to the TECH 1 and TECH JA this cartridge can also be used with the Mastertech tester Refer to the Mastertech Operator s Manual for installing the cartridge and connecting the Mastertech to the vehicle When using the Asian Imports Software cartridge and MASTERTECH on Asian vehicles with OBD II compliant controllers an OBD II compliant MASTERTECH and 16 14 pin adapter cable is required or an OBD II Vehicle Interface Module VIM and 16 24 pin adapter cable can be used When used alone in the Mastertech the operation of the cartridge and the vehicle identification screens test menus and data screens are as described in this manual This cartridge can also be used with the Mastertech in conjunction with a program card which allows viewing of vehicle identification screens test menus and diagnostic data parameters in full screen Enhanced Mode displays Refer to the Enhanced Mode operating instructions in the program card operator s manual for further detail Vetronix Corporation Copyright 2002 Manual P N
474. o Read Submode F1 Enter DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC s Submode F4 Clear DTC s OBD II Systems 1996 98 OBD II VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS Using the Asian cartridge the following Chrysler Imports vehicles can be diagnosed ECU ENGINE ADAPTER ENGINE TYPE MODES CODE 1990 M30 3 0L V6 VG30E EFI 2 MIL LED Q45 4 5L V8 VH45DE EFI 2 MIL LED NONE NONE ADAPTER TYPE ENGINE peki CODE 1991 G20 2 0L 4 SR20DE EFI 2 MIL LED M30 3 0L V6 VG30E EFI 2 MIL LED Q45 4 5L V8 VH45DE EFI 2 MIL LED NONE NONE NONE ADAPTER ENGINE GET CODE 1992 G20 2 0L 4 SR20DE EFI 2 MIL LED M30 3 0L V6 VG30E EFI 2 MIL LED Q45 4 5L V8 VH45DE EFI 2 MIL LED NONE NONE NONE ADAPTER ENGINE pires CODE 1993 G20 2 0L 4 SR20DE SMPI 2 MIL LED J30 3 0L V6 VG30E SMPI 2 MIL LED Q45 4 5L V8 VH45DE SMPI 2 MIL LED NONE NONE NONE INFINITI VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS ENGINE ENGINE TYPE CODE ADAPTER G20 J30 Q45 1994 2 0L 4 3 0L V6 4 5L V8 SR20DE VG30E VH45DE SMPI SMPI SMPI MIL LED MIL LED MIL LED NONE NONE NONE ENGINE ENGINE TYPE CODE TYPE ADAPTER TYPE G20 J30 Q45 1995 2 0L 4 3 0L V6 4 5L V8 SR20DE VG30DE VH45DE SMPI SMPI SMPI
475. o return to the Data List parameter pair screen Press the opposite function key used to select the previous parameter GT or Gp to deselect the parameter The asterisk will disappear Scroll through the Data List until a parameter for which you want information is displayed Repeat Steps 2 and 3 5 Press 341 to return to the Data List parameter pair screen or Select Mode menu To display Parameter descriptions Not viewing on vehicle live data list do the following 1 Press G to select OBD II Toolpak 2 Press Ga to select Parameters from OBD II Toolpak menu 3 Press X to select Definitions from the Parameters menu The key help screen will be displayed 4 Press or to move the cursor to the desired diagnostic data parameter 5 Press to display the first text screen for the selected parameter Press to advance through the text description screens Press to view the previous text description screen 6 Press SP to return to the Parameter Definition list or the Parameters menu ACTIVE KEYS Select OBD II Toolpak Scroll up and down Select deselect a parameter View parameter description Exit to the previous test menu Submode F1 Ranges Common high and low values for each diagnostic data parameter are available when connected to a vehicle and viewing a live data list or during a shop or training review session Current diagnostic data parameter values are available d
476. on Assembly Line Communication Link Angle Atmospheric Pressure Aspirated Air Supply Valve Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid Atmospheric Pressure Auxiliary Battery Plus Voltage Bypass Air Control Barometric Pressure Atmospheric Pressure Block or Black BLM BTDC CA CAL CAN CARB CARB CEL CH CID CK CKP Block Learn Before Top Dead Center California Calibration Canada Carburetor The California Air Resource Board CARB is the regulatory agency which specifies vehicle emissions standards and testing programs OBD II is CARB s latest program for on board and off board test requirements for new vehicles Carter Carburetor Cruise Control Charcoal Canister Purge Check Engine Check Engine Lamp Chamber Component Identifier Used in the Non Continuous Test Results mode of the On Board Tests function to specify the component for which the test results are being reported Refer to the service manual for the vehicle under test for a definition of the CIDs Crankshaft Crankshaft Position CKT CL CLCC CL Fault CNTRL COM COMM CONT CONTR CONV CTL CYL Data List DECEL DEF DEG DI DIFF DJC DLC DLC DOHC Circuit Clearance Light Closed Loop Carburetor Control Closed Loop with fault for FUEL STATUS parameter Used to indicate that the fuel syst
477. onds depending on how many systems are available on the vehicle The tester lists the systems that can be tested with the installed adapter Press or to continue to the Select System displays POSSIBLE AV ACTIVE SYSTEMS SUPPORTED BY CHECK DLC CONNECT ADAPT Y TO DLC FOR HELP USE F9 DLC LOC POS CHECK SYS 1 ENGINE DTC 2 AIR BAG DTC TURN IGN KEY Y ON TO PERFORM SYSTEM INQUIRY ENTER ENTER POSSIBLE v ACTIVE SYSTEMS SUPPORTED BY TDCL DLC TDCL CONNECTOR SYSTEM INQUIRY PLEASE WAIT POS TDCL SYS Y TO SELECT SYSTEM MENU 1 ENGINE DATA 2 ENGINE DTC 3 ECT DTC POS SYS Y DTC UISE CTL DTC C DTC 4 5 6 gt 14 LEXUS SELECTING THE VEHICLE SELECT SYSTEM MENU The Select System menu displays the systems available for testing on the selected vehicle An or next to a system indicates that the system is Active and no asterisk next to a system indicates it is Inactive Press the function key listed to the left of the system you wish to test to advance to the Select Mode menu ENTER SELECT SYSTEM Y F0 ENGINE k F1 ECT ok lt Active systems F2 ABS ok no DTCs stored Active systems DTCs stored SELECT SYSTEM Y F3 CRUISE CTL F4 AIC N F5 AIR BAG systems TO SELECTED MODE MENU NOTE If an ECU is malfunctioning and doe
478. ons NOTE Use of this mode requires knowledge of the vehicle s emissions equipment configuration exhaust type dual single single with a connection number of catalytic converters and number of oxygen sensors Refer to the Appendix B for further OBD II Oxygen Sensor Location information 36 COMMON TEST MODES II TEST MODES To obtain Oxygen Sensor information do the following 1 Press G to select OBD II Toolpak from the Select Mode menu 2 Press GZ to select 025 Information from the OBD II Toolpak menu 3 Press to select Location from the 025 Information menu The key help screen will be displayed Press Gili or wait to advance 4 A series of information screens will appear They remind you to review and obtain the following information from the vehicle configuration exhaust type dual single single with a connection total number of catalytic converters total number of oxygen sensors Press or wait to advance 5 Using information obtained in step 4 select exhaust system type 6 Using information obtained in step 4 select number of catalytic converters 1f required 7 Using information obtained in step 4 select number of oxygen sensors if required 8 A confirmation screen with your selected data is displayed The key help screen will be displayed Press 555359 or wait to advance 9 Press to advance through the text description screens Press to back up through
479. or to scroll one manufacturer at a time until the gt arrow is opposite the manufacturer you wish to select Then press Gui to select REPLAY SNAPSHOT DATA If Snapshot data is stored in the tester memory the tester asks if you wish to replay saved Snapshot data Press to replay the saved data or press to proceed to the Vehicle Selection displays SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR Once the manufacturer is selected the Select Model Year menu is displayed Press the last two digits of the year model being tested for 1990 models 6 D for 1991 models and so on SELECTING THE MODEL The Select Model menu displays models available for testing Press the key until the model being tested is displayed then press the key SELECTING THE ENGINE If more than one engine is available for the selected model a Select Engine menu is displayed Press Je until the engine type of the vehicle is displayed then press VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY After the vehicle type 1s selected the tester displays a summary screen of the selected vehicle Information displayed includes the year manufacturer model engine size and type The tester displays the summary screen for three seconds then automatically advances to the System Inquiry displays If the summary screen is not correct press 694 to go backward through the vehicle selection displays until you reach the information that needs to be changed LEXUS 11 SELECTING THE VE
480. or MIL then enter the DTC into the tester Incorrect ECU LED or MIL interpretation can cause the wrong DTC description to be displayed Refer to the following procedure for manually reading 1 LED DTCs on the ECU To manually read DTCs from late model Acura vehicles that use 1 LED on ECU or 1 LED on ECU and dashboard MIL do the following 1 The MIL and the ECU mounted LED can be used to read DTCs from the ECU 2 Use F2 SCC LOCATION from the Information menu for help in locating the Service Check Connector SCO or F5 ECU LOCATION for help in locating the engine electronic control module from the Information menu 3 If required connect the Honda Acura SCC Jumper P N 02001935 into the Service Check Connector 4 Turn the ignition key to run 5 The MIL and the ECU LED will flash DTCs if stored in ECU memory 6 The 10 s digit corresponds to a long pulse and the 1 s digit corresponds to a short pulse 7 Use F1 ENTER DTCs and type manually read DTCs into the tester or select the DTC from F2 DTC LIST 8 The selected code s will appear on the tester along with a brief description 9 If used remove the Honda Acura SCC jumper from the Service Check Connector 10 Use F4 CLEAR DTCs for DTC clear code information 11 Turn ignition key off when diagnosis is finished NOTE For further information refer to the Factory Service Manual for the vehicle EH you are testing ACURA 11 TEST MODES Submode F2 D
481. or you to chose Option 1 is an automated function which the tester clears DTCs from the vehicle ECU memory This is performed by tester keypad presses Option 2 clears the tester memory from DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The clear DTC s mode is helpful and provides information that you would normally have to locate in a service manual CHRYSLER IMPORTS 23 CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 7 CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS DTCs available for Chrysler Imports vehicles are listed in the following charts Some code numbers have different descriptors depending on the selected vehicle Only codes available for the selected vehicle are displayed by the tester OBD OBD I SYSTEMS YEAR 1984 DESCRIPTOR 1984 1 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 2 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 3 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 4 PRESSURE SNSR OR CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE ISC MOTOR POS SENSOR OR CKT ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR SPEED SENSOR FAILURE YEAR 1985 DESCRIPTOR 1985 1 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 2 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE 3 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 4 PRESSURE SNSR OR CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE ISC MOTOR POS SENSOR OR CKT ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR SPEED SENSOR FAILURE 24 CHRYSLER IMPORTS CHRYSLER IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES YEAR 1986 D
482. orted as constants programmed in the vehicle ECU or calculated values by the vehicle ECU See the following table for programmed and calculated data parameters PARAMETER TID TYPE R gt gt L 028 V 01 Constant L gt gt R 028 02 Constant LOW SW V 03 Constant HIGH SW V 04 Constant R gt gt L SW TIM 05 Calculated L gt gt R SW TIM 06 Calculated MIN 02 V 07 Calculated 02 V 08 Calculated O2S TRANS T 09 Calculated NOTE Parameter IDs greater than 9 are manufacturer specific and are therefore defined only by an ID preceded by a e g 70 and 71 for Chrysler O2S test results Refer to the vehicle s service manual to determine how to interpret these parameters Additional O2S Information Pressing while the O2S RESULTS data is being displayed will cause the tester to display additional information about the displayed parameters The tester displays the Test ID number TID along with hexadecimal displays of the current data value Val the ECU programmed minimum value Min and the maximum ECU programmed value Max for this parameter Min and Max are values reported by the ECU Val should be within those limits TID 05 Val 29 Min 0A Max 32 TID 06 Val 16 Min 0A Max 32 COMMON TEST MODES Il 25 TEST MODES TJ GD Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs unlock bottom parameter if fix
483. ostic information stored in the vehicle controllers 18 COMMON TEST MODES II TEST MODES Some vehicles will not allow DTCs to be cleared while the engine is running In this case the tester will display a prompt screen to turn off the engine leaving the key in the ON position For some vehicles communication may be lost when the key is turned off and then back on If a Communication Error screen is displayed exit back to the MAIN menu and re select Powertrain You should now be able to clear the diagnostic information Module s 10 Did Not Respond Try Again With Ignition ON And Eng NOT Running EXIT YES Clears all emissions related information GUT Return to SELECT MODE menu Submode F3 Pending DTCs For PENDING DTCs mode the vehicle s controller performs analysis similar to that used to determine if the equivalent DTC is present but with less stringent requirements For example a DTC may require a condition to be present for several drive cycles while the equivalent pending DTCs may be set with the first occurrence of the condition Results of the pending DTCs request are displayed in a manner similar to the DTC display mode They are displayed with the same Pxxxx designations and the same descriptors as the DTCs If the vehicle you are testing contains more than one OBD II ECU you are asked to select which ECU information you would like displayed F3 PENDING DTCs SELECT ECU
484. ou with a review of the DTC s that you entered or selected in the tester The description of the entered or selected DTC s will be displayed along with a numerical summary of the entered or selected DTC s Review is intended to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTCs that you have encountered during diagnosis 22 MITSUBISHI TEST MODES Submode F4 Clear This submode has two options for you to chose Option 15 to view text screens that provide information on how to clear the DTCs from ECU memory This is performed by tester keypad presses Option F1 clears the tester memory from DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The clear DTC s mode is helpful and provides information that you would normally have to locate in a service manual MODE F2 DTC To read DTCs on all 1989 93 and select 1987 88 and 1994 95 Mitsubishi vehicles you will need to locate the vehicle DLC and connect the Mitsubishi Check Adapter to the tester and vehicle To locate the DLC select F1 DLC LOCATION from the Information menu If necessary refer to the COMMON TEST MODES I section for further instructions When Mode F2 DTC is selected the tester displays four DTC submodes F1 READ DTC s F2 DTC LIST F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC s Submode F1 Read DTC s This submode provides automated DTC retrieval from the vehicle ECU Step by step screen instructions guide you to connect the YELLOW M
485. p MIL codes or OBDII DTCs Autocodes Mancodes ECU LED MILcodes OBD II DTC Term used when tester can read codes from the vehicle ECU automatically via the data link connector Used when vehicle is supported with F2 DTC Term used when tester provides information on the tester display about how to read codes from vehicle ECU and there is no connection to the vehicle via a diagnostic connector Equipment used to manually read DTCs includes single wire jumper analog voltmeter ECU LED or Mastertech oscilloscope function Used when vehicle is supported with F1 DTC ENTRY Term used when tester provides information the on tester display about how to read ECU codes from vehicle ECU LED and there is no connection to the vehicle via a diagnostic connector Equipment used to manually read DTCs includes single wire jumper Used when vehicle is supported with F1 DTC ENTRY Term used when tester provides information the on tester display about how to read ECU codes from vehicle MIL and there is no connection to the vehicle via a diagnostic connector Equipment used to manually read DTCs includes single wire jumper Used when vehicle is supported with F1 DTC ENTRY Term used to describe a powertrain code that can be read from a vehicle ECU automatically via the data link connector The Society of Automotive Engineers SAFE has defined a standardized set of five character alpha numeric DTCs which can be read from an ECU by scan tool
486. p displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs 22 COMMON TEST MODES II TEST MODES KEYS Continued Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Display trouble codes for current sample Toggle the data descriptor line with the Parameter Identification PID number and the ECU number Display first earliest sample Display trigger sample 0 Display last most recent sample Toggle unit conversions for applicable parameters Print data list if eguipped with serial printer 509908 BEE Return to SNAPSHOT menu MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS The OBD CONTROLS mode allows you to perform individual output controls to check for proper vehicle component or system operation The OBD CONTROL S that you can control depend on the vehicle under test Submode F0 Evap Leak The EVAP LEAK test is used to enable the conditions required to conduct an evaporation system leak test Selecting 0 EVAP LEAK does not actually run the test but instead closes the system preventing leakage Off board test equipment can then be used to test the vehicle s evaporative emission system The vehicle manufacturer is responsible for automatically aborting the leak test when necessary F4 OBD CONTROLS FO EVAP LEAK EVAP LEAK TEST ENABLED EXIT If the conditions necessary to run the evaporative emissions system leak test are not correct the vehicle ECU m
487. pare Vehicle instructions to ensure proper vehicle preparation prior to testing The vehicle must be completely EB warmed up in order for the tester to communicate properly with the vehicle 24 MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 7 MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS DTCs available for Mitsubishi vehicles are listed in the following tables Some code numbers have different descriptors depending on the selected vehicle Only codes available for the selected vehicle are displayed by the tester OBD OBD I SYSTEMS YEAR 1984 DESCRIPTOR 1984 1 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE ISC MOTOR POS SWITCH OR CKT ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR AR N VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OR CKT YEAR 1985 DESCRIPTOR 1985 1 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE TP SENSOR OR TPS CKT FAILURE ISC MOTOR POS SWITCH OR CKT N O oO N ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR YEAR 1986 DESCRIPTOR 1986 1 O2 SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE 2 IGNITION SIGNAL OR CKT FAILURE MITSUBISHI 25 MITSUBISHI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1986 DESCRIPTOR 3 AIR FLOW SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE A PRESSURE SENSOR OR CKT FAILURE BARO SENSOR OR CIRCUIT FAILURE TP SENSOR O
488. pplication select the OBD Controls menu for F1 O28 MONITOR as a possible selection On Mazda vehicles the switch monitor lamp circuit is monitored with the engine running so you can determine Oxygen Sensor output rich or lean states The O2S Monitor provides you with a guided procedure which tests the condition of the oxygen sensor the oxygen sensor known as O2S is mounted in the engine exhaust system and is in direct contact with the exhaust gases The O2S changes its output according to the rich or lean condition of the O2 present in the exhaust gases NOTE When performing the O2S Monitor test make sure the vehicle you are EH testing is properly warmed up and is tested in a well ventilated area To perform the O2S Monitor test do the following 1 Press QD to select 025 Monitor from the OBD Controls menu 2 The tester displays instructions for performing O2S Monitor Test Press 19 9 when each step has been completed 3 Follow the instructions on the tester display When each instruction is completed the tester indicates if further action is necessary If a problem is detected press 94 to return to the OBD Controls menu 26 MAZDA CONTROLS 4 Start the engine and warm to normal operating temperature 5 The tester display informs you of the current O2S state When the exhaust surrounding the O2S tip is lean the tester will display EXHAUST LEAN When the exhaust surrounding the O2S tip is ri
489. priate adapter and to properly prepare the vehicle 4 If no codes are present the tester informs you Press 9 0 to return to the Select Mode menu 5 If DTCs are present the tester displays an instruction screen for reading the DTCs Press to display the first code COMMON TEST MODES I 13 MODE F2 DTC S 6 The tester automatically displays each code and a description for three seconds An example is shown on the following page Remember that the DTCs displayed will be different depending on the vehicle selected 7 A DTC can be held by pressing the key while the code is displayed This gives you more time to record the code Press the key to resume display of the DTCs 8 Press 434 to display a summary of the DTCs 9 Press G to print a list of the DTCs read by the tester 10 Press SID to terminate the Read DTC mode and return to the Select Mode menu 11 To clear the codes select F4 Clear DTC s from the Select Mode menu Refer to Submode F4 for instructions on clearing the DTC s Example 1 Example 2 RECEIVING FAULT CODE INFORMATION PLEASE WAIT XX START ENGINE AND WARM TO NORMAL OPERATING TEMP ENTER ENTER The asterisk flashes the same as the MIL ADVANCE CODE HOLD CODE EXIT QUIT ENTER SUMMARY TURN IGNITION KEY OFF ENTER DTC 02 TURN KEY TO RUN THROTTLE TEMP OR START ENGINE SENSOR FAULT ENTER ENTER
490. pshot has been taken When the SNAPSHOT REPLAY mode is first entered the tester displays information about the saved snapshot The snapshot s trigger point Beginning Center or End and trigger type Manual Any DTC or Single DTC are displayed for a couple seconds before the snapshot data 1s displayed When replaying a saved snapshot the sample at the time of the trigger 1s initially displayed Samples before and or after the trigger be viewed by pressing the and keys to scroll through the samples SNAPSHOT TRIGGER Point Center Type Manual Engine Speed 1024 RPM Ign Timing 29 5 The sample number of a snapshot is displayed in the lower right of the display screen This index number will initially be a 0 samples after the trigger will be displayed as positive numbers and samples before the trigger will be displayed as negative numbers While replaying a snapshot pressing will cause the software to toggle between the sample index and the sample time The sample time display gives the time in seconds relative to the trigger sample at which the Tech 1 received the currently displayed sample For example a sample time of 3 4 means the sample was received 3 4 seconds after the trigger sample sample time of 2 6 seconds means the sample was received 2 6 seconds before the trigger Engine Speed 1024 RPM Ign Timing 29 5 3 Scroll through displayed data parameters Scroll through samples GI Mark to
491. r SELECT TRIGGER FO Beginning F1 Center F2 End Submode F3 Snapshot Replay Snapshot Data Capture When the trigger type is selected the tester displays a status message in the form of a flashing W indicating that the tester is storing data and waiting for the trigger While waiting for a trigger to occur you can press the AGMED or G key at any time to trigger the snapshot manually regardless of the trigger type selected When a trigger has occurred the flashing W will change to a constantly displayed T When the tester memory is full the tester displays an O to indicate that the snapshot is complete Pressing i after a trigger has occurred will end the data capture phase Once you have captured snapshot data you can examine it by pressing GE from the SNAPSHOT menu Use the and keys to scroll through the samples The last snapshot is retained in the tester unless COMMON TEST MODES II 21 TEST MODES tis overwritten by a new snapshot Anew application is selected from the application menu Anew master cartridge is installed in the tester The tester is unplugged from power for more than 24 hours You can review the captured snapshot in one of two ways Replay a snapshot after communication is established by selecting F3 SNAPSHOT REPLAY from SNAPSHOT menu Without vehicle communications select F1 Replay Snapshot Data from the MAIN menu this menu option is only displayed if a sna
492. r more oxygen sensors FUNC FXS GMP4 GND HA HAC HC Hexadecimal HF HO2S HTD HTR HVAC IAC IAT IAT 9 ID IDL IG IGN IM240 Function Fixed Spark Mode Microcomputer type used in High Speed ECMs Ground High Altitude High Altitude Control Hitachi Carburetor A number system used by computers consisting of 16 digits Hexadecimal numbers are represented by the digits 0 through 9 plus through representing values of 10 through 15 On the tester and in this manual hexadecimal numbers are preceded with a e g C4 7F 41 High Fuel Heated Oxygen Sensor Heated Heater Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning Idle Air Control Intake Air Temperature or Intake Air Thermosensor Intake Air Temperature in degrees The Unit Conversion function can be used to switch between F and Identification Idle Ignition Ignition IM240 is an enhanced inspection and maintenance test program legislated by the U S Environmental Protection Agency EPA to meet federal clean air standards INJ INT ISC ISO ISO 9141 ISO 9141 2 J1850 J1930 Injector J1962 Intake Idle Speed Control International Organization for Standardization The European organization which controls the ISO 9141 documents applicable to OBD IL J1978 A European document defining a class of communications between vehicle ECUs and off board
493. r stand alone display 4 If the display is correct press If the display is not correct refer to Appendix D 5 Follow the instructions on the following page to select the vehicle type you are testing by entering required vehicle information into the tester 6 When the vehicle has been selected refer to the Honda Test Modes section for information on how to prepare the vehicle to retrieve DTCs On some late model Honda vehicles the Service Check Connector SCC jumper P N 02001935 is required to retrieve DTCs If available use F2 SCC LOCATION from the Information menu to locate the service check connector FIGURE 1 2 Service Check Connector Jumper 8 HONDA SELECTING THE VEHICLE 5 SELECTING THE VEHICLE Once you ve pressed GUAE from the power up screen the following steps must be performed to select the manufacturer model year model and engine type of the vehicle being tested Remember if you make a mistake you can always press 248 to go back to the previous menu SELECTING THE MANUFACTURER A menu of manufacturers available for testing is displayed in a scrolling menu You can scroll down one screen at a time by pressing or up one screen at a time by pressing M Press D or to scroll one manufacturer at a time until the arrow is opposite the manufacturer you wish to select Then press 1959 to select SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR Once the manufacturer is selected the Select Model Year menu is
494. rcuit Malfunction EGR System Malfunction High Flow EVAP Control System Small Leak Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve Malfunction Canister Control Vacuum Check Switch Malfunction Purge Control Valve or Solenoid Valve Malfunction Purge Volume Control Valve Malfunction EVAP Vent Control Valve Malfunction EVAP Purge Flow Monitoring Malfunction EVAP Vent Control System Malfunction TCC Solenoid Valve Malfunction A T Diagnosis Communication Circuit Malfunction TPS Voltage Input to A T Too High or Low Park Neutral Switch Circuit Malfunction Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve Malfunction TCC Solenoid Valve Circuit Malfunction A T TCC Slip Detected During Lock Up Cooling Fan Circuit Malfunction 40 NISSAN SUBARU VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS SUBARU SPECIFIC INFORMATION TEST MODES AVAILABLE GETTING STARTED SELECTING THE VEHICLE TEST MODES Mode F1 Entry Submode 0 How To Read Submode F1 Enter DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC Submode F4 Clear DTC s SUBARU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs OBD OBD I Systems OBD II Systems VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS Using the Asian Imports Cartridge the following Subaru vehicles can be diagnosed ENGINE FUEL ECU ADAPTER SYSTEM 1983 BRAT 1 8L H4 ECC CARTER A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE BRAT 1 8L H4 ECC HITACHI A T M T ECULED MANCODES NONE BRAT 1 8L H4 EFI TURBO ECULED MA
495. repare Vehicle instructions to ensure proper vehicle preparation prior to testing The vehicle must be completely warmed up in order for the tester to communicate properly with the vehicle MODE F1 DTC ENTRY When Mode F1 DTC Entry is selected the tester displays submodes which after your selection can provide information on how to read diagnostic trouble codes DTCs from the vehicle how to clear DTCs from the vehicle or tester memory obtain a text description of entered or selected DTCs and review entered or selected DTCs as a result of manually retrieving codes from the ECU DTC ENTRY SUBMODES F0 HOW TO READ FI ENTER DTC s F2 DTC LIST F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC s Manually Reading DTCs To manually read Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs on Mazda vehicles from 1983 95 there is a single method that should be used This requires an analog voltmeter and a single wire jumper that is placed across a self test input pin to ground of the 1 pin or 17 pin DLC Using the analog voltmeter set to a 20 volt scale and connected to the self test output pin of the Data Link Connector DLC the DTC can be interpreted from the analog voltmeter needle flashes For the automobile manufacturers that mention the use of an analog voltmeter to read manual DTCs the Mastertech Oscilloscope may be used Set up the single channel oscilloscope and make connections the same way as the analog voltmeter above Choose the 20v division scale and
496. rer Only test modes available for the selected vehicle are displayed in the test mode menus The functions and operating procedures for each test mode are described in the Common Test Modes section MAKE DATA READ DTC DTC SNAP OBD SYSTEM INFOR EN PRINT LIST INESS ENTRY SHOT CON TESTS MATION HANCD MODE TROLS MODE ACURA CHRY IMP 3 s si DAIHATSU HONDA HYUNDAI s sz m INFINITI SA KIA LEXUS MAZDA E si i MITSUBISHI NISSAN sj SUBARU The Enhanced Mode is a Mastertech function that provides expanded data list display capabilities Print Mode supports Data List Snapshot and current or available DTCs when using the optional VP 411 printer OBD amp OBDI OBD II Isuzu and Suzuki Test Modes are described in the Isuzu and Suzuki Operator s Manuals SYSTEM TESTS AVAILABLE System Tests Mode is available for each make of vehicle System Tests contains submode 0 Prep Vehicle This submode gives instructions for proper vehicle preparation prior to testing to ensure accurate test results GENERAL INFORMATION 23 TEST MODES AVAILABLE OBD CONTROLS AVAILABLE V
497. ressure Sensor Malfunction VSS Malfunction VSS Signal Intermittent VSS Circuit Intermittent IAC System Malfunction Idle Control System RPM Lower than Expected MAZDA 59 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 1998 DTC CONTINUED NO P0507 P0510 P0550 P0603 P0605 P0703 P0704 P0705 P0706 P0707 P0708 P0710 P0711 P0712 P0713 P0715 P0720 P0721 P0725 P0731 P0732 P0733 P0734 P0735 P0736 P0740 P0741 P0742 P0743 P0745 P0746 P0750 DESCRIPTOR Idle Control System RPM Higher than Expected Closed Throttle Position Switch Malfunction P S Pressure Switch Circuit Malfunction ECM PCM KAM Memory Test Error PCM ROM Test Error Brake ON OFF Switch Input Error Clutch Pedal Position Switch Circuit Malfunction Transmission Range Sensor Circuit Failure Transmission Range Sensor Short Circuit or Sensor Malfunction Transmission Range Sensor Low Input Transmission Range Sensor High Input Transmission Fluid Temp Sensor Circuit Malfunction Transmission Fluid Temp Sensor Circuit Malfunction Transmission Fluid Temp Circuit Low Input Transmission Fluid Temp Circuit High Input Turbine Shaft Speed Sensor Circuit Signal Lost Output Shaft Speed Sensor Signal Lost Output Shaft Speed Sensor Erratic Signal Engine Speed Input Circuit Malfunction Gear 1 Incorrect Ratio Gear 2 Incorrect Ratio Gear 3 Incorrect Ratio Gear 4 Incorrect Ratio Gear 5 Incorrect Ratio Reverse
498. rminal of diagnosis connector RA Pin 2 Ni Pin 1 2b For 3 pin diagnostic connector connect analog voltmeter red lead to pin 2 diagnosis terminal and voltmeter black lead to pin 3 ground terminal of diagnosis connector T a i Pin 3 3 ignition switch to ON 4 DTC indication will begin on voltmeter Voltmeter will fluctuate 0 to 12 volts if DTCs are stored in ECU If a is stored in ECU the first number of 12 volt 0 4 second indications will equal the 1 s digit ofa 1 digit 12 volt pulses will be output every 0 4 seconds DTCs are separated by 0 volts for 2 seconds DTC 3 DTC 4 SEPARATION Next DTC Indication Ov O seconds ERA DE NE al III 5 If no DTCs are in ECU voltmeter will read constant 12 volts 2 sec 6 After recording DTCs turn ignition switch off 7 Disconnect voltmeter leads 8 Erase DTCs when all repairs are completed 20 CHRYSLER IMPORTS TEST MODES To manually read DTCs from 1994 95 Chrysler Import Vehicles using the Instrument Panel Malfunction Indicator Lamp do the following The DLC type is vehicle dependent refer to the information displayed on the tester FO HOW TO READ for the DLC type 1 Locate the 16 pin Diagnostic Connector Use F4 DJC Location from the Information menu for diagnostic connector location 2 Jumper the 16 pin diagnostic connector pins 1 and 5 with the single wire M
499. rom the Select Mode menu The Snapshot functions are listed in the Snapshot Options menu To bypass the Data Capture phase and review previously captured Snapshot data press F3 REPLAY DATA 2 To select a Snapshot option press the key listed to the left of the desired function The Snapshot functions are explained below F0 ANY CODE F1 SINGLE CODE F2 MANUAL TRIGGER F3 REPLAY DATA F9 TRIGGER POINT F0 BEGINNING F1 CENTER F2 END OF DATA A trigger occurs when any trouble code is set An or 921 key press also causes a trigger You can select a specific trouble code that must be detected before the trigger will be set When F1 SINGLE CODE is selected the tester displays SNAPSHOT MODE ENTER TROUBLE CODE XX CODE ENTER Use numeric keys to enter the trouble code number that you wish to cause the trigger then press The tester continues to store data until the specified trouble code is detected If the code you enter does not exist for the engine type being tested an INVALID CODE message will be displayed and the code will have to be reentered An key press will also cause a trigger While operating the Snapshot mode you can always cause the trigger to be set by pressing GI GED or To replay previously captured data press GE data captured during the Snapshot is retained in the tester memory for up to 24 hours even if the tester is disconnected from the vehicle or
500. rom the vehicle how to clear DTCs from the vehicle or tester memory obtain a text description of entered or selected DTCs and review entered or selected DTCs as a result of manually retrieving codes from the ECU To read codes on Daihatsu vehicles you must connect the 6 pin Daihatsu jumper P N 02002073 to the Diagnostic Jumper Connector and observe the flashing MIL If you do not know where the DJC is located select Mode F4 DJC Location from the Information menu If necessary refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further instructions Follow the detailed instructions on the following pages to manually read the DTCs Once the DTCs have been manually read from the ECU you can input the DTC into the tester so the tester can define the code A complete list of Daihatsu DTCs is also included in DAIHATSU DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs on page 11 MODE F1 DTC ENTRY When Mode F1 DTC ENTRY is selected the tester displays five submodes F0 HOW TO READ Fl ENTER DTC s F2 DTC LIST F3 REVIEW DTC 4 CLEAR DTC s Manually Reading DTCs To manually read Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs on Daihatsu vehicles from 1988 92 locate and jumper the Diagnostic Connector then read the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL This method requires the 6 pin Daihatsu jumper P N 02002073 which connects 2 pins of the 6 pin DJC The DTCs are flashed out on the dashboard mounted MIL Refer to the section on manually r
501. rom this list the can DTC List be selected or deselected using the and keys without the need to enter the DTC numerically Submode F3 REVIEW displays all DTCs that have been selected or entered into the tester memory Review DTC Submode F4 Clearing DTCs from ECUs on import vehicles sometimes requires special steps not related to Clear DTC s the tester This submode has a selection which automatically clears or describes how to clear ECU DTCs e g removing a certain fuse or disconnecting the battery This submode has a selection for clearing DTCs entered into the tester memory using DTC Entry Submode F5 On certain Toyota and Lexus vehicles the engine ECU can be commanded into a Sensitive Sens DTC DTC detection mode This sub mode increases the chance of capturing an intermittent fault within the engine control system SUBMODE F1 READ DTC S The purpose of the Read DTC submode is to read DTCs stored in the ECU on vehicles equipped with On Board Diagnostics OBD and a Data Link Connector DLC Lists of the DTCs for each vehicle are included in the Manufacturer Specific Sections of this manual To select Read DTC s submode do the following 1 Press to select DTCs from the Select Mode menu 2 Press al to select Read DTCs from DTC Menu 3 The tester will display screens such as in the examples on the following page The tester may display instruction screens to guide you to connect the appro
502. rouble Codes including manufacturer specific DTCs on OBD II compliant vehicles e Read Freeze Frame DTC information for OBD II compliant vehicles Print diagnostic data and trouble codes View Readiness Test Information for OBD II compliant vehicles Diagnose intermittent problems by capturing and storing multiple samples of system data before and after the problem occurs then examining the data to determine the problem Clear engine and transmission DTCs not available on all vehicles Perform various engine running tests Control engine and transmission actuators not available on all vehicles Perform specialized tests on selected engine ECUSs not available on all vehicles Control engine idle speed not available on all vehicles Read engine and transmission controller information not available on all vehicles Resetengine and transmission memory parameters not available on all vehicles ASIAN IMPORTS CARTRIDGE KIT CONTENTS The Asian Imports Cartridge kit includes the Asian Imports Cartridge and this operator s manual The following vehicle specific adapters and cables are used in conjunction with the Asian Imports Cartridge Kit Type 3 Cable For OBD II Applications When testing OBDII compliant vehicles with a 16 pin DLC the 16 14 Pin OBDII Type3 Adapter Cable P N 02001969 must be connected to the end of the Mastertech Tech 1A DLC Adapter Cable 6 GENERAL INFORMATION ASIAN IMPORTS CARTRIDGE KIT DES
503. s Pressing from the Select Mode menu displays a list of tests available To return to the Select Mode menu press EXIT J Once you have selected the test mode operation begins Detailed operating instructions for each output control test are on the following pages There are descriptions of four output tests available in the Nissan specific section Each OBD Control test can provide you with enhanced diagnostic information which will help to pinpoint Air Fuel Ratio AFR problems ECU switch input problems and real time diagnostic trouble code monitoring for intermittent component failure F0 AFR MONITOR A Monitors engine control system open closed loop operation and exhaust emission rich lean status F1 AFR MONITOR Monitors engine control system open closed loop operation with indication of AFR greater than 5 lean greater than 5 rich or between 5 lean and 5 rich F2 SWITCH TEST Monitors ECU idle starter and vehicle speed switch input F3 RT DTC MONITOR Real Time Diagnostic Trouble Code monitors intermittent crank signal ignition primary and air flow meter component MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS Submode 0 AFR Monitor A The AFR Monitor A miscellaneous test is available for all 1987 89 and select 1990 95 Nissan vehicles If you are unsure of test application check the ECU Modes column in the Nissan Vehicles and Systems table If the ECU Modes column indicates 5 Modes then the vehicle supports AFR Monitor A Th
504. s OBD OBD I Systems section for further instructions Follow the detailed instructions on the following pages to read the DTCs Once the DTCs have been read the tester can define the code A complete list of Honda DTCs is also included in HONDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs on page 15 Typical Honda ECU Honda Acura Service Check Connector Jumper MODE F1 DTC ENTRY When Mode F1 DTC ENTRY is selected the tester displays five submodes F0 HOW TO READ F1 ENTER DTC s F2 DTC LIST F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC s HONDA 11 TEST MODES Submode F0 How to Read This submode provides information on how to manually read DTCs from the vehicle Step by step screen instructions provide information to correctly set up the vehicle ECM This is performed by following the tester instruction screens If you have trouble additional DTC retrieval information is described below If you refer to the factory service manual for this information make sure that you are following the correct steps for the system that you are working on Submode F1 Enter DTCs This submode provides you with a text description of the numeric that was entered into the tester There can be two methods to manually read DTCs from the Honda ECUs On early Honda ECUs there are 4 LEDs and on later ECUS there is a single LED Honda service and repair information indicates that code 0 is supported for OBD systems Code 0 refers to ECU related failures
505. s not communicate with the tester the ECU will be listed as Inactive in the Select System menu INACTIVE SYSTEM DISPLAYS If an inactive system has been selected from the Select System Menu the tester will display information screens These screens remind you that DTCs will be output on the System MIL Instrument Panel and MIL flashes must be counted manually to read DTCs INACTIVE SYSTEM HAS BEEN SELECTED FOR TESTING A FOR INACTIVE AY SYSTEMS TESTER INITIATES DTC FLASH ON SYS MIL MIL FLASHES MUST BE COUNTED TO DETERMINE DTC ENTER TO SELECT MODE MENU LEXUS 15 SELECTING THE VEHICLE SELECT MODE MENU When the above steps are completed the Select Mode menu displays the test modes available for the selected vehicle and system Refer to Section 7 Test Modes and the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for operating the test modes with Lexus vehicles A list of Engine system test modes is shown below SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST F2 DTC F3 SNAPSHOT SELECT MODE Y F5 SYSTEM TESTS F8 INFORMATION TO SELECTED TEST MODE Enter the displayed DTC Move to the next DTC Stop the automatic scrolling DLC Location 16 LEXUS TEST MODES 7 TEST MODES The Select Mode menu displays test modes available for the selected vehicle and system Operating instructions for modes F0 DATA LIST F2 F3 SNAPSHOT and F8 INFORMATION are i
506. s section includes the test modes available how to connect the tester to the vehicle operating instructions for DTC entry and the applicable DTCs for each model year Parameters that can be displayed by Lexus vehicles along with a description and states or units range of each parameter are listed in DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS on page 27 4 LEXUS LEXUS SYSTEMS 3 LEXUS OBD SYSTEMS Lexus vehicles are equipped with On Board Diagnostic OBD systems that operate with engine fuel and emission systems Lexus OBD systems include transmission ECT antilock brake ABS cruise control CCS air conditioning A C and air bag AB For these systems Lexus vehicles do not use a multiplexed vehicle network and as a result the separated systems accompany engine OBD systems with each additional system ECU having it s own diagnostic trouble code DTC output line In addition engine ECUs support serial data communications Following is information about each Lexus OBD system ENGINE DATA LIST Lexus engine serial data list is used to aid in diagnostics for the engine control system Engine control module input sensors input switches and output actuator data list parameters are provided to the tester by the ECU via a serial data link Lexus ECUs update this information at 1 3 seconds update Not all Lexus vehicles support data list and in some cases where the tester has determined that a system is inactive and the data list
507. se Option is to view text screens that provide information on how to clear the DTCs from ECU memory This is performed by tester keypad presses Option F1 clears the tester memory of DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The clear DTC s mode is helpful and provides information that you would normally have to locate in a service manual KIA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 7 KIA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS DTCs available for Kia vehicles are listed in the following tables Some code numbers have different descriptors depending on the selected vehicle Only codes available for the selected vehicle are displayed by the tester OBD I SYSTEMS YEAR 1994 DESCRIPTOR 1994 2 NO DISTRIBUTOR NE SIGNAL CKT 3 NO DISTRIBUTOR G SIGNAL 4V ONLY 8 MAF SENSOR CKT OPEN OR SHORTED 9 ECT SENSOR CKT OPEN OR SHORTED 10 IAT MAF SNSR CKT OPEN SHORTED 12 TP SENSOR CKT OPEN OR SHORTED 14 AP ECM SENSOR CKT OPEN SHORTED 15 O2 SENSOR CKT LESS THAN 0 55V 17 FDBK SYS 02S NO CHANGE FOR 50s 25 FPRC SOL CKT OPEN OR SHORTED 26 EVAP SOL CKT OPEN OR SHORTED 34 ISC SOL CKT OPEN OR SHORTED 12 KIA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS LEXUS SPECIFIC INFORMATION LEXUS OBD SYSTEMS TEST MODES AVAILABLE GETTING STARTED SELECTING THE VEHICLE TEST MODES Mode F2 DTC Submode F1 Read Enter DTC s Submode 5 Sens LEXUS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs DATA LIST PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
508. selection is displayed data list may still not be supported If a vehicle has a TDCL and Check DLC Data List may only be supported on the TDCL DLC This is a function of the data link connector so make sure that you are connected to the correct DLC for data list information Review the Lexus application matrix column titled Information Type for the availability of serial data on the vehicle being tested ENGINE DTCS Lexus engine DTCs are available on Lexus vehicles with electronic engine control Engine DTCs are set by the engine ECU when problems with but not limited to the ECU air fuel ratio throttle position and air pump control are detected In addition Lexus engine ECUs can be commanded to a sensitive test mode which is found in the Sensitive Test this test triggers the engine ECU into a sensitive mode which detects engine DTCs using an environment that is less stringent to DTC detection The Asian Imports application cartridge supports reading engine DTCs automatically or manually depending on the state active or inactive of the engine system ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED TRANSMISSION DTCS Lexus are available on select Lexus vehicles with an refer to the factory service manual for the transmission type for the vehicle you are testing ECT DTCs are set by the ECT ECU when problems with but not limited to the ECU ATF temperature accumulator control solenoid and shift control solenoid s are detected The
509. sian Imports Cartridge are separated into two different sections within the Asian Imports Operator s Manual The vehicle s on board system will determine which section of the Operator s Manual will need to be used Vehicles that are OBD II certified have information about the operating test modes in the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section of the Operator s Manual Vehicles that have OBD or OBD I systems have test mode information in this section of the Operator s Manual In these sections you will find information on test modes available how to connect the tester to the vehicle and operating instructions for the different test modes A complete list of Nissan Diagnostic Trouble Codes is included at the back of each section To determine which section of the Operator s Manual to use for diagnostic information and instructions look at Adapter Type of the Vehicle and Systems chart If the vehicle you are testing has an OBD II adapter type use the Common Test Modes OBD II Systems section of the Operator s Manual If the vehicle you are testing does not have the OBD II Adapter Type use this section to diagnose the vehicle under test 10 NISSAN TEST MODES AVAILABLE 3 TEST MODES AVAILABLE The following test modes are available when testing Nissan vehicles Operating instructions for test modes other than DTC ENTRY DTCs and OBD Controls are included in Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section There are also Nissan specific instructio
510. slowly release 6 Start engine 7 Turn heater fan headlamp and rear defogger switches ON and then all OFF 8 Drive vehicle above 7 MPH 9 Operate the engine speed above 2000 RPM until the MIL turns ON If the MIL stays ON check for DTC s by observing the O2 Monitor Lamp mounted on the ECU Use F5 ECU LOCATION from the Information menu for ECU location The long segment 1 2 seconds ON represents the tens digit The short segment 0 2 seconds ON represents the ones digit Each DTC is separated by a 1 8 second delay If the MIL blinks the system is normal 10 Turn the key OFF and disconnect the Test Mode Connectors 11 Erase DTC s when all repairs are completed Use F4 CLEAR DTC s from the Entry menu for instructions on how to clear the DTC s from the vehicle and the tester To manually read Test Mode DTCs from 1992 1995 SVX Subaru vehicles using the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL and ECU LED O2 Monitor LED do the following 1 Warm engine to normal operating temperature turn all accessories switches OFF 2 Turn key OFF 3 Connect either diagnostic lead to pin 1 of the black connector Use F4 DJC LOCATION from the Information menu for test mode connectors location 4 Turn key ON Do not start engine The MIL should turn ON 5 Start engine The MIL should turn OFF If the MIL stays ON note the DTC s and continue 6 Drive the vehicle greater than 7 MPH for at least 1 minute 20 SUBARU TEST MODES
511. smission Control Switch Circuit Out of Range P1781 4x4 Low Switch Out of Range P1783 Transmission Over Temp Condition P1788 Var Force Solenoid 2 Circuit Open P1789 Var Force Solenoid 2 Circuit Shorted P1790 TPS Open or Short 1792 Malfunction P1794 Battery or Battery Circuit Failure P1795 Idle Switch Open or Short P1797 Park Neutral Signal Open or Short P1804 4WD High Indicator Circuit P1806 4WD High Indicator Short to Voltage P1808 4WD Low Indicator Circuit P1810 4WD Low Indicator Short to Voltage P1812 4WD Mode Select Circuit P1815 4x4 Shift Control Switch Short to Ground P1820 Transfer Case Relay Module CW Relay Circuit P1822 Transfer Case Relay Module CW Relay Short to Battery Voltage P1824 Elec Shift Relay Circuit P1826 Elec Shift Relay Short to Voltage P1828 Transfer Case Relay Module CCW Relay Circuit P1830 Transfer Case Relay Module CCW Relay Short to Battery Voltage P1846 Transfer Case Touch Drive Plate A Circuit P1848 Transfer Case Touch Drive Plate A Short to Battery Voltage P1850 Transfer Case Touch Drive Plate B Circuit P1852 Transfer Case Touch Drive Plate B Short to Battery Voltage P1854 Transfer Case Touch Drive Plate Circuit P1856 Transfer Case Touch Drive Plate Short to Battery Voltage 66 MAZDA MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 1998 DTC DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED NO
512. st modes are supported in the Asian Imports software program as modes through F8 After using Asian Imports software modes F0 F8 you will notice new types of diagnostic data that are displayed on the tester F1 Diagnostic Procedure is designed to assist you in learning how to diagnose an OBD II system fault or assess current system condition While there are many approaches that can be used there is no one right way to perform this task This submode helps formalize a strategy and teaches you how using a sensible approach to use the Asian Imports software modes F0 F8 and determine a solution to a problem within the OBD II system To select Procedure from the Diagnostics menu do the following 1 Press to select OBD II Toolpak from the Select Mode menu 2 Press G to select Diagnostics from the OBD II Toolpak menu 3 Press to select Procedure from the Diagnostics menu First time users to ensure proper operation this mode is best reviewed before actual testing on the vehicle is performed Prior to the testing it will be to your advantage to know the answers to the following Is the MIL on Are DTCs present If so record the DTC numbers Is the fuel tank cap installed and is it tight 3 clicks s the fuel tank level greater than 15 of total volume Press GB O or GM to review and answer the prompts displayed on the screen and to read any key help screens that may be displayed for navigation help A
513. stem lists may not be supported by the vehicle under test Inactive systems do not display ok or ng on the right hand side of the display see Select System Menu section The System Inquiry information screens then display possible Active systems available using the Toyota Check or TDCL Data Link Connector s DLCs TOYOTA 13 SELECTING THE VEHICLE VEHICLE HAS AY VEHICLE HAS AV CHECK AND TDCL CHECK DLC DLC USE BLUE OR USE BLUE GREEN ADAPTER ADAPTER ACTIVE SYSTEMS Y INDICATED BY ok OR ng okzNO DTC L ng DTCs IN ECU INACTIVE SYS AY NO ok ng DISP TESTER CAN START DTC MIL FLASH NOTE VEHICLE AV MAY NOT SUPPORT ALL DISPLAYED INACTIVE SYSTEMS TO POSSIBLE SYSTEMS SUPPORTED DISPLAYS POSSIBLE SYSTEM SUPPORTED DISPLAYS 1989 94 VEHICLES ONLY When adapter cable and Active Inactive information screens have been displayed the tester instructs you to connect the adapter cable to the tester DLC cable and the vehicle DLC If you are not sure where the vehicle DLC is located press at any time during system inquiry for DLC location information When the tester is connected to the vehicle turn the ignition key to the ON position then press 1359 to continue with the system inguiry This portion of the system inguiry can take up to 30 seconds depending on how many systems are available on the vehicle The tester lists the systems that can be tested with the ins
514. sure of the oxygen content in the exhaust emission gases that surround the sensor tip and is a primary input to the ECU Once O2S is warmed up 2500 F its output voltage will fluctuate above and below a threshold of 0 450 volts Values greater than 0 450v indicate a rich condition while values less than COMMON TEST MODES II 43 ASIAN IMPORTS DIAGNOSTIC PARAMETERS 0 450v indicate a lean condition If the O2S has not achieved its normal operating temperature its value may remain at 0 450v Associated with the OBD II system and the parameter label are Bx and Sx Bx refers to Bank 1 or 2 and Sx refers to the sensor in positions 1 2 3 or 4 Refer to Appendix B OBD II Oxygen Sensor Location Information for a more complete description of the O2S naming convention ST FT 1 STFT2 100 to 100 Short Term Fuel Trim ST FT is the measure of adaptive or feedback fuel correction strategy for the injection of fuel into the engine Short Term Fuel Trim represents the ECU s dynamic short term adjustment to fuel strategy determined from a lookup table in its memory This parameter is continually changing over time at a rate faster than Long Term Fuel Trim and varies with engine design and engine operating conditions The numeric character in ST FT1 and ST FT 2 defines the cylinders that are grouped as a bank for fuel feedback correction Bank 1 1s the bank which contains cylinder number 1 Expected values for this parameter ca
515. t P0103 Sensor Circuit High Input P0105 MAP BARO Circuit Malfunction P0106 BARO EGR Boost Sensor Circuit Performance P0107 BARO EGR Boost Sensor Circuit Low Input P0108 BARO EGR Boost Sensor Circuit High Input P0110 IAT Circuit Malfunction P0111 IAT Circuit Performance Problem P0112 IAT Circuit Low Input P0113 IAT Circuit High Input P0115 ECT Circuit Malfunction P0117 ECT Sensor Low Input P0118 ECT Sensor High Input P0120 Throttle Position Circuit Malfunction P0121 TPS Circuit Malfunction P0122 TPS Circuit Low Input P0123 TPS Circuit High Input P0125 Coolant Temp Low for Too Long no Closed Loop Fuel Control P0126 ECT Sensor Low Temp P0130 O2 Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 1 Circuit Malfunction P0131 Upstream HO2 Sensor Circuit Bank 1 Low Voltage P0132 HO2 Sensor Circuit Bank 1 Sensor 1 High Voltage P0133 Upstream HO2 Sensor Bank 1 Slow Response P0134 HO2 Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 1 no Activity P0135 Upstream HO2 Sensor Bank 1 Circuit Malfunction P0136 Downstream HO2 Sensor Circuit Malfunction Bank 1 P0137 Downstream HO2 Sensor Low Voltage Bank 1 P0138 Downstream HO2 Sensor Circuit Bank 1 High Voltage P0140 HO2 Sensor Circuit Bank 1 Sensor 2 no Activity MAZDA 57 MAZDA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 1998 DTC DESCRIPTOR CONTINUED NO P0141 Downstream HO2 Sensor Bank 1 Heater Circuit Malfunction
516. t 15 of FCC rules for a Class A computing device Operation of this eguipment in a residential area may cause unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception reguiring the operator to take whatever steps necessary to correct the interference A NOTE ABOUT 1 AND TECH 1A TESTERS The TECH 1 Series A is an updated version of the TECH 1 In addition to already proven TECH 1 diagnostic power the TECH 1 Series A has on board RS232 Instrumentation Port and DC Power Jack capabilities You can differentiate a TECH 1A from a TECH 1 by the phone style jacks on both sides of the tester existing aftermarket TECH 1 application cartridges will run in the TECH 1A Note that the TECH 1 and TECH 1A do not use the same DLC or DC Power cable nor are the Adapters the same On some vehicles power to the cigarette lighter is controlled by the ignition switch When testing these vehicles with a TECH 1 or TECHIA it is best to connect the tester directly to the battery with the optional Battery Adapter Cable P N 02001636 which is available from your TECHIA distributor USING THIS CARTRIDGE WITH A TECH 1 TECH 1A TESTER When using the Asian Imports Software and a TECH 1A on OBD II compliant controllers an OBD II interface cartridge and 16 14 pin adapter cable is required or an OBD II Vehicle Interface Module VIM and 16 24 pin adapter cable can be used When using the Asian Imports Software and a TECH 1 on Asian vehicles with OBD II complia
517. t modes Refer to the charts on the following pages for a list of tests available for each vehicle Only test modes available for the selected vehicle system are displayed in the Select Mode menu AVAILABLE TEST MODES F0 DATA LIST Displays diagnostic data parameters in pre selected or user selected pairs F1 DTC ENTRY The DTC Entry mode is designed for vehicles that have On Board Diagnostics OBD capability but do not have a Data Link Connector DLC The DTC Entry mode has five submodes Submode 0 HOW TOREAD displays information about how to set the vehicle controller in the mode so you can manually read stored DTCs Submode Fl ENTER DTC s allows you to input a DTC to the tester that was manually read from ECU LEDs analog voltmeter or the vehicle Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL The DTC description is then displayed on the tester screen Submode F2 LIST allows you to scroll through a list of DTCs applicable to the vehicle being tested Submode F3 REVIEW DTC allows you to review DTCs that have been selected or entered into the tester memory Submode F4 CLEAR DTC s displays information about how to clear the DTCs from the vehicle being tested or from the tester memory F2 DTC The DTC mode is designed for vehicles that have On Board Diagnostics OBD capability and have a Data Link Connector DLC The DTC mode has four submodes Submode Fl READ DTCs reads and displays stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes stor
518. t support Sensitive Mode If the screen is displayed with test status or a message to retry the test EH tester cannot command the ECU into Sensitive DTC Mode an information LEXUS 19 TEST MODES DTC TEST MODE MENU EXIT TEST NOT SUPPORTED BY ECU TEST TEST INCREASES ECU SENSITIVITY TO DTC DETECTION DONE YES 7 TURN A C SW OFF PUT TRANSMISSION IN NEUTRAL GEAR DONE YES TURN IGNITION KEY OFF CLOSE THROTTLE DONE YES TURN IGN KEY TO ON CONFIRM ENG MIL FLASHING DONE YES START ENGINE AND ROADTEST ABOVE 6 MPH TO CHK DTCs DONE YES ROADTEST DONE STOP VEHICLE AND PREPARE FOR DTCs DONE YES YES RECEIVE FAULT CODE INFORMATION PLEASE WAIT RECEIVING FAULT CODE INFORMATION PLEASE WAIT 24 ADVANCE CODE HOLD CODE EXIT QUIT ENTER SUMMARY 24 INTAKE TEMP SENSOR SIGNAL DTC SUMMARY 24 DTC F1 READ DTC S F3 REVIEW DTC S F4 CLEAR Example of Sensitive DTC Submode Instructions KEYS GO Advance to next DTC or hold displayed DTC Confirm instructions on display are completed Confirm MIL not flashing Display DTC Summary Return to DTC Entry menu 20 LEXUS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS 8 LEXUS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS DTCs available for Lexus vehicles are list
519. t the DTCs obtained from the analog voltmeter as an alternative way of entering DTCs into the tester s memory As you scroll through the available DTCs you can view a description of the DTC obtained from the analog voltmeter You can Select the DTC on the tester screen for later review or printing Refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further information Submode F3 Review DTC This submode provides you with a review of the DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The description of the entered or selected DTC will be displayed along with a numerical summary of the entered or selected DTC Review DTC is intended to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTCs that you have encountered during diagnosis Submode F4 Clear DTC s This submode has two options for you to chose Option 1 1s an automated function which the tester clears DTCs from the vehicle ECU memory This is performed by tester keypad presses Option 2 clears the tester memory from DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The clear DTC s mode is helpful and provides information that you would normally have to locate in a service manual 22 MAZDA TEST MODES IMPORTANT Follow the Submode F0 Prepare Vehicle instructions to ensure proper vehicle preparation prior to testing The vehicle must be completely warmed up in order for the tester to communicate properly with the vehicle MA
520. t use a multiplexed vehicle network and as a result the separated systems accompany engine OBD systems with each additional system ECU having its own diagnostic trouble code output line In addition engine ECUS support serial data communications Following is information about each Toyota OBD system ENGINE DATA LIST Toyota engine serial data list is used to aid in diagnostics for the engine control system Engine control module input sensors input switches and output actuator data list parameters are provided to the tester by the ECU via a serial data link Toyota ECUs update this information at 1 3 seconds update Not all Toyota vehicles support data list and in some cases where the tester has determined that a system is inactive and the data list selection is displayed data list may still not be supported If a vehicle has a TDCL and Check DLC Data List may only be supported on the TDCL DLC This is a function of the data link connector so make sure that you are connected to the correct DLC for data list information Review the Toyota application matrix column titled Information Type for the availability of serial data on the vehicle being tested ENGINE DTCS Toyota engine DTCs are available on Toyota vehicles with electronic engine control Engine DTCs are set by the engine ECU when problems with but not limited to the ECU air fuel ratio throttle position and air pump control are detected In addition Toyota engine ECUs
521. t voltmeter leads 8 Erase DTCs when all repairs are completed Manually reading DTCs from 1993 95 Hyundai Scoupe using instrument panel malfunction indicator lamp MIL 1 Locate the 12 pin Diagnostic Connector Use F4 DJC Location from the Information menu for help on diagnostic connector location 2 Turn ignition key ON do not start engine 3 Within 1 second of key ON ground pin 10 of the diagnostic connector for 2 5 seconds the jumper configuration best suited for this operation is a double ended alligator type with small jaw about 3 feet long PIN 10 4 Observe the Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL to read DTCs The first MIL output is either the stored or the no fault detected MIL flashes 4 4 4 4 In the case of more than one stored in ECU each individual is repeated infinitely until pin 10 is grounded again MIL will turn ON OFF if DTCs are stored in ECU after pin 10 is grounded If a DTC is stored in ECU MIL digit flashes are indicated by 0 5 second pulses MIL digit flashes are separated by a MIL off 2 5 second pause HYUNDAI 13 TEST MODES 1s Ground PIN 10 Within 1 second of ignition key on on gt IGNITION I KEY Ungrounded PIN 10 2255 Grounded MEL MIL fuga MIL seconds 2 58 2 55 2 55 4 2 55 4 4 2 55 4 4 2 55 1 il 0 55 0 55 MIL
522. t you have encountered during diagnosis Submode F4 Clear This submode has two options for you to chose Option FO is to view text screens that provide information on how to clear the DTCs from ECU memory This is performed by tester keypad presses Option F1 clears the tester memory of DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The clear DTC s mode is helpful and provides information that you would normally have to locate in a service manual NISSAN 19 TEST MODES MODE F2 DTC To read DTCs on all 1987 89 and select 1990 95 Nissan vehicles you will need to locate the vehicle DLC and connect the Nissan Check Adapter to the tester and vehicle To locate the DLC select F1 DLC Location from the Information menu If necessary refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further instructions When Mode F2 DTC is selected the tester displays four submodes DTC SUBMODES Fl READ DTC s F2 DTC LIST F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC s Submode F1 Read DTC s This submode is available for all 1987 89 and select 1990 95 Nissan vehicles If you are unsure of the Read test application check the ECU Modes column in the Nissan Vehicle Coverage table found at the beginning of this section If the ECU Modes column indicates 5 Modes then the vehicle supports F1 READ DTC s This submode provides automated DTC retrieval from the vehicle ECU Step by step screen instructions guide you to co
523. talled adapter Press or to continue to the Select System displays 20 TOYOTA SELECTING THE VEHICLE POSSIBLE AV ACTIVE SYSTEMS SUPPORTED BY CHECK DLC CONNECT ADAPT 4Y TO DLC FOR HELP USE F9 DLC LOC ENTER ENTER 4 5 6 POS TDCL SYS AV 1 2 3 POS CHECK SYS AY TURN IGN KEY Y 1 ENGINE DATA ON TO PERFORM 2 ENGINE DTC SYSTEM INQUIRY 3 AIR BAG DTC ENTER N ENTER POSSIBLE TDCL CONNECTOR ACTIVE SYSTEMS SUPPORTED BY SYSTEM INQUIRY TDCL DLC PLEASE WAIT ENTER ENGINE DATA ENGINE DTC ECT DTC POS SYS Y DTC s UISE CTL DTC C DTC 2 ENTER SELECT SYSTEM MENU TO SELECT SYSTEM MENU The Select System menu displays the systems available for testing on the selected vehicle An ok next to a system indicates that the system is Active an ng next to a system indicates it 1s Inactive Press the function key listed to the left of the system you wish to test to advance to the Select Mode menu SELECT SYSTEM Y F0 ENGINE ok F1 ECT ok F2 ABS Active systems no stored SELECT F3 CRUISE CTL ng F4 AIC N F5 AIR BAG Inactive systems TO SELECTED MODE MENU If an ECU is malfunctioning and does not communicate with the tester the ECU will be listed as Inactive in the Select System menu
524. tatus displays information about the OBD II system s commanded secondary or auxiliary air injection diverter valve position The possible states are diverting secondary air upstream of the first catalytic converter UPSTRM downstream of the first catalytic converter DNSTRM or venting to the atmosphere ATM OFF RSRVD is applicable for future applications SE 40 to 419 C 40 to 215 Engine Coolant Temperature ECT is an analog input to the ECU This parameter provides a temperature indication of engine coolant near the ECT sensor ECT sensors can be located in the intake manifold cylinder head or water pump housing Typical ECT is 200 F warm engine at idle Note that the in parenthesis indicates the parameter is temperature related ENGINE LOAD UNITS RANGE Engine Load is derived by the ECU from a measure of current engine airflow divided by engine peak airflow Engine Load directly increases with throttle angle and drive conditions and is an indicator of percent engine capacity in any given operating mode Engine Load is typically 5 at engine idle and 80 or greater during Wide Open Throttle warm engine ENGINE SPEED RPM 0 to 8000 Engine Speed is an indication of crankshaft revolutions per minute The ECU uses input engine speed to make determinations about current engine operating conditions and the operation of various engine management system output components FT O2S B1 1 FT O2S
525. ted once so if they are missed then the procedure must be repeated Depending on the model year DTC 44 or 55 indicates a pass DTC 7 Turn ignition key off To manually read DTCs from 1991 95 Nissan ECHO s with the 1 LED 2 mode system do the following 1 Use Mode F5 ECU Location from the Information menu to locate the vehicle ECU 2 Turn the ignition key to ON ECU LED and MIL should illuminate briefly for a bulb check 3 Tum the rotary diagnostic mode selector fully clockwise or change the diagnostic slide switch to the ON position 4 Wait at least 2 seconds 5 Turn the rotary diagnostic mode selector fully counterclockwise or push the slide switch back to the original position 6 Count the flashes on the ECU LED or MIL Long flashes are the 10 s digit and short flashes are the 1 s digit 7 Write down all received DTCs The DTCs will be reported once so if they are missed then the procedure must be repeated DTC 44 or 55 indicates a pass DTC 8 Turn ignition key OFF To manually read DTCs from 1993 95 Nissan Quest 3 0L do the following 1 Locate the Diagnostic Jumper Connector under hood below MAF sensor on bracket bolted to transaxle 2 Turn the ignition key to ON 3 Disconnect the Diagnostic Jumper Connector DJC 4 Referring to the illustration use the Nissan jumper wire P N 02002075 to short the Blue White wire and Grey Blue wire between the DJC halves 18 NISSAN TEST MODES
526. tep by step screen instructions provide information to correctly set up the vehicle ECU This is performed by following the tester instruction screens If you have trouble additional DTC retrieval information is described below If you refer to the manual for this information make sure that you are following the correct steps for the system that you are working on On Chrysler Imports vehicles the Enter DTCs submode allows you to enter manually read DTCs This submode provides you with a text description of the numeric DTC that was entered into the tester Submode F1 Enter DTC s The Enter DTC Submode displays two question marks for DTC Entry The tester screen prompts you to enter the DTCs read from the analog voltmeter or the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Be careful when reading the DTC from the analog voltmeter or MIL Incorrect analog voltmeter or MIL interpretation can cause the wrong DTC description to be displayed Once all DTCs have been manually read and recorded enter each DTC into the tester as described in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section Refer to the appropriate procedure for manually reading analog voltmeter or MIL DTCs on the following pages Chrysler Imports service and repair information indicates that code 0 is supported for OBD systems Code 0 refers to ECU related failures and is valid when the engine MIL does not illuminate or will not illuminate for 2 seconds when the ignition is turned on Refer to the
527. termittent event and saved in the tester for later analysis This data is retained in the tester memory for at least 24 hours even if you remove your tester from the vehicle or until it is replaced with newer data Some vehicle systems support the use of OBD Controls which can be used to diagnose certain powertrain control system problems For example on some systems you can monitor air fuel ratio determine oxygen sensor range of operation and perform switch tests In some cases the OBD Controls allow you to command the ECU into a mode of operation that sets up an ideal environment for fuel or ignition system diagnostics A NOTE ABOUT TECH 1 AND TECH 1A TESTERS The Asian Imports application cartridge is compatible with the TECH 1 TECH 1A and MASTERTECH testers However if you are using the Asian Imports application cartridge with a TECH 1 a TECH 1 14 15 Pin Data Link Connector DLC cable P N 02001980 is required for connection to the Asian vehicle adapters Also when using a TECHI tester on Toyota or Lexus vehicles the number of available OBD systems will be reduced see the Toyota or Lexus sections in this manual When using a TECH 1 tester on Mazda vehicles the Switch Test OBD Controls test will not function properly see the Mazda section of this manual The TECH tester is an updated version of the TECH 1 tester In addition to already proven TECH 1 diagnostic power the TECH 1A has on board RS232 Instrumentation Port and D
528. the key until the model being tested is displayed then press the key SELECTING THE ENGINE Next the Engine Select menu is displayed Press until the engine type of the vehicle is displayed then press SELECTING THE FUEL SYSTEM TYPE Next the Fuel System select menu is displayed selected models only Press TS until the fuel system type of the vehicle is displayed then press SELECTING THE TRANSMISSION TYPE Next the Transmission select menu is displayed selected models only Press until the transmission type of the vehicle is displayed then press SELECTING THE EMISSION TYPE Next the Emission select menu is displayed selected models only Press until the emission type of the vehicle is displayed then press 12 SUBARU SELECTING THE VEHICLE SELECTING THE DRIVE TYPE Next the Drive select menu is displayed selected models only Press QT until the drive system type 2WD or 4WD of the vehicle is displayed then press VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY After the engine transmission emission and drive types are selected the tester displays a summary screen of the selected vehicle Information displayed includes the year manufacturer model engine size and type and additional information such as the type of fuel system SELECT MODE MENU When the above steps are completed the Select Mode menu displays the test modes available for the selected vehicle and system Refer to Section 6 Test Modes
529. the 2 pin or 3 pin Diagnostic Connector 2 For the 2 pin diagnostic connector connect analog voltmeter red lead to pin 1 diagnostic terminal and voltmeter black lead to pin 2 ground terminal of diagnostic connector For the 3 pin diagnostic connector connect analog voltmeter red lead to pin 2 diagnostic terminal and voltmeter black lead to pin 3 ground terminal of diagnostic connector PIN 2 PIN 1 3 Turn ignition switch to ON 4 DTC indication will begin on voltmeter Voltmeter will fluctuate Ov to 12v if DTCs are stored in ECU If a DTC is stored in ECU the first number of 12v 0 4s indications will equal the 1s digit of a 1 digit DTC DTC 12v pulses will be output every 0 4s DTCs are separated by Ov for 2s indication 5 If no DTCs are in ECU voltmeter will read constant 12v 6 After recording DTCs turn ignition switch off 7 Disconnect voltmeter leads 8 Erase DTCs when all repairs are completed F DTC 3 4 J4 DTC 4 SEPARATION Next DTC Indication 0v seconds F F F F F F bd edycja Ki KTT 2 sec MITSUBISHI 21 TEST MODES To manually read DTCs from 1994 95 Mitsubishi Vehicles using the dashboard malfunction indicator lamp do the following DLC type is vehicle dependent refer to information displayed on tester FO HOW TO READ for DLC type 1 Locate the 16 pin Diagnostic Connector 2 Jumper the 16 pin diagnostic connector pins 1 and 5 with the si
530. the text description screens These text screens contain bank number and sensor number information that the OBD II system uses for its naming convention Using this information will help your understanding of the OBD II system 10 Press 9410 to return to previous menu ACTIVE KEYS Scroll up and down GI Select O2S location exhaust system number of catalytic converters number of oxygen sensors Select exhaust system number of catalytic converters number of oxygen sensors GB Select exhaust system number of oxygen sensors Select 025 Information Advance program from current screen Exit to the previous test menu Submode F1 Type Mode 1 Type provides text based information about how the electronic powertrain control system utilizes heated upstream and downstream and non heated upstream and downstream oxygen sensors Information on sensor signal PCM use and heater operation is provided This mode can assist you in learning about the importance of an OBD II system s oxygen sensor based on the types of O2Ss that are currently used on vehicles COMMON TEST MODES II 37 TEST MODES NOTE Use of this mode requires knowledge about the oxygen sensor type J upstream downstream heated non heated for the current vehicle under test To display information about how the electronic powertrain control system utilizes oxygen sensors do the following 1 Press to select OBD II
531. tion menu for Data Link Connector location assistance 4 Power MASTERTECH or TECH I TECH IA with 12v power cable 5 Select Chrysler Imports vehicle to test 6 Press F2 from Chrysler Imports test mode menu 7 Press F1 READ DTCs submode from test menu Follow instructions on the tester display 8 Tester will automatically command the vehicle ECU into the correct mode required to read DTCs and will display all received DTCs on the tester display Submode F2 DTC List This submode provides you with a way to view all possible ECU DTCs including DTC numbers and descriptions You can also select the DTCs obtained from the analog voltmeter or MIL as an alternative way of entering DTCs into the tester s memory As you scroll through the available DTCs you can view a description of the DTC obtained from the analog voltmeter or MIL You can select the DTC on the tester screen for later review or printing Refer to the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section for further information Submode F3 Review DTC This submode provides you with a review of the DTCs that you entered or selected in the tester The description of the entered or selected DTC will be displayed along with a numerical summary of the entered or selected DTC Review DTC is intended to provide you with an electronic clipboard that keeps track of the DTCs that you have encountered during diagnosis Submode F4 Clear DTC s This submode has two options f
532. tion menu for help in locating the engine ECU 2 The ECU LEDs are numbered 8 4 2 and 1 as read from left to right 3 Turn ignition key to ON 4 Watch the LEDs on the ECU and note which LED is ON 12 HONDA TEST MODES 5 Use F1 ENTER DTCs and if the LED is ON press on the tester keypad If the LED is OFF press 9 on the tester keypad Reading the ECU LEDS from left to right the LEDs indicate ON OFF NOTE ON OFF Press and into the tester then press ANIE EB 0000 OFF ON OFF ON 6 The resulting code appears on the tester along with a brief description 7 Use F4 CLEAR DTCs for DTC clear code information 8 Turn ignition key off when diagnosis is finished One LED For Hondas with a single LED the Enter DTC s submode displays two guestion marks for entering the DTC The tester screen prompts you to enter the DTCs read off the ECU LED or the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Be careful when reading the DTC from the ECU LED or MIL then enter the DTC into the tester Incorrect ECU LED or MIL interpretation can cause the wrong DTC description to be displayed Refer to the following procedure for manually reading 1 LED DTCs on the ECU ENTER DTC 2 Typical Honda ECU ENTER LED To manually read DTCs from late model Honda vehicles that use 1 LED on ECU or 1 LED on ECU and dashboard MIL do the following 1 The MIL and the ECU mounted LED can be used to read DT
533. to menu Select Test Mode TOYOTA 23 TEST MODES 7 TEST MODES The Select Mode menu displays test modes available for the selected vehicle and system Operating instructions for modes 0 DATA LIST F2 and F3 SNAPSHOT are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section Instructions for selecting and operating mode F1 ENTRY F2 Submode F1 READ ENTER DTCs and Submode F5 SENSITIVE DTC are included in this section Detailed operating instructions for using Mode F1 DTC ENTRY with Toyota vehicles are included in the following procedure READING CODES When Mode F1 DTC ENTRY is selected the tester displays submodes which after your selection provide information on how to read diagnostic trouble codes DTCs from the vehicle how to clear DTCs from the vehicle or tester memory obtain a text description of entered or selected DTCs and review entered or selected DTCs as a result of manually retrieving codes from the ECU To read DTCs on 1983 85 Toyota vehicles you must connect the single wire Toyota jumper P N 02002076 to the diagnostic jumper connector DJC and observe the MIL or analog voltmeter sweeps To read DTCs on 1986 88 Toyota vehicles you must connect the single wire Toyota jumper P N 02002075 to the DJC and observe the flashing MIL If you do not know where the DJC is located select Mode F4 DJC LOCATION from the Information menu If necessary refer
534. to DTC menu Submode F5 Sens DTC This submode is available for 1989 94 Toyota vehicles The Sensitive DTC test submode applies to Toyota engine controllers and is only available when the Engine system is Active Toyota engine ECUs have the capability to enter an increased sensitivity mode to detect fault code conditions The Sens DTC submode is helpful for diagnosing intermittent problems If you are using a TECH 1 or TECH tester power the tester directly from the battery via the optional battery adapter cable P N 02001636 To access the Sens DTC submode do the following 1 Press select DTCs from Select Mode menu 2 Press to select SENS DTC from the DTC menu 3 The tester displays instructions for preparing the vehicle to capture DTCs in the Sensitive Mode Follow the instructions on each display then press to continue 4 When the vehicle preparations are complete the tester checks for DTCs then displays the codes on line four 5 The tester displays instructions for viewing the DTCs Press to view the DTCs 6 The tester displays the first DTC Press to scroll through the captured DTCs A DTC can be held by pressing the key while the code is displayed Press the key to resume display of the DTCs 7 Press 19 9 to display a summary of the captured DTCs 8 Press CR to return to the DTC menu NOTE In some cases Toyota ECUs do not support Sensitive DTC Mode If the EB tester cannot
535. to go back to the previous menu SELECTING THE MANUFACTURER A menu of manufacturers available for testing is displayed in a scrolling menu You can scroll down one screen at a time by pressing or up one screen at a time by pressing M Press 6 or OD to scroll one manufacturer at a time until the arrow is opposite Mazda Then press to select SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR Once the manufacturer is selected the Select Model Year menu is displayed Press the last two digits of the year model being tested for 1990 models D for 1991 models and so on SELECTING THE MODEL The Model Select menu displays models available for testing Press the key until the model being tested is displayed then press the key SELECTING THE ENGINE AND ENGINE TYPE Next the Engine Select menu is displayed For selected vehicles you will also be asked to select the fuel type such MFI Press NP until the engine and fuel type of the vehicle is displayed then press VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY After the vehicle is selected the tester displays a summary screen of the selected vehicle Information displayed includes the year manufacturer model engine size and type and additional information such as the type of fuel system SELECT MODE MENU When the above steps are completed the Select Mode menu displays the test modes available for the selected vehicle and system Refer to Sections 6 Test Modes 7 OBD Controls
536. to perform a diagnostic approach using each of the software modes on OBD II compliant vehicles How to verify a repair using the modes is contained in the F0 Diagnostics mode Submode F0 Prep Vehicle The Prep Vehicle mode is used to properly prepare the vehicle powertrain for diagnostic procedures Following the instructions in this mode will ensure that the vehicle system 1s preconditioned and ready for diagnostic testing To prep the vehicle for diagnostic testing do the following 1 Press X to select OBD II Toolpak from the Select Mode menu 2 Press QD to select Diagnostics from the OBD II Toolpak menu 3 Press a to select Prep Vehicle from the Diagnostics menu 4 Review and answer the prompts that are displayed on the screen using the and keys Use or to advance through the text description screens 5 Press to return to the previous menu 30 COMMON TEST MODES II TEST MODES ACTIVE KEYS Scroll up and down 3 Answer question or query Advance to the next menu Exit to the previous question Submode F1 Procedure The OBD II system represents the latest in on board failure detection strategies Strategies such as misfire detection component and fuel system status are some examples of diagnostic data that can be obtained from the OBD II system Along with the new more stringent methods of failure detection came standardized diagnostic test modes These standardized te
537. to the manufacturer specific instruction EH following manufacturers Chrysler Imports Hyundai Mitsubishi Infiniti sections for further details 3 Connect the DC Power Cable to the end of the DLC cable 4 Refer to the manufacturer s specific instructions section for the vehicle you are testing for the following information Installing the appropriate adapter s on the DLC cable Connecting the tester to the vehicle or setting up the ECU for manual DTC referral Powering up the tester Selecting the vehicle you are testing 5 When the Select Mode menu is displayed refer to the Common Test Modes section to select and operate the test modes GENERAL INFORMATION 25 GETTING STARTED Mastertech Tester Cartridge and Cables 26 GENERAL INFORMATION GETTING STARTED Tech 1A Tester Cartridge and Cables GENERAL INFORMATION 27 GETTING STARTED Tech 1 Tester Cartridge and Cables 28 GENERAL INFORMATION COMMON TEST MODES OBD OBD I SYSTEMS Selecting Test Modes Mode Data List Mode F1 DTC Entry Submode F0 How To Read Submode F1 Enter DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC Submode F4 Clear DTC s Mode F2 DTC s Submode F1 Read DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC Submode F4 Clear DTC s Mode F3 Snapshot Mode F4 OBD Controls Mode F5 System Tests Submode F0 Prep Vehicle Mode F8 Information S
538. tor P0134 Front HO2 Sensor Excessively High Voltage P0135 Front HO2S Heater Circuit Malfunction Right Bank P0136 Rear HO2 Sensor Circuit Malfunction P0137 Rear HO2 Sensor Minimum Voltage Monitor P0138 Rear HO2 Sensor Maximum Voltage Monitor P0139 Rear HO2 Sensor Response Monitor P0140 Rear HO2 Sensor Excessively High Voltage NISSAN 37 NISSAN DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS YEAR 1995 98 DTC DESCRIPTION CONTINUED NO P0141 Rear HO2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction P0150 Front HO2 Sensor Circuit No Closed Loop Control Left Bank P0151 Front HO2 Sensor Lean Shift Monitor Left Bank P0152 Front HO2 Sensor Rich Shift Monitor Left Bank P0153 Front HO2 Sensor Response Monitor Left Bank P0154 Front HO2 Sensor Excessively High Voltage Left Bank P0155 Front HO2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction Left Bank P0156 Rear HO2 Sensor Circuit Malfunction Left Bank P0157 Rear HO2 Sensor Minimum Voltage Monitor Left Bank P0158 Rear HO2 Sensor Maximum Voltage Monitor Left Bank P0159 Rear HO2 Sensor Response Monitor Left Bank P0160 Rear Sensor Excessively High Voltage Left Bank P0161 Rear HO2 Sensor Heater Circuit Malfunction Left Bank P0170 Fuel Injection System Malfunction Right Bank P0171 Fuel System Malfunction Lean Condition Right Bank P0172 Fuel System Malfunction Rich Condition Right Bank P0173 Fuel Injection System
539. tructions on connecting the printer to the tester and printing the data parameters 4 You may return to the Select Mode menu at any time by pressing 2419 An example of the operation of the Data List mode is summarized in the following flow diagram The data displayed may be different for the selected vehicle SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST F1 DTC ENTRY F2 DTC BAROMETRIC PRESS 100mmHg VEHICLE SPEED 0 0 MPH COOLANT TEMP 40 104 F INTAKE AIR TEMP 40 104 F DESIRED IDLE 797 RPM IDLE SWITCH ON Data List Mode Create Your Own Data Pairs You can create data parameter pairs different from the pre programmed pairs Any two parameters that can be monitored can be made into a pair New data pairs are created simply by scrolling either the bottom or top display parameter while the other display parameter is fixed Pressing G causes the top display parameter to be fixed which is indicated with a in the left column of the second line of the display as shown in Figure A Pressing Gp causes the bottom display parameter to be fixed as shown in Figure B To unfix the top parameter press ai Press COMMON TEST MODES I 3 MODE FO DATA LIST GD to unfix the lower parameter The tester won t allow both top and bottom parameters to be fixed at the same time As an example let s say you wish to create a pair with ENGINE SPEED and BARO To do so scrol
540. u for help on DJC location 4 Jumper T and EI terminals by connecting the single wire Toyota Jumper P N 02002076 to the vehicle s 2 pin DJC ET 26 TOYOTA TEST MODES 5 Dashboard MIL will begin flashing DTCs The first number of MIL flashes will equal the 10 s digit of a 2 digit DTC After a 1 5 second pause the second number of flashes will equal the 15 digit If there are 2 or more codes there will be a 2 5 second pause between each DTC On a single digit DTC the MIL will blink a number of times equal to the DTC Single digit DTCs are separated by a 3 0 or 4 5 second pause If no DTCs are stored in ECU MIL will flash normal code DTC kj DTC 5 ALEZ 2 SEPERATION 12v F TMS Next DTC MIL 8 ov Indication O seconds 11 35 0 331 0 33 0 33 lids lode 0 66 0 66 0 66 0 66 0 66 1983 84 exc Cressida and Celica Supra and selected 1985 vehicles only Other 1985 have DTC output like that shown in the previous section 6 For 1983 85 Toyota vehicles there are two types of normal code conditions One is 1 flash in 3 0 seconds and the second is 1 flash in 4 5 seconds 7 Disconnect Toyota single wire jumper 8 Erase DTCs when all repairs are completed To manually read DTCs From 1983 84 Toyota Cressida and Celica Supra Vehicles using an Analog Voltmeter or Mastertech Oscilloscope do the following 1 Set the vehicle initial conditions by making sure that battery voltage is
541. ubmode F1 DLC Location Submode F2 SCC Location Submode F3 ID Info Submode F4 DJC Location Submode F5 ECU Location SELECTING TEST MODES 1 SELECTING TEST MODES The Asian Imports Cartridge makes selecting a test mode easy by displaying a Test Mode Menu To select a test mode simply press the tester key listed to the left of the test mode on the menu The tester automatically scrolls up to three test modes at a time Pressing the key turns off the automatic scrolling and freezes the menu The menu may then be manually scrolled by pressing the key Regardless of which test modes are displayed any available test mode can be selected at any time from the menu SELECT MODE 4 Y F0 DATA LIST F1 DTC ENTRY F2 DTC rox to Data List display to DTC Entry display to Trouble Codes display SELECT MODE F3 SNAPSHOT to Snapshot mode F4 OBD CONTROLS F5 SYSTEM TESTS to OBD Controls menu to System Tests menu to Information menu SELECT MODE y F8 INFORMATION When F4 OBD Controls mode is selected a submenu of specific tests available for the selected vehicle is displayed The tester displays only the test modes available for the selected vehicle Once you have selected a test mode operation begins Detailed operating instructions for each test mode are provided in the following sections ACTIVE KEYS 0 6 Select test modes and submodes 1 Scroll menu down Freeze
542. ugh the Check connector and it might not be necessary to use the cigarette lighter plug If the TDCL connector is used plug the tester DC Power Cable into the vehicle cigarette lighter NOTE Since the cigarette lighter and Check DLC can be switched some tests such as the Sens DTC Test require that the power cable be directly EB connected to the battery via the optional battery adapter cable P N 02001636 LEXUS 9 GETTING STARTED 5 Turn on the tester and select the application software that you will be using Verify that the correct screen is displayed The tester should display a screen similar to the one below ASIAN IMPORTS 83 02 lt ENTER gt Tester Stand Alone Display 6 If the display is correct press If the display is not correct refer to Appendix D 7 Follow the instructions on the following pages to select the vehicle type you are testing 10 LEXUS SELECTING THE VEHICLE 6 SELECTING THE VEHICLE Once you ve pressed GUAE from the power up screen the following steps must be performed to select the manufacturer model year model and engine type of the vehicle being tested Remember if you make a mistake you can always press 248 to go back to the previous menu SELECTING THE MANUFACTURER A menu of manufacturers available for testing is displayed in a scrolling menu You can scroll down one screen at a time by pressing or up one screen at a time by pressing Press D
543. uring Snapshot While the tester is waiting for the trigger condition to occur a flashing W is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the screen BATTERY VOLTAGE 13 4V COOLANT TEMP 83 Flashing W indicates the tester is waiting for a trigger w 4 While the tester is waiting for the trigger it is continuously storing data The data is organized as a number of samples The value or state of each parameter as well as all trouble codes are saved for each sample data parameters available in F0 Data List mode are stored when saving a snapshot 5 Once the trigger occurs the tester continues to save data samples until its memory is full The tester display indicates that the trigger has occurred by replacing the flashing W in the lower right hand corner of the display with a solid As soon as the memory is full the Data Capture phase terminates automatically and the tester goes on to the Search for Trouble Code phase BATTERY VOLTAGE 13 4V Solid T indicates the trigger has occurred and the tester is collecting data COOLANT TEMP 83 T 6 Pressing 9 terminates the Data Capture phase early If the trigger occurred before 249 was pressed the tester automatically goes to the Data Display phase If the trigger had not occurred before was pressed the tester returns to the Snapshot Options menu COOLANT TEMP COOLANT TEMP COOLANT TEMP 409C 1049F 409C 1049F 40
544. uring connection to the vehicle powertrain system The common high and low values were obtained by collecting data from actual OBD II certified 14 V6 and V8 powertrain systems operating with no faults detected COMMON TEST MODES II 33 TEST MODES To view common high and low values for diagnostic parameters do the following 1 Press to select OBD II Toolpak from the Select Mode menu 2 Press HD to select Parameters from the OBD II Toolpak menu 3 Press QD to select Ranges from the Parameters menu The key help screen will be displayed 4 Press GB GB or NIH to advance through the text description screens These text screens indicate that the displayed common high and low values are from actual OBD II certified systems 5 Press or D to move the cursor to the desired data parameter 6 Press to display the first data condition screen for the selected parameter The data condition screen displays the condition for which the high low data is valid The data condition and parameter name will toggle on the first display line The or keys can be used to toggle between the data condition and the parameter name 7 Press or to advance through the data conditions As before The data condition and parameter name will toggle on the first display line The or keys can be used to toggle between the data condition and the parameter name The data conditions are listed in the following table DATA CONDITION DISPLAY
545. ut components 44 COMMON TEST MODES II VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS ACURA SPECIFIC INFORMATION TEST MODES AVAILABLE GETTING STARTED SELECTING THE VEHICLE TEST MODES Mode F1 Entry Submode 0 How To Read Submode F1 Enter DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC Submode F4 Clear DTC s ACURA DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCs VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS 1 VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS Using the Asian Imports Cartridge the following Acura vehicles can be diagnosed MODEL 1986 ENGINE NSE Paa EO 1986 INTEGRA 1 6L 14 DI6A1 MPFI ECU LED NONE LEGEND 2 5L V6 25 1 MPFI ECU LED NONE MODEL 1987 ENGINE geraden ME 1987 INTEGRA 1 6L 14 D16A1 MPFI ECU LED NONE LEGEND SEDAN 2 5L V6 25 1 MPFI ECU LED NONE LEGEND COUPE 2 7L V6 C27A1 MPFI ECU LED NONE MODEL 1988 ENGINE SE 1988 INTEGRA 1 6L 14 DI6A1 MPFI ECU LED NONE LEGEND SEDAN 2 7L V6 C27A1 MPFI ECU LED NONE LEGEND COUPE 2 7L V6 C27A1 MPFI ECU LED NONE MODEL 1989 ENGINE gus bist ea 1989 INTEGRA 1 6L 14 DI6A1 MPFI ECU LED NONE LEGEND SEDAN 2 7L V6 C27A1 MPFI ECU LED NONE LEGEND COUPE 2 7L V6 C27A1 MPFI ECU LED NONE 2 ACURA VEHICLES AND SYSTEMS MODEL 1990 ENGINE ENGINE FUEL TYPE SYSTEM JUMPER TYPE 1990 INTEGRA LEGEND SEDAN LEGEND COUPE 1 6L 14 B18AI MPFI 2 7L V6 C27A1 MPFI 2 7L V6 C27A1 MPFI ECU LED ECU LED ECU LED NONE NONE NONE MO
546. ve a negative time samples after the trigger have a positive time Select the data parameters to be displayed in the same manner as in the Data List mode Data List functions are available such as the ability to create your own parameter pairs 10 For most vehicles you can press to view the trouble codes present in any sample 11 The currently displayed sample may be printed if the tester is connected to a printer To print the data press While the tester is sending data to the printer the keyboard is disabled Snapshot data can also be printed in a tabular format using the SCREEN PRINT feature Refer to the tester operator s manual for setting up the tester to print 12 When you are finished viewing the sampled data press 9 0 to return to the Snapshot Options menu Press 9 0 again to return to the Select Mode menu Scroll through displayed data parameters G GD Fix the top or bottom display parameter respectively Display trouble codes for current sample Go to the next data sample Go to the previous data sample Toggle between sample time and index Go to the earliest sample in memory 24 COMMON TEST MODES I MODE F3 SNAPSHOT ACTIVE KEYS Continued Go to the trigger sample sample 0 G9 Go to the latest sample in memory GI Print Data List Return to Set Up Phase O DISPLAYS LAST SAMPLE OF DATA
547. ve systems Refer to System Inquiry on page 13 for more information on Inactive system detection The following chart lists Lexus ECUs that can be tested using the Asian Imports Cartridge the test modes available for each system and the DLC Cable adapter required Not all vehicles are equipped with every ECU 6 LEXUS LEXUS SYSTEMS ECU DATA LIST DTC S SNAPSHOT ADAPTER ENGINE TDCL CHECK ECT TDCL ABS TDCL CCS TDCL AIC TDCL AIR BAG If you are using Asian Imports Cartridge with a TECHI tester the NOTE available Lexus OBD systems will be limited to Engine Data List Engine DTCs and Transmission DTCs Also you will need a different TECH 1 EH 14 15 Pin DLC Cable P N 02001980 which can be used with the Toyota Lexus Check Adapter Cable P N 02001896 or the Toyota Lexus TDCL Adapter Cable P N 02001895 LEXUS 7 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 4 TEST MODES AVAILABLE The Select Mode menu displays test modes available for the selected vehicle and system Operating instructions for modes F0 DATA LIST F2 F3 SNAPSHOT and F8 INFORMATION are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section Instructions for selecting and operating mode F2 Submode F1 READ ENTER DTCs and Submode F5 SENSITIVE DTC are included in this section MODE DATA LIST ENGINE ONLY MODE F2 SUBMODE F1 READ DTCs IF SYSTEM IS AC
548. vehicles with automatic cruise control CCS DTCs are set by the CCS ECU when problems with but not limited to the ECU actuator malfunction and cruise control switch problems are detected The Asian Imports application cartridge supports reading CCS DTCs automatically or manually depending on the state active or inactive of the CCS system AIR CONDITIONING DTCS Toyota A C DTCs are available on select Toyota vehicles with automatic air conditioning A C DTCs are set by the A C ECU when problems with but not limited to the ECU room temperature sensor and air mix door problems are detected Note that on some Toyota vehicles the A C system does not support a dashboard MIL The Asian Imports application cartridge supports reading A C DTCs automatically or manually depending on the state active or inactive of the A C system AIR BAG DTCS Toyota AB DTCs are available on select late model Toyota vehicles equipped with the airbag system AB DTCs are set by the AB ECU when problems with but not limited to the ECU squib malfunction and warning light circuit problems are detected The Asian Imports application cartridge supports reading AB DTCs automatically or manually depending on the state active or inactive of the AB system A NOTE ABOUT THE MIL On some of the above systems the ECU DTC output line is routed to the dashboard mounted system MIL which flashes out the DTC when the ECU is commanded to the diagnostic mode In this case th
549. version function can be used to switch between gm sec and Ib min Magnet Malfunction Manifold Manifold Absolute Pressure Intake Manifold Absolute Pressure in units of pressure The Unit Conversion function can be used to switch between kPa inHg and mmHg Manifold Air Temperature Multiport Fuel Injection MIL MIN mmHg MON MONIT MOP MPFI MPH MPI MPS MPU ms MSC MT MTR mV N A NEUT 02 025 0258151 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Used to indicate that an emissions related fault has been detected by the ECU and a DTC has been set Typically the MIL stays illuminated while the fault is present and for 3 ignition cycles after the fault has gone away Generally if the vehicle s on board diagnosis has detected that the fault is not present for 3 consecutive ignition cycles the MIL will be turned off Even though the MIL is off the DTC will still be present in the ECU s memory and can be read using the tester s DTCs function Minimum Millimeters of Mercury Monitor Monitor Metering Oil Pump Multi Port Fuel Injection Miles Per Hour Multi Port Fuel Injection Motor Position Sensor Micro Processing Unit An abbreviation for milliseconds A millisecond is 1 1000th ofa second Mass Storage Cartridge Manual Transmission Motor Millivolts Not Available Neutral Oxygen Oxygen Sensor Oxygen Sensor 1 for Bank 1 OBD OBDI OBD II OD OHC
550. wer take off is engaged or active AII of the above are part of the California Air Resources Board OBD II regulation and are options available to the automobile manufacturer for vehicle Powertrain Control Module PCM development In the case of some READINESS tests per the above a manufacturer may have determined that a READINESS test is unreliable or not complete when certain conditions exist therefore not enabling proper operation ACTIVE KEYS Move marker Freeze menu scroll Print readiness test results EXIT Return to SELECT MODE menu COMMON TEST MODES II 15 TEST MODES MODE F2 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES DTCS Submode F0 Read DTCs When you select the 0 READ DTCs mode the tester reads all DTCs which have been stored by the vehicle s controllers and then displays atwo column list of all DTCs theID ofthe ECU reporting the DTCs how many codes have been reported by that ECU If the vehicle you are testing contains more than one OBD II ECU you will be asked to select which ECU information you would like displayed SELECT ECU F1 11 ENGINE F2 22 CHASS F2 DTCs F0 READ DTCs SELECT ECU x ECU 10 DTCs 3 x P0443f P0110 P0111 For vehicles with multiple ECUs only To read DTCs do the following 1 Select F2 DTCs from the SELECT MODE menu 2 Select F0 READ DTCs for the menu 3 Select desired ECU from the SELECT ECU menu for vehicles with mu
551. you are using the Asian Imports Cartridge with a TECH 1 tester the NOTE available Toyota OBD systems will be limited to Engine Data List Engine DTCs and Transmission DTCs Also you will need a different TECH 14 15 Pin DLC Cable P N 02001980 which can be used with the Toyota Lexus Check Adapter Cable P N 02001896 or the Toyota Lexus TDCL Adapter Cable P N 02001895 1 TEST MODES AVAILABLE 4 TEST MODES AVAILABLE The following test modes are available when testing Toyota vehicles Operating instructions for test modes other than ENTRY or are included in the Common Test Modes OBD OBD I Systems section There are also Toyota specific instructions for operating the test modes in Toyota Section 7 Mode F0 Data List Engine System only if Engine System is active Mode Fl DTC Entry Submode F0 How To Read Submode F1 Enter DTC s Submode F2 DTC List Submode F3 Review DTC s Submode F4 Clear DTC s Mode F2 DTC Submode F0 How To Read Submode F1 Read Enter DTCs If System is inactive Submode F3 Review DTC Submode F4 Clear DTC s Submode F5 Sensitive DTC Engine only Mode F3 Snapshot Engine System only if Engine System is active NOTE Some Toyota vehicles do not support the option to use or EH Single DTC as a snapshot trigger Mode F5 System Tests Submode F0 Prep Vehicle Mode F8 Information Submode F1 DLC Lo

ASIAN IMPORTS APPLICATION

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents